JP2022123448A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest regarding a game machine capable of controlling a game state to a special state on the basis of the number of execution times of variable display.SOLUTION: The number of losing variation patterns (for example, 2) determinable if a CPU 103 is in "a time-shortening state B" when a variable display result is "losing" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (for example, 3) determinable in "a time-shortening state A", and is smaller than the number of losing variation patterns (for example, 4) determinable in "a probability variable state", and average time (for example, approximately 2.2 seconds) of variable display time of a losing variation pattern determined if a CPU 103 is in "a time-shortening state B" when a variable display result is "losing" is smaller than average time (for example, approximately 5.58 seconds) of variable display time of a losing variation pattern determined in "a time-shortening state A", and is smaller than average time (for example, approximately 4.83 seconds) of variable display time of a losing variation pattern determined in "a probability variable state".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-50

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player.

As shown in Patent Document 1, in a pachinko game machine or the like as a game machine, for example, after a normal jackpot occurs, the game state is controlled to a normal game state, and the probability of determining a jackpot is reduced to about 1/300. When the number of times of the set and executed special game reaches 1000 times and no big win occurs, the game state is controlled to the variable ceiling probability state, and the probability of determining the big win is increased to about 1/100. There were things that were taken. Further, it is disclosed that when the 1000 game jackpot does not occur in the normal game state, the time saving state may be generated instead of the variable ceiling probability state. In addition, as shown in Patent Document 2, there is a gaming machine that provides a plurality of parts (for example, an introductory part, a win/fail determination part, an epilogue part, etc.) from the start to the end of the variable display to increase the interest of the player. Are known. In addition, as shown in Patent Document 3, among the jackpot patterns, the jackpot pattern changes again after temporarily stopping with a non-probability variation pattern (normal jackpot pattern), and then a re-lottery such that the non-probability variation pattern or the probability variation pattern stops. A gaming machine that executes an effect is known.

JP-A-2005-95449 JP 2019-118411 A JP 2016-179389 A

There is room for improving the marketability of the game machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 to 3.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The game machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition and being able to control to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
state control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
a decision means capable of deciding to control to said advantageous state;
variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The effect execution means can execute a specific notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled in the non-special state,
The specific notification effect includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the propriety notification, when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed. and an epilogue part to be executed,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. and including
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. less than the number of possible variable display patterns,
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is short, the speed at which the variable display is completed is faster than in other states. Since a series of presentations to be performed can be shown more suitably, marketability can be enhanced.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 069SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time reduction frequency|count determination table for every transition opportunity. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is an explanatory view for explaining idle time (relief time reduction). It is similarly an explanatory view for explaining idle time (relief time reduction). It is similarly an explanatory view for explaining idle time (relief time reduction). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to battle rush, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to play time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a pole and a battle rush. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the variable display count display and the special display count; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding the case of reaching|attaining relief time reduction after RAM clearing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case of reaching|attaining relief time reduction after RAM clearing. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect for the case of reaching the relief time reduction with 900 variable displays after the big hit, and (B) is a time chart showing a modification of the time reduction rush effect B. After a big hit, it is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case of reaching|attaining relief time reduction by the variable display of 900 times. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation operation example in case the number of pending|holding memories is 0 when it reaches|attains relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation operation example in case the number of pending|holding memories is 1 or more when it reaches|attains relief time reduction. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to the customer waiting screen; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to transition to a customer waiting screen as characteristic part 069SG modified example 1; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modified example of an effect operation related to transition to a customer waiting screen as characteristic part 069SG modified example 1; It is the flowchart which shows the timer interruption processing for game control as characteristic section 069SG modified example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing display processing as characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a characteristic portion 069SG modified example 3; It is a figure for demonstrating the content of various production|presentations. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a countdown notice. Similarly, it is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a countdown notice. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a pending|holding change notice. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a symbol chance eye notice. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of an effect display notice. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a pre-reading notice type determination table. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a look-ahead announcement effect pattern determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a ready-to-win announcement execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button announcement effect pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing character announcement pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body operation pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body announcement pattern determination table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining various operation examples according to game states. (A) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the probability variable state, the time saving state A loss reduction non-reach fluctuation pattern, and (B) the loss reduction non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time saving state B. It is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. It is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. It is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B. It is an example of the effect operation of SP reach E and SP reach D. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. (A) to (C) are timing charts showing control operation examples in SP reach E, C, and D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram comparing super reach and non-reach out-of-reach; (A) to (C) are diagrams showing rush introduction effects, and (D) is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the time-saving rush effect A. FIG. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the variable probability rush effect, and (B1) to (B4) of the time saving rush effect B. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table as Embodiment 2 in the characteristic part 069SG; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a part of variable display start setting processing as Embodiment 2 in the characteristic part 069SG; It is a figure which shows a variable display effect|presentation pattern determination table. It is an example of the effect operation of SP reach D. It is a figure for demonstrating the characteristic according to game state. In the characteristic portion 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a normal symbol hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variable display time, and (D) is a second start winning opening at the time of a normal symbol hit. It is explanatory drawing of opening time. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation patterns according to variable display results; It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table in a normal state; It is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table in the probability variation state. It is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table in the probability variation state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state B. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the winning probability and the winning interval to the start winning opening. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values α, β, and γ; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values α', β', and γ'; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ, ε, and ζ; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ′, ε′, and ζ′; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values η, θ, and ι; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values η′, θ′, and ι′; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ, λ, and μ; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ′, λ′, and μ′; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values ν, ξ, and π; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values ν', ξ', and π'; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value; (A) is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting value for 10 hours of the pachinko game machine, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the design value of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a normal state; It is explanatory drawing of calculation of the average fluctuation|variation time in time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of calculation of the average fluctuation|variation time in time saving state B. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram of the calculation of the average variation time in the probability variation state. Time saving state A, time saving state B, is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation of the second special figure is executed in the probability variation state. Time saving state A, time saving state B, is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display of the second special figure is performed 110 times in the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 3 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 3 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 2 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 2 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 1 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 1 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, ( B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in the characteristic part 018SG; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table in a low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table in a high base state. It is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the jackpot variation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. It is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the loss variation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types. (A) is a diagram showing the character display mode in the SP reach production A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach production A to E, (C) is the BGM in the SP reach production A to E FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an output pattern of sound effects and sound effects; (A) is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. It is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach production A~E. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example until it develops into SP reach production|presentation after the variable display of SP reach (alpha), (beta), (gamma) is started. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of SP reach production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of SP reach production|presentation B and C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of SP reach production|presentation D and E. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a success button production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of movable body production|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the big hit notification of the SP reach effect A~E. It is a diagram showing an effect operation example of the loss notification of the SP reach effect A~E. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of post-production A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of post-production B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of post-production B. FIG. (A) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table A, (B) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table B, and (C) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table C. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting frame LEDs in a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting frame LEDs in a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission; It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a frame lamp. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the special figure LED board, the fourth symbol unit, and the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the various board|substrates etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating hit classification. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating a big-hit determination table and a big-hit kind determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a production|presentation control command. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side; It is a diagram for explaining a post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. It is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating a previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery of the production|presentation pattern in a sub side. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a series of production|presentation. It is a figure for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part; It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a role object action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a losing epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol or even-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation), and a fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation), and a fanfare part. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver; It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a character action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanfare part. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13); FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining volume levels; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining volume levels; FIG. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r24) to (r27); It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portion. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r32) to (r35); It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (r54) to (s4). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines; FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23); It is a detailed explanatory view of (A24) to (A46) portions. (b4) to (b6) are detailed explanatory diagrams and comparison diagrams during the jackpot round. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound; FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (o3) to (o5). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles; FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11); It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of pattern output. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern fixing period. FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout; FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a game effect lamp at the time of losing and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of losing; (r48) It is detailed explanatory drawing of a part. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for the start part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the start part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used for a fanning part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a failed epilogue part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a role product action part in the latter half of SP development; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a swing part of reach B in the second half of SP; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach B in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of the SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP final reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in an epilogue part for a SP final reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a relief part; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-lottery part (before operation promotion); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a re-lottery part (patterns maintained after operation promotion); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for fanfare; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps and a grandchild table for board left lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the red blinking brightness data table of the accessory action; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in brightness data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for left-board lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the tilt luminance data table without operation prompting; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the shutter brightness data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the missing luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table; It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the swaying aspect of a design. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table;

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The game machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. Less than the number of possible variable display patterns (for example, when the variable display result is “loss”, the number of loss variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in “time saving state B” (for example, 2) is “time saving A part that is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "state A" (for example, 3) and less than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the "probability variation state" (for example, 4)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "loss", the CPU 103 determines in "time saving state B"). Average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) is less than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and in the "probable variation state" A portion less than the average time (for example, about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (see FIGS. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period during which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is Since the number of types of variable display patterns is reduced and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the speed at which the variable display is completed is faster than in other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
It is possible to variably display a plurality of lines of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns displayed in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C),
The starting order of the variable display of the decoration identification information in each row is determined if the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information is the specific mode in the variable display in which the determining means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. This is common between when non-specific display results are displayed in
The time until the variable display speed of the decoration identification information of each row that started the variable display reaches the maximum speed is the decoration in the variable display that is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. When a non-specific display result is displayed without the form of variable display of the identification information becoming a specific form, and in the case of the variable display in which it is not decided by the decision means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, decoration identification It is different from the case where the variable display of information does not become a specific mode and the non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the start order of variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is definitely variable State, when it is a non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state A and when it is a non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B, but the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, 5C are the highest. The time to reach the speed is shorter in the time saving state B than in the probability variable state and the time saving state A (tb1 ~ tb2 < ta1 ~ ta3) part. See Figure 11-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first special state and the second special state have the same variable display start order of the decoration identification information for each row, but the time required to reach the maximum speed is different. A different impression can be given for each and interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or form 1-2,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
The order of stopping the variable display of the decoration identification information in each row is determined if the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information is the specific mode in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. (For example, the stop order of variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed. If there is, it is stopped and displayed in the order of left → right → middle, and if it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time.See Fig. 11-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first special state and the second special state differ in the variable display stop order of the decoration identification information in each row, so that different impressions can be given for each state, and interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
The order of stopping the variable display of the decoration identification information in each row is determined if the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information is the specific mode in the variable display in which the determining means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. This is common between when non-specific display results are displayed in
In the first special state, it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state during the time from when the decoration identification information of one of the plurality of columns is stop-displayed until when the next decoration identification information is stop-displayed. In the variable display, a non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the decoration identification information being a specific mode, and a variable in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. In the display, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode and the non-specific display result is displayed. The order is common in the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the variable probability state and the time saving state A and the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B, but among the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, 5C The time from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display area of 1 to when the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is the probability change state, the time saving state A, the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern, and the time saving state B. It may be different depending on whether it is a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the time from when the first decoration identification information is stop-displayed to when the next decoration identification information is stop-displayed differs between the first special state and the second special state. It can give a different impression and increase interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
Equipped with output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed,
1, the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state; and when a non-specific display result is displayed in the second special state, and in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. When the non-specific display result is displayed, it is different (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is a non-reach variation pattern in the probability variable state, the time saving state A, left, middle, Since the right is stopped and displayed at different timings, it is three times, and if it is a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so it is once. 11-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stop of the decoration identification information, and different impressions can be given for each state by the different number of times the stop sound is output between the first special state and the second special state. can increase interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
Equipped with output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed,
1, the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state; and when a non-specific display result is displayed in the second special state, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. When the non-specific display result is displayed, it is common (for example, the number of output times of the pattern stop sound in the variable display of 1 is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state It may be common to the case where it is a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stop of the decoration identification information, and the development cost can be reduced by sharing the number of times the stop sound is output between the first special state and the second special state. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The decoration identification information is stopped when the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result without being in a specific mode when the determining means does not determine to control to the advantageous state. a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when displayed,
When the decoration identification information is statically displayed in the first special state, the specific action display is executed, and when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in the second special state, the specific action display is not executed (for example, If it is a non-reach-out variation pattern in the variable probability state and time-saving state A, a specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed. Action) is not performed (see Figures 11-51 to 11-54),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to realize a smooth variable display by not executing the specific action display in the second special state while increasing the performance effect with the specific action display in the first special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-7,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The decoration identification information is stopped when the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a variable display in which a non-specific display result is displayed without being in a specific mode when the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state. a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when displayed,
The display mode of the specific action display is common to the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example, Specific action display (symbol stop action) is common in the case of non-reach loss variation pattern in probability variable state, time saving state A and non-reach loss variation pattern in time saving state B, in specific action display While enhancing the production effect, the part that makes the specific action display mode common in the case of the variable probability state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by standardizing the mode of the specific action display between the first special state and the second special state while enhancing the effect of the specific action display.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-8,
The decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and the predetermined identification information (for example, small pattern) different from the decoration identification information can be synchronized and variably displayed,
The period from when the identification information is stop-displayed to when the predetermined identification information is stop-displayed is the variable display of the decoration identification information when the decision means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. In the case of the variable display in which the non-specific display result is displayed instead of the specific mode, the decoration identification information is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. (For example, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped to when the small pattern is stopped is , If the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B is shorter than the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state and the time saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)> t2 (tb3 to tb4)} part, see Fig. 11-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-9,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
A minimum period from when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in a variable display of 1 in the first special state to when the decoration identification information starts to be displayed in the next variable display, and the variable of 1 in the second special state. The minimum period from the stop display of the decoration identification information to the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the next variable display is common (for example, the variable display of 1 in the probability variable state and the time saving state A In the pattern fixed period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from the stop display of the decorative pattern to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the next variable display, and the variable display of 1 in the time saving state B. is the minimum period from the stop display to the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the next variable display, which is the minimum period (tb4 to tb5).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the control in consideration of the drawing process until the decoration identification information is completely stopped and displayed.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-10,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the first special state when the variable display is not determined to be displayed is common (for example, when the variable display result is "no") CPU 103 determinable loss variation pattern in "time saving state B" (e.g., "non-reach A") and determinable loss variation pattern in "time saving state A" and "probability change state" (e.g., "non-reach A" ) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

(SG2020-070) The game machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. It is less than the number of possible variable display patterns and less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "missing", the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" The number of determinable deviation variation patterns (for example, two) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (eg, three), and the deviation that can be determined in the "probability variation state" less than the number of variation patterns (for example, 4)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "off"). The average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time reduction state B" is the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "time reduction state A" A portion that is less than the average time (eg, about 5.58 seconds) of and less than the average time (eg, about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "probability variation state". -50 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is Since the number of types of variable display patterns is reduced and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the variable display speed is increased compared to other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be displayed is common (for example, CPU 103 determinable loss variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and determinable loss variable display pattern in at least one of time saving state A and probability change state (e.g., non-reach, SP Reach D) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-3 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1 or form 2-2,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in both the first special state and the third special state when it is a variable display that is not determined to be displayed is common (for example, the CPU 103 is in a time saving state Determinable loss fluctuation pattern in B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and determinable loss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) in both the time saving state A and probability variable state are common some part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-3,
The average period of the control periods controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state, and the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state is Shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, the probability variable The average time of the control period controlled to the state is preferably shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than in the third special state, so that the variable display speed is increased, thereby providing a suitable second special state. In the first special state, the average period of the control period is lengthened, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-4,
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state. The number of deviation fluctuation patterns that can be determined in state B (for example, two) is less than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time saving state A (for example, three), and the deviation fluctuation that can be determined in time saving state A The number of patterns (eg, 3) is less than the number of determinable deviation variation patterns (eg, 4) in the probability variation state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced in the second special state to prioritize the use of variable display, while the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased in the third special state. can enhance the interest of the game.

(SG2020-071) The gaming machine of Form 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-11,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the processing);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed,
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "jackpot" (for example, one) is " Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 2), and less than the number of determinable deviation variation patterns in the 'probability variation state' (for example, 3)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state in the case of the variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state is Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in 1 special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" The average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) is less than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "variable probability state" A portion less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern (see FIGS. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since control is performed in an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-12,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for executing variable display of identification information and the amount of game value given in the advantageous state after the variable display part is completed. including a post-production part that notifies the game value information that can be specified,
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the post-production part in the first special state and the execution period of the post-production part in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state While the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B are different, the pattern confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state A and the probability change state ) and the pattern confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state B are common (see FIG. 11-61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the execution period of the post-effect in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state and the second special state. .

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-13,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for executing variable display of identification information and the amount of game value given in the advantageous state after the variable display part is completed. including a post-production part that notifies the game value information that can be specified,
Display means capable of executing a specific action display for causing the identification information to perform a specific action when the identification information is stopped and displayed during the execution period of the variable display part in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. with
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the specific action display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific action display in the second special state are common (for example, variable display of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state While different from the time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the display time of the big hit specific action display of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (ta3 to ta4) And the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific action display in the time saving state B is a common part.See FIG. 11-61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the specific action display in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state and the second special state. can.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-14,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled, the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state is common (for example, the variable display result is a "jackpot" In the case, the CPU 103 is determinable in the "time saving state B" loss variation pattern (eg, "SP reach D") and determinable loss variation pattern (eg, "SP reach D") in the "variable state" common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-5,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is It is less than the number of determinable variable display patterns and less than the number of determinable variable display patterns in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 is set to "time saving state B" The number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in ``time saving state A'' (for example, 2), and can be determined in ``variable probability state'' less than the number of outlier variation patterns (for example, 3),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit" The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state B" by the CPU 103 is the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A". A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "variable probability state". 50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since control is performed in an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-6,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled is common ( For example, the CPU 103 can determine a big hit variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, SP reach D), and at least one of the time saving state A and the probability change state (for example, probability change state) The big hit variable display pattern that can be determined in , SP reach D) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-7,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; At least part of the variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled ( For example, the CPU 103 can determine the big hit variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, without SP), and the big hit variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, without SP) are common some part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-8,
The average period of the control periods controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state, and the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state is Shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, the probability variable The part that makes the average time of the control period controlled to the state shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than in the third special state, so that the variable display speed is increased, so that the second special state can be preferably provided. In the first special state, the average period of the control period is lengthened, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 2-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-9,
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display has been determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, if the CPU 103 The number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state B (eg, 1) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (eg, 2), and the jackpot that can be determined in the time saving state A. The number of variation patterns (eg, 2) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns (eg, 3) that can be determined in the probability variation state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced in the second special state to prioritize the use of variable display, while the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased in the third special state. can enhance the interest of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of form 1-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-15,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determining means, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a specific mode (for example, reach mode). A first non-specific variable display pattern (such as "SP reach A to E lost") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the result of the missing display) after becoming, and the variable of the decorative identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach out" etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the display mode being the specific mode,
In the second special state, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the second non-specified variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined is higher (for example, in "time saving state B" The ratio (for example, 97%) of determining the "non-reach loss variation pattern" by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "missing" is when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state A". Higher than the ratio (for example, 95%) in which the "non-reach variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103, and when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probability variation state", the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach variation pattern". is higher than the percentage (eg, 95%) for which is determined, see FIGS. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control to the advantageous state. By setting the aspect of the variable display to the specific aspect, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to be mischievous.

The gaming machine of form 1-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-16,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the first non-specific variable display pattern during the period from when the variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the second non-specific variable display pattern to when the display is stopped. From the form of variable display is shorter than the period until it becomes the specific form (for example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach out variation pattern is the variable display of the decorative pattern in the super reach out variation pattern. A portion shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from the start until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific mode, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-17,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
In the second non-specified variable display pattern, the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the predetermined row out of the plurality of rows to the stop display is longer in the first non-specified variable display pattern. A period shorter than the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information of the predetermined row to the stop display (for example, in the non-reach-out variation pattern, the variable display of the decoration identification information in the left decoration design display area 5L is started. The period from to stop display (tb0 to tb1) is the period (tb0 ∼ tb2), see Fig. 11-62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display of the decoration identification information in the predetermined row is completed in a short period of time, so that the second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-18,
The second unspecified variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state and the second unspecified variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common ( For example, the CPU 103 is determinable non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B (e.g., non-reach), non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and probability change state and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of Form 2-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 1-10,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determining means, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a specific mode (for example, reach mode). A first non-specific variable display pattern (such as "SP reach A to E lost") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the result of the missing display) after becoming, and the variable of the decorative identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach out" etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the display mode being the specific mode,
In the second special state, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the second non-specified variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. is higher than the rate at which the second unspecified variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state, and the determination in the third special state Higher than the rate at which the second unspecified variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by means (for example, the variable display result in the "time saving state B" The ratio (for example, 97%) at which the "non-reach variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "missing" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state A" Higher than the ratio (for example, 95%) at which the non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined, and the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach loss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "variable probability state". higher than the proportion (eg, 95%) of the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period during which the advantageous state was not controlled continued for a long time, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control to the advantageous state. By setting the aspect of the variable display to the specific aspect, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to be mischievous.

The gaming machine of form 2-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-11,
The second non-specific variable display pattern determinable by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second non-determinable variable display pattern in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The specific variable display pattern is common (for example, the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) in the time saving state B and the time saving state A and the probability change state. non-reach and out-of-reach variation patterns (e.g., non-reach) are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-12,
The second unspecified variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state, and the second unspecified variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state. And are common (for example, CPU 103 is determinable non-reach loss variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., non-reach) and determinable non-reach loss variation pattern in both time saving state A and variable state (e.g., non-reach) and the part that is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of Form 1-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-19,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determining means, in the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the special A first specific variable display pattern that displays the display result of variable display of identification information (for example, "SP reach A to C, E big hit", etc.) It is possible to determine a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) that displays the display result of variable display of identification information,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state is determined in the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined is higher (for example, the reach mode in the time saving state B The ratio (for example, 90%) that does not go through the "SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" is determined is the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A ” is determined (eg, 5%), and the percentage (eg, 5%) where the “non-SP A jackpot variation pattern” that does not go through the reach mode in the probability variation state is determined. Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, by setting the aspect of the variable display to a specific aspect, it is possible to control to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, so it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-20,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
A first specific action display for performing a specific action on the decoration identification information when the variable display mode is the specific mode, and a second specific action display (for example, symbol stop action display) and a display means capable of executing,
In the first specific variable display pattern, the first specific action display and the second specific action display are performed by the display means. The second specific action display is executed without executing the action display (for example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP reach E via reach, reach specific action display and big hit specific action display are executed, but reach In the variation pattern of the SP reach D that does not go through, the part where the reach specific action display is not executed and the jackpot specific action display is executed (see FIGS. 11-55),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the first specific action in the second special state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, and thus a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-21,
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common (for example, CPU103 determinable non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) in time saving state B, non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) determinable in at least one of time saving state A and probability change state, is the common part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of form 2-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-13,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B), and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state and a third special state (e.g., variable probability state) that is controlled when is finished,
The variable display pattern determining means, in the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the special A first specific variable display pattern that displays the display result of variable display of identification information (for example, "SP reach A to C, E big hit", etc.) A second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via A", etc.) that displays the display result of variable display of identification information can be determined,
In the second special state, the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is the first special state. is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state, and the determination in the third special state If the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the means, the ratio is higher than the second specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, "SP reach D The ratio (for example, 90%) of determining the "jackpot variation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" is the ratio of determining the "non-SP A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A ( For example, 5%) and higher than the ratio (for example, 5%) in which the "non-SP A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the variable probability state is determined (see Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, by setting the aspect of the variable display to a specific aspect, it is possible to control to an advantageous state without being mischievous, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-14,
The second specific variable display pattern determinable by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second specific variable determinable in at least one of the first special state and the third special state The display pattern is common (for example, the non-reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP non-through) that can be determined in the time saving state B by the CPU 103, and the non-determinable in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state. Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, non-SP) and common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-15,
the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state; the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state; is common (for example, CPU 103 can determine non-reach jackpot variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., without SP) and non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., SP non-via) and the part that is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of Form 1-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-22,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determination means may control to the advantageous state by the determination means that no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state and the second special state. In the case of variable display that is not determined, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period that can store reserved storage in the second reserved storage means can be determined,
The effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and the predetermined variable display in the second special state. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, the suggestive effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state A" and when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "variable probability state", "movable body notice", "character notice", etc. in the variable display On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state B", "movable body notice" or A part that does not execute a suggestive effect such as "character notice" (see Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern is performed by the suggestive effect. Since there is no mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-23,
In the second special state, when it is a variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is not executed by the effect executing means, and the determining means controls to the advantageous state. If it is a variable display determined to However, if it is a big hit variation pattern, "movable body notice" or "character notice" may be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-24,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern for displaying the display result of the variable display after the variable display mode of the decoration identification information becomes a specific mode,
The suggestive effect includes a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the variable display mode becomes a specific mode (for example, the suggestive effect suggesting that the state of the variable display is controlled to the jackpot game state is the ready-to-win mode of the variable display mode. Whether or not (whether or not reach is established) may include "reach notice" and "button notice" as an inciting effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-25,
The effect executing means, based on the determination result of the determining means, a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the first suggestive effect is executed, (For example, based on the variable display result, the first suggestive effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)), and the first suggestive effect is executed A portion that can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), which has a high rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state, thereby increasing interest.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of form 2-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-16,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "movable body notice" or "character notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determination means determines that no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and Determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved storage means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to a state. is possible and
The effect execution means performs the variable display when the variable display is performed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is performed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state. The suggestive effect can be executed in the display, and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state, the suggestive effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, "time saving state A" When variable display is performed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in , and variable display is performed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in the "probable variable state" When executed, a suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while a deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state B". When the variable display is executed in , the part that does not execute the suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" in the variable display (see Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern is performed by the suggestive effect. Since there is no mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of Form 1-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-26,
Based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole), variable display of identification information (for example, decoration pattern) is performed, and an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Reservation storage means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information (for example, effect control command) about the game;
Based on the information received from the information transmitting means, an effect executing means (for example, , a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pre-reading notice effect),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The effect execution means selects one of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effect patterns (e.g., "countdown notice", "holding change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice"). is determinable and
The number of pre-reading forewarning effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means can be determined in the first special state. less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “time saving state B” (for example, 0 pieces) is When the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A", the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is smaller, and the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state". The number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 in the case (for example, 4) less than the part),
In the second special state, when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed is determined by the determining means in the first special state. It is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" (for example , 0%) is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state A" (for example, 30%), and when the variable display result is lost in the "variable state" A portion lower than the execution rate of prefetching notice (for example, 40%). See Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, in the variable display not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. Since the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since the pre-reading notice performance is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-27,
A first pre-reading notice effect pattern as a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect execution means in the first special state and the second special state, and a case where the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed. There is also a second pre-reading announcement effect pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is high,
The rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, time saving state A and time saving state As a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "holding change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice""blue" pattern), and a second pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "suspended change notice", "symbol chance eye Notice”, “Red” pattern of “effect display notice”), and the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) , The rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)) Lower portion),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, it is less likely that the player will be unnecessarily provoked by the first look-ahead forewarning effect, so it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-28,
A first pre-reading notice effect pattern as a pre-reading notice effect pattern commonly executable by the effect executing means in the first special state and the second special state, and a case where the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed. There is also a second pre-reading announcement effect pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is high,
The rate at which the second prefetching notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second prefetching notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, time saving state A and time saving state As a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "holding change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice""blue" pattern), and a second pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "suspended change notice", "symbol chance eye Notice”, “Red” pattern of “effect display notice”), and the rate at which the second pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) , Rate of execution of the second pre-reading notice effect pattern in time saving state A and probability variable state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)) portion higher than),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second look-ahead forewarning effect is likely to be executed in the second special state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-29,
The pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect execution means in the first special state and the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect execution means in the second special state are common (for example, time saving state A And the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable probability state and the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B are common (for example, "symbol chance eye notice"). part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead foretelling effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of Form 2-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 1-17,
Based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole), variable display of identification information (for example, decoration pattern) is performed, and an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Reservation storage means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information (for example, effect control command) about the game;
Based on the information received from the information transmitting means, an effect executing means (for example, , a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pre-reading notice effect),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by
The effect execution means selects one of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effect patterns (e.g., "countdown notice", "holding change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice"). is determinable and
The number of pre-reading forewarning effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means can be determined in the first special state. It is less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns and is less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, if the variable display result is wrong in the "time saving state B", it is for effect control The number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the CPU 120 (for example, 0) is the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “time saving state A” (for example, 3 pieces) and less than the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “variable probability state” (for example, 4) Part),
In the second special state, when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed is determined by the determining means in the first special state. is a variable display that is lower than the rate at which the look-ahead forewarning effect is executed when it is not decided to control to the advantageous state by the deciding means in the third special state. (For example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the "time-saving state A" is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost (for example, 30%), and the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "variable state" (for example, 40% ), see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, in the variable display not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. Since the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since the pre-reading notice performance is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-18,
Said pre-reading forewarning effect pattern which can be determined by said effect executing means in said second special state, and said pre-reading forewarning effect which can be determined by said effect executing means in at least one of said first special state and said third special state. The pattern is common (for example, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B, and the effect control CPU 120 in at least one of the time saving state A and the variable probability state The pre-reading that can be determined The notice effect pattern is common (for example, "symbol chance eye notice") part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead foretelling effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-19,
The pre-reading forewarning effect pattern that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state, and the pre-reading forewarning effect pattern that can be determined by the effect executing means in both the first special state and the third special state are Common (for example, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B, and the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in both the time saving state A and the probability variable state are common There is (for example, "pattern chance eye notice") part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-20,
The number of said pre-reading advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by said effect executing means in said second special state is smaller than the number of said pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined by said effect executing means in said first special state. The number of the pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in one special state is smaller than the number of the pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the third special state (for example, "time saving The number of types of pre-reading notices (for example, 0) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in state B” is the effect when the variable display result is lost in “time saving state A”. The number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state". (e.g. less than 4 pieces),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable pre-reading forewarning effect patterns is reduced to give priority to digestion of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable pre-reading forewarning effect patterns is increased. By doing so, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of Form 1-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-30,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, "time saving state B ”The execution ratio of the button notice per variable display (for example, 10% in the big hit, 5% in the loss) is the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in “Time saving state A” (for example, in the 80%, 20% for loss) and lower than the execution ratio of button notice per variable display of 1 in the “variable state” (for example, 80% for big hit, 30% for loss). 50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times the player is prompted to perform an action in the variable display of 1 is taken into consideration that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time. is small, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-32 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-31,
In the second special state, when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the motion promoting effect is executed by the effect executing means is determined by the determining means as the advantageous state. When it is a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to a state, the rate at which the action promotion effect is executed by the effect execution means is higher (for example, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control The ratio (for example, 10%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 is higher than the ratio (for example, 5%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure. high part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to the fact that the action promoting effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-33 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-32,
As action promotion effect patterns executable by the effect executing means, a first action promotion effect pattern and a second action promotion effect pattern with a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first action promotion effect pattern is executed. There is a production pattern and
The rate at which the second action promotion effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second action promotion effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, a "button notice" effect As a pattern, there is a "hit" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the "hit" pattern is executed, and in the time saving state B " The percentage of execution of the pattern (eg, 10%) is lower than the percentage of execution of the "continuous hits" and "long press" patterns in the time-saving state A and probability variation (eg, 40%), but the time-saving state The rate of execution of the "hit" pattern in B may be higher than the rate of execution of the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in the time saving state A or the probability change),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state, the second action promotion effect pattern is often used, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-34 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-33,
The period in which the action promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period in which the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the button The period during which the notice 'is executed and the period during which the 'button notice' is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the period during which the 'reach notice' is executed)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the execution period of the action promoting effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-34,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect before executing the action promotion effect,
The period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the effect control CPU 120 Before the "button notice" is executed, an action-promoting preparation effect (for example, although not shown, a fade-in display of the push button 31B to be operated and an effect display are displayed before the operation valid period starts). ) can be executed, the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state B are common. preferably),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period of the action-promoting preparation effect for the first special state and the second special state, the development cost can be reduced and the execution of the action-promoting effect can be reduced. It can be notified suitably.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of Form 2-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-21,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by
The execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state, and in the third special state Lower than the execution ratio of the operation promotion effect per variable display (for example, the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for the big hit, 5% for the loss) , Lower than the execution ratio of button notice per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 80% for big hit, 20% for loss), and button notice per variable display in "variable state" a portion that is lower than the execution percentage (eg, 80% for big hits, 30% for losers, see FIGS. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times the player is prompted to perform an action in the variable display of 1 is taken into consideration that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time. is small, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of Form 1-36 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-35,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action and a specific effect to notify that the control is in the advantageous state) and a part that can execute "movable body production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
As the effect execution pattern of the action-promoting effect and the specific effect that the effect execution means can execute in one variable display, a first effect execution pattern (for example, " pattern A-2, A-3"), and a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the specific effect without executing the action promoting effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. Higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to control (for example, in the time saving state B, the SP reach D big hit variation pattern does not execute the "win/fail button effect" without executing the "movable body The ratio (for example, 90%) of executing the ``immediate hit effect'' that executes the effect is the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the time saving state A. It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "immediate hit production" to execute "movable body production" without executing the "success button production" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the probability variation state " A portion that is higher than the percentage (for example, 0%) of executing “immediate hit production” or “full rotation production” (see FIG. 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, it is decided to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to perform an action when notified, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of Form 2-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-22,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute effects including an action promoting effect that prompts the player to move and a specific effect that notifies that the control is in the advantageous state) A part that can execute "appropriate button presentation"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
As the effect execution pattern of the action-promoting effect and the specific effect that the effect execution means can execute in one variable display, a first effect execution pattern (for example, " pattern A-2, A-3"), and a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the specific effect without executing the action promoting effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. When it is determined to control, the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed, and when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state, the second effect execution pattern is determined. Higher than the rate at which the production execution pattern is executed (for example, in the time saving state B, the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern executes the "movable body production" without executing the "successful button production" Execution of "immediate hit production" The ratio (for example, 90%) is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body production" without executing the "win/fail button production" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the time saving state A, A portion higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the variable state (see Fig. 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, it is decided to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to perform an action when notified, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of Form 1-37 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-36,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
As the types of the action promoting effects that can be executed by the effect executing means, a first action promoting effect prompting the player to perform one action (for example, an operation prompting display for a "hit" operation), and a predetermined action period for the player. There is a second action promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display for “continuous hit” or “long press” operation) that prompts the action over the
The effect execution means can execute both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state, and can execute the first action promotion effect in the second special state. On the other hand, it does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the “variable probability state” and the “time saving state A”, both the “blow pattern” and the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” Execution can be determined, and in the "time saving state B", while it is possible to determine the "blow pattern", the part that does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" (see FIGS. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the troublesome operation is performed over a predetermined operation period. is less likely to be urged to the player, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of Form 2-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-23,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
As the types of the action promoting effects that can be executed by the effect executing means, a first action promoting effect prompting the player to perform one action (for example, an operation prompting display for a "hit" operation), and a predetermined action period for the player. There is a second action promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display for “continuous hit” or “long press” operation) that prompts the action over the
The effect executing means can execute both the first action promoting effect and the second action promoting effect in the first special state and the third special state, and the first action in the second special state. While it is possible to execute the promotion effect, it does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the “variable probability state” and the “time saving state A”, pattern" can be determined to be executed, and in the "time saving state B", while it is possible to determine the "single blow pattern", the part that does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern". reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the troublesome operation is performed over a predetermined operation period. is less likely to be urged to the player, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of Form 1-38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-37,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a “movable body notice”) that can execute effects including a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The effect executing means controls a first suggestive effect (for example, "vibration (small)") based on the determination result of the determining means, and the state is more advantageous than when the first suggestive effect is executed. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, “vibration (large)”) with a high ratio of
The execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the first special state (for example, in "time saving state B" The execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display (for example, 0% big hit, 0% loss) is the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 90% big hit, 30% lost), and a portion lower than the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display of 1 in "variable probability state" (for example, 90% big hit, 40% lost). -50 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times it is suggested to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-38,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state is determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state. In the case of variable display, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in the first special state is higher than The ratio (for example, 0%) is lower than the ratio (for example, 90%) at which "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state when the variable display result is a big hit, but the variable display result is The ratio of execution of "movable body notice" in time saving state B in the case of a big hit is higher than the rate of execution of "movable body notice" in time saving state A or probability variable state when the variable display result is a big hit. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-39,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. is higher than the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first special state when is the determined variable display (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, in the time saving state B "vibration (small) ”The rate at which the pattern is executed (for example, 0%) is the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the variable probability state when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 30%). is also low, but the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is "vibration ( small)" part that may be higher than the rate at which the pattern is executed (e.g. 30%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive effect between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of form 2-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-24,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a “movable body notice”) that can execute effects including a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The effect executing means controls a first suggestive effect (for example, "vibration (small)") based on the determination result of the determining means, and the state is more advantageous than when the first suggestive effect is executed. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, “vibration (large)”) with a high ratio of
The execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the first special state, and the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the third special state is one. Lower than the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display (for example, the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% big hit, 0% loss) is " Lower than the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 90% big hit, 30% lost), and "movable body notice" per variable display in "variable state" ” (for example, hit 90%, lose 40%), see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times it is suggested to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of Form 1-41 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-40,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set to a specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "character notice" and "reach notice" part) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The execution ratio of the fanning effect per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the fanning effect per variable display in the first special state (for example, in "time saving state B" The execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display (for example, 10% jackpot, 5% loss) is the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 80 jackpots %, 20% off) and lower than the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display of 1 in the "variable state" (for example, 80% big hit, 30% off).In addition, "time saving state B ”The execution ratio of “reach notice” per variable display in ” (for example, 20%) is the execution ratio of “reach notice” per variable display in “time saving state A” (for example, 40%) than Along with being low, the part lower than the execution ratio (eg, 50%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "variable state" (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times whether or not to display the specific display is encouraged in consideration of the fact that the period of not being controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of Form 2-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-25,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set to a specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "character notice" and "reach notice" part) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The execution ratio of the fanning effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the fanning effect per one variable display in the first special state, and one in the third special state. Lower than the execution ratio of the fanning effect per variable display (for example, the execution ratio of “character notice” per variable display in “time saving state B” (for example, 10% jackpot, 5% loss) is “time saving Lower than the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "state A" (for example, 80% jackpot, 20% loss), and execution of "character notice" per variable display in "variable state" Ratio (eg, 80% jackpot, 30% off) is lower than.In addition, the execution rate (eg, 20%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is "time saving state A" Lower than the execution ratio (e.g., 40%) of "reach notice" per variable display in , and the execution ratio (e.g., 50%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "variable state" lower part, see Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times whether or not to display the specific display is encouraged in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of Form 1-42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-41,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
an operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a movable body effect to move the movable body and a specific effect to notify that the control is in the advantageous state A part that can execute "movable body production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed,
The effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the specific effect before the execution period of the specific effect as the effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed in one variable display. A first effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body effect is executed also during the period, and the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. Higher than the ratio of execution of the second effect execution pattern when it is determined to control (for example, the execution ratio of “pattern A-1” when the variable display result is lost in “time saving state B” (For example, 90%) is higher than the execution ratio of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state A" (for example, 10%), and variable display in "variable state" A portion higher than the execution rate (for example, 20%) of "Pattern A-1" when the result is a failure (see Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, when it is decided to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period of not being controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely moved unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-42,
Control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body presentation when the deciding means decides to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; The control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined to control in the advantageous state is common (for example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, Control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for the operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in "body effect", and in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, in "movable body effect" control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for controlling the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the movable body between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-43,
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light,
control data used for controlling the light emitting means for emitting light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation in the case where the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; and control data used for controlling the light emitting means for emitting light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. and are common (for example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the movable body LED 208 or the frame LED 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 Control data used for control (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000), and in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, a movable body that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in "movable body production" A portion common to control data used for controlling the LED 208 (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable body effect in the first special state and the second special state. .

The gaming machine of form 1-45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-44,
A display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body,
an effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation when the determination means determines to control the advantageous state in the first special state; The effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation in the case where the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is common. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the “movable body production” (movable body production image of FIG. 11-59 (D1) 069SG456 reference) and, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body production" (see the movable body production image 069SG456 of FIG. 11-59 (D1)) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the effect image that is displayed in conjunction with the movable object presentation in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-45,
Equipped with vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion,
a vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation in the case where the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation in the case where the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is common. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" and the time saving state B In the case of a big hit 2, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body presentation" is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the movable body presentation between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-47 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-46,
The rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state is determined by the determining means in the second special state to achieve the advantageous state. Higher than the rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to control (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, "pattern A-2, A- 3 (first effect execution pattern)” is executed (for example, 80 to 90%) is “pattern A-2, A-3 (first effect execution pattern)” is executed at a higher rate (e.g., 10%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first special state, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable body moves, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-48 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-47,
The execution frequency of the movable body effect in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body effect in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state B (for example, about 10%) is a part lower than the execution frequency (for example, 80 to 90%) of the “movable body effect” in the time saving state A and the variable probability state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily in the second special state, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of Form 2-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-15,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
an operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a movable body effect to move the movable body and a specific effect to notify that the control is in the advantageous state A part that can execute "movable body production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the specific effect before the execution period of the specific effect as the effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed in one variable display. A first effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body effect is executed also during the period, and the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. When it is determined to control, the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed, and when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state, the second effect execution pattern is determined. Higher than the rate at which the effect execution pattern is executed (for example, the execution rate of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" (for example, 90%) is "time saving state A "Pattern A-1" execution ratio (for example, 10%) when the variable display result is lost in "Pattern A-1 ” execution rate (for example, 20%), see FIG. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, when it is decided to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period of not being controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely moved unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of Form 1-49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-48,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
a specific effect for informing that the display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; A post effect that notifies game value information (for example, the number of balls to be put out) that can specify the size of the game value; and a part that can execute "post-production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "jackpot" (for example, one) is " Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 2), and less than the number of determinable deviation variation patterns in the 'probability variation state' (for example, 3)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state in the case of the variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state is 1 Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display time of the big hit variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" The average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) is less than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "variable probability state" A portion less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern (see FIGS. 11-50),
The effect mode of the post-effect is common to the case where the post-effect is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-effect is executed in the second special state (for example, SP Regarding the effect mode of "post effect" that notifies the scheduled number of balls to be given in the big hit game state informing that it is controlled to the big hit game state in the reach effect, as shown in FIG. B", "probable variable state", part common to "time saving state A". See Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In , the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, so that the speed of the variable display is increased, and after being notified that the control is in an advantageous state, the same as the first special state. Since it can be excited by the production of, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-50 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-49,
The specific effect executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. The specific effect that is executed when it is performed is common (for example, the “movable body effect” that is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, and the variable in the time saving state B The "movable body effect" executed when the display result is a big hit is a common part (see Fig. 11-59 (D1)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the specific effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-51 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-50,
Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting light,
Control data used to control the light emitting means that emit light in conjunction with the post-effect in the first special state, and control data used to control the light emitting means that emit light in conjunction with the post-effect in the second special state. The control data is common (for example, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the "post-production" in the time saving state B). and the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light (for example, the light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300) part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emit light in conjunction with the post-performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-52 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-51,
Equipped with vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion,
a vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-performance in the first special state; a vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-performance in the second special state; is common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the "post-production" in the time saving state B Executed by the vibration motor 61 are common (for example, the vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the post-performance between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of Form 2-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-27,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
a specific effect for informing that the display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; A post effect that notifies game value information (for example, the number of balls to be put out) that can specify the size of the game value; and a part that can execute "post-production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is It is less than the number of determinable variable display patterns and less than the number of determinable variable display patterns in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 is set to "time saving state B" The number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in ``time saving state A'' (for example, 2), and can be determined in ``variable probability state'' a portion that is less than the number of outlier variation patterns (for example, 3),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state in the case of the variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state is It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is a "big hit"). The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state B" by the CPU 103 is the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A". A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "variable probability state". 50),
The effect mode of the post-effect is the case where the post-effect is executed in the first special state, the case where the post-effect is executed in the second special state, and the case where the post-effect is executed in the third special state. It is common to the case where the post-article production is executed (for example, "post-production" that informs the scheduled number of balls to be given in the big hit game state that informs that the SP reach production is controlled to the big hit game state For the effect mode, as shown in FIG. 11-60, the part that is common to "time saving state B", "variable probability state", and "time saving state A".See FIG. 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. , the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, so that the speed of the variable display increases, and after being notified that the control is in an advantageous state, the first special state and the first special state Since the three special states can be livened up with a common performance, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of Form 1-53 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-52,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determining means is
When no pending memory is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state and the variable display is such that the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state, the second pending storage determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of causing pending storage in the means;
In the second special state, when no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the predetermined variable display period It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a shorter special variable display time than (for example, the CPU 103, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the probability variable state or the time saving state A, the time to store the pending memory in the second pending memory While it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time to earn (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds and SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.), time saving state B When the number of retained memories is 0, the variable display time is longer than the deviation fluctuation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) can determine short shortened non-reach variation patterns (e.g., ultra-shortened unreached with variation time of 1.5 seconds and shortened unreached A with 3 seconds of variation time, see FIGS. 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display can be performed even when the pending memory is not stored. Since the predetermined variable display pattern with a long period is not determined and the speed of the variable display is not reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of Form 2-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-28,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determining means
In the first special state or the third special state, when no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means and the variable display is such that it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state. , it is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period that can be stored in the second reservation storage means;
In the second special state, when no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the predetermined variable display period It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a shorter special variable display time than (for example, the CPU 103, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the probability variable state or the time saving state A, the time to store the pending memory in the second pending memory While it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time to earn (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds and SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.), time saving state B When the number of retained memories is 0, the variable display time is longer than the deviation fluctuation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) short non-reach variation patterns (e.g. ultra-short non-reach with variation time of 1.5 seconds and short non-reach A with 3 seconds of variation time, see FIGS. 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display can be performed even when the pending memory is not stored. Since the predetermined variable display pattern with a long period is not determined and the speed of the variable display is not reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of Form 1-54 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-53,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the control of the special state. A portion where the CPU 120 can execute the “plunging effect”),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The production executing means is
displaying the special state start display in the special state start effect when control of the first special state is started;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start presentation, and the special display which is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image in the probability change rush effect While displaying rush image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, in the time saving rush performance B, it is common with the rush image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time saving state A and the probability variable state. The part that displays the rush image 069SG470 and displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started. Figure 11-64),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled continued for a long time, in the special state start effect, the first special state is changed. Not only the special state start display common to when the control is started but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed, so that the start of the second special state can be livened up.

The gaming machine of form 1-55 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-54,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the processing);
with
The variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern for a variable display period during which the special state start effect can be executed in the variable display in which the control of the second special state is started (for example, effect control The CPU 120 for relief may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time that can execute "rush effect" in the relief time reduction arrival variation.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state start effect can be preferably executed.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of Form 2-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-29,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the control of the special state. A portion where the CPU 120 can execute the “plunging effect”),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The production executing means is
displaying the special state start display in the special state start effect when control of the third special state is started;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start presentation, and the special display which is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image in the probability change rush effect While displaying rush image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, in the time saving rush performance B, it is common with the rush image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time saving state A and the probability variable state. The part that displays the rush image 069SG470 and displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started. Figure 11-64),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time, the third special state is changed in the special state start effect. Not only the special state start display common to when the control is started but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed, so that the start of the second special state can be livened up.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of Form 1-56 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-55,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 performs step 069SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C ( 10R)) and
The decoration variable display means, when the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state, as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means It is possible to execute a special decoration variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) that stops after the specific display result to be displayed is variably displayed for a predetermined period,
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determining means determines to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to the second Higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined to control in an advantageous state (for example, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the production The ratio (for example, 100%) at which the control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation production" is determined by the production control CPU 120 as "SP reach" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A. D (full rotation)" execution ratio (for example, 0% (non-execution)) is higher than, and when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the variable probability state, the effect control CPU 120 A portion that is higher than the percentage of executing "SP reach D (full rotation)" (for example, 0% (non-execution). See Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the second advantageous state with a high degree of advantage is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled has continued for a long time. is determined, the special variable display is more likely to be executed, so a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of form 2-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-30,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B), and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state and a third special state (e.g., variable probability state) that is controlled when is finished,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C ( 10R)) and
The decoration variable display means, when the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state, as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means It is possible to execute a special decoration variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) that stops after the specific display result to be displayed is variably displayed for a predetermined period,
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determining means determines to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to the second When it is determined by the determining means in the third special state that the control to the second advantageous state is performed at a rate higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is performed when it is determined to control to the advantageous state (For example, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the production control CPU 120 executes "full rotation production" The ratio (for example, 100%) is the ratio of the performance control CPU 120 to execute “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in time saving state A ( For example, when it is higher than 0% (non-execution) and "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the variable probability state, the effect control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)" higher than the percentage of the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the second advantageous state with a high degree of advantage is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time. is determined, the special variable display is more likely to be executed, so a suitable second special state can be provided.

(Characteristic part 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The game machine of form 1 of characteristic part 099SG is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 110, is obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 110 From the period value χ small part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-100) The game machine of form 2 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the The one variable not controlled to the advantageous state is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state by the first number of times, and the one variable not controlled to the advantageous state executed in the third special state. A period value that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the display by the first number (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ψ obtained by multiplying β by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is Part smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-101) The game machine of form 3 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state performed in the second special state by the second number of times is the period value performed in the first special state. Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the variation of 1 in the time saving state B The period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1100, is the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 1100 '),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-102) The game machine of form 4 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state performed in the second special state is the period value performed in the first special state. The one variable not controlled to the advantageous state is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state and performed in the third special state. A period value that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the display by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ψ obtained by multiplying β by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ′ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of fluctuations of 1 in the time saving state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ ' is the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 1100 The part smaller than the period value ω ')
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-103) The game machine of form 5 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 0 Start when The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A A portion smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-104) The game machine of form 6 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. Said advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in said pending memory means in said third special state is zero, less than the duration value obtained by multiplying said first number of times by said variable display duration. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 0 is out by 110 is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A is less than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display results start when the number is 0 by 110, and the period value ξ Part smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-105) The game machine of form 7 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 0 Start when The period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value ν′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-106) The game machine of form 8 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. Said advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in said pending memory means in said third special state is zero, less than the duration value obtained by multiplying said second number of times by said variable display duration. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value ξ obtained by multiplying 1100 by the average variable display period of the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 0 is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A The period value ξ' is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that is started when the number of memories is 0 and the variable display result is not correct by 1100, and the period value ξ' is Part smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the probability variable state is lost by 1100 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-107) The game machine of form 9 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 1 Start when The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-108) The game machine of form 10 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. Said advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in said pending memory means in said third special state is one less than the duration value obtained by multiplying said first number of times by said variable display duration. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 1 is lost by 110 is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A It is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order when the number is 1 by 110, and the period value λ is A portion smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-109) The game machine of form 11 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the number of second special figure pending storage in the time saving state B is 1 Start when The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value κ′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-110) The game machine of form 12 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is one less than the duration value obtained by multiplying the variable display duration by the second number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value λ ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 1 is lost by 1100 is the second special figure pending in the time saving state A The period value λ is smaller than the period value κ′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is lost when the number of memories is 1, and the period value λ is probability variable. Part smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 in the state is lost by 1100) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-111) The game machine of form 13 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Information about the variable display is further provided with a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can be stored as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 2 Start when The period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A A portion smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-112) The game machine of form 14 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is two, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value θ obtained by multiplying 110 by the average variable display period of the variable display that is started when the number of reserved memories is 2 is the second special figure reserved memory in the time saving state A is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display results start when the number is 2 by 110, and the period value θ is in the probability variable state A portion smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-113) The game machine of form 15 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The second number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 2 Start when The period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A portion smaller than the period value η′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-114) The game machine of form 16 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The second number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is two, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value θ ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that is started when the number of pending memories is 2 and the variable display result is lost by 1100 is the second special figure pending in the time saving state A It is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the error in the variable display result starting when the number of memories is 2 by 1100, and the period value θ' is A portion smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the probability variable state and multiplied by 110 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-115) The game machine of form 17 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 3 Start when The period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A A portion smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-116) The game machine of form 18 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is 3, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-15, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value ε obtained by multiplying 110 by the average variable display period of the variable display results that are started when the number of pending memories is 3 is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order when the number is 3 by 110, and the period value ε is A portion smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-117) The game machine of form 19 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable between a non-special state (for example, normal state) and a special state (for example, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, probability variable state) in which the variable display is more frequently executed in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state. State control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 3) Start when The period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value δ′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-118) The game machine of form 20 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is 3, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 3 is lost by 1100 is the second special figure pending in the time saving state A The period value ε' is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display results in which the variable display results start when the number of memories is 3 and is not correct by 1100, and the period value ε' is A portion smaller than the period value ζ 'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is lost by 1100 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shoots game media into game areas where game media can flow down (for example, a right game area and a left game area),
As variable display, it is possible to perform variable display of special identification information and variable display of normal identification information (for example, a portion that can perform variable display of special symbols and variable display of normal symbols),
Based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information, a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a state in which the game medium is more likely to enter than the first state. A variable means (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B that forms a second starting winning opening) that is changed to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to enter;
Reservation storage means (for example, first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable display of the special identification information as reservation storage,
with
The game area has a special path (e.g., left game area) provided with the variable means and a non-special path (e.g., right game area) different from the special path,
The upper limit number of pending storage that can be stored by the pending storage means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending The number of pending memories that can be stored in the storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the game state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, FIG. 12-2 ( As shown in B), the part where the probability per normal pattern is the same even if the game state is any of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state),
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, in FIG. 12-2 (D) As shown, the part where the opening time of the second start winning opening is 3 seconds even if the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state),
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is shot toward the special path (for example, in both the time saving state A and the time saving state B, a game ball is launched toward the right game area state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the portions in which the game playability is shared between the first special state and the second special state, and the game playability is increased between the first special state and the second special state, which are the same special state. Players can be prevented from being confused by a large difference.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
When the period value is obtained by measuring the period required until the variable display not controlled to the advantageous state is performed for the first number of times or the second number of times in each special state, the start point of the measurement is , including the point at which the game medium is started to be launched (for example, the variable display period in which the variable display result is lost), the timing at which the game ball is launched, or the timing at which the launched game ball enters the start winning opening A portion that calculates the average variable display period as the period from the start timing to the end timing of the variable display based on the start winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the measured period value can be obtained appropriately.

The game machine of form 23 is the game machine according to any one of form 2, form 6, form 10, form 14, and form 18,
A holding storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information related to variable display as holding storage,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first The number of pending memories that can be stored in the special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 parts),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, FIGS. 12-6, 12-8, and 12- As shown in 10, since the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern that causes the variable display result to fail differs according to the number of reserved memories, the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the variable display result to fail is stored. different parts depending on the number of retained memories),
The period value is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the percentage of the first number of times variable display performed with each number of reserved memories multiplied by the average variable display period of the number of reserved memories (for example, FIG. 12-13 , the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of each reserved memory number by the ratio of the variable display executed with each reserved memory number to the 110 variable displays. is),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period A. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio a (for example, A is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A. Average variable display period, a is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display of the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period B, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period B. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio b (for example, B is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, b is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is one in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period C, and the number of reserved memories is C. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio c (for example, the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A is out. The average variable display period, c is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special pending memories in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period D, and the number of reserved memories is D. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio d (for example, D is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A is 3 The variable display result is out The average variable display period, d is the ratio of the variable display when the number of second special pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The period value of the first special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, and the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B. A hold 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the above, a hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α is the part calculated by the value of A × a + B × b + C × c + D × d),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 23 or 24,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the number of reserved memories is equal to E. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio e (for example, E is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, e is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period F, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period F. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio f (for example, F is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B is 1 The variable display result is out The average variable display period, f is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is one in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period G, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period G. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio g (for example, G is a variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, g is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is two in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period H, and the number of reserved memories is H. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio h (for example, H is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 in the time saving state B. Average variable display period, h is the ratio of the variable display when there are three second special-figure pending memories in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The period value of the second special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, and the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F. A hold 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the above, a hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio g, and the average variable display period G, the first number of times, the ratio h, and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β is the part calculated by the value of E × e + F × f + G × g + H × h);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate second special state period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 23 to 25,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period I. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio i (for example, I is the average that the variable display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state is out Variable display period, i is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period J, and the number of reserved memories is equal to J. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio j (for example, J is the average that the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories in the probability variable state is 1 The variable display period, j is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is one in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period K, and the number of reserved memories is K. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio k (for example, K is the average number of variable display results when the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 in the probability variable state. The variable display period, k is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is two in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period L, and the number of reserved memories is L. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio l (for example, L is the average that the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability variable state is out Variable display period, l is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The period value of the third special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, and the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J. A hold 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the above, a hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period K, the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ is the portion calculated by the value of I x i + J x j + K x k + L x l);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate third special state period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The game machine of form 27 is the game machine according to any one of form 4, form 8, form 12, form 16, and form 20,
Hold storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B) that can store a plurality of information related to variable display as reservation storage,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first Part where the number of pending memories that can be stored in the special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),
The average variable display period of the variable display differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the variable Since the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern that causes the display result to be wrong differs according to the number of reserved memories, the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the variable display result to be wrong differs according to the number of reserved memories that are stored. part),
The period value is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the percentage of the second number of times variable display performed with each number of reserved memories multiplied by the average variable display period of the number of reserved memories (for example, FIG. 12-14 , the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of each reserved memory number by the ratio of the variable display performed with each reserved memory number to 1100 variable displays. is),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to form 27,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period A. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio a' (for example, A is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, a' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period B, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period B. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio b ' (for example, B is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, b' is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure reservation memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period C, and the number of reserved memories is C. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio c ' (for example, C is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, c ' is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special figure pending memories in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period D, and the number of reserved memories is D. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio d' (for example, D is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, d' is the ratio of the variable display when there are 3 second special figure pending memories in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The period value of the first special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display. A holding 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the period B, a holding 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio c', and the average variable display period C, the second number of times, the ratio d', and the average (For example, the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The game machine of means 29 is the game machine according to form 27 or form 28,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the number of reserved memories is equal to E. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio e' (for example, E is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, e ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period F, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period F. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio f' (for example, F is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, f' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period G, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period G. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio g' (for example, G is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, g' is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special pending memories in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period H, and the number of reserved memories is H. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio h ' (for example, H is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, h' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The period value of the second special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display. A holding 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the period F, a holding 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio g', and the average variable display period G, the second number of times, the ratio h', and the average (For example, the period value β' is calculated by the value of Exe'+Fxf'+Gxg'+Hxh' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate second special state period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 27 to 29,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period I. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio i ' (for example, I is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the probability variable state. Average variable display period, i ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probability variable state to the 1100 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period J, and the number of reserved memories is equal to J. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio j ' (for example, J is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the probability variable state. The average variable display period, j 'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is one in the probability variable state to the 1100 times variable display in the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period K, and the number of reserved memories is K. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio k ' (for example, K is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the probability variable state. Average variable display period, k' is the ratio of variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is two in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period L, and the number of reserved memories is L. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio l' (for example, L is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability variable state. Average variable display period, l' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is 3 in the probability variable state to the 1100 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The period value of the third special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display. A holding 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the period J, a holding 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average (For example, the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate third special state period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

(Characteristic part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) Characteristic part 018 The game machine of form 3-1 of SG form,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light emitters (for example, movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
a movable body (eg, movable body 32);
Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a specific effect that notifies whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state and a special effect that causes the movable body to operate and the light emitter to emit light) A part that can execute SP reach performance A to E and movable body performance),
with
The production executing means is
As the specific effect, a first specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect B) in which a specific character (for example, enemy character X-1) is displayed and whether or not the specific character is used to control the advantageous state is displayed. ), and a second specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect A) for notifying whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state without displaying the specific character,
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the specific effect execution period (for example, the SP reach effect execution period (of ta2 to ta5 The part where the movable body effect can be executed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the first specific effect, the specific character (eg, character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with the effect image (eg, effect image 018SG250B) related to the motion of the movable body (FIGS. 13-14). (D2) (see D4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, an effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the motion of the movable body in a mode common to the first specific effect is displayed while the specific character is displayed. is not displayed (see Figure 13-14 (D1)),
The light emission mode (e.g., light emission pattern LP3-2) of the light emitter in the special effect is determined when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect and when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect. and (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first specific effect in which the specific character is displayed and the second specific effect in which the specific character is not displayed are made common in the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitter in the special effect, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. While reducing , the relevance between the specific performance and the special performance can be enhanced depending on whether or not the specific character is displayed during the execution period of the special performance, and the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first specific effect is executed than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, super reach β than the variation pattern of super reach α Since the variation pattern of is higher in the expectation of a big hit, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the SP reach production B and the SP reach production C than in the SP reach production A. (Big hit expectation: SP reach production A < SP reach production B <SP reach production C) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1 or form 3-2,
The execution period of the special effect is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the "determined effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is the SP reach It is common in productions A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach production A = SP reach production B = SP reach production C = SP reach production D = SP reach production E) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period of the special effect, the control data for the movable bodies and the light emitters in the special effect can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-3,
The execution period of the special effect includes a first period and a second period after the first period,
While the effect mode in the first period is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the effect mode in the second period is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect ( For example, the execution period of the movable body production includes a first period and a second period after the first period, and the production mode in the first period is common to the SP reach production B to E and the SP reach production A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14 (C) is common), the production mode in the second period is different between SP reach production B to E and SP reach production A. Figure 13-14 (D1) Parts different from the images shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the production mode common until the first period, the production cost can be further reduced, and either the first specific production or the second specific production can be used until the first period. Since it becomes unclear what the specific performance is, it is possible to improve the performance interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-4,
The effect executing means can execute a third specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect E) for displaying a special character (for example, enemy character X-2) different from the specific character as the specific effect,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs between when the first specific effect is executed and when the third specific effect is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state The determination ratio of the SP reach β variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and the determination ratio of the SP reach γ variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect E when the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. is 800/997),
In the third specific effect, an effect image common to the first specific effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body during the execution period of the special effect executed when the control to the advantageous state is notified. (For example, effect image 018SG250B) is displayed and the special character (for example, character image 018SGX2) is displayed,
The light emission mode (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) of the light emitter in the special effect executed in the third specific effect is different from the light emission mode of the light emitter in the special effect executed in the first specific effect. Common (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitter in each special effect are made common to reduce the manufacturing cost, and at the same time, it is possible to increase the specific effects in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is different. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to which specific performance is to be executed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-5,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
Light emission of the light emitter in the special effect regardless of the detection timing at which the action of the player is detected by the action detection means in the action valid period before being notified that the control to the advantageous state in the specific effect is performed. The end mode is common (for example, an arbitrary timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when is completed, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission end mode of the light emitter can be changed by changing the timing at which the player moves, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-6,
The production executing means can execute a post-period production (jackpot notification) in a post-period after the special production during the specific production,
The light emission pattern is common regardless of the type of the specific effect in which the post-period effect is executed (for example, in the post-period after the movable body effect during execution of the SP reach effect A to E, the jackpot is confirmed as the post-period effect Notification can be executed, and in the big hit confirmation notification, regardless of the type of SP reach production A to E, the light emission pattern of frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and movable body LED 208 is common (for example, light emission pattern LP3 -2) part, see Fig. 13-6(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the production cost can be further reduced because the production in the later period is executed with the common light emission pattern regardless of the type of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-7,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) are provided,
The effect executing means can output a special effect sound from the sound output means in the special effect,
The output pattern of the special effect sound is common to any type of the specific effect (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is common to any type of SP reach effect A to E (sound Pattern BP0-1 to 3) part.See Fig. 13-6(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the output pattern of the special effect sound, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is the gaming machine according to form 3-8,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
Regardless of the detection timing at which the action of the player is detected by the action detection means in the action valid period before being notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect sound in the special effect The output end mode is common (for example, an arbitrary timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period during which the “pass/fail button effect” is executed, or when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation is valid. Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when the period ends, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the mode of ending the output of the special effect sound can be changed by changing the timing of the action of the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-9,
The specific character displayed in the special effect executed in the first specific effect is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the movable body 32 The effect image 018SG250B displayed according to the vibration is displayed in a display color common or similar to the display colors of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a portion displayed in a similar color),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the specific character and the effect image can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special presentation can be enhanced.

(SG2020-019) The gaming machine of Form 3-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-10,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body (eg, movable body 32);
Effect executing means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a specific effect of notifying whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state, a special effect of moving the movable body, and a post-effect to be executed after the special effect. A part where the CPU 120 for SP can execute SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B),
with
The production executing means is
As the specific effect, a first mode (for example, SP ready-to-win effect B) is an effect in which a specific character (for example, an enemy character) is displayed and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state using the specific character. It is executable with the second mode (for example, SP reach production D),
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the specific effect execution period (for example, the SP reach effect execution period (of ta2 to ta5 The part where the movable body effect can be executed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect, in both the first mode and the second mode, the specific character (eg, character image) together with the common effect image (eg, effect image 018SG250B) related to the motion of the movable body 018SGX1) is displayed,
When the specific effect is executed in the first mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific effect of the first mode is not executed, and the specific effect is performed in the second mode. mode, the post-production using the specific character that was displayed in the specific production of the second mode is executed (for example, in the case of the SP reach production B, in the SP reach production Instead of the post-effect B using the displayed enemy character X-1, the post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed (see FIG. 13-17), while in the case of the SP reach effect D, the SP reach effect A part where the post-effect B (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the common specific character is displayed with different effects while reducing the manufacturing cost by standardizing the action mode of the movable body in the specific character and the special effect between the first mode and the second mode. As a result, the relevance between the specific effect and the special effect and between the specific effect and the post-effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-12 is the gaming machine according to form 3-11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect of changing the specific character to a special mode after the special effect executed in the specific effect,
The special effect when the specific effect is executed in the second mode is executed after the post-effect (for example, in the SP reach effect B, in the big hit notification before the post-effect A, the player is knocked down. A character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). After being skipped, a special image 018SGXZ that disappears and becomes a star is displayed (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the mode of the specific effect, so the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-13 is the gaming machine according to form 3-11 or form 3-12,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the post-effect during a variable display period in which one variable display is being executed,
In the post-effect, game value information capable of specifying the size of the game value to be given in an advantageous state in which control by the specific effect related to the post-effect is notified (for example, SP The execution period of "post production A, B" in reach α, β, γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, SP reach production A to E From the timing ta5 at which the determined decorative symbols forming the predetermined big winning combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the notification of the determination of the big win, the determined decorative symbols forming the predetermined big winning combination are stop-displayed (the variable display ends) at the timing ta7. up to (ta5 to ta7)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the post-effect in which the game value information is notified, and to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 3-14 is the gaming machine according to form 3-11 or form 3-12,
A gaming machine that notifies that it is controlled to the advantageous state by deriving and displaying a specific display result as a result of variable display,
The effect execution means can execute the post-effect when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-effect A, B" in SP reach α, β, γ is , During the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns that become the predetermined jackpot combinations in the jackpot decision notification of the SP reach performances A to E are temporarily stopped. From the displayed timing ta5 to the timing ta7 (the end of the variable display) at which the finalized decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed (ta5 to ta7)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize the timing at which the post-effect is executed, so that it is possible to increase attention to the post-effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-11 to 3-14,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the game value given is greater than that of the first advantageous state,
The rate of being controlled to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific effect of the second mode is executed than when the specific effect of the first mode is executed (for example, in the low base state SP When the SP reach effect B is executed when the reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined, the "jackpot B (6R)" (first 2 advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state and the SP reach production D is executed, "jackpot B (6R)" (second 1 advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), the ratio of which is controlled to 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the specific effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-11 to 3-15,
When the specific effect is executed in the first mode, the effect executing means can execute the post-effect in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, the post-effect A of the SP ready-to-win effect A). Then, since the character does not appear in the SP reach effect A, the character does not appear in the post effect A. In addition, in the post effect A of the SP reach effect B and C, the character appears in the SP reach effect B and C, The part where the character does not appear in the post-production A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the post-effect is executed even when the specific effect of the first mode is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 3-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-11 to 3-16,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect during one variable display,
A variable display period of variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the second mode is shorter than a variable display period of variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the first mode,
During the period from the end of the special effect in the specific effect of the second mode until the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is derived after the special effect is completed in the specific effect of the first mode. Longer than the period until it is displayed (for example, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends in the SP reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed is the SP reach β Longer than the period (ta4-ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body production" is completed to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed (ta4-ta7; SP reach γ > SP reach β)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the specific effect of the second aspect executed in a short variable display period, the period after the end of the special effect is lengthened, so that even if the variable display period is short, the impression of the variable display is enhanced. be able to.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of Form 3-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-17,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A specific effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect to be executed when it is notified that the control to the advantageous state is performed in the specific effect, and a post-facto effect to be executed after the special effect Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach effect A to E, the movable body effect, and the post effect A, B),
The production executing means is
As the specific effect, a specific character (for example, an enemy character X-1) and a special character (ally character A-1) are displayed, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled using the specific character and the special character. and a special character (enemy character X-2) different from the specific character (enemy character X-2) and the special character (ally character A-1) are displayed, and the special character and a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled using the special character,
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character and the special character displayed in the first specific effect are displayed and operated to achieve the advantageous state. can execute a first post-effect (e.g., post-effect B) that reports game value information (e.g., scheduled number of balls put out) that can specify the magnitude of the game value to be given in
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect, the special character displayed in the second specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated to achieve the advantageous state. can execute a second post-effect (e.g., post-effect B) that reports game value information (e.g., scheduled number of balls put out) that can specify the magnitude of the game value to be given in
At least the action mode of the special character is common to the first post-production and the second post-production (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a common character in the specific performance and the post-performance, the production cost can be reduced and the relationship between the specific performance and the post-performance can be easily understood, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 3-19 is the gaming machine according to form 3-18,
The execution period of the second post-effect is common to the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E is all common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period, it is possible to easily divert the control data of the post performance, especially the action control data of the special character, so that it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost. .

The gaming machine of form 3-20 is the gaming machine according to form 3-18 or form 3-19,
The effect executing means is capable of causing a light-emitting body to emit light in the post-effect,
The light emission pattern of the light emitter is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball-out addition part of the post-effect B). The light emission pattern is common to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission pattern can also be shared, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of form 3-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-20,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying a background image in the post-effect,
The background image is common to the first post-production and the second post-production (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is the post-production B of the SP reach production D and the post-production B of the SP reach production E). (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the background image can also be shared, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of form 3-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-21,
The special character is common to the first post-production and the second post-production (for example, the ally character A-1 is the post-production B of the SP reach production D and the post-production B of the SP reach production E). are common (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special characters can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-22,
The production executing means is
In the first post-production, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at a common time,
In the second post-effect, the special character and the special character can be displayed at the same time (for example, in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D, the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 are displayed at the same time, and in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E, an image of the enemy character X-2 fighting against the ally character A-1 is displayed at the same time (Fig. 13-18). ~ see Figure 13-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since each character is displayed at the same time, it is possible to enhance the impression of the post-production and improve the production effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-23,
The production period of the post-production includes a first production period and a second production period after the first production period,
The production executing means is
In the first effect period, a suggestive display regarding the size of the game value to be given in an advantageous state informing that the control is performed by the specific effect related to the post-effect, and the size of the game value to be added to the suggestive display. is displayed (for example, a scheduled ball throw addition part in which the scheduled number of balls thrown is displayed by addition in response to the friendly characters appearing in the SP reach effects D and E attacking the enemy characters),
In the second presentation period, the game value given in the advantageous state is added to the game value indicated by the suggestive display by adding the magnitude of the game value indicated by the addition display. (For example, after the ally character gives the last blow to the enemy character, the scheduled number of balls to be put out is stopped and notified, and then the final decorative pattern for the big hit combination is displayed. Scheduled pitch announcement part where the variable display ends with the stop display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the suggestive display and the addition display are displayed in the post-effect, the magnitude of the game value to be given in an advantageous state is announced, so the effect of the post-effect can be enhanced.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of Form 3-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-24,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A specific effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect to be executed when it is notified that the control to the advantageous state is performed in the specific effect, and a post-facto effect to be executed after the special effect Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach effect A to E, the movable body effect, and the post effect A, B),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, "jackpot A (6R)" in the low base state/"jackpot B (6R)" in the high base state) and a state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. a second advantageous state (for example, "jackpot B (6R)" in the low base state/"jackpot C (10R)" in the high base state);
The production executing means is
As the specific effects, a first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D), a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) different in effect mode from the first specific effect, the first specific effect and It is possible to execute a third specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A) in which the effect mode is different from the second specific effect,
As the post-production, when the special production is executed in the first specific production, a first post-production in a production mode related to the first specific production (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-1 appear It is possible to execute post-production B) to
As the post-production, when the special production is executed in the second specific production, a second post-production in a production mode related to the second specific production (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-2 appear It is possible to execute post-production B) to
As the post-performance, when the special performance is executed in the third specific performance, a third post-performance (for example, post-performance A) in a performance mode related to the third specific performance can be executed,
The ratio controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which one of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect is executed (for example, SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation in high base state When the pattern is determined, the ratio controlled to the "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantage state) that is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantage state) is the SP reach. It is 40% when the performance D is executed, and 60% when the SP reach performance E is executed, and when the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state, "jackpot A (6R)". The proportion controlled to the "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state) that is more advantageous to the player than the (first advantageous state) is 100% when the SP ready-to-win effect A is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, not only is it notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, but the ratio of control to the second advantageous state differs depending on which specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is controlled. The degree of attention of the player can be suitably increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-26 is the gaming machine according to form 3-25,
While the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production are common,
The production period of the third post-production is different from the production periods of the first post-production and the second post-production (for example, the execution period of "post-production A" corresponding to each of the SP reach productions A to C (ta5 to ta7) are all common, and the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to SP reach effects D and E are all common, while the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" ) and the execution period (15 seconds) of “post-effect B”),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production common, it is possible to easily share the production content and control between the first post-production and the second post-production. The cost can be reduced, and by executing the third post-performance with a different performance period, the post-performance can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the performance effect of the post-performance can be enhanced. .

The gaming machine of form 3-27 is the gaming machine according to form 3-25 or form 3-26,
The effect execution means is capable of causing the light emitter to emit light in the post-effect,
While the light emission pattern of the light emitters in the first post-effect is common to the light emission pattern of the light emitters in the second post-effect,
The light emission pattern of the light emitter in the third post-effect is different from the light emission pattern of the light emitter in the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the light emission pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E) While the light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-5 and LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball release notification part of the production B are common, the post-production corresponding to the SP reach production A. A movable body LED208 and frame LED9L1 ~ 9L12, 9R1 ~ 9R12 light emission pattern (light emission pattern LP4-2, LP4-3), SP reach production D and SP reach production E movable body LED208 in post-production B corresponding to A portion different from the light emission pattern (light emission pattern LP4-5, LP4-6) of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 (see FIG. 13-6),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the light emission pattern of the first post-performance and the light emission pattern of the second post-performance common, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced, and the third post-effect having a different light emission pattern can be achieved. By executing the production, the production effect of the post-production can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece moves to the winning ball. It is close to the device 6A and becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (the second start winning opening) by moving the movable piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided to operate according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change-over switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the throwing rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability / high base state, a variable probability state is a high probability / high base state, and a normal state is also called a low probability / low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of putting out balls are changed according to set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit and the ball-out rate are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the odds of winning a big hit change according to the set value, the throwing rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6, with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control processing, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 069SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion 069SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-64. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flow chart in this characteristic part 069SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "069SGS1", and "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach" or "super reach". is sometimes abbreviated as “SP reach”. Further, in the characteristic portions 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "fluctuation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

[Embodiment 1]
The first embodiment of the characteristic portion 069SG will be described below. Pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in FIG. A game machine in which the probability of a big hit is set to about 1/319 is explained.

Also, after turning on the power to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after the occurrence of a big hit, even if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times) continuously in a low probability state When the next big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or a relief time saving state) among a plurality of kinds of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , in this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the jackpot A among a plurality of types of jackpots, 110 times of variable display is performed in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state) among a plurality of types of time saving states, While the number of variable display times remaining from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the relief time saving is 790 times, if it is controlled to either the jackpot B or the jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots, the probability variable state (high probability / High base state) 110 times of variable display is performed, so the number of variable display times from after the end of the probability variable state to reaching the relief time reduction is 900 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of variable display is 1100 times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming “0”.

In the present embodiment, in the variable display at the time of relief time reduction, by displaying the shutter image (see FIGS. 11-23 (B) (C)) on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the variable before the relief time reduction In the display, after reducing the visibility of the first background image (see FIG. 11-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state displayed as the background image, the third background image corresponding to the relief time saving as the background image (See FIG. 11-23(D)) is displayed.

In this embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in the left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is It is formed in the right game area in which game balls can flow down. A game ball weakly launched by the shooting device flows down the first path in the left game area, and a game ball strongly launched by the shooting device flows down the second path in the right game area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the flowing direction of the game balls. The first big winning hole is opened and closed to allow game balls to enter and closed to prevent game balls from entering by driving the solenoid 069SG2A (see FIG. 11-2) to open and close the big winning door (not shown). It is possible to change between states. The second big winning hole is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 069SG2B (see FIG. 11-3) to open and close the big winning hole door (not shown) so that game balls can enter and closed where game balls cannot enter. It is possible to change between states.

Furthermore, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided in the first big prize opening, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided in the second big prize opening. there is

That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area (first route) can win the general winning hole 10, the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, and the right game area (second route ), the game ball flowing down wins the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. As well as being able to pass through the passage gate 41 .

The switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024 incorporated in the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

Between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area cannot win the first starting winning opening. there is

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the present embodiment, the first special figure can be displayed in a variable manner. 1 special symbol display device 069SG004A, second special symbol display device 069SG004B capable of executing variable display of the second special symbol, first suspension display device 069SG025A capable of displaying the number of first pending memories, capable of displaying the number of second pending memories A second pending display device 069SG025B, a normal pattern display device 069SG020 that can execute variable display of normal patterns, a normal pattern pending display device 069SG025C that can display the normal pattern pending memory number, the number of rounds of the big hit game during the big hit game ( A game that launches a game ball such as a round indicator 069SG131 that can display a jackpot type), a jackpot game state, a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), a low probability / high base state (time saving state), etc. toward the right game area In the right-handed lamp 069SG132 that lights up in the state, the probability variable lamp 069SG133 that lights up when it is in the high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the low probability / high base state (time saving state) A game information display section is provided in which lighted time-saving lamps 069SG134 are collectively arranged. When the game state is the normal state, the right-handed lamp 069SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops when the variable display results in a big win.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). An information output circuit for output is installed.

In the present embodiment, a V winning opening and a discharge opening downstream of the V winning opening are provided in the second big winning opening. A variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by means of a solenoid. That is, the game ball flowing down in the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. shall flow down to the outlet without being able to pass through the

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 has a V switch 069SG023B1 that can detect that a game ball has passed through a V winning hole provided downstream of the second big winning hole via a switch circuit 110. and a discharge switch 069SG023B2 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the discharge port.

Also, the effect control board 12 is connected with a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 . In addition, the lamp control board 14 has a right-handed LED 069SG031 for prompting a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 069SG032 that lights up during variable display of the first special symbol, and a lighted during variable display of the second special symbol. The second special figure LED069SG033, the first pending storage LED069SG034A that lights when the first pending storage number is 1 to 2, and the first pending storage LED069SG034B that lights when the first pending storage number is 3 to 4 , a second pending LED 069SG035A that lights when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 069SG035B that lights when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, and a push button 31B. A button LED 62, a movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, and the variation pattern judgment Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for use, the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of each random number MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern determination table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc., is stored.

FIG. 11-3 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 069SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature part 069SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for judging the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic portion 069SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/319.68 in this feature part 069SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state becomes higher (in this feature part 069SG about 1/80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

In the determination table stored in the ROM 101, in addition to the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. For the first special symbol), in addition to the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. A determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball throwing rate) does not change according to the set value, but the probability of winning a big win (ball throwing rate) does not change according to the set value. ) may be changed.

(Jackpot type determination table)
Figures 11-3 (C1) and 11-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3(D). In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. Also, these jackpots A, jackpots B, and jackpots C are maximized after the jackpot game ends by entering the V prize opening after the game ball enters the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probability variable control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) is a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open state period and a long open state with a long open period. state (eg, 15 seconds). In the big win A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the big wins B and C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. and

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot A'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial normal jackpot.

In the jackpot game state by the ``big win B'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot C'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two or less jackpot types, or Four or more types may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. , and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%. Both the variable probability control and the time saving control are carried out after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the big win game state with a probability of 100%, so that the probability change control is performed after the big win game ends. and time saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even in the case of a jackpot A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is in a short-circuited open state, but it is extremely rare. Description will be made on the assumption that no V prize is won and the variable probability control is not executed. Also, even in the case of the big win B and the big win C, it is possible that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, but it is extremely rare, so the big win B and the big win C are made. In this case, it is assumed that the V prize is won and the variable probability control is executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C capable of executing variable probability control and time saving control of 110 times after the end of the jackpot game state was illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time saving control is performed 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) jackpot D etc. may be provided, By doing this, the interest is improved because the next big hit is rich, and after the end of the big hit D, even if the probability change control ends without the big hit occurring in the 110 times probability change state, the time saving state A (low After executing variable display 899 times without a big hit in the high/high base state), it is controlled to the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state), which will be described later, only by executing the variable display once in the normal state. Therefore, interest increases.

(Time saving times)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, when the big hit A occurs and the game ball does not enter the variable probability region, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low probability Control is performed 110 times in a time-saving state A (in this example, it is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with a time-saving number of times of 110 times. In addition, either a big hit B or a big hit C occurs and the game ball is placed in the probability variable area. When winning a prize, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) probability-variable state in which probability-variable control is performed 110 times (in this example, extreme battle rush (extreme / BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time reduction) In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low-probability control is 1100 It is controlled to the time-saving state B (in this example, the number of times of time-saving 1100 times, 1100 battle rush (play-1100 BATTLE RUSH)).However, after the time-saving state B ends, it is controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state. Even if the change is performed 900 times again without being changed, it will not be controlled to the time saving state B again based on this.

In addition, when the lost symbol with time saving is stopped and displayed in the normal state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) time saving state B (in this example, time saving control is performed 1100 times) 1100 times of play/1100 battle rushes) may be controlled. In this case, even if lost symbols with time saving are stopped and displayed in a high base state (probability variable state, time saving state), transition control of the game state is not performed (control is not performed to the time saving state of 1100 times of time saving). This is in order not to reduce the degree of relief for the player. For example, if it is configured to re-control to the time-saving state of 1100 times of time-savings based on the stopped display of the lost symbols with time-saving when being controlled to the probability variable state that tends to be a big hit, the player This is not preferable because it results in control from an advantageous state to a disadvantageous state. Therefore, only when the game state under control when the missing symbols with time saving are stopped and displayed is the normal state, the game may be controlled to the time saving state of 1100 times of time saving.

In addition, the relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time-saving state via the relief time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is as follows. can be calculated as

K={(1−ML)̂n}×100
(K = time saving arrival rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display count)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in the present embodiment is approximately 1/319, the relief short-time arrival rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine in which setting values can be set, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is, so that even if the jackpot probability is a low setting value, the player can be saved. can do.

(fluctuation pattern)
11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern determination table according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 11-5, (A) is a specific example of a change pattern determination table for loss when the number of retained memories in the normal state is 0 to 2, and (B) is a variation for loss when the number of retained memories is 3. A specific example of a pattern determination table, (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0 to 2, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach B, and SP reach A Two judgment values are assigned, and SP reach B is assigned one judgment value. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of retained memories is 3, 97 determination values are assigned to shortened non-reach B, and SP reach A is assigned two determination values, and SP reach B is assigned one determination value.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP non-passing B, SP Reach A is assigned 40 determination values, and SP reach B is assigned 50 determination values.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the probability variable state is 0, and (B) is for loss when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 (C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 2 to SP reach C is assigned, and three determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 85 determination values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, and non- Ten determination values are assigned to the reach A, two determination values are assigned to the SP reach C, and three determination values are assigned to the SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0, five determination values are assigned to SP non-passing A, and SP reach C is assigned 80 determination values, and SP reach D is assigned 15 determination values.

In addition, FIG. 11-7 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the time saving state A is 0, and (B) is a case where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. (C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 to SP reach E is assigned a judgment value. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 90 determination values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, and non- Five determination values are assigned to reach A, and five determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, five determination values are assigned to SP non-passing A, SP Reach E is assigned 95 decision values.

In addition, FIG. 11-8 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, and (B) the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss in the case of 3, and (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 3 to SP reach D is assigned a judgment value. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach, SP Reach D is assigned three decision values.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-8(C), 100 determination values are assigned to the SP reach D in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the probability variation state is about 8.2 seconds {(( 7 s × 95) + (40 s × 2) + (25 s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 4.8 seconds {((3s*85)+(7s*10)+(40s*2)+(25s*3))÷100=4.8}.

Here, assuming that the first variable display after the probability change state is started has a reserved memory number of 0, and the variable display of 2 to 110 times has a reserved memory number of 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in the probability change state. is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2+(4.8*109))/110=4.83}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the variable probability state is about 51.1 seconds {( (22s x 5) + (55s x 80) + (40s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined in the variable probability state is about 51 .1 second.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A is about 9.15 seconds {( (7 s × 95) + (50 s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 5.55 Seconds {((3s*90)+(7s*5)+(50s*5))÷100=5.55}.

Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state A is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 110 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state A The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15+(5.55*109))/110=5.58}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the time saving state A is about 62.8 seconds { ((22s*5)+(55s*95))/100=62.85}.

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B is about 7.54 seconds {( (7 s × 97) + (25 s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 2.205 Seconds {((1.5s*97)+(25s*3))÷100=2.205}.

Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state B is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 1100 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state B The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54+(2.205*1099))/1100=2.20985}.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds. , The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big win that can be determined in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds.

In this way, the number of fluctuation patterns for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 is three for the probability variable state, two for the time saving state A, two for the time saving state B, and the number of pending memories is 1 to The number of variation patterns for loss that can be determined in the case of 3 is four for the variable probability state, three for the time saving state A, and two for the time saving state B.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the determinable deviation variation pattern is 4.83 seconds in the probability variable state, 5.58 seconds in the time saving state A, and 2.2 seconds in the time saving state B.

In addition, the number of big hit variation patterns that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is three for the variable probability state, two for the time saving state A, and one for the time saving state B.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the determinable big hit variation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the variable probability state, 62.8 seconds in the time saving state A, and 40 seconds in the time saving state B.

That is, the number of types of determinable loss variation patterns decreases in the order of probability variation state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (probability variation state> time saving state A> time saving state B), determinable loss variation pattern variable The average time of the display time is shortened in order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (variable probability state>time saving state A>time saving state B).

In addition, the types of determinable jackpot variation patterns decrease in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (variable probability state > time saving state A > time saving state B), variable display of determinable jackpot variation patterns The average time of time is shortened in order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (variable probability state>time saving state A>time saving state B). In this way, the time saving state B has fewer variation pattern types and a shorter variable display period of 1 than the variable probability state and the time saving state A. That is, monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, the number of types of variation patterns for loss and the number of types of variation patterns for big hits that can be determined exemplified a form in which the probability variation state is more than the time saving state A, but the time saving state A is more than the probability variation state Alternatively, the variable probability state and the time saving state A may be the same.

Further, the various variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-8 are commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Especially in the time saving state B, the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Since the number of variable pattern types that can be determined is smaller than in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, and the average time of the variable display time is short, monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, when V winning occurs in the jackpot game state by "jackpot A", similarly to "jackpot B" and "jackpot C", the probability variable state in which the probability variable control and the time saving control are executed after the jackpot game state is completed. Since it is controlled, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6. In addition, when V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state by "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", time-saving state A in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, similar to "jackpot A". , the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7. That is, the variation pattern determination table does not use the variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type, and since an irregular state may occur in the jackpot game state, it is linked to the state after the jackpot game state. A variation pattern determination table based on

That is, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) V When a V winning occurs in a jackpot game state in which a prize can be won, control is performed to a probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state, while when a V prize does not occur in a jackpot game state in which a V prize can be won, the game is controlled. In the one which is controlled to the first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is controlled to the second time-saving state after the end of the big win game state when the V prize does not occur in the jackpot game state where it is difficult to win a V prize, The first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are common time-saving states, and the variable display period of 1 in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state is the variable display of 1 in the time-saving state B of the present embodiment. Shorter than the period is preferred.

(Variation pattern without reach)
In the present embodiment, variation patterns without reach ("shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra-shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-via A, SP non- Via B") is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the variable display result is ``losing'' or ``jackpot'' without establishing a reach after the variable display is started is displayed in a stopped state. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra-shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-A, SP non-B" collectively simply "non-reach" or " It is also called "non-reach fluctuation pattern". In addition, "SP non-passing A, SP non-passing B" is a non-reach variation pattern for a big win in which reach or SP reach does not materialize.

In the present embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve reach, the variable display period is 7000 ms when it is determined to be the "non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, and the "SP non-via A" fluctuation pattern is determined. The variable display period is 7,000 + 15,000 ms, and the variable display period is 12,000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach B", and the variable display period is determined to be the "non-SP B" variation pattern. is 12,000 + 15,000 ms, the variable display period is 3,000 ms when it is determined to be the “shortened non-reach A” variation pattern, and the variable display period is 5,000 ms when it is determined to be the “shortened non-reach B” variation pattern. , the variable display period is 1500 ms when the variable pattern is determined to be "ultra-shortened non-reach". Of these, the variation pattern of "super-shortening non-reach" is a variation pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, and when it is controlled to another game state (time-saving state A, probability variable state) in which time-saving control is executed The variable display period is shorter than any of the fluctuation patterns determined in .

(Variation pattern with super reach)
In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation patterns with super reach ("SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", "SP reach D", "SP reach E"), the reach state was established Later, as an SP reach performance, a bowling performance (SP reach A) for notifying whether or not a jackpot is won by bowling between an ally character and an enemy character, and a battle between the ally character and the enemy character are performed. A battle performance (SP reach B to E) for informing whether or not a big win is won is executed by , and the final display result is fixed and stopped after the end of the bowling performance or the battle performance. Here, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (defeat effect) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "big hit", an effect (victory effect) is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, or an effect (defeat effect) is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. After being executed, an effect (resurrection effect) in which the ally character revives and wins over the enemy character is executed.

In addition, the “variation pattern without reach” is a variation pattern in which the variable display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becoming the predetermined reach mode. In addition, it includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is displayed without the final reach mode even if there is a reach bias such as "reach notice" to be described later. In addition, the "variation pattern with super reach" means that the display result is displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, the reach effect develops, and the SP reach effect is executed. It is a variation pattern.

In addition, the super reach big hit variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is given in the big win game state after the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed and the victory performance and the revival performance of the variable display part are completed. and a post-production part for identifiably announcing the scheduled number of put-out balls.

The variable display period of the variable display part is 45000ms for SP reach A, 80000ms for SP reach B, 40000ms for SP reach C, 25000ms for SP reach D, and 50000ms for SP reach E. For each type of SP reach A to E different. On the other hand, the execution period of the post-production part is 15000 ms, common to SP reach A to E. In the present embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 15000 ms) in the variable display period is assigned to the post-effect part, but the predetermined period may differ according to the type of SP reach. Also, a fanfare period or the like in the jackpot game state may be assigned to the post-effect part.

In the present embodiment, all variation patterns involving reach are super reach variation patterns, and the normal reach variation pattern is not set, but the present invention is not limited to this, normal reach variation A pattern may be set.

(Production control command)
FIG. 11-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-9(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. Different EXT data are set according to (predetermined result) and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which one of a plurality of types of jackpot types should be set when the variable display result is "a jackpot."

As for the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command with a variable display result of "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8FXXH stops (confirms) the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. It is a design determination designation command that designates a design determination period until it is done.

In the symbol confirmation designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(C), the command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A designation command that terminates the variation of the special symbols and sets the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds. The command 8F01H is a design determination B designation command that terminates the special design variation and sets the design determination period to 20 seconds.

In the present embodiment, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed, and (ii) after the big hit, when the relief time reduction is reached with the variable display of 900 times, the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation , a pattern confirmation designation command in which different EXT data is set is transmitted. Specifically, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed, a symbol confirmation A designation command is transmitted in which the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation. In addition, (ii) after the big hit, when the relief time reduction is reached with 900 times of variable display, a symbol determination B designation command is transmitted in which the symbol determination period is 20 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation.

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding relief working time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variable count notification command for notifying the remaining probability variable control count in the probability variable state.

The command F100H is a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031. The command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command for notifying that the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned off.

Command 91XXH is a restoration time reduction time number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the value of the relief time reduction counter by converting it into a hexadecimal number at the time of power restoration. In the recovery time reduction time count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), each digit (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd digit, fourth digit), different EXT data is set.

In the recovery time reduction time number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction time number designation 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the relief time reduction number is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are restoration time reduction number designation 2 commands that designate the second digit of the value of the number of times of restoration. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number designation 3 commands that designate the third digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number designation 4 commands that designate the fourth digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time.

The command 94XXH is a relief time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), different EXT data is set according to the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until relief time reduction .

In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), the command 9400H is a relief time reduction number A designation command that designates that the relief time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that designates that the remaining 1 to 125 times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that the remaining 127 times or more is reached until the relief time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601H is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining variable display number is 700 times, relief A command 9607H is transmitted as a time saving number of times 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display specifying command for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing in this embodiment. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the production control command for instructing restoration from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction. Then, the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to transmit a recovery time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to set a value corresponding to the current value of the relief time-saving number counter and transmit a relief time-saving number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the relief time reduction number designation command is sent, and the remaining variable display up to the current relief time reduction You will be notified of the number of times.

In addition, in this example, when the power is restored, aside from the command at the time of restoration, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery and the number of times of recovery is transmitted. However, it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, in the EXT data of the recovery command (eg, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened may be set and transmitted. .

Also, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, when there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, in the initialization process of step S8, the area of the relief time reduction counter Perform clear processing on the included area.

Further, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "900" is set to the relief time reduction number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power supply to the game machine is turned on, if the big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state B is controlled. will be In addition, in this example, since the effect control command for instructing initialization to be transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set to the relief time reduction number counter, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the transmission of the directed effect control command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter (“900” in this example), sets the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal, and sets the relief time reduction counter. Control is performed to transmit the number-of-times designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the progress processing of the game, is executed, so that the variable display is not started before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, the case of setting the relief time reduction number counter to "900" and initializing it is shown. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (Steps S4 and S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, it may be configured such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is performed.

(Time saving flag, variable probability flag)
In this Embodiment, when one of the conditions for being controlled by a time saving state is satisfied, a time saving flag can be set. The time saving flags include a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when it is controlled to the time saving state A via the jackpot A. This time-saving flag A is set when the big hit game state of the big hit A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (when the big hit occurs during the time-saving state A, 110 times of time-saving control ends and the normal state controlled timing).

The time saving flag B is set when it is controlled to the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving. This time-saving flag B is when variable display is executed 900 times in which the display result does not become a big hit pattern after RAM clearing, or when the display result does not become a big win pattern in a low probability state after the end of the big win game state, variable display is performed 900 times. is executed, and when the time-saving state B ends (the timing of the big hit during the time-saving state B, the timing of the time-saving control ending 1100 times and being controlled to the normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when V is won in the first round of the big win game, when the big win game ends, the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, and a variable probability flag is set. This variable probability flag is erased at the timing when the variable probability state ends (the timing when the variable probability state becomes a big hit, the timing when the variable probability control is executed for the 110th time and the timing is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the variable probability flag is erased based on the fact that it is the 110th time after the variable display is controlled to the variable probability state when step 069SGS69A in FIGS. 11-12 described later is YES.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the combined reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 069SGS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 069SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 069SGS54).

In this embodiment, the processing of steps 069SGS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 069SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61), and executes the big winning determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if it is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 uses the low probability jackpot determination value to perform the big hit determination. Further, if the variable probability flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the high-probability big-hit determination value to perform the big-hit determination. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values.

If it is determined to be a big hit (step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step 069SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value matching the random number is determined as the jackpot type (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for type determination extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (step 069SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time reduction condition for controlling the relief time reduction regardless of the variable display result (big hit, loss) (the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted and becomes "0" ) can occur. In this example, the time-saving state A is entered based on the big hit A, and the time-saving state is based on the fact that the next big hit does not occur even after the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times). Although it is controlled to B, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a big hit. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is established becomes a big hit, it is configured to control to the time saving state A based on the big win.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 069SGS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended when the variable display ends (step 069SGS69).

In addition, in this example, steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed before the counting process of the number of times of variable display until relief time saving after step 069SGS71 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such processing It is not limited to modes. For example, after executing the counting process of the number of times of variable display up to relief time saving in step 069SGS71 and thereafter, the subtraction process of the time saving number counter may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the subtraction process is performed after setting "110" to the time saving number counter (see step 069 SGS172), the value of the time saving number counter will be 1 extra. Since it will be subtracted, in the variable display which becomes relief time saving, 1 may be added again to the value of the time saving frequency counter after the subtraction process. Moreover, you may comprise so that "111" which is one more may be set to the number-of-times-savings counter beforehand.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS69A, if it is in the variable probability state, the processing after step 069SGS70 (especially the processing of step 069SGSS71) is not performed, so when the gaming state is a variable probability state ( In this example, even if the variable display is executed during pole/battle rush, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not subtracted. If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation flag is set, the processing after step 069SGSS70 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time-saving number counter is not updated, the relief time-saving number designation command or the relief time-saving number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 at this point, the timing after it has already been controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state B) via the relief time-saving (time-saving state B or time-saving state B The timing is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in ), and the big hit that triggers 900 to be set to the relief time reduction number counter has not occurred. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 069SGS71). Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time-saving number designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 069SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time-saving number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time-saving number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating control to the time reduction state B at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 069 SGS75 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as the EXT data, and issues a command 957FH as a relief time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control for transmission to the CPU 120 is performed (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times) It is checked whether or not (step 069SGS77). Incidentally, whether or not the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 069 SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9601H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction, and transmits a relief time reduction number designation command or a relief time reduction number 2 designation command is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining variable display times until relief time reduction and execute a fan effect or a countdown effect, which will be described later.

Also, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs for the first time It is configured to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command and a relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command, and when the relief time becomes short after the second time, it is configured not to transmit the relief time-saving number designation command and the relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command. good too.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a big win A, the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "2", and when it is determined to be a big win B, the special symbol stop symbol is "3". When it is determined to be a big win C, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be ``7'', and when it is determined to be a loss, the stop design of the special design is determined to be ``-''. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 069SGS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. It is checked whether or not it is set (step 069SGS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the probability variable flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the relief time saving determination flag, and the number of execution times of the variable display during the time saving state if it is set. The time saving number counter is cleared (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set to the relief time reduction number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and when the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed 900 times in the low probability state after the big win game is over. will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled to the time reduction state B.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 069 SGS135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "900" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to be initialized. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start turning on the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying lighting of the right-handed LED 069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a time timer before the opening of the big winning opening for measuring the time (fanfare time) before opening the big winning opening 069SG007A or the second big winning opening 069SG007B. (Step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, sets the time reduction flag B and controls to the time reduction state (step 069SGS171A). . Then, "1100" is set in the time saving frequency counter (step 069SGS172).

Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state B designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 069SGS174). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069 SGS174B). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In addition, although this example shows an example in which the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling to the time reduction state B at the timing of the relief time reduction, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state B at the timing of the relief time saving and to set the relief time saving number counter (set "900"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time-saving counter, "900" is set. ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "900". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS172, it shows a case where 1100 times, which is a value larger than the variable display count (900 times) until relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction count. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, in step 069SGS172, a value equal to or less than "900" may be set in the time saving number counter.

Further, in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of times of shortening of working hours may be set in the number of times of shortening of working hours counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "110", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "1100". good too.

Further, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of time saving by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving determined by the lottery process may be set in the time saving number counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 110 times with a probability of 10% and may be determined to be 1100 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Moreover, if the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, CPU103 will confirm whether the time reduction end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets one of the time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to B) that has been set, and terminates the time saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command for notifying the right-handed LED 069SG031 to be extinguished to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command (a kind of game state designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 069SGS141-S152, it shows the case where the right-handed notification is terminated with the transition to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the time-saving final variation. It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

Moreover, in step 069SGS141, if the time saving end flag is not set (step 069SGS141; No), it will transfer to step 069SGS175.

At step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state change)
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described. 11 to 15 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), when the big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, it is controlled to the probability variable state, and when the big hit A occurs 2, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the jackpot). In addition, although not shown, even when the big hit B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled. Also, even if it is lost, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit will not occur When the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, or (Q) (Q-1) After 110 variable displays in time saving state A, the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low probability / high base state)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the variable probability state is entered again. controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit will not occur When the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, or (Q) (Q-1) After 110 variable displays in time saving state A, the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this example, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but only such a control mode can't For example, comparing the number of times the current number of times of saving time and the number of times of saving time corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variable area (in this example, 110 times), the number of times the number of remaining times of the current time saving number is greater For example, the present time saving state B may be continued as it is.

In addition, in this example, although it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or during the probability changing state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player. The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of 1 special symbol is executed.

(Explanation of play time)
Next, the feature of "idle time" which is the time saving state B (relief time saving state) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18. 11-16, (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing an example of the case where the "free time" is not installed, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing an example of the case where the "free time" is installed. FIGS. 11-17 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of deviation variation in a normal state. Fig. 11-18 shows (E1) and (E2) explanatory diagrams of free time where the fluctuation efficiency is the same as in the normal state, and (F1) to (F4) explanatory diagrams of the free time in this case where the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in the normal state. is. 11-16 to 11-18, for the convenience of explaining the features of the "play time", images for explanation that are different from the effect images explained below will be used for explanation.

First, in the case of a pachinko game machine not equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. state (low probability / low base state)) without being controlled by a big hit (for example, 900 times when the probability of a big hit is about 1/300, about 3 times the denominator of the probability of a big hit). Even if you are caught, you will not be controlled to "play time", that is, to reduce working hours. At this point, since the player has already got into the game about three times as much as the denominator of the probability of a big win, the player continues playing for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is also increasing. However, this normal state (low-probability/low-base state) continues until a big win occurs, requiring further investment, which may significantly reduce the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko machine equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Accurate / low base state)))) without being controlled by a big hit, and if a variable display is performed for a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the denominator of the probability of a big hit), it becomes “play time”, and a specific number of times ( For example, it will be controlled to the time saving state B over a variable display of about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator at maximum, such as 1100 times. At this point, the player has already been hooked about three times as much as the probability of a big win, so the player continues the game for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is quite large. However, by controlling the "play time", that is, the time-saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit is increased, so that the decline in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) to (D), the player continues the game without winning the big win for the period from the end of the big win to the time when the "play time" is set. (“I am addicted”), and during that period, various announcements are being made and continue to be aroused. In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times, for example, when the variable display is performed the first number of times (for example, 105 times) after the end of the big hit (see FIG. 11-17 (A)), the variable display is performed the second number of times ( For example, 213 times) is executed (see FIG. 11-17 (B)), and when the variable display is executed a third time (for example, 506 times) (see FIG. 11-17 (C)), the variable display is When the 4th time (for example, 882 times) is executed (see FIG. 11-17 (D)), at least the production with high expectations for a big hit such as SP reach (for example, SP reach production of "hot heat") is predetermined It is highly likely that it is quite depressing because it has been executed a number of times and all of these SP reach effects continue to miss.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (E1) (E2), even if it is finally controlled to "play time" (time saving state B) after 900 times of variable display, this time saving state B is normal When the variation efficiency is low like the state (low probability/low base state), the number of useless shots increases, which may lead to further additional investment and prolonged play. In addition, since the SP ready-to-win effect is completely removed in the 900th variable display, the player is quite depressed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment has a higher variation efficiency than the normal state (low probability / low base state) Since it is a time-saving state, it is possible to continue playing while suppressing additional investment. In addition, the time-saving control is controlled to a big hit during the period controlled to the time-saving state B by executing the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, etc., a maximum of about 3.8 times the probability of a big hit). Since there is a high probability (for example, about 97%) that the For example, if the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/319.9, the probability of not hitting the jackpot with one variable display is about 99% {(319.9−1)÷319.9=0.996874}, and 1100 rotations The probability of not hitting the jackpot within that time is about 3% (0.996874^1100=0.031937). Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot within 1100 spins is about 97% (1-0.031937=0.968063).

In addition, in "play time", the variable display period of the selected variable pattern is short, so the variable display is more efficient than other time-saving states, so it is possible to efficiently digest the variable display and draw a big hit in a short period of time. In addition, it is an advantageous state in which there is a high possibility that an advantageous big win (for example, big win B, big win C, etc.) will be given to the player by making a big win in the second special game due to the right-handed game. be. In addition, since the advance notice effect and the SP ready-to-win effect, etc., which will be described later, are unlikely to be executed, and there are few opportunities to be aroused by the losing effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the desire to play. In other words, the "play time" of the present embodiment is different from the game state for waiting for the next big hit while enjoying the production, such as the variable probability state and the time saving state A. This is a game state in which priority is given to efficiently digesting and winning the next big hit. Details of the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment will be described below.

(Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when it is controlled to the time saving state A via the jackpot A, the production mode is controlled to "battle rush". FIG. 11-19(A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), the game state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state A), and when the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 110, the production mode is " A second background image 069SG320 representing the scenery of the town in the evening is displayed as the background image of the decorative design in correspondence with the fact that it is "Battle Rush", and "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. An effect mode display 069SG221 made up of characters is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining time-saving display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX= 0 to 110) are displayed, and in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are displayed.

At this time, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013 corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the value of the second reserved memory number is 4. Four second suspension displays 069SG002 are displayed in the second suspension display area 069SG012. In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decoration pattern (For example, an arrow "↓↓↓") is provided in a display area 5SL, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, the time saving remaining display 069SG201, and the right hitting notification image 069SG400 For such, by displaying it on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, the effect image overlaps and the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display On the other hand, by displaying the decoration pattern on the back side (lower layer) than the production image, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the production image from being reduced due to overlapping of the decoration patterns. You may do so.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. It is variably displayed according to the operation (see the small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1)). By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body 32 is entirely or partially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED069SG032 and the second special symbol LED069SG033 The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state A is completed, it is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state) In this case, the first background image 069SG310 representing the scenery of the town in the daytime is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and is executed after being controlled to the low probability/low base state in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. A variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, characters of "game 0 times") corresponding to the variable display count is displayed. At this time, the production mode display 069SG221 at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 0 to 100), the image The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" in the lower right portion of the screen of the display device 5 are erased.

In addition, when it is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state), if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less, the countdown effect described later is executed, and the screen right of the image display device 5 A special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "XXX more times", and a triangular object, XXX=1 to 300) are displayed at the bottom.

(Yu 1100 Battle Rush [Yu Time])
In this embodiment, when it is controlled to the time saving state B via relief time saving, the production mode is controlled to "play 1100 battle rush" (also referred to as "play time"). FIG. 11-19(B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), the game state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state B), and when the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 1100, the production mode is " 1100 Battle Rush”, a third background image 069SG330 representing a nighttime townscape is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed as “Yu 1100 Battle Rush”.・An effect mode display 069SG222 consisting of characters "1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, in correspondence with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low accuracy / high base state, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX=0 to 1100) are displayed, and a right-handed informing image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decoration pattern (For example, an arrow "↓↓↓") is provided in a display area 5SL, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, for the time saving remaining display 069SG201, the display mode (for example, design, font, color, etc.) is common to the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B, so that the cost can be reduced. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), after the 1100th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when controlled to the low probability / low base state, The first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. At this time, the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 0 ~ 1100), the right hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hitting" in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit occurring in the time saving state B, even if the 900th variable display is executed without a big hit in the low probability state, the time saving is performed. It is never controlled to state B. Therefore, after the 110th variable display is completed without occurrence of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state described later, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit occurring in the time saving state B, the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5 . By doing so, after the 1100th variable display is completed without the occurrence of a big hit in the time saving state B, if the 900th variable display is executed without the occurrence of a big hit in the low probability state, the time saving state It is possible to prevent the user from thinking that B is controlling him/her.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), during the period that is controlled to the time saving state B, active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, in the second pending display area 069SG012 Although the form in which the second pending display 069SG002 is displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active display 069SG003 and the second pending display 069SG002 are displayed during the period when the time saving state B is controlled. You may choose not to do so. In addition, in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the active display 069SG003 and the second pending display 069SG002 may be displayed or may not be displayed.

Also, after the 110th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state A ends, when it is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state, for example, characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" are displayed. After that, it may be controlled to the low accuracy/low base state. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when it is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" as described above should not be displayed.

In addition, after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when it is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, the shutter effect performed at the time of transition to the time saving state B ( 11-23(B)) may be performed before controlling to the low accuracy/low base state.

In addition, when the 101st variable display starts when the game state is controlled to the time saving state A, the countdown notification indicating that the number of times of the time saving is remaining is 10 times, while the game state is the time saving state. Even if the 1091st variable display when controlled by B starts, the countdown notification may not be performed, and by doing this, the time saving state B (play time) is about to end You can prevent it from being lost.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when controlled to the probability variable state via the big win B or the big win C, the production mode is controlled to "extreme/battle rush". FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing an example of the effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "extreme/battle rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-20 (A), the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), and when the value of the time saving counter is 11 to 110, the production mode is "extreme・A fourth background image 069SG340 representing a landscape of a wilderness in the daytime is displayed as a decorative design background image corresponding to "Battle Rush". RUSH" is displayed. In addition, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining time-saving display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX= 11 to 110) are displayed, and in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are displayed. In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decoration pattern (For example, an arrow "↓↓↓") is provided in a display area 5SL, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (B), the game state is controlled to a high accuracy/high base state, and when the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 10, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 In the part, the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201 in a mode expanded from the time saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time saving counter is 11 to 110 (in this example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX = 0 to 10 ) is displayed. In addition, the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201 is not limited to the mode in which the time saving remaining display 069SG201 is enlarged, and the display color of the time saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed or an effect display may be added to the time saving remaining display 069SG201. Further, at the timing when the time saving remaining display 069SG201 is switched to the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201, a dedicated sound effect may be reproduced and output from the speaker.

Further, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the remaining time saving display may be displayed in the same manner as the variable probability state. Further, in the time saving state B, stress may not be applied to the player by not performing the emphasized time saving remaining display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(C), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/high base state, when the 110th variable display is executed with the display result being "loss". , the result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. In the result image 069SG500, the characters "Extreme / BATTLE RUSH end" that informs that the pole / battle rush has ended, and the characters "BONUS x 〇 times" indicating the number of hits (〇 is the number of hits) are given. "XXXX pt" (where XXXX is the total number of awarded game balls) indicating the total number of game balls awarded.

It should be noted that the number of big hits included in the result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive big hits based on variable display in a high probability state (so-called number of consecutive games), and the total number of given game balls is the number of consecutive games. It includes the number of prize balls given in the big hit of .

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), after 110 times of variable display when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/high base state, it is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state. , the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the variable display count corresponding to the variable display count executed after being controlled to the low accuracy/low base state in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 A display 069SG202 (in this example, characters of "Game 0") is displayed. At this time, the effect mode display 069SG223 at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the emphasized time reduction remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", X = 0 to 10), The right hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hitting" in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In addition, when the game state is controlled from the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B to the normal state, the left hitting notification performance for instructing the left hitting may be executed based on the completion of the time saving control. In the left-handed notification effect, the left-handed notification image, the characters "left-handed" and the arrow image are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the sound "Please hit left" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. be done.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display when being controlled to the time saving state A is completed, or as shown in FIG. And after the 1100th variable display is completed when it is, or after the 110th variable display is completed when it is controlled to the variable state as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), By displaying the variable display count of the variable display count display 069SG202 as common “0 times” when the control of the low probability / low base state (normal state) is started, the state of the pachinko machine 1 (the previous big hit type, time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variable state, etc.) cannot be easily grasped, and expectations for being controlled to the time saving state B can be enhanced.

In addition, when the control of the low probability / low base state (normal state) is started, as the variable display number displayed in the variable display number display 069SG202, when the control of the time saving state A is completed, "110 times", The number of times of variable display executed in each state may be displayed, such as "1100 times" when the control of the time saving state B is finished, and "110 times" when the control of the variable probability state is finished. By doing so, the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (kind of the previous big hit, time saving state A, time saving state B, whether it was controlled to any of the probability variable state) can be generally confirmed, thereby making it possible to confirm the time saving state B Since it becomes easier to predict the number of times of variable display until the control is executed, it can lead to an improvement in motivation to play.

Also, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, a common song (for example, song A) is fixedly reproduced as BGM, and in the variable probability state, a plurality of songs including song A (for example, songs A to X). Any one of them may be selectable, and the selected music may be replayed.

Also, when the music A flows in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. are emitted in a light emission pattern corresponding to the music A (e.g., a light emission pattern matching the rhyme of the music). can be

In addition, when the music A is played in the time saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. are displayed in a light emission pattern (e.g., a light emission pattern that matches the background image) that is different from when the music A is played in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. It may be made to emit light.
In addition, the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state A and the probability variable state (pattern according to the rhyme of the song) is better than the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B The light emission pattern is emphasized more than (the pattern matched to the background image), and the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B becomes a calm light emission pattern. Note that the light emission pattern to be emphasized includes a pattern with a higher luminance than the calm light emission pattern, a pattern with a short switching interval of the light emission data, a pattern with a short flickering cycle, and the like. By doing so, in the time saving state B, as described in the above flow, the player may be depressed, so the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 is overemphasized. It is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player by calming down the player.

Further, for example, a common background image is displayed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, but in the time saving state B, by making the perspective (visibility) of the background image different from that in the time saving state A, the same background image is displayed. Even if the image is used, it can be understood that it is in a completely different state (a different impression is given).

In addition, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the size of the decoration pattern is also different (for example, the time saving state A: normal, the time saving state B: large), and even if the background image is diverted, the state is completely different. can be understood (to give an impression).

In addition, after execution of the variable-probability rush effect/time-saving rush effect A, a prepaid card prevention display or a gaming machine maker display may be performed. In this case, after execution of the time-saving rush effect B, it is preferable not to display the prepaid card forgetting prevention display and the game machine maker display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent stress from being given to the player by performing the above display when entering the time saving state B without going through the big win.

(variable number of times display, special number of times display)
In the present embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is executed after being controlled to the low probability/low base state. A variable display number display 069SG202 corresponding to the number of variable display times (in this example, characters such as "game XXX times") and a special number display 069SG203 corresponding to the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is reached (in this example , characters such as "Yuu 1100 BATTLE RUSH", characters "XXX more times", triangular objects, etc.). In the present embodiment, the effect in which the special count display is displayed is called a countdown effect.

In this embodiment, it is determined which of the variable display number display and the special number display is displayed according to the value of the relief time reduction number counter. Moreover, the display mode of a special number display can be changed according to the value of a relief time reduction counter. FIG. 11-21 is a diagram showing an example of an effect on the image display device 5 when the variable number of times display or the special number of times display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 301 to 900, the variable display number display 069SG202 (in this example, "Game XXX times” characters, XXX=0 to 699, etc.) are displayed. The number (XXX) of the variable display frequency display 069SG202 is added and displayed each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 31 to 300, a countdown effect is executed, and a special number display 069SG203 in white mode is displayed at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. (In this example, the characters "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", white characters "XXX more times", and white triangular objects, XXX=31 to 300) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 30, the countdown effect is executed, and the special number display 069SG203 (this In the example, the characters "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red characters "XXX more times", and the red triangular object (XXX=30) are enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 3 seconds). As shown in 11-21(D), the image is shifted to the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 and displayed in reduced size. Then, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red mode special number display 069SG203 (in this example, "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH characters "until", red characters "more XXX times", and a red triangular object (XXX=1 to 30) are displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable display when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0, the special number display is not displayed, but not limited to such a form, the relief time reduction number counter value In the variable display when is 0, a special number display may be displayed. For example, in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, after the red mode special number display is displayed, when the variable display in which the relief time reduction number counter value is 0 is executed, the gold mode special The number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, characters such as "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", gold characters of "none more", gold triangular objects, etc.) may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the special number display 069SG203 is displayed, the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The special count display 069SG203 may be displayed while the display count display 069SG202 is displayed, and the addition display of the variable display count display 069SG202 and the subtraction display of the special count display 069SG203 may be performed along with the variable display. In this case, the variable number of times display 069SG202 is displayed in a mode with lower visibility than the display mode of the special number of times display 069SG203 (for example, the variable number of times display 069SG202 is displayed in a smaller size than the special number of times display 069SG203). ) is preferred.

In addition, the trigger for starting the display of the special number display 069SG203 is when the variable display is started when the number of remaining variable display times before being controlled to the time saving state B is a predetermined number (for example, the remaining 50 times). It may be a fixed timing, the timing of winning by executing the display start lottery of special number display 069SG203, the timing of ending the fluctuation pattern of SP reach out, or until it is controlled to the time saving state B The timing may be irregular, such as when it is suggested that the number of remaining variable displays has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 remaining times) by executing a remaining number of times indication effect or the like. Further, when the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is started, the special number of times display 069SG203 may be highlighted by displaying it on the full screen. Also, instead of displaying the special number of times display 069SG203, it is possible to execute a dedicated background effect that switches to a dedicated effect mode (for example, "Extreme heat when reaching").

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 301 to 900, the SP reach variation pattern will be more difficult to determine than before the relief time reduction number counter value is 301 to 900. Switch to the fluctuation pattern table. may By doing so, it is possible to play the game with a variable display that reflects the intention of the player who wants to rush into relief quickly.

In addition, during the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the full-screen display period), execution of various advance notice effects described later may be restricted (for example, not executed, or displayed in an unobtrusive manner). . In addition, when the execution time of the notice effect and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the full screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 is displayed without being highlighted, or a pre-reading notice to be described later is displayed. When the performance execution time and the display period of the special count display 069SG203 (including the full screen display period) overlap, the special count display 069SG203 is displayed when the variable display is started after the end of the look-ahead preview effect. If a predetermined variable display during the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the full screen display period) results in a big hit, the display of the special number display 069SG203 is restricted (for example, not displayed or conspicuous) may be displayed in a form that does not exist).

(Example of production when reaching short relief time)
As described above, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed (when the relief time reduction is reached without hitting once after the RAM is cleared), the pattern is determined in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation A pattern confirmation A designation command with a period of 0.5 seconds is transmitted, and (ii) after a big hit, when a short relief time is reached with 900 variable displays (one big hit, then a short relief time without a big hit) ), a symbol confirmation B designation command is transmitted in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation. In the present embodiment, since the pattern fixed period is different between the case of (i) and the case of (ii), the low probability / high base state after the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation in the low probability / low base state is completed The effect mode of the period (that is, the pattern determination period) until the relief time saving game is started after being controlled to (time saving state B) is different.

Next, (i) an example of an effect when the relief time is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25. In this example, (i) when the relief time is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) deviation".

(Example of production in case of (i))
FIG. 11-22 shows the execution of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be “non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) lost” when the relief time is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed. 11-23 are time charts showing timings, and FIGS. 11-23 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the CPU 103 displays the first special symbol variable display (relief time reduction number counter At the timing of ending the variable display when the value is 1) (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-22), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the design determination A designation command, the design display area of the image display device 5 In 5L, 5C and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols ("146" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols whose display result is "loss" is determined and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, displays the reserved display 069SG001 in the first reserved display area 069SG011. I am letting In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image of the decoration pattern based on the fact that the game state is the normal state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved memory number is 1, and displays the character "0" because the second reserved memory number is 0. ing. Also, a combination of small symbols ("146" in this example) is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display area. In other words, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0) (in FIG. 11-22 At the timing T2 shown), the effect control CPU 120 executes the shutter effect and causes the entire screen of the image display device 5 to display the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-22), the effect of receiving the symbol confirmation A designation command The control CPU 120 fixes and stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 . That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped. In addition, when the variable display ends, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-handed A right-handed informing image 069SG401 larger than the informing image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are faded-in displayed. By doing so, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player continues the left-handed game and loses interest. By fade-in displaying the notification image 069SG401, it is possible to favorably lead to a right-handed game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-22), When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), the production control CPU 120 responds to the production mode becoming "play 1100 battle rush", as a background image of the decorative pattern A third background image 069SG330 is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters “Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH” on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (this In the example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX=1100) are displayed, and the right-handed informing image 069SG400 and the characters “right-handed” are displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display the previously executed combination of decoration symbols (“234” in this example). Also, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before ("234" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display area.

Next, (ii) an example of an effect in the case of reaching a relief time reduction with 900 variable displays after a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-24(A) and 11-25. In this example, (ii) after the big hit, the case where the short relief time is reached by the variable display of 900 times, the case where the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) lost" will be explained.

(Example of production in case of (ii))
Fig. 11-24 shows (A) when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) lost" when the relief time is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit. (B) is a time chart showing a modification of the time-saving rush effect B. FIG. FIGS. 11-25 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

First, the effect configuration in FIGS. 11-25 (A) and (B) is shown in FIGS. 11-23 (A) and (B). Description is omitted because it is the same as the production configuration in the variation pattern of reach or non-reach).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24(A)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 . That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, in front of the shutter image 069SG250 in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed, and the image display device 5 At the center of the screen, a right-handed informing image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed informing image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are faded in. By doing so, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player continues the left-handed game and loses interest. By fade-in displaying the notification image 069SG401, it is possible to favorably lead to a right-handed game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed in the design confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the design confirmation B designation command (in FIG. 11-24 (A) At the timing of T4 shown), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting notification image 069SG401 while displaying the right hitting notification image 069SG400. After the fade-out display, time-saving rush performance B is executed, and a rush image 069SG473 (in this example, an image including the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In the time-saving effect B, the player is notified that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) by displaying a rush image 069SG473 including characters of "play 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush". ing.

In addition, the rush image 069SG473 is the rush image 069SG470 that is displayed in common even when control of the time saving state A and the variable probability state is started, and the minimum size at the lower left of the display screen. and a leisure time image 069SG473B composed of characters "1100" and "play".

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (E), at the timing when the design confirmation period (20 seconds) designated by the design confirmation B designation command has passed (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)) , When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), the production control CPU 120 responds to the production mode becoming "play 1100 battle rush", the background image of the decorative pattern to display the third background image 069SG330. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters “Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH” on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (this In the example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX=1100) are displayed, and the right-handed informing image 069SG400 and the characters “right-handed” are displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display the previously executed combination of decoration symbols (“234” in this example). In addition, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before ("234" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display area.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25, the design confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the design confirmation B specification command has passed and the game state is controlled to the time saving state B. , the production mode is set to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. Seconds) has passed and the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, and at a timing different from the timing, the production mode may be changed to “Yu 1100 Battle Rush” and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed. For example, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, (A) the timing at which the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B is started At the timing, the effect mode may change to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed. Also, the timing at which 0.5 seconds have elapsed (in this example, the design determination period specified by the design determination A designation command) has elapsed in the design determination period (20 seconds) specified by the design determination B designation command. (In this example, at the timing of T4), without executing the time-saving rush effect B (Fig. 11-25 (D)), the effect mode becomes "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. You may do so.

Also, when displaying the shutter image 069SG250 in FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-25 (B), an image that suggests that it is controlled to the time-saving state B (for example, characters such as “play”) may be displayed. In this way, when the shutter image 069SG250 is commonly displayed at the timing when the time saving state B is controlled and the timing other than when the time saving state B is controlled (for example, the timing when the production mode is switched) , easier to distinguish.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25, (i) when the relief time is reached after clearing the RAM, and (ii) after the big hit, relief is performed by variable display 900 times. Although an example of a form in which the production mode differs depending on when the time is reached, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production of a common mode between the time of (i) and the time of (ii) may be executed. That is, the time reduction rush production B may be executed at the time (i) and the time (ii), or the time reduction rush production B may be executed at the time (i) and the time (ii). may not be executed. Further, the time-saving rush performance B may be executed in different modes between the time of (i) and the time of (ii).

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25, the form of executing the time-saving rush production B in the design determination period (20 seconds) specified by the design determination B designation command was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, after being controlled to the time saving state B, the time saving rush performance B may be started. Hereinafter, modified examples of execution timing of each effect when the relief time is reached will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-24(B), 11-26, and 11-27.

FIG. 11-24(B) is a time chart as a modified example showing the execution timing of each effect when the relief time reduction is reached. FIG. 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the number of pending memories is 0 when the time saving is reached.

First, the effect configuration in FIG. 11-26(A) is the same as the effect configuration shown in FIG. 11-25(A), so the description is omitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0) (FIG. 11-24 ( At the timing of T2 shown in B), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in which the display result is "lost". , in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of the small symbols whose display result is "loss" is confirmed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , fade-in display is performed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the notification of hitting to the right is started.

Then, at the timing (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the time saving state B control is started, Although the variable display can be started, if the number of pending memories is 0, the display of the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in FIG. 11-26(D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (E), the first variable display starts based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second start winning (may be the first starting winning) has occurred. 11-24(B)), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state of being displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F), the effect control CPU 120, after the first variable display is completed, at the timing when the second variable display is started (in FIG. 11-24 (B) At the timing T6 shown), the shutter effect is ended, and after the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 are hidden, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving rush effect B is started.

In addition, the time-saving rush production B is started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time-saving state B (for example, during the first variable display or at the start of the second and subsequent variable displays). good. Also, if the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms), such as when an ultra-shortened variation pattern is determined as the variable display variation pattern, the variable display may be performed continuously over multiple times of variable display. In this case, it is preferable that the image of the time-saving rush effect B is continuously displayed without depending on the variable display of the decoration pattern. In addition, when the variable display of the big hit is started during the execution period of the time-saving rush performance B, the time-saving rush performance B being executed is interrupted or ended, and the performance (for example, SP reach performance etc.) according to the variation pattern is performed. Alternatively, the big hit notification performance may be executed without performing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern.

Next, FIG. 11-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect operation when the number of pending memories is 1 or more when reaching the relief time saving.

11-27(A) to (C) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 11-26(A) to (C), so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in which the display result is "lost". , in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of the small symbols whose display result is "loss" is determined and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , fade-in display is performed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the notification of hitting to the right is started.

Here, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)) , Since the control of the time saving state B is started and the first variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 5, the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen. In addition, the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the near side of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-27(E), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the second variable display is started after the first variable display ends, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed. and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 are hidden, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed, and the time-saving rush effect B is started.

In this way, the effect control CPU120, when the variable display of the relief time-saving reach fluctuation is completed, based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, lights the right-handed LED069SG031, to the display screen of the image display device 5 In order to display the right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters “Right-handed” and start the right-handed notification, the control of the time saving state B is not started after the control of the time saving state B is started. Even when the shutter performance indicating the start or the time-saving rush performance B is not started, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that it is controlled to the time-saving state B.例文帳に追加

Further, in the above embodiment, when the time saving is reached after clearing the RAM, 0.5 seconds is set as the pattern confirmation period, and after the big hit, when the time saving is reached with the variable display of 900 times, the pattern confirmation period is reached. 20 seconds is set as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common pattern fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set when the relief time is reached. In addition, even in this case, the time-saving state B is controlled by executing the right-handed notification and the time-saving rush effect B after the variable display is started after the control of the time-saving state B is started. To prevent a player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing it.

In the above-described embodiment, when reaching the relief time saving after clearing the RAM, at the timing when the pattern confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern confirmation A designation command has passed, the shutter effect is finished, and the shutter image This shows an example of ending the display of 069SG250 and displaying the background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush. Here, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation A designation command, for example, if the symbol confirmation A designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 is missed, or due to the symbol confirmation A designation command being garbled. , If the received command could not be recognized as the pattern confirmation A designation command, then (A) the timing of receiving the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and (B) 1 after being controlled to the time saving state B At the timing of receiving a command (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variation pattern designation command, etc.) corresponding to the start of the variable display for the first time, the shutter It is also possible to end the effect, end the display of the shutter image 069SG250, and display the background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush. It should be noted that at the timing of receiving another command (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern confirmation designation command, etc.) corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B, the shutter effect is ended and the shutter The display of the image 069SG250 may be ended and the background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush may be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the big hit, 0.5 seconds out of the pattern confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B specification command has passed when the relief time is reached with the variable display of 900 times. At this timing, the shutter effect is finished, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is finished, and the time-saving rush effect is executed. Here, if the effect control CPU 120 could not normally receive the symbol confirmation B designation command, for example, if the symbol confirmation B designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 was missed, or if the symbol confirmation B designation command was garbled. , If the received command could not be recognized as the design confirmation B designation command, then (A) the timing of receiving the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and (B) 1 after being controlled to the time saving state B At the timing of receiving a command (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variation pattern designation command, etc.) corresponding to the start of the variable display for the first time, the shutter At the same time as ending the production and ending the display of the shutter image 069SG250, the time saving rush production B may be executed. It should be noted that at the timing of receiving another command (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern confirmation designation command, etc.) corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B, the shutter effect is ended and the shutter You may make it complete|finish the display of image 069SG250, and to perform time saving rush production|presentation B. FIG.

In addition, in Figures 11-22 to 11-25, the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened Each effect executed when it is determined to be non-reach B or non-reach B) lost" was explained, but although not shown, the variation pattern was determined to be "SP reach A lost or SP reach B lost" When, an SP reach effect corresponding to the SP reach type (for example, bowling effect for SP reach A, battle effect for SP reach B) is executed, and a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character in the bowling effect or battle effect. After the image to be displayed is displayed and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, the shutter performance is started, and the time reduction rush performance B may be started in the pattern fixing period after the shutter performance is finished.

In addition, when the variable display (relief time-saving arrival fluctuation) in which the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 is a big hit, the following (1) to (3) may be performed.

(1) If the big hit variation pattern “SP reach B (battle SP)” is determined in the variable display where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, a shutter effect is performed at the start of the variable display (for example, 11-23 (B)), for example, the shutter effect is completed at the timing of developing into the SP reach effect B (refer to the timing of FIG. 13-11 (A2)), then the SP reach effect B is executed, and the big hit may be notified.

(2) If the variation pattern for the big hit “SP Reach B (Battle SP)” is determined in the variable display where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the special number display remains “1” and the shutter effect is not performed. It is also possible to execute a winning performance such that the SP ready-to-win performance B is executed at the beginning of the game.

(3) When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, a special big hit variation pattern (for example, shutter closed→shutter open with decorative patterns aligned→big hit) may be provided.

In addition, the execution of the look-ahead performance described later when the value of the relief time-saving counter reaches a specific number of times remaining to 0, and the execution of the look-ahead performance in the variable display when the relief time-saving number counter value is 0 are restricted. is preferred.

(Example of customer waiting screen)
In this embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demonstration display designation command designating that the customer is in a customer waiting state, a customer waiting demonstration production is executed in which a demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. . FIG. 11-28(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a customer waiting state screen.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), this demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A representing a teammate character, the words "demonstration video", and an announcement image 069SG700a (in this example, a triangular object with "play"). Image with the words "time loaded") and is included. Also, if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 includes the various images described above (friend characters, “demo video” characters, etc.), as well as a special number display 069SG203 (this In the example, a special number display in white mode is further included.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player during the customer waiting state that the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is small (in this example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less). can be used to facilitate operations.

(Modified example of customer waiting screen)
In the example of FIG. 11-28 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 shows an example in which the special number display 069SG203 is included, but not limited to such a form , Regardless of the value of the relief time-saving counter, the special number display 069SG203 is not included in the demo image 069SG700 in both cases where the value of the relief time-saving counter is 301 or more and 300 or less. good too.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(B), when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, the image display device 5 displays a demonstration image 069SG700. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A representing a teammate character, the characters "demonstration video", and an announcement image 069SG700a (in this example, an image in which the characters "equipped with play time" are displayed on a triangular object). ) is included, but the special number display is not included regardless of the value of the relief time reduction counter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (C), at the timing when a new start winning occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, and the screen right of the image display device 5 A special number display 069SG203 is displayed at the bottom.

According to such a configuration, by not notifying the player of the number of remaining variable display times until the time-saving relief is reached during the customer waiting state, only gaming machines with a small number of remaining variable display times until the time-saving relief are selected. It is possible to prevent this, and suppress the occurrence of excessive bias in the operation of the game machine.

Regardless of whether or not RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display count display and the special count display may be hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the power is turned on. .

For example, when the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on, when the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on is 301 or more and when it is 300 or less, the predetermined number of times is variable. By hiding the display of the variable display count and the display of the special count until is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's play for the sole purpose of saving time. Also, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display of the predetermined number of times is displayed both when the value of the counter for reducing the number of times of relief at power failure is 301 or more and when it is 300 or less. By hiding the display of the variable display count and the display of the special count until execution, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game.

According to such a configuration, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on when the store is opened, the player who wants to save time can refer to the final variable display count at the time of power failure on the previous day. By doing so, it is possible to suppress playing a game by selecting a gaming machine with a small number of remaining variable display counts until the relief time reduction is reached. In addition, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on when the store is opened, a player aiming to save time can save time by referring to the final variable display count at the time of power failure on the previous day. It is also possible to prevent players from avoiding playing a game on a gaming machine with a large number of remaining variable display counts until reaching .

In addition, not limited to the above form, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes a specific value, even when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is not executed after the power is turned on, the variable display number display and A special count display may be displayed.

For example, when the RAM clearing process is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on is a specific value (for example, 20 or less) less than the value corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, 50) Alternatively, the display of the special number of times may be displayed during the customer waiting state after the power is turned on or when the variable display of the special symbols is being executed. In addition, when the RAM clear processing is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the time saving counter at the time of power on is not a specific value, but the number of times of saving time is displayed by the variable display executed after the power is turned on. When the value of the counter becomes a specific value (for example, 20 or less), even if the value of the relief time reduction counter does not correspond to the predetermined number of times, the special number of times display is displayed. good.

(Characteristic part 069SG modification 1)
Next, the characteristic part 069SG modified example 1 will be described. FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to transition to the customer waiting screen as the characteristic part 069SG modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the production operation example regarding the shift to the customer waiting screen as the first modified example of the characteristic part 069SG.

First, an example of the production operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. When a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms) has passed without starting a new variable display after stopping, the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and displays the image. A demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the device 5 to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 11-29 (A2)). After that, when the start winning is generated, the demonstration image 069SG700 is hidden and variable display is started (see FIG. 11-29 (A3)).

Next, an example of the production operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after reaching the relief time reduction will be described. As shown in FIG. When the number of pending memories is 0, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right hitting LED 069 SG 031 based on the reception of the right hitting LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, and the image display device 5 A right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the lower right part of the screen, and a right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. is faded-in displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started. In addition, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed, the control of the time saving state B is started (see FIG. 11-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms, etc.) has passed without starting a new variable display from when the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation has stopped, the production control CPU 120 is a customer waiting demonstration Even if the display designation command is received, the display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 is maintained without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect (FIG. 11-29). (See B3)).

After that, when the starting winning prize occurs, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning prize (may be the first starting winning prize) has occurred. At this timing, the shutter performance is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Note that the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right hitting notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the rush image 069SG473 is displayed to start the time-saving rush effect B (see FIG. 11-29(B5)).

Next, to explain an example of the production operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right-handed notification, as shown in FIG. When stopped, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more (for example, 1), the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on receiving the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display. Then, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, the right hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hitting" are displayed, and at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a right hitting notification image larger than the right hitting notification image 069SG400 is displayed. The image 069SG401 and the characters "Right-handed" are faded in before the shutter image 069SG250, and the right-handed notification is started. In addition, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the design confirmation A specification command has passed, the control of the time saving state B is started, and the first reservation storage is digested and the first variable display is performed. is started, the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . The state in which the right-hand shot notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (see FIG. 11-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first reservation memory becomes 0, the state where the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (see FIG. 11-29 (C3 )reference).

Then, a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms) has passed without starting a new variable display since the variable display of the pattern stopped in the first variable display after the control of the time saving state B was started. When the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration display specifying command, the demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed without executing the customer waiting demonstration production. The state of displaying the shutter image 069SG250 on the front side is maintained (see FIG. 11-29 (C4)).

After that, when the starting winning prize occurs, the effect control CPU 120 starts the second variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning prize (may be the first starting winning prize) has occurred. At this timing, the shutter effect is finished, and after hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed to start the time-saving rush effect B (Fig. 11-29 (C5) reference).

Thus, in the characteristic part 069SG modification 1, the production control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demonstration production during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation to the end of the time reduction rush production B. By restricting and executing the right-handed notification with priority, the display of the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the right-handed notification image 069SG400, does not disappear. 29 (A2), by displaying the demo image 069SG700, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time-saving state B is being controlled.

In addition, in this modification, in the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation to the end of the time-saving rush effect B, the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is restricted and the right-handed notification is preferentially executed. , the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation to the end of the time-saving rush effect B, the CPU 103 issues a customer waiting demonstration display designation command. By not transmitting, the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect may be restricted.

Next, still another modified example of the production operation example regarding the shift to the customer waiting screen when reaching the relief time saving will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of the symbols in the relief time reduction reaching variation that has reached the relief time reduction is stopped, if the number of pending memories is 0, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display Based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response, the right-handed LED 069SG031 is lit, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. A right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fade-in to the front side of the decoration pattern, and the right-handed notification is started. do. In addition, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed, the control of the time saving state B is started (see FIG. 11-30 (D2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms) has passed without starting a new variable display after the variable display of the pattern in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation is stopped and controlled to the time reduction state B, production control Upon receipt of the customer-waiting demonstration display designation command, the CPU 120 displays the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer-waiting demonstration effect, and at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, hits right. The notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right shot" are displayed (see FIG. 11-30 (D3)).

After that, when the starting winning prize occurs, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning prize (may be the first starting winning prize) has occurred. At this timing, the shutter performance is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Note that the right-hand shot notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-30 (D4)).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D3), when the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the player touches the touch ring of the batting operation handle 30. At this timing, the demonstration image 069SG700 is hidden and the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" shown in FIG. 11-30 (D2) are displayed, and then the first variable display The shutter effect may be started at the timing when is started.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right hitting notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed to start the time-saving rush performance B (see FIG. 11-30 (D5)).

In this way, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed and the customer waiting demo effect may be executed during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation to the end of the time-saving rush effect B, but the demo image 069SG700 At the same time, the hitting to the right notification image 069SG400 and the characters "hitting to the right" may be displayed to notify the hitting to the right. In this way, the control for displaying the demonstration image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demonstration effect is common to the normal state, thereby reducing the processing load. By displaying the characters "Right-handed" in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game.

Further, for example, the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400, is displayed in an overlapping manner on the front side of the demo image 069SG700. You may make it

(Characteristic part 069SG modification 2)
Next, characteristic portion 069SG modified example 2 will be described. FIG. 11-31 is a flow chart showing a game control timer interrupt process as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 11-32 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 11-33 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 11-34 is a flow chart showing the display processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14, the lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 in the special symbol stop processing, and the right-handed LED lighting notification command to the production control board 12, right Although the form of transmitting the hitting LED extinguishing notification command is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of turning on and off these right hitting lamps 069SG132, and the right hitting LED to the effect control board 12 The process of transmitting the lighting notification command/right-handed LED extinguishing notification command may be executed outside the special symbol stop process. In addition, the subtraction of the value of the relief time reduction counter is executed in the special symbol normal process, and the relief time reduction determination flag is turned on when the relief time reduction is reached. is executed in the special symbol stop processing to turn on and off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 without using the relief time reduction determination flag, and send the right-handed LED lighting notification command and right-handed LED extinguishing notification command to the production control board 12 You can do it.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 as the characteristic portion 069SG modification 2, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 turns on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24). And setting processing, display processing (step 069SGS24A) including transmission processing of right-handed LED lighting notification command and right-handed LED extinguishing notification command to production control board 12, and execution of normal symbol process processing (step S26) A display control process (step 069SGS26A) for turning on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 according to the setting process performed later in the display process may be executed.

In the characteristic part 069SG modification 2, in order to execute the above-described display processing (step 069SGS24A) and display control processing (step 069SGS26A), the CPU 103 executes special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33. do.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33, first, when the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 is similar to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14. , step 069SGS131 to step 069SGS135 are executed. Then, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS138 and step 069SGS139 without starting the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and transmitting the right-handed LED lighting notification command, and then changes the state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B described later. The memory is cleared (step 069SGS139a), the process of step 069SGS140 is executed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103, after executing the processing of steps 069SGS131 to step 069SGS133, specifies the state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B at that time, and these time saving flag A and the time saving The state of flag B is updated and stored (step 069 SGS160). Also, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the probability variation flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS174E, if the probability variation flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is already 0 (Step 069SGS162).

If the value of the relief time-saving number counter is already 0, that is, if it is already in the time-saving state B (step 069SGS162; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS174E, and if the value of the relief time-saving number counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No ) decrements the value of the relief time reduction number counter by 1 (step 069SGS163), and determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after decrementing the value by 1 is 0 (step 069SGS164).

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then terminates the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the right-handed LED extinguishing notification command. After executing the processing of step 069SGS152 without executing transmission, the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS172 to step 069SGS174, and then starts lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the right-handed LED start notification command Information indicating that the number of variable display times has reached 1100 without the variable display result becoming a big hit is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like. A specific number (for example, 4) is set in a specific number of times reaching information output frequency counter indicating the number of times that the specific number of times reaching information is output, and a specific number of times reaching information output period timer indicating the output period of the specific number of times reaching information is set. Go to 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In the information output process (step S23) at the time of the next interruption, the CPU 103 sets the output of the specific number of times reaching information over the period set in the specific number of times reaching information output period timer to the specific number of times reaching information output counter. It should be executed the specified number of times.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 turns on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and transmits a right-handed LED lighting notification command/right-handed LED extinguishing notification command in the display processing (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interruption. After setting the shift flag, the process of step 069 SGS175 is executed to end the special symbol stop process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-34, in the display process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the transition flag is set, that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process in which the variable display result is lost at the time of the previous interruption has been executed. It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS181). If the transition flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process is terminated, and if the transition flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the transition flag is cleared (step 069SGS182) and stored The state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B being set is compared with the current state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B (step 069 SGS183), and the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B changes to the on state (set state) It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS184).

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the ON state, that is, if it is newly controlled to the time saving state A or the time saving state B (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right striking lamp 069SG132 and the time saving lamp 069SG134 While performing the lighting setting, the right hitting LED lighting notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the display processing is terminated (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

Also, if the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the ON state (step 069SGS184; No), whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the OFF state (cleared state) is determined (step 069SGS187). If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the off state (step 069 SGS187; N), the display process is terminated, and if the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the off state, that is, newly When it is controlled from the time saving state A or the time saving state B to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right hitting LED extinguishing notification command to the production control board 12 while performing the extinguishing setting of the right hitting lamp 069SG132 and the working hour saving lamp 069SG134 is transmitted, and the display processing ends (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 may turn on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting of step 069SGS185 or the lighting setting of step 069SGS188.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 and the characters "right hitting" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving the right hitting LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103, The display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 and the characters "Right-handed" in the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 may be ended in response to receiving the right-handed LED turn-off notification command from the CPU 103 .

(Characteristic part 069SG modification 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, by displaying the special number of times display on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is reached Although it was a production configuration that suggests that it is decreasing, it is not limited to such a form, it is a production different from the special number display, and the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is reduced You may perform the relief time-saving suggestion production to suggest.

11-35(A) and (B) are the same as those for the variable display count display and special count display (white mode) shown in FIGS. 11-21(A) and (B). Therefore, the description is omitted. 11-35 (C) and (D) production configuration other than the relief time-saving suggestion production is the same as the production configuration for the special number of times display (red mode) shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), Description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 11 to 30, when the first step in the relief time reduction suggestion production is executed, the first suggestion image (in this example, The first suggestion image 069SG800A) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of relief time reduction covering the upper quarter area of the background image is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestive image is an image that has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the first suggestive image is superimposed appears to be lowered from the player's perspective. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestive image 069SG800A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (D), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 10, when the second step in the relief time reduction suggestion production is executed, the second suggestion image (this example Then, the second suggestion image 069SG800B related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of relief time reduction covering the upper half area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestive image is an image that has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the second suggestive image is superimposed appears to be lowered from the player's perspective. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestive image 069SG800B.

In the present embodiment, the background image including the suggestive image (first suggestive image, second suggestive image) by the relief time-saving suggestive effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image even when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Is displayed. In this way, by varying the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the value of the relief time-saving number counter regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the relief time-saving It is possible to suggest that the number of remaining variable display times until the arrival is small, and to improve interest.

In this example, as an image that changes the interface image, an example of displaying a suggestive image (first suggestive image, second suggestive image) related to the shutter image at the time of relief time reduction is superimposed on the background image. You may superimpose-display the image unrelated to the shutter image at the time of relief time saving arrival|attainment not only in such a form but a background image. For example, an effect image with a different display area and display color may be superimposed according to the value of the relief time-saving counter, and when the value of the relief time-saving counter is 21 or more, the display area of the effect image is the first. area (for example, 25% of the screen) and the display color is blue, but when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image is a second area wider than the first area (for example, the screen 50%) and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various productions)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-36 to 11-50. 11-36 are diagrams for explaining the contents of various effects. FIG. 11-37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. FIG. 11-38 is also a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pending change notice. FIG. 11-40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the symbol chance eye notice. FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the effect display notice. 11-42, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing pre-reading notice type determination tables. 11-43, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the pre-reading announcement effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11-44 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. FIG. 11-45 is a flow chart showing an example of an effect process during variable display. 11-46, (A) is a reach announcement execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button announcement effect pattern determination tables. 11-47, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing character announcement pattern determination tables. 11-48, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body motion pattern determination tables. 11-49, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the movable body announcement pattern determination table. 11-50, (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining the characteristics of each game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-36, the effect control CPU 120 provides a countdown notice and a pending change notice as a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). , the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice can be executed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a movable body announcement, a character announcement, a ready-to-win announcement, and a button announcement as announcement effects suggesting that a big hit will be controlled in the variable display.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has a hit/fail button effect and a movable body effect as a decision effect for informing whether or not the variable display based on the super reach big hit variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is controlled to the big hit game state. and are executable.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, after the end of the variable display part in which the variable display of the decoration pattern in the variable display based on the super reach big hit variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is executed, is scheduled to be given in the big hit game state. A post-effect can be executed in a post-effect part that notifies the number of balls in a identifiable manner.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts control of each game state by displaying a state start display when control of any of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B as a special state is started. It is possible to execute a rush effect to notify.

(Look-ahead notice effect)
Next, the look-ahead preview effect will be described. In the present embodiment, in the starting prize determination process of step S101 in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of the starting prize, stores hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and executes processing for updating the hold storage number. . When a start-up win occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information, and the display result and variation pattern are determined based on the extracted random number value. Prefetch determination processing is executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, an effect control command for designating the determination results such as the generation of start winning, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination is transmitted to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加

The effect control CPU 120 is based on the information received from the main board 11 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 in the effect control process process of FIG. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect that suggests being controlled, and if execution is decided, the type of pre-reading notice effect to be executed (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "symbol chance eye notice" , "effect display notice" and production patterns of various notices).

In the present embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined on the condition that the number of pending memories is "4". It may be determinable. Also, the type of pre-reading notice effect to be executed is exemplified as one of the countdown notice, pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, multiple notices may be executed simultaneously.

"Countdown notice" starts the variable display of the reserved memory that is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect until the variable display of the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as target reservation) starts. It is an effect of executing a countdown such as "3"→"2"→"1"→"0" every time.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the countdown notice is any one of a pattern that ends the countdown at "3", a pattern that ends at "2", a pattern that ends at "1", and a pattern that ends at "0". one pattern is determined. Expectations are higher in the order of patterns ending with "3", patterns ending with "2", patterns ending with "1", and patterns ending with "0" (Expectation: ending with "3" < " 2"<ends with '1'<ends with '0').

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A), when a start winning prize is generated, a countdown notice is executed and a pattern ending with "0" is determined. -37 (B)), when the next variable display is started, the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37 (C)), and the variable The display ends (see FIG. 11-37(D)). Next, when the next variable display is started, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37 (E)), and the variable The display ends (see FIG. 11-37(F)).

Next, when the next variable display is started, a character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and a countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38(G)), The variable display ends (see FIG. 11-38(H)). Next, when the next variable display, that is, the target hold variable display (for example, the super reach variation pattern) is started, the character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG414 indicating "0" are displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 11-38(I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not shown, when the pattern of "3" is determined, the countdown notice is given when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed in FIG. 11-37(C). When the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed in FIG. If the pattern of "1" is determined, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed in FIG. 11-38(G).

Moreover, the production pattern of the countdown is arbitrary, and five or more production patterns may be set. Also, the countdown may be started from a number other than "3". Alternatively, it may be counted up such as "0"→"1"→"2"→"3".

The "suspension change notice" changes the display color of the hold display of the target hold until the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) targeted for the look-ahead notice effect is notified of whether or not a big hit will be achieved. It is a performance.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the pending change notice is a pattern where the display color of the pending display finally becomes "blue", "green", "red", and "golden". , and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, the change mode of the display color of the hold display (for example, at the time of starting winning, at the time of hold memory consumption, variable display period of target hold, etc.) , If "red" is determined, whether to change to "red" from the beginning or to change in stages such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be arbitrarily decided. . Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (A), when the execution of the hold change notice and the pattern of "red" are determined with the occurrence of the start winning, the target hold that is the target of the hold change notice is held After the display is displayed in white, the variable display ends. Next, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the pending target changes to "blue" (see FIG. 11-39(B)), and the variable display is finished. Next, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the pending target changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 11-39(C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the target pending variable display (for example, super reach variation pattern) is started.

Incidentally, the number of effect patterns of the pending change notice is arbitrary, and may have five or more patterns. Further, pending changes are not limited to changing colors as described above, and may be changed to characters, items, and the like.

"Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is until the variable display of the reserved memory (target hold) that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is started. It is an effect that is stopped and displayed at "combination of even numbered symbols" or "combination of odd numbered symbols".

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice is a pattern in which the winning symbols are "combination of even numbered symbols" (for example, "264" etc.) and a pattern in which the winning symbols are "combination of odd numbered symbols" (for example). For example, there is a pattern that is stopped at ``135'', etc.), and based on the result of the variable display, it is determined whether the missing symbols are a combination of even-numbered symbols or a combination of odd-numbered symbols. Further, one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations such as "combination of even numbered symbols" and "combination of odd numbered symbols" may be determined. In addition, the display color of the pedestal display portion 069SG052 (to be described later) that constitutes the decorative pattern includes a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, and a "golden" pattern. A pattern is determined. The degree of expectation is higher for "combination of odd-numbered symbols" than "combination of even-numbered symbols". In addition, the pedestal display part becomes higher in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (A), when the execution of the symbol chance eye notice and the effect pattern are determined with the occurrence of the start winning, the variable display ends, and the symbol is displayed from the next variable display. Chance notice is started.

When the winning pattern is determined to be "a combination of even-numbered symbols" and the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is determined to have a pattern of "blue", the missing symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of even-numbered symbols of "246", and the pedestal is displayed. The part 069SG052 is displayed in "blue" (see FIGS. 11-40 (B1) and (B2)). On the other hand, when the winning pattern is "combination of odd numbered patterns" and the pedestal display part 069SG052 is determined to be "red", the odd numbered pattern of "375" is stopped and displayed, and the pedestal display part is stopped. 069SG052 is displayed in "red" (see FIGS. 11-40 (C1) and (C2)).

In the present embodiment, the decorative patterns are a number display portion 069SG051 consisting of numbers "1" to "9" and a pedestal display portion displayed on a display layer (back side) lower than the number display portion 069SG051. 069SG052. The pedestal display portion 069SG052 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to surround the numbers “1” to “9” displayed on the number display portion 069SG051, and is displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, white). , which is a display mode common to all numbers (“1” to “9”).

The number of effect patterns for the symbol chance eye notice is arbitrary, and the number of symbol combinations, the display color of the pedestal display portion 069SG052, and the like may have five or more patterns. A character image, a decoration image, or the like may be displayed on the pedestal display portion 069SG052. Also, for example, individual character images corresponding to each number (“1” to “9”) may be displayed.

"Effect display notice" is until the variable display of the pending memory (target pending) that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect starts, and when the variable display of the pending memory that is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect starts , the effect image is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 .

In the present embodiment, the effects pattern of the effect display notice includes a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, and a "golden" pattern of the effect image. A pattern is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, the change mode of the display color of the effect image (for example, when "red" is determined, it is changed to "red" from the beginning, or "blue" → " It is possible to arbitrarily decide whether to change stepwise from "green" to "red"). Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (A), when the execution of the effect display notice and the "red" pattern are determined with the occurrence of the start winning, the variable display ends (FIG. 11-41 ( B)), after the next variable display is started (see FIG. 11-41(C)), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 A “blue” effect image 069SG420 is displayed (see FIG. 11-41(D)). Next, when the next variable display is started, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41 (E)), and when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable body on the display screen of the image display device 5 32, the "red" effect image 069SG420 is displayed (see FIG. 11-41(F)). Then, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden when the next variable display, that is, the target pending variable display (for example, super reach variation pattern) is started (see FIG. 11-41(G)).

The effect display notice may have any number of production patterns, and may have five or more production patterns. Also, the size of the effect image 069SG420 may be varied according to the degree of expectation. Also, the effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display, but also at the start of the variable display or during other periods.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161, based on the information received from the main board 11, to control the holding memory stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 to the jackpot game state. Prefetching notice effect type determination tables A to D used for determining whether or not to execute the suggested prefetching notice effect and the type of prefetching notice effect to be executed when execution is decided will be described. 11-42, (A) is the notice effect type determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the notice effect type determination table B used in the variable probability state, and (C) is the notice effect used in the time saving state A The type determination table C, (D) is the notice effect type determination table D used in the time saving state B. In the following, random numbers from 0 to 99 are used as random numbers for determining various types of effects.

As shown in FIG. 11-42(A), in the advance notice effect type determination table A used when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 "non-execution" Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance notice" are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "suspension change notice" is assigned. , 15 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance notice", and 15 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (B), in the advance notice effect type determination table B used when the game state is the probability variable state, when the variable display result is "big hit", 20 "non-execution" Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance notice" are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "suspension change notice" is assigned. , 15 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance notice", and 15 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (C), in the notice effect type determination table C used when the game state is the time saving state A, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 40 pieces are set to "non-execution". is assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice" Twenty decision values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "loss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", and "symbol chance number 10 determination values are assigned to "notice", and 10 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), in the notice effect type determination table D used when the game state is the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 70 pieces in "non-execution" are assigned, and 30 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when the variable display result is "loss", the proportion of "non-execution" increases in the order of the normal state, the probability variable state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. That is, it is most likely to be executed in the probability variable state, and is not executed in the time saving state B (most difficult to be executed). The "countdown notice" is a notice that is not executed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, and the "suspended change notice" and "effect display notice" are notices that are not executed in the time saving state B.

Here, the determination of the pre-reading notice effect type is compared in three game states (probability variable state, time saving state A, time saving state B) in which time saving control is executed.

First, when the variable display result is "big hit", the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect is 80% in the probability variable state, 60% in the time saving state A, and 30% in the time saving state B, and the variable display result is "miss". The number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined in the case is 40% in the variable probability state, 30% in the time saving state A, and 0% in the time saving state B (non-execution).

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the variable state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. , and the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is “miss” is “4 types” in the variable state, “3 types” in the time saving state A, and “0 types” in the time saving state B (non- execution)”.

Thus, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", only the "symbol chance eye notice" can be executed, and no other look-ahead notice effects are executed. , and when the variable display result is "missing", the pre-reading foretelling effect is not executed. That is, in the time saving state B, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect is lower than that in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and the number of determinable effect types is small.

Also, in the time-saving state B, it is possible to execute a "symbol chance eye notice" as a look-ahead notice effect. This is because in the time saving state B, a variation pattern with a short variable display time (for example, ultra-shortened non-reach) is likely to be determined, and the time is shorter when executing the look-ahead effect in the variable display of 1. For example, , It is easy to miss color changes in small pending display areas such as "pending change notice". In addition, although the "countdown notice" is executed with a plurality of variable displays, the change in the count is difficult to notice because the count is displayed for a short period in one variable display. On the other hand, the "pattern chance eye notice" is executed in a plurality of variable displays, and the change in the display color of the decorative pattern and the pedestal can be suitably shown when the decorative pattern is stopped, so the time saving state B It can be said that it is a look-ahead forewarning effect suitable for execution in .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state B, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B If the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect when the variable display result is "miss" is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect when the variable display result is "miss" in the probability variable state or time saving state A, time saving state B In the case where the variable display result is "missing", the pre-reading announcement effect may be executed. In addition, if the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "missing" is less than the variable probability state or time saving state A, two or more types of pre-reading notice effects can be executed in time saving state B. may be

Next, the effect pattern determination tables A to F used when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect decided to be executed will be described. 11-43, (A) is the effect pattern determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the effect pattern determination table B used in the variable probability state, (C) is the effect pattern determination table used in the time saving state A C, (D) are the effect pattern determination table D used in the time saving state B, (E) is the effect pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) is the effect pattern determination table F used in the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 11-43(A), when the game state is the normal state, an effect pattern determination table commonly used when determining the effect patterns of the pending change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice. In A, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(B), when the game state is the variable probability state, the production pattern determination table commonly used when determining the production pattern of the pending change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice In B, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (C), when the game state is the time saving state A, the effect pattern determination commonly used when determining the effect pattern of the pending change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice In Table C, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "red". decision values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". A judgment value is assigned.

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (D), in the effect pattern determination table D used when determining the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is "big hit". , 90 determination values are assigned to "red" and 10 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", the "symbol chance eye notice" is not executed, so no judgment value is assigned to any effect pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-43(E), when the game state is the normal state, the effect pattern determination table E used for determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice shows that the variable display result is "big win". , then patterns ending in "3" are assigned five decision values, patterns ending in "2" are assigned five decision values, and patterns ending in "1" are assigned Twenty decision values are assigned, and 70 decision values are assigned to patterns ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , ten determination values are assigned to patterns ending with "1", and five determination values are assigned to patterns ending with "0".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(F), when the game state is the variable probability state, the variable display result is "big hit" in the effect pattern determination table F used for determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice. 5 judgment values are assigned to patterns ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to patterns ending in "2", and 20 judgment values are assigned to patterns ending in "1". are assigned, and 70 decision values are assigned to patterns ending with "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 20 decision values are assigned to patterns ending with "1", and 10 decision values are assigned to patterns ending with "0".

In this way, the effect patterns in the pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice are set so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" ( Expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold"). In addition, the effect pattern in the countdown notice is set so that the expectation level is set to end at "3", end at "2", end at "1", and end in order until "0" (expectation level: "3"). ]<ends with '2'<ends with '1'<until '0').

Here, three game states (probability variable state, time saving state A, time saving state B) in which time saving control is executed are compared with respect to determination of production patterns of various notices.

In addition, the number of production patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the probability variable state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. , and the number of production patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "miss" is "4 types" in the probability variable state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "0 types" in the time saving state B (non execution)”.

Thus, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is possible to decide one of two types of "red" or "gold" as the effect pattern of "symbol chance eye notice". In addition, when the result of variable display is "loss", none of the effect patterns of "symbol chance eye notice" is determined (non-execution). That is, in the time saving state B, the number of production patterns that can be determined is smaller than that in the variable probability state and the time saving state A.

(Notice production)
Next, the advance notice effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-36, "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" as notice effects are predetermined in the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

"Movable body notice" is an effect suggesting that the movable body 32 is vibrated up and down when the variable display is started to control the big win (see FIGS. 11-57 (A1) (B1)). ). The production pattern of the movable body notice has a "vibration (small) pattern" with a small vertical vibration width and a "vibration (large) pattern" with a larger vertical vibration width than the vibration (small), and the variable display result , one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined.

The movable body 32 can move vertically between an origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and an effect position approximately in the center of the display screen, and falls by its own weight from the origin position to the effect position. It is possible. The vibration in the advance notice of the movable body is an effect of vibrating the movable body 32 up and down between the origin position and a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position. Also, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

In the "preview of character", a predetermined character appears during the period from when the variable display is started until the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the reach mode, and the lines of the character are displayed, and the characters are displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. This is an effect that prompts whether or not the reach mode will be achieved by outputting the voice of the displayed lines (see FIGS. 11-57 (A2) and (B2)). The production pattern of the reach notice is a "line A pattern" where the character's line is "Reach?" , non-execution, “serif A pattern”, or “serif B pattern” is determined. The contents of the lines are arbitrary, and lines other than the above may be used.

The character's line pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Also, although the type of character does not change, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of types of characters according to the result of the variable display.

The "ready-to-reach notice" is stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L after the decorative patterns variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L are stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. Whether or not the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, that is, whether or not the ready-to-win mode is achieved (Fig. 11-57 (A3 to A5), ( B3 to B5)).

Specifically, after the decorative design variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the left decorative design is displayed before the stop display position in the variably displayed right decorative design display area 5R. The deceleration display of the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the area 5L is started (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) and (B4)). Then, when an operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, if the ready-to-win mode is not established, the left decoration is performed. A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 11-57 (A5) and (B5)), and the ready-to-win mode. In this case, the decorative design of the same number as the decorative design stop-displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is stop-displayed at the stop display position.

In addition, the reach mode is a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns (for example, "333" etc.) that constitutes the big hit display result from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed. ), except for one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) (for example, left pattern and right pattern, etc.) are displayed in a stopped state, and the one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) is variably displayed. It is a mode (also referred to as reach effect) to perform.

When the variation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice regardless of whether or not the variable display result becomes the big hit display result in the reach notice execution determination process of step 069 SGS278 to be described later. It is decided by lottery whether or not, and a production control pattern (process table) corresponding to the content of the decision is set. Further, when the variation pattern is non-reach, the ready-to-reach mode is not entered after the ready-to-reach notice is executed, and when the variation pattern is the SP ready-to-win state, the ready-to-reach mode is entered after the ready-to-reach notice is executed, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. .

The "button notice" is issued after the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L in the right decorative design display area 5R is started when the ready-to-win notice is executed. , is an effect executed until a predetermined operation effective period elapses (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) and (B4)). Specifically, during the period from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern to the elapse of a predetermined operation valid period, the operation prompting effect prompts the user to operate the push button 31B. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has passed, the operation prompting display and the button image are displayed. is hidden and ends.

The effect pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice includes a "long press pattern" that encourages a long press operation of the push button 31B over a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that prompts the push button 31B to be repeatedly pressed over a predetermined operation period. and a "single-hit pattern" that prompts the user to press the push button 31B once. Depending on the results of the variable display, non-execution, "long-press pattern", "continuous-hit pattern", and "single-hit pattern" are available. one is determined. Incidentally, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set.

The operation prompting display is "long press!" for the "long press pattern", "successive hits!" for the "continuous hit pattern", and "hit!" for the "single hit pattern".

(Decision production)
Next, the decision performance will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-36, the decided effect is the effect that is executed before notifying whether or not the big hit is controlled at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern (Fig. 11- 58 (C4-C8), see FIG. 11-59 (A10-D3), (B7-D3)), which is executed during a predetermined operation valid period, and after the "success button effect" There is a "movable body effect" that is executed.

The "approve/fail button effect" is an operation prompting effect that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B until a predetermined operation valid period elapses. and a button image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. , the operation prompting display and the button image are hidden (see FIG. 11-58 (C4), FIGS. 11-59 (A8 to A10), and (B7)).

The effect pattern includes a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red, which will be described later. If "pattern A-1", "pattern A-2", "pattern B-1", and "pattern B-2" are determined in the "movable body motion pattern determination process", "white pattern" is determined When "pattern B-3" is determined, "red pattern" is determined. Either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" may be determined according to the result of the variable display, regardless of the "movable body motion pattern determination process". Also, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

"Movable body effect" is a effect for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to a big win game state depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. Specifically, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period in the "win/fail button effect", or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, the movable body 32 is moved to the origin position. If the movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position to the performance position, it is notified that it will be controlled to the big win game state, and if the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the performance position, it is not controlled to the big win game state, that is, it is a failure. (See FIGS. 11-58 (C6) and 11-59 (D1)).

When the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 built in the movable body 32 light up in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. , an effect image emphasizing the movable body 32 is displayed, and when the movable body 32 does not fall, the lighting of the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9, the display of the image in which the enemy character is defeated, the effect image, etc. are not executed.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, the hit/fail button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the big hit, and the variable display result is not lost. In some cases, after the hit/fail button effect is performed, the loss notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

(post-production)
Next, the post-production will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-36, the post-effect is after the fact that the variable display part in which the variable display of the decoration pattern in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is executed is controlled to the jackpot game state. In the effect part, it is an effect (see FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10)) in which the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state is announced so as to be identifiable.

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the super reach jackpot variation pattern to the notification of the variable display result, and the post-effect part is the period during the variable display period of the super reach jackpot variation pattern. It is a period from the end of the variable display part to the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display period of the super reach big hit variation pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-effect part period. The post effect is performed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the pattern confirmation period after the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern. You may do so.

In the post-production, a friendly character and an enemy character appearing in the SP ready-to-win production, and a scheduled number-of-balls-out counter display indicating the number of scheduled balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed, and the friendly character attacks the enemy character. is added, the display of the scheduled pitch count counter increases. Next, during a predetermined operation effective period, an operation prompting display consisting of the characters "Press!" and a button image imitating push button 31B are displayed. Alternatively, when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has passed, the friend character defeats the enemy character, a predetermined number (for example, 1000 or 1500) is displayed on the counter display of the number of scheduled balls, and the scheduled number of balls during the big win is displayed. The number of balls is reported. After the end of the post-performance, the jackpot game state is started.

(Rush performance)
Next, the rush effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-36, the rush effect is the “rush introduction effect” executed before the start of the “variable probability rush effect” and the “time saving rush effect A”, and the control of the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state. A ``probability variable entry performance'' executed when starting, a ``time reduction rush performance A'' executed when control of the time reduction state A is started after the end of the big win game state, and a jackpot game state in the low probability state. There is a "time saving rush performance B" that is executed when the control of the time saving state B is started due to the execution of 900 times of variable display without being controlled. In addition, the timing to start the relief time-saving arrival variation (variable display when the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0) in which the "time-saving rush effect B" is executed, that is, before the execution of the "time-saving rush effect B""Shuttereffect" (see FIGS. 11-23(B)(C) and FIGS. 11-25(B)(C)) is executed.

Specifically, the “probability variable entry performance” and the “time reduction rush performance A” are executed during the ending period of the jackpot game state, and the “time reduction rush performance B” is the 900th time when the start condition for the control of the time reduction state B is established. After the variable display (relief time reduction arrival fluctuation) is completed, it is executed during the symbol determination period (for example, 20 seconds, etc.).

"Time saving rush production A" is a time saving state A by displaying the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" This is an effect that informs that the control of is started (see FIG. 11-63 (D)).

"Probability change rush effect", after the rush introduction effect (see Figure 11-63 (A) ~ (C)) is displayed, in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" By doing so, it is an effect that informs that the control of the variable probability state is started (see FIGS. 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

"Time-saving rush production B" does not display the rush introduction production (see FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C)), and in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" By displaying characters, it is an effect to notify that the control of the time saving state B is started (see FIGS. 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (B1 to B4)).

Further, as for the probability variable rush effect/time-saving rush effect B, the characters “BATTLE RUSH rush!!” may be displayed after the characters “pole” and “play 1100” are displayed.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 11-44 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS271; Yes), corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning The various command data and various flags stored with the buffer numbers are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 069SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0", Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", and the first special figure reservation storage Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the buffer number "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage ” is shifted so that the various command data stored in correspondence with buffer numbers “1-3” are stored in correspondence with buffer numbers “1-3”.

In addition, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not on (is off) at step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on ( step 069 SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes), Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are shifted upward by one buffer number. (Step 069 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0", 2 Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", and the second special figure pending storage Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the buffer number "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage ” is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-3”.

After executing step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variation pattern specification command is stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area upon receipt of the variation pattern specification command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, and is erased when the variable display ends. It should be noted that the variation pattern designation command may be erased according to reading.

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do. In the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area in response to the reception of the display result designation command. erased. It should be noted that the display result specifying command may be erased according to reading.

In addition, in this characteristic part 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a symbol other than "7" as the stop symbol. It is determined from a plurality of combinations of even symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", "888"). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" is used as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are not aligned is determined as a stop pattern.

Also, in the look-ahead notice setting processing of step S161 in the production control process processing of FIG. is determined to be either a combination of even-numbered symbols or a combination of odd-numbered symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 stores a relief time reduction number A designation command specifying that the relief time reduction has been reached in the command storage area, that is, whether the variation is a relief time reduction arrival variation (Step 069SGS276A). If it is a relief time-saving arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), shutter effect setting processing is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a relief time-saving arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter effect setting process, a period until the start of effect is set in the shutter effect start waiting timer, and the corresponding shutter effect is started at the timing when the effect start waiting timer is timed up.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS283. If the fluctuation pattern is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069 SGS277; No), reach notice execution decision processing is executed (Step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for reaching notice execution determination is extracted, and whether or not to execute reach notice is determined using the reach notice execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-46 (A). do.

In the reach notice execution determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (A), for each of "non-execution" and "execution", if the game state is "normal state" , “time saving state A” and “time saving state B”, different determination values are assigned so as to have the number of determination values shown in FIG. 11-46(A).

Specifically, when the gaming state is the "normal state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the game state is the "probability variable state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the game state is "time saving state A", 60 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", and 40 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the game state is "time saving state B", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, the reach notice is set so that the execution ratio becomes lower in order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution ratio: probability variable state > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reach notice is exemplified with a probability of 20% in the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice is not executed in the time saving state B You may do so.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not execution of reach notice is determined in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A), and if it is determined that execution of reach notice is not determined (step 069SGS279A; No), proceed to step 069SGS280, if it is determined that the execution of reach notice is determined (step 069SGS279A; Yes), after selecting the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice (step 069SGS279B), button notice A pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button notice pattern determination process, for example, a button notice pattern determination random number (0 to 99) is extracted, and as shown in FIGS. A button notice pattern is determined using Tables A to D.

In the button notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E) show different determination values for each of the variable display results of "big win", "reach failure", and "non-reach failure". are assigned as numbers.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), in the button notice pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 determination values are assigned to "single blow", 20 determination values are assigned to "continuous hits", and "long press" is assigned. 20 decision values are assigned to . In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit". 10 determination values are assigned to the "long press", and 5 determination values are assigned to the "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach out", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and "continuous hit" is assigned. , and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C), in the button notice pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", the "non-execution , 40 judgment values are assigned to "single blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Twenty decision values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit". 10 determination values are assigned to the "long press", and 5 determination values are assigned to the "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach out", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and "continuous hit" is assigned. , and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (D), in the button notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non 20 determination values are assigned to "execute", 40 determination values are assigned to "hit", 20 determination values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 decision values are assigned to each. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 determination values are assigned to "hit", and 10 determination values are assigned to "continuous hit". Five determination values are assigned to the "long press", and five determination values are assigned to the "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "no reach out", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 determination values are assigned to "hit", and "continuous hit" is assigned. , and 10 determination values are assigned to "long press".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), in the button notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non 90 determination values are assigned to "execute", and 10 determination values are assigned to "hit". Further, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", and 5 determination values are assigned to "hit". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the button notice is set so that the execution ratio becomes lower in the order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (execution ratio: probability variable state > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

Especially in the case of time saving state B, when the variable display result when the number of pending memories is "0" is "missing", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or SP reach is determined, but the execution ratio of reach notice is low , Even if the reach notice is executed, the button notice will not be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result when the number of pending memories is "0" in the time saving state B is "missing", even if the reach notice is executed, the button notice is not executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result when the number of pending memories is "0" in the variable probability state or the time saving state A is at a rate lower than the execution rate of the button notice in the case of "missing" A button notice may be made executable.

In addition, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is other than "0", the button notice is executed at a rate of 5% in the reach notice. The present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the number of pending memories, if the variable display result is "missing", the button announcement may not be executed.

In addition, in the case of a big hit or a loss of reach, a pattern of "hit" that prompts the player to perform one operation may be executed, but the execution rate is extremely low, and the player is not allowed to perform the operation for a predetermined operation valid period. The "continuous hit" or "long press" operation, which is more troublesome than the "single hit" operation that prompts the player to perform one operation, is not promoted.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, when it is determined that execution of the reach notice is not determined in step 069SGS279A (step 069SGS279A; No), or after executing the button notice pattern determination process in step 069SGS279C, the effect control CPU 120 Character announcement pattern determination processing is executed (step 069 SGS280). In the character notice pattern determination process, a character notice pattern determination random number (0 to 99) is extracted, and a character notice pattern determination table A corresponding to the game state is created as shown in FIGS. ~D is used to determine the character announcement pattern.

In the character announcement pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. ”, the different judgment values for the variable display results of “big hit” and “losing” are shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D). so that it is assigned.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-47(A), in the character notice pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and "word B" is assigned. , 10 decision values are assigned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-47(B), in the character notice pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", the "non-execution , 30 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "word B". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and "word B" is assigned. , 10 decision values are assigned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (C), in the character notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non 20 determination values are assigned to "execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "serif A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "serif B". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and "word B" is assigned. , 10 decision values are assigned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (D), in the character notice pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is the "time-saving state B", when the variable display result is a "jackpot", "non 90 judgment values are assigned to "execution", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "serif B". Further, when the variable display result is "miss", 95 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "serif A". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the character notice is set so that the execution ratio decreases in the order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (execution ratio: variable probability state > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

Especially in the case of time saving state B, if the variable display result is "off" when the number of pending memories is "0", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or SP reach is determined, but in the variable display of any fluctuation pattern Character announcements are never executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the time saving state B, the character notice is not executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Even if it is possible to execute the character notice at a rate lower than the character notice execution rate when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the variable probability state or the time saving state A good.

Also, in the time saving state B, when the number of pending memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "missing", the character notice is executed at a rate of 5%, but the present invention is limited to this. Regardless of the number of pending memories, if the variable display result is "miss", the character announcement may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, after executing the character notice pattern determination process in step 069 SGS280, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a super ready-to-win variation pattern. Judge (step 069SGS281A). If the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), proceed to step 069SGS282. When the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), movable body motion pattern determination processing is executed (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern is extracted, and the movable body motion pattern corresponding to the game state is determined as shown in FIGS. A movable body motion pattern is determined using determination tables A to D.

In the movable body motion pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-48(A) to (D), the movable body announcement is not executed, and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance (determined performance). "Pattern A-1" for a big hit, "Pattern A-2" for a big hit where the movable body notice is vibration (small) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body production, the movable body notice is vibration (large), "Pattern A-3" for a big hit in which the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body production, and "Pattern B-1" for a loss in which the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body 32 is not dropped in the movable body production of the fixed production. , "Pattern B-2" for missing the movable body notice is vibration (small) and the movable body 32 is not dropped in the movable body presentation, the movable body notice is vibration (large) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body presentation 11-48 (A) to ( It is assigned so that the number of judgment values shown in D) is obtained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-48(A), in the movable body motion pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", , 10 determination values are assigned to "pattern A-1", 20 determination values are assigned to "pattern A-2", and 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern A-3". has been assigned a value. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 20 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48(B), in the movable body motion pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", the "pattern A-1" is assigned 20 determination values, "Pattern A-2" is assigned 10 determination values, and "Pattern A-3" is assigned 70 determination values. It is In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 20 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (C), in the movable body motion pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", " 10 decision values are assigned to "pattern A-1", 10 decision values are assigned to "pattern A-2", and 80 decision values are assigned to "pattern A-3". assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D), in the movable body motion pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "big hit", " 90 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1", 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3". assigned. In addition, 100 determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-1" when the variable display result is "miss".

In this way, when comparing the movable body motion pattern when the variable display result is a big hit in the three game states excluding the normal state, "pattern A-" in which both the movable body announcement and the movable body effect are executed 2”, the execution ratio of “pattern A-3” is higher than the time saving state B in the probability changing state and the time saving state A. On the other hand, the rate of execution of “Pattern A-1” in which the movable body announcement is not executed and only the movable body presentation is executed is higher in the time saving state B than in the probability variable state and the time saving state A.

In addition, when comparing the movable body motion patterns when the variable display result is lost in the three game states excluding the normal state, "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3" in which only the movable body notice is executed ', the probability variable state and the time saving state A are higher than the time saving state B (non-execution).

That is, in the case of the time saving state B, the execution ratio of the movable body notice is lower than that of the variable probability state and the time saving state A (execution ratio of the movable body notice: variable probability state>time saving state A>time saving state B).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, execution of "Pattern A-1" in which the movable object announcement is not executed and only the movable object effect is executed. Although the ratio illustrated the form of 90%, the present invention is not limited to this, "Pattern A-1" when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in the variable probability state or the time saving state A If it is higher than the execution rate of , it may be 90% or less. Further, the execution ratio may be 100% when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in the time saving state B.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, when the variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern in step 069SGS281A, that is, when it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the movable body notice pattern. Processing is executed (step 069SGS282). In the movable body notice pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body notice pattern is extracted, and a movable body notice pattern corresponding to the game state is determined as shown in FIGS. The determination tables A to D are used to determine the movable body advance notice pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 11-49(A) to 11-49(A) to (D), in the movable body notice pattern determination tables A to D, each pattern of "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)" On the other hand, if the variable display result is "big hit", different judgment values for each case of "loss" are assigned so that the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D) ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49(A), in the movable body notice pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", , 10 decision values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 decision values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 decision values are assigned to "vibration (large)". assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration (Large)” is assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-49(B), in the movable body announcement pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", "non 10 judgment values are assigned to "execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". there is In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration (Large)” is assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), in the movable body notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", " 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration (Large)” is assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), in the movable body notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", super Since only the reach variation pattern is determined, no determination value is assigned to any of "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)". In addition, if the non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution". there is

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the movable body notice is set so that the execution ratio decreases in the order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (execution ratio: probability variable state>time saving state A>time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, when the non-reach variation pattern is determined, the movable body announcement is not executed, including when the number of pending memories is "0".

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "missed" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the time saving state B, the movable body notice is not executed. It is not limited, and the movable body notice is executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the movable body notice when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the variable probability state or the time saving state A. It may be possible.

In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is other than "0" in the time saving state B, the movable body notice is exemplified as a non-execution form, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, if the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is other than "0", the movable body announcement may be executed.

When execution of any of the effect patterns is determined in the above-described button notice pattern determination process, character notice pattern decision process, or movable body notice pattern decision process, the period until notice start is set in various notice start waiting timers. , the corresponding advance notice is started at the timing when the various advance notice start waiting timers are timed up.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, when the variation pattern is the shortened non-reach variation pattern or the ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern in step 069SGS277, when the movable body operation pattern determination process of step 069SGS281B is executed, the movable body announcement pattern determination of step 069SGS282 When the process is executed, in step 069SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 069SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 069SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the process ends.

(Effect processing during variable display)
Next, FIG. 11-45 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has various effect start waiting timers set (determined to perform the notice effect etc.), or the notice effect execution flag is ON (execution of the notice effect In the case (step 069SGS304; Y), various effect processing is executed (step 069SGS305). If both the effect start waiting timer and the notice effect executing flag are off, the process proceeds to step 069SGS306 without executing the effect processing of step 069SGS305.

At step 069 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 069 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 069SGS311). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 069SGS310; N), after executing step 069SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 069SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 069SGS313; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 069SGS314). If the definite command reception flag is not ON (step 069SGS314; No), the process is terminated.

If the variable display time timer has timed out at step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or if the determination command reception flag is ON at step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), right-handed LED lighting start command reception It is determined whether or not the flag is on (step 069SGS315). When the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right-handed hitting LED 069SG031 starts lighting, and the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start the right-handed notice. After (step 069SGS316), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends.

If the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether or not the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317). If the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS317; Yes), the lighting of the right-handed LED 069SG031 is terminated, and after the right-handed notification is finished by hiding the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the like ( Step 069SGS318), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. Also, if the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS317; No), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319) , terminate the process.

In addition, although not shown in a particularly detailed illustration, after executing the processing from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318, after the pattern confirmation period specified from the symbol confirmation designation command based on the confirmation command reception flag has passed, the effect control process flag The value of is updated to a value according to the special figure per waiting process (step S173).

In addition, even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to the control of stopping the fluctuation. Even when the designated command is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the normal variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the processing of step 069 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

(Various action examples by game state)
Next, examples of various operations for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-50. 11-50, (A) is a diagram showing an example of variation operation by game state, (B) is a diagram showing an example of effect operation by game state, (C) is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of the time saving state B It is a diagram.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (A), the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three game states of "time saving state B", "variable probability state" and "time saving state A" are compared. .

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of deviation variation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. Reach" and "SP Reach D" are "two", and in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIGS. Shortened non-reach A”, “non-reach A”, “SP reach C”, “SP reach D” “four”, and in “time saving state A”, shown in Figure 11-7 (A) (B) Thus, when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3, the maximum is "3" of "shortened non-reach", "non-reach", and "SP reach E".

That is, when the variable display result is "missing", the number (for example, two) of the missing variation patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state B" by the CPU 103 is the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A". It is less than the number (for example, 3) and less than the number (for example, 4) of determinable deviation variation patterns in the "probability variation state".

In addition, the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probability variable state, or the case of the time saving state B is more than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state. If less, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for is about 7.54 seconds {((7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for possible misses is about 2.205 seconds {((1.5s*97)+(25s*3))/100=2.205}. Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state B is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 1100 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state B The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54+(2.205*1099))/1100=2.20985}.

In the "probable variable state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 0 is about 8.2 seconds {((7 s × 95) + (40 s × 2) + (25 s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, variable display time of fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 is about 4.8 seconds {((3s*85)+(7s*10)+(40s*2)+(25s*3))/100=4.8}. Here, assuming that the first variable display after the probability change state is started has a reserved memory number of 0, and the variable display of 2 to 110 times has a reserved memory number of 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in the probability change state. is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2+(4.8*109))/110=4.83}.

In the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 is about 9.15 seconds {((7s×95)+(50s×5))/100=9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 5.55 seconds {((3s×90)+(7s×5)+(50s×5))÷100=5.55}. Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state A is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 110 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state A The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15+(5.55*109))/110=5.58}.

That is, the average time of the variable display time of the missing variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "off" (for example, about 2.2 seconds) is in the "time saving state A" Less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (e.g., about 5.58 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability variation state" (e.g., about 4.83 seconds).

In addition, the average time (for example, about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state B" is the pending memory in "time saving state A" Less than the average time (for example, about 9.15 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined when the number is 0, and the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "probability variation state" is less than the average time of the variable display time (eg, about 8.2 seconds).

In addition, the average time (for example, about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 in "time saving state B" is, in "time saving state A" Less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (eg, about 5.55 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability variation state" (eg, about 4.8 seconds).

According to the items (A1) and (A2), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. The variable display in which is not determined has fewer types of variation patterns and a shorter average time of variable display time, so that the digestion speed of the variable display is higher than that of the variable probability state and the time saving state A, so it provides a suitable time saving state B. can do.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern is longer in the order of time saving state B, probability variable state, and time saving state A, or the case of time saving state B is more than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability changing state If shorter, the time can be varied.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. ”, and in the “variable probability state”, as shown in FIG. ”is “three”, and in “time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. is "two" of ".

That is, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, one) is the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A". It is less than the number (for example, 2) and less than the number (for example, 3) of determinable deviation variation patterns in the "probability variation state".

In addition, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probability variable state, or the case of the time saving state B is higher than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state. If less, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the big hit variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. is about 40 seconds.

In the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is about 51.1 seconds { ((22s x 5) + (55s x 80) + (40s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined in the variable probability state is about 51.1 seconds.

In the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is about 62.8 seconds. {((22s*5)+(55s*95))/100=62.85}.

That is, the average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the big hit variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "big hit" is determined in the "time saving state A". Less than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "probability variable state" (for example, about 51.1 seconds) less than

According to the items (A3) and (A4), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. The variable display for which is determined has fewer types of variation patterns and a shorter average time of the variable display time, so that the digestion speed of the variable display increases more than the probability variable state and the time saving state A, so the suitable time saving state B is selected. can provide.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern is longer in the order of the time saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time saving state A, or the time saving state B is longer than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability changing state. If shorter, the time can be varied.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. , in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) (B), the number of pending memories is 0, 80% when 1 to 3, and in the "time saving state A", FIG. As shown in -7 (A) and (B), it is 70% when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3.

That is, the ratio (for example, 97%) in which the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach loss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B" is the variable display result in the "time saving state A" is higher than the ratio (for example, 95%) at which the "non-reach variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "missing", and when the variable display result is "missing" in the "variable probability state", the CPU 103 higher than the proportion (eg, 95%) determined by the "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern".

According to the item (A5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is not decided to control to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the variable display mode to the reach mode, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B because it is less likely to be mischievous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach loss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "missing" is 97% for the time saving state B, and both the probability changing state and the time saving state A At 95%, the form in which the time saving state B, the probability variable state and the time saving state A are lowered in order is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B (eg, 97%), the probability variable state (eg , 95%), the time saving state A (for example, 94%) may be lower in order, or if the time saving state B is higher than at least one of the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the above The ratio can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state B", the ratio of determining the "non-reach loss variation pattern" by the CPU 103 is 97%. The present invention is not limited to this, the ratio of determining the "non-reach loss variation pattern" by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time saving state B" is 100%, that is, " If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state B", the reach variation pattern may not be determined.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing", the CPU 103 can determine in the "time saving state B" loss variation pattern (for example, "non-reach A"), and "time saving state A" and "probable variable state" determined Since the possible deviation variation pattern (for example, “non-reach A”) is common, it is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 can determine the loss variation pattern in the "time saving state B" (for example, "SP reach D"), and the loss variation pattern that can be determined in the "probability variation state" ( For example, "SP reach D") is common, so that the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (B), compare the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three game states of "time saving state B", "variable probability state" and "time saving state A" do.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution ratio of "movable body notice" and "character notice" as a jackpot suggestion effect in the variable display of the losing variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0, in "time saving state B", Fig. 11-49 ( As shown in D), the execution ratio of "movable body notice" is 0% (non-execution), and as shown in FIG. Yes, in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the execution ratio of "movable body notice" is 40%, as shown in FIG. The ratio is 30%, and in the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), the execution ratio of “movable body notice” is 30%, as shown in FIG. The execution ratio of "character announcement" is 20%.

In other words, it should be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state A", and when the variable display is performed in the variation pattern, and when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "probable variable state" When the variable display is executed in the variable pattern, while the suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state B" When the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined in (1), suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" are not executed in the variable display.

According to the item (B1), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state continued for a long time. To provide a suitable time-saving state B because there is no mischief caused by a movable body notice or a character notice in variable display of a variable pattern (for example, "non-reach" or "SP reach" other than shortened non-reach). be able to.

To explain in detail, when the control of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B is started, since the left-handed game in the normal state has been performed until then, the reserved memory is stored in the first reserved memory. Even if there is, it is conceivable that there is no reserved memory in the second reserved memory. In other words, when the variable probability state or time saving state A is started at the first hit, or when the control of the time saving state B is started by executing the variable display 900 times, the time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory In order to earn money, the deviation variation pattern that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 0 is a deviation variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation time of 25 seconds and 40 seconds of SP reach) are determined at a high rate. Then, when a loss variation pattern whose variable display time is longer than that of shortened non-reach is determined, suggestive effects such as "notice of movable body" and "notice of character" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when the control of the time saving state B is started, the player has a high possibility that various outage notices have been executed in the long game period so far, so even in the time saving state B "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed, it will be annoyed, so when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, "movable "Body notice" and "Character notice" are not executed.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state B", "movable body notice" or " Although a form in which suggestive effects such as "character notice" are not executed has been exemplified, for example, when variable display is executed in a deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state B", The execution ratio of suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" in variable display is better It is preferable to make it lower than the execution rate.

In addition, when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0, the rate at which suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" are executed is the time saving state B If the execution ratio of "movable body notice" or "character notice" in is lower than the execution ratio of "movable body notice" or "character notice" in at least one of the time saving state A and the variable state, the above ratio is various can be changed to

In addition, in the time saving state B, if it is a losing variation pattern, "movable body notice" and "character notice" are not executed, and if it is a big hit change pattern, "movable body notice" and "character notice" are executed. You may do so. By doing so, in the time saving state B, interest can be enhanced by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect such as "notice of movable body" or "notice of character" is executed.

In addition, the suggestive effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is "reach notice" or " It may also include a button notice. By doing so, in the time-saving state B, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the "ready-to-reach notice" and the "button notice" are executed, thereby increasing interest.

Further, based on the variable display result, a first suggesting effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) and a second suggesting effect having a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state than when the first suggesting effect is executed. By being able to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a suggestive effect (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest. can be enhanced.

<Item B2>
Regarding the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. ”, and in the “probability change state”, as shown in FIG. There are, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG.

That is, when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B", the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, 0 pieces) is the variable display result in the "time saving state A". In some cases, the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is less than the number of types (for example, 3), and when the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state", the pre-reading that can be determined by the production control CPU 120. It is less than the number of types of notice (for example, 4).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B" is exemplified. It is not limited to this, for example, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is "time saving state A" and "probable variable state If the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in at least one of the above, one or more types of pre-reading notice may be executable.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “time saving state B” is variable display in at least one of the “time saving state A” and the “variable probability state”. If the number is less than the number of types of pre-reading advance notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the result is a loss, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution ratio of "pre-reading notice" when the variable display result is lost, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. In state", as shown in FIG. 11-42(B), the total execution ratio of "countdown notice", "hold change notice", symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice" is "40%", In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-42(C), the total execution ratio of "holding change notice", symbol chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" is "30%".

That is, the execution ratio (for example, 0%) of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state A" (for example, 30%), and lower than the execution ratio (for example, 40%) of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state".

According to the items (B2) and (B3), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display in which is not determined, development costs can be suppressed by reducing the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined, and the pre-reading notice effects are less likely to be mischievous, so it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B. can.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B" is 0%, that is, the form in which the pre-reading notice is not executed was exemplified. It is not limited, for example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is the variable display result in at least one of "time saving state A" and "variable probability state" If it is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice in the case of the loss, the pre-reading notice may be made executable.

In addition, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice in the case where the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B" is the prefetching in the case where the variable display result is lost in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability variable state" As long as it is lower than the execution rate of the notice, the above rate can be changed in various ways.

In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, “holding change notice”, “symbol chance eye notice , and "blue" pattern of "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "hold There are "change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, Fig. 11 -43 (D) reference) is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)), so that the time saving In the state B, since the first pre-reading notice effect is less likely to be mischievous, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, “holding change notice”, “symbol chance eye notice , and "blue" pattern of "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "hold There are "change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the second prefetch notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, Fig. 11 -43 (D) reference) is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)) , In the time-saving state B, since the second foreseeing forewarning effect is likely to be executed, the suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A and the variable probability state and the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B are common (for example, “symbol chance eye By not setting the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B and the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in at least one of the time saving state A and the variable probability state are common. By not setting a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B and the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in both the time saving state A and the variable probability state are common (for example, By doing so, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution ratio of "button notice" as an action promotion effect that encourages the player's action, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. In the case of "5%", in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. In state A", as shown in FIG. 11-46(D), it is "80%" in the case of a big hit and "20%" in the case of a loss. It should be noted that these execution ratios are the ratios when the "reach notice" is executed.

In other words, the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for big hits, 5% for losing) is the execution of button notice per variable display in "time saving state A" It is lower than the ratio (eg, 80% for the big hit, 20% for the loss), and the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in the "variable state" (eg, 80% for the big hit, 30% for the loss). low.

According to the item (B4), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, the player is instructed to push the button in the variable display of 1. Since the number of executions of the button notice, which is an operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of 31B, is small, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in the "time saving state B" is higher than the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in the "time saving state A" and the "variable probability state" However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the button notice may not be executed (execution rate 0%) in "time saving state B".

In addition, the execution ratio of button notice per variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution ratio of button notice per variable display in "time saving state A" or "variable probability state", the above ratio can be changed in various ways.

<Item B5>
In the button notice, a "single hit pattern" as a first action promotion effect that prompts the player to perform a single action, and a "continuous hit pattern, long hit pattern" as a second action promotion effect that prompts the player to perform a predetermined action period. Regarding the execution ratio with "push pattern", in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. is "5%", and in the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "0% (non-execution)" in the case of a big hit or a loss.

In the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), the execution ratio of the "hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a big hit, and "10%" on average in the case of a miss. In the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", "40%" in the case of a big hit, and "20%" on average in the case of a loss.

In the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (D), the execution ratio of the “hit pattern” is “40%” for the big hit, and “7.5%” on average for the loss. , in the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "40%" in the case of a big hit, and "17.5%" on average in the case of a miss.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 can determine execution of both the "single blow pattern" and the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "variable probability state" and the "time saving state A", and in the "time saving state B" , the “single hit pattern” can be determined, but the execution of the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” is not determined.

In addition, the execution ratio of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for big hits and losses) is pattern, long press pattern” execution ratio (for example, 40% for big hits, 20% for misses), and the execution ratio of “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” per variable display of 1 in “time saving state A” (eg 40% for big hits, 17.5% for losers).

According to the item (B5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, considering that the period not controlled to the jackpot game state continued for a long time, the player pushed over the operation valid period Since the player is less likely to be prompted to perform troublesome operations such as "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" in which the button 31B must be operated continuously, the preferred time-saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the "single blow pattern" in the "time saving state B", but does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern". , The present invention is not limited to this, for example, the determination ratio of "hit pattern" in "time saving state B" is "hit pattern" in at least one of "time saving state A" and "probability variable state" If it is lower than the determined ratio of , the "hit pattern" may be made executable.

Also, in the time saving state B, the ratio (for example, 10%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a big hit is used for effect control when the variable display result is a loss. By making the rate (for example, 5%) higher than the execution rate of the "button notice" by the CPU 120, attention can be paid to the execution of the "button notice" in the time-saving state B, and interest can be improved.

In addition, as the effect pattern of the "button notice", a "single hit" pattern, a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the "single hit" pattern is executed, There is a rate (eg, 10%) in which the “hit” pattern is executed in the time saving state B, and the rate at which the “continuous hit” or “long press” pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability change (for example, 40% ), but the rate of execution of the "hit" pattern in the time saving state B is higher than the rate of execution of the "continuous hit" and "long press" patterns in the time saving state A and the probability change good. By doing so, when the action promotion effect is executed in the time saving state B, the pattern of "one blow" is often used, so that the interest can be improved.

In addition, the period during which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state and the period during which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the "reach notice" is executed period), the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of "button notice" in the time saving state A, the variable probability state and the time saving state B.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 also provides an action promotion preparation effect (for example, although not shown in particular, a fade-in display of the push button 31B to be operated before the operation effective period starts) before executing the "button notice". When it is possible to execute a production that is displayed or an effect display is displayed), the period during which the operation promotion preparation production is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and the operation promotion preparation production in the time saving state B It is preferable that the execution period and the period are the same. By doing so, the development cost can be reduced, and the execution of the "button notice" can be preferably notified.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution ratio per variable display of "movable body notice" as a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the jackpot game state, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), 0% (non-execution) in the case of a big hit or loss, and in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. In the time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. 11-49(C), it is 90% in the case of a big hit and 30% in the case of a loss.

That is, the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% big hit, 0% loss) is "movable body" per variable display in "time saving state A" Lower than the execution ratio of "notice" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% loss), and the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "variable state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% loss) ).

According to the item (B6), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is suggested that it is controlled to the jackpot game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state continued for a long time. Since the number of execution times of the movable body announcement to be performed is reduced, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this. ,) is that the execution ratio of “movable body notice” per variable display in “time saving state B” is “movable If it is lower than the execution ratio of "body announcement", "movable body announcement" may be made executable in "time saving state B".

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, the proportion (for example, 0%) at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B is " Although it is lower than the rate (for example, 90%) at which "movable body notice" is executed, the rate at which "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is that the variable display result is a big hit. In the case of , it may be higher than the rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state. By doing so, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" in the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B.

In addition, the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "vibration (small)" pattern in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is the time saving state A and the probability variable state when the variable display result is a big hit Although the ratio (for example, 30%) of executing the “vibration (small)” pattern in , When the variable display result is a big hit, it may be higher than the ratio (for example, 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability variable state. By doing so, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" in the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B.

<Item B7>
Regarding the execution ratio per variable display of "character notice" as a stimulus effect to instigate whether the variable display mode is to be the reach mode, in "time saving state B", as shown in Fig. 11-47 (D) 2, 10% in the case of a big hit, 5% in the case of an error, and in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. Yes, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-47 (C), it is 80% for a big hit and 20% for a miss.

That is, the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% big hit, 5% loss) is "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (eg, 80% jackpot, 20% loss), and the execution rate of "character notice" per variable display in "variable state" (eg, 80% jackpot, 30% loss) than low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. B" is 20%, "variable probability state" is 50%, and "time saving state A" is 40%.

That is, the execution ratio of "reach notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 20%) is the execution ratio of "reach notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example , 40%) and lower than the execution ratio (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "variable probability state".

According to the item (B7), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, whether or not reach is established is encouraged. Since the number of execution times of the reach notice and the button notice is reduced, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution ratio of "time saving state A" and "movable body notice". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution ratio of "character notice" per one variable display in "time saving state B" may be 0%, that is, may not be executed. In addition, if the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution ratio of "time saving state A" or "movable body notice", the above ratio can be changed in various ways. be.

<Item B8>
"Pattern A" that executes "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation" is a movable body motion pattern of "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation" that can be executed in the variable display of 1 by the presentation control CPU 120. -2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)” and “Pattern A-1 (first 2 effect execution pattern)”, and the execution ratio of “pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a big hit, in “time saving state B”, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D) 90%, in the “probability variable state”, 20% as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), and in “time saving state A”, 10% as shown in FIG. .

In other words, the execution ratio (for example, 90%) of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" is the same as "time saving state A" when the variable display result is wrong. Higher than the execution rate (eg, 10%) of "Pattern A-1" and the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in the "variable state" (eg, 20%) high.

According to the item (B8), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is determined to control to the big hit game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big hit game state continued for a long time. In this case, the movable body 32 is less likely to be unnecessarily operated in the movable body notice before the execution of the movable body performance in which the big hit is notified by the falling of the movable body 32, so a suitable time-saving state B. can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is the variable display result in "time saving state A" and "variable probability state" Although the form lower than the execution ratio of "Pattern A-1" in the case is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" Pattern A-1" may be executed at 0%, that is, not executed.

Also, when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the rate at which "pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed (for example , 80 to 90%), "pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B By being higher than the ratio (for example, 10%), in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, attention can be paid to whether or not the movable body 32 operates, and interest can be improved.

In addition, the execution frequency (eg, about 10%) of the “movable body effect” in the time saving state B is lower than the execution frequency (eg, 80 to 90%) of the “movable body effect” in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. Since the movable body 32 is rarely operated unnecessarily in the time saving state B, the suitable time saving state B can be provided.

<Item B9>
11-60 for the effect mode of the "post effect" in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies the expected number of balls to be put out in the jackpot game state in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the SP reach effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in , "time saving state B", "probability variable state", and "time saving state A" are common.

According to the item (B9), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is determined to control to the big win game state considering that the period not controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display, the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average time of the variable display time is shortened, so that the speed of digestion of the variable display increases, and after being notified that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the time saving state Since A and the probability variable state can be excited by a common performance, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, a "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, and a "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B , are common (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), the development cost can be reduced.

In addition, the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the control data for the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state B The control data to be used is common (for example, light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), so development costs can be reduced.

In addition, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post production" in the time saving state B , are common (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), the development cost can be reduced.

<Item B10>
When the time saving control is started, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the start of the time saving control by displaying a rush image 069SG470 (for example, characters such as "BATTLE RUSH rush!!") as a special state start display. Regarding the "rush performance" as the special state start performance, when control of the variable probability state is started, a rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the variable probability rush performance, and when the control of the time saving state B is started, the time saving rush performance B is displayed. In addition to displaying the rush image 069SG470, the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B (for example, characters such as “play 1100”) are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state or time saving state A is started. (See FIGS. 11-63(D), 11-64(A4) and (B4)).

According to the item (B10), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, the probability variable state control is performed in the rush effect. Not only the rush image 069SG470 common to when it is started, but also the idle time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state is started, are displayed, so that the start of the time saving state B is excited. can be done.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 may be capable of determining a special fluctuation pattern having a variable display time during which the "rush production" can be executed in the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to suitably execute the "plunging effect".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (C), the difference between the “time saving state B”, the “probability variable state” and the “time saving state A” will be described.

<Item C1>
As explained in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIG. 11-50 (A), the number of loss variation patterns and jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 is the smallest in the case of the time saving state B, and the loss variation The average time of the variable display time of the pattern and the jackpot variation pattern is the shortest in the case of the time saving state B, and the determination ratio of non-reach loss is the highest in the case of the time saving state B. Therefore, the average digestion time per variable display in each of the “time saving state B”, “probability variable state”, and “time saving state A” in which time saving control is performed is the fastest in the time saving state B, and the probability variable state is medium speed , time-saving state A is slow.

In this way, among the time saving state B, the probability changing state and the time saving state A in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than the normal state by performing the time saving control, the probability changing state and the time saving state A are advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the time-saving state B is controlled via execution of variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without the occurrence of a big hit in the low-probability state. be.

In addition, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the number of times of variable display in which the time saving control is performed is the first number (for example, 110 times), whereas in the time saving state B, the number of times of variable display in which the time saving control is performed is It is a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times.

That is, in the case of the time-saving state such as the probability variable state and the time-saving state A, the player can wait for the next big hit while enjoying the reach and various effects while suppressing the investment compared to the normal state. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state B, there is no big hit and the game is controlled through a long-term game in a disadvantageous state for the player, and the number of times of variable display of the time saving control is larger than that of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. Considering that it is a time-saving state, by increasing the variation efficiency as described above, the number of wasteful hits is reduced and the investment is suppressed. By giving priority to winning a big hit in time, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's desire to play.

<Item C2>
Further, as described in each item B1 to B10 shown in FIG. 11-50 (B), the execution ratio of the various notice effects described above is the lowest in the time saving state B, the highest in the variable probability state, and the time saving state A Medium.

In other words, in the game over a long period of time until it is controlled to the time saving state B, various announcement effects are executed, and the player is likely to be depressed by continuing to miss, so the time saving In the state B, the execution ratio of the notice effect is lower than that in other game states, so that it is possible to suitably prevent the player from losing the motivation to play due to the losing effect.

<Item C3>
In this way, the time saving state B has a higher variation efficiency than the other variable states and the time saving state A in which the time saving control is performed in the same way, and the opportunity to be fueled by the notice effect is reduced, so additional investment This is a game state characterized by suitably digesting the variable display and waiting for a big hit while suppressing the decline of the player's desire to play.

More specifically, the time-saving state B has an average normal figure fluctuation time (period for changing the normal figure), the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game, and the game ball is easy to enter the second start winning opening. While the control (high open control, high base control) etc. is common with other probability variable states and time saving state A, the average special figure fluctuation time (period of changing special figures) is changed to other probability variable states and time saving This is a time-saving state in which variation efficiency is prioritized over performance by lowering the execution frequency of various performances while increasing variation efficiency by shortening the time compared to state A. - 特許庁

In addition, the CPU 103 is determinable loss variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D), and determinable loss variable display pattern in at least one of time saving state A and probability change state (e.g., non-reach , SP reach D) are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the loss variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, non-reach, SP reach D), and the loss variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probability change state (for example, non-reach, SP reach D ) and are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state is controlled to the time saving state A. preferably shorter than the average time of the control period. In this way, in the time-saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than in the variable probability state, so that the digestion speed of the variable display increases, thereby providing a suitable time-saving state B, and in the time-saving state A. The interest in the game can be enhanced by lengthening the average time of the control period.

In addition, the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, two) is less than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (eg, three), and in the time saving state A The number of determinable deviation variation patterns (eg, 3) is less than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the probability variable state (eg, 4). By reducing the number to give priority to the completion of the variable display, increasing the number of determinable loss variation patterns in the probability variation state can enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the big hit variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, SP reach D), and at least one of the time saving state A and the probability changing state (for example, the probability changing state) The big hit variable display pattern that can be determined in , SP reach D) are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the big hit variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, without SP) and the big hit variable display pattern (for example, without SP) that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the variable probability state. By doing so, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B.

In addition, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state is controlled to the time saving state A. preferably shorter than the average time of the control period. In this way, in the time-saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than in the variable probability state, so that the digestion speed of the variable display increases, thereby providing a suitable time-saving state B, and in the time-saving state A. The interest in the game can be enhanced by lengthening the average time of the control period.

In addition, the number of big hit variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state B by the CPU 103 (for example, one) is less than the number of big hit variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, two), and in the time saving state A The number of determinable jackpot variation patterns (for example, two) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in the variable probability state (eg, three), so that in the time saving state B, the number of determinable jackpot variation patterns While the number is reduced to give priority to the completion of the variable display, the number of determinable big hit variation patterns is increased in the variable probability state, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, the CPU 103 is determinable in the time saving state B non-reach out variation pattern (eg, non-reach), and the non-reach out variation pattern (eg, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state And are common, and by not setting the determinable non-reach deviation only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B (eg, non-reach) and the non-reach loss variation pattern (eg, non-reach) that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probability variable state are common It is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity by not setting the determinable non-reach deviation only in the time saving state B.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in the time saving state B (for example, SP non-through), and the non-reach jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, SP non Via) and are common, and by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity.

In addition, the CPU 103 is determinable in the time saving state B non-reach big hit variation pattern (for example, SP non-passing), and non-reach loss variation pattern determinable in both the time saving state A and probability variable state (for example, SP non-passing), is common, and by not setting a non-reach big hit that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the time saving state B, the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 is exemplified as a form in which the probability is changed and the time saving state is lower than the time saving state A. For example, the normal state (low probability / Low base state) is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving arrival fluctuation) When the number of remaining variable display times becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, the remaining 100 times or 50 times), the effect control CPU 120 may be made lower than the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the normal state. Also, in this case, the execution ratio of 1 production is lower than the execution ratio in the normal state, but may be higher than the execution ratio in the time saving state B (execution ratio of 1 production; normal state (remaining Number of times 101 times or more)> Normal state (Remaining number of times 100 times or less)> Time saving state B).

Also, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the remaining variable display count until it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving arrival fluctuation) is less than a predetermined number (for example, the remaining 100 times or 50 times) At times, the contents of the items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may change to correspond to the time saving state B. By doing in this way, the troublesomeness until it is controlled by the time saving state B can be suppressed.

Also, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the remaining variable display count until it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving fluctuation) is a specific number (for example, the remaining 50 times or 10 times) or less. When the variable display result is a big hit in , the ratio of execution of low-expectation effects (for example, SP ready-to-win effect A, weak pattern advance notice effect, etc.) may be increased.

(Variable display mode of the pattern)
Next, the variable display mode of decorative patterns and small patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-51 to 11-55. FIG. 11-51 is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in (A) the variable probability state, the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time saving state A, and (B) the shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time saving state B. . FIG. 11-52 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. FIG. 11-53 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. 11-54 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-time variation pattern in the time saving state B. FIG. FIG. 11-55 is an example of effect operation of SP reach E and SP reach D. FIG.

In the present embodiment, the decoration patterns variably displayed in the decoration design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R are a number display portion 069SG051 consisting of numbers "1" to "9" and a number display portion 069SG051 lower than the number display portion 069SG051. and a pedestal display portion 069SG052 displayed on the display layer (back side). On the other hand, the left small pattern, the middle small pattern, and the right small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are each composed of numbers "1" to "9" displayed smaller than the decorative patterns. Configured. The decoration design and the small design are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special design.

The variable display modes of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R of the decorative patterns (for example, non-reach-type loss fluctuation patterns, etc.) are the normal state, the probability variable state/time saving state A, and the time saving state B. The case is different from the case of . Below, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the non-reach variation pattern (including shortened non-reach A, non-reach A) in the normal state, probability variable state/time saving state A, the timing of FIG. 11-51 (A) Based on the chart, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 11-52 and 11-53. In addition, since the variable display mode of the decoration pattern of the non-reach system off in the normal state, the variable probability state and the time saving state A is common, in FIG. do.

As shown in FIG. 11-51 (A), at the start timing ta1 of the variable display of the shortened non-reach out in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R The decorative design and the small design are variable. The display starts simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-52(A)). That is, the starting order of variable display of each decorative pattern is common. In addition, each decorative pattern is changed to "medium speed" at timing ta2 after a predetermined time has passed since the variable display was started at "low speed", and at timing ta3 after a predetermined time has passed, it is changed to "high speed" which is the maximum speed. After that, the display is variably displayed at a constant rotational speed. On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the variable display start timing ta1. Incidentally, the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the decoration pattern and the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the small pattern may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns changes from "medium speed" to "low speed" in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area 5C. . Then, at the timing ta4 when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-52(B)). Next, after the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see FIG. 11-52(C)), and then the original size is displayed. At the timing of returning to , the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 11-52(D)).

Next, at timing ta5 when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-52(E)). Next, after the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see FIG. 11-52 (F)), and then the original size is displayed. At the timing of returning to , the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 11-52 (G)).

Next, at timing ta6 when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-53(H)). Next, after the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size after a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see FIG. 11-53 (I)), the original size is displayed. At the timing ta6 after returning to , the decoration design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 11-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in a temporary stop display mode (for example, , swing mode, etc.).

Then, at timing ta7 when a predetermined time has passed from timing ta6 when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 5C (timing when the design confirmation designation command is received), the left, middle, and right small patterns are displayed at the same time. (All at once) are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-53(K)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific action. At the timing ta7 when the small symbols are stop-displayed, the three decoration symbols temporarily stopped-displayed in the decoration-design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stop-displayed.

Then, the next variable display can be started at timing ta8 after the symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 ms) has passed from timing ta7 when the small symbols are stopped and displayed.

Next, the variable display mode of the non-reach-type lost decorative symbols in the time-saving state B will be described based on the timing chart of FIG. 11-51(B) with reference to FIG. 11-54. In addition, since the variable display mode of the non-reach system off decorative symbols in the time saving state B is common, FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11-51 (B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of the ultra-shortened non-reach out in the time saving state B, the decorative design of each decorative design display area 5L, 5R, 5R and the small design are variablely displayed. They are started at the same time (all at once) (see FIG. 11-54(A)). That is, the starting order of variable display of each decorative pattern is common. Further, each decorative pattern is variably displayed at a constant rotational speed after reaching the maximum speed of "high speed" at timing tb2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the variable display start timing tb1. Incidentally, the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the decoration pattern and the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the small pattern may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display is approaching, the variable display speeds of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are simultaneously (simultaneously) set to "medium speed", and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C At the timing tb3 when the decorative symbols are simultaneously (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-54(B)). Incidentally, the variable display speed of the decoration pattern may be changed from "high speed" to "low speed" without going through "medium speed". Next, the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, and a specific operation display (stop display action) is not performed, and a predetermined time has passed since timing tb3 when each decorative pattern was temporarily stopped and displayed. At the timing tb4 (timing at which the symbol confirmation designation command is received), the left, middle and right small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time (see FIG. 11-54(C)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific action. At the timing tb4 when the small symbols are stop-displayed, the three decoration symbols temporarily stopped-displayed in the decoration-design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stop-displayed.

Then, at timing tb5 after a symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 ms) has passed from timing tb4 when the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the next variable display can be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period in which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time saving state B, the probability variable state and the time saving state A, The time saving state B may be shorter than the probability variable state and the time saving state A. In addition, the period in which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "high speed" is shorter in the case of the time saving state B than in the case of the time saving state B and the time saving state A, but the time saving state B and the time saving state and the time saving state It may be common with A.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A (left, middle, right Although the decorative patterns are horizontally aligned and stopped display), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, While the decorative patterns are horizontally arranged and displayed stationary, in the time saving state B, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the time saving state B such that the left, middle and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed at different positions in the vertical direction. The mode may be different from the stop display mode of the decorative symbols in the variable probability state or the time saving state A. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative design that is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time saving state A (variable display in the vertical direction). ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, while the display is variably displayed in the vertical direction, in the time saving state B the horizontal direction Variable display in the time-saving state B, such as variable display, or variable display of decorative patterns is reduced in the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by friendly characters, enemy characters, etc. are continuously displayed on the display screen. The mode may be different from the variable display mode in the variable probability state or the time saving state A.

Thus, the start order of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the probability variation state, when the time saving state A is a non-reach loss variation pattern, and the time saving state B is a non-reach loss variation pattern. Although it is common in the case, the time until the decorative design of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C reaches the maximum speed is shorter in the time saving state B than in the variable probability state and in the time saving state A. (tb1-tb2<ta1-ta3). Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, 5C is, in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, if the non-reach loss variation pattern is present, the display is stopped in the order of left → right → middle, and the time saving is performed. In the state B, when it is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the non-reach loss variation pattern in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B. Although it is common in the case, the time from when the decorative design is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative design is stopped and displayed is a probability variable state. , When it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state A, and when it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B may be different. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the number of output times of the pattern stop sound in the variable display of 1 is 3 times because the left, middle, and right are stopped at different timings in the case of a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state and the time saving state A. , in the time-saving state B, when it is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so it is one time. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the number of output times of the symbol stop sound in the variable display of 1 is the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B. Even if it is common good. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, when it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probability change state and the time saving state A, a specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed, whereas in the time reduction state B it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern Specific action display ( Symbol stop action) is not performed. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the performance effect is enhanced by the specific action display, while in the time saving state B, the specific action display is not executed, thereby realizing a smooth variable display.

In addition, the specific action display (symbol stop action) is common in the case of the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the variable probability state, the time saving state A and the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B, so that the specific action Development cost can be reduced by sharing the mode of specific action display between the variable probability state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B, while increasing the presentation effect by the display.

In addition, the period from the stop display of the decorative pattern to the stop display of the small pattern is the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state and the time saving state A {t1(ta6-ta7)>t2(tb3-tb4)}. Therefore, in the time saving state B, smooth variable display can be realized.

In addition, in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1, and the design determination period (ta7 to ta8) which is the minimum period until the variable display of the decorative design is started in the next variable display. And, in the time-saving state B, the symbol determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped in the first variable display to when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the next variable display, Common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the control in consideration of the drawing process until the decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed.

Although the display of the specific action of each decorative pattern has been exemplified as an action display that is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode. is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways. In addition, in the specific action display, only the pedestal display portion 069SG052 performs the specific action display, and the number display portion 069SG051 does not perform the specific action display, so the specific action display enhances the performance effect while ensuring the visibility of the identification information However, the specific action display may be performed on the number display portion 069SG051 together with the base display portion 069SG052. Also, the specific action mode may be different for each decorative pattern with different numbers.

In addition, in the above description, the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern and the non-shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern have exemplified a form in which the variable display mode is common, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the variable display mode may be different between the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern and the non-shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern.

In addition, the display position of the decoration pattern in the time saving state B may be changed between when the variable display is started and when the variable display is stopped. I can show you.

In addition, instead of speeding up the variable display speed of the decorative pattern to reach the maximum speed as in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is changed into a form that is difficult to see (for example, a dark form) during the variable display, and A variable display with a sense of speed may be realized by changing from a difficult-to-recognize mode to a normal mode when the decoration pattern is stopped.

Next, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display will be described based on FIG. 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the big hit variation pattern of the SP reach E, the variable display is started (see FIG. 11-55 (A)), and after the decoration design is stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L (FIG. 11-55 (B)), the decorative pattern is displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R at a reduced speed, and the reach notice and the button notice are executed (see FIG. 11-55 (C)), and the decorative pattern is displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. is displayed temporarily, the pedestal display portion 069SG052 of the decorative design temporarily displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, and then returned to the original size. A return reach specific action display is performed (see FIG. 11-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 11-55 (E)).

Next, although not shown in particular, when the big hit notification is performed through the SP ready-to-win production, the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined big hit combinations are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (Fig. 11). -55(F)). After that, after the pedestal display part 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, a big hit specific action display is performed. (Refer to FIG. 11-55 (G)), and the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (Refer to FIG. 11-55 (H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot variation pattern of the SP reach D, the variable display is started (see FIG. 11-55 (I)), and the reach mode is not displayed, and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are displayed in advance. Confirmed decorative symbols that are a predetermined big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (F)). After that, after the pedestal display part 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, a big hit specific action display is performed. (Refer to FIG. 11-55 (G)), and the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (Refer to FIG. 11-55 (H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E variation pattern, the reach specific operation display for performing the specific operation of the decoration pattern when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and the decoration patterns are stopped at the determined decoration pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination. A second specific action display for performing a specific action on the decorative pattern when displayed can be executed, and a reach specific action display and a jackpot specific action display are executed in the variation pattern of the SP reach E via the reach. However, in the variation pattern of the SP reach D that does not go through the reach, the big win specific action display is executed without the reach specific action display. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time saving state B, since it is less likely to be unnecessarily fanned, the suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, after the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 11-55(I), the reach state is not displayed, and the decorative pattern Although the display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C have been exemplified as a mode in which fixed decorative symbols that are a predetermined big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is started. A "movable body presentation" in which the movable body 32 falls may be executed without intervention of the player's operation until the fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined big winning combination are temporarily stopped and displayed. .

(Display mode of non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern)
Next, non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns are compared. FIG. 11-56 is a diagram for comparison of production operation examples of non-reach loss variation patterns. FIG. 11-57 is a diagram for comparing production operation examples of non-reach loss variation patterns. In the following, a detailed operation example of the specific operation display executed when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-56, when comparing the non-reach variation patterns of the shortening system, first, in the "super-shortening non-reach" that can be determined in the time saving state B, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of each At the same time, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (see FIG. 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed at the same time (see FIG. 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" that can be determined in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, the variable display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (Fig. 11-56 (B1) reference). Next, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 11-56 (B2)), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 11-56 (B3)), A decoration design is stopped and displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 11-56 (B4)).

As for the non-reach variation pattern of the shortening system in this way, in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, the variable display time is the shortened non-reach A with "3 seconds", and the decorative pattern is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds", which is super-shortened non-reach, and the left, right, and center decoration patterns are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-57, when comparing the non-reach out variation patterns, first, in the "non-reach A" that can be determined in the probability variation state, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Each decorative design is started at the same time. At this time, a “movable body advance notice” may be executed in which the movable body 32 moves up and down (see FIG. 11-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative design is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of characters such as "Reach?" "Notice" may be executed (see Fig. 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 11-57 (A3)), the decorative design is displayed at a reduced speed in the right decorative design display area 5R, "ready notice", and push. A button image 069SG441 imitating the button 31B and an operation prompting display 069SG442 such as "press and hold!" 57 (A4)). After that, a decorative design different from the left design is stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57 (A5)), and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 5C without going into the ready-to-win state. Then the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (A6)).

In addition, "non-reach A" (see Figure 11-57 (B1) to (B6)) that can be determined in the time saving state A is a non-reach deviation variation pattern that can be determined in the probability variable state (Figure 11-57 (A1 ) to (A6)), so the description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the "non-reach A" that can be determined in the time saving state B, after the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. C1), the decorative design display area 5L , 5C, and 5R are stopped at the same time, and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (C2)).

In this way, for the non-reach variation pattern, the probability variable state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B, the variable display time is common in "7 seconds", but in the probability changing state, the time saving state A, "movable body notice" , “Character notice”, “Reach notice” and “Button notice”, while the execution rate of various effects such as “Movable body notice”, “Character notice”, “Reach notice” and “Button The execution ratio of various effects such as "notice" is low (or not executed) compared to the case where the variable probability state or the time saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the super reach fluctuation patterns are compared. FIG. 11-58 is a diagram for comparison of an effect operation example of a super reach variation pattern. FIG. 11-59 is a diagram for comparing an example of the effect operation of the super reach variation pattern. FIG. 11-60 is a diagram for comparing an example of the effect operation of the post effect in the super reach variation pattern.

Hereinafter, based on FIGS. 11-58 and 11-59, when comparing the super reach fluctuation patterns, first, in the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach E" that can be determined in the time saving state A, the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C , and 5R, the variable display of the decoration patterns is started at the same time (see FIG. 11-58 (A1)). Next, a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of, for example, characters such as "Maybe reach!" "Character announcement" may be executed (see Fig. 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-58 (A3)). It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the ready-to-win state is reached, a "reach notice" or a "button notice" may be executed.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 consisting of a character image and character display such as "SP reach effect E" is displayed (see FIG. 11-58 (A4)). Also, at this time, the decorative designs variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right portion of the display screen of the image display device 5. FIG. Then, a "battle effect" is started in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character and the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character confront each other (see FIG. 11-58 (A5)).

Next, a predetermined time has passed since the battle presentation started, and the final showdown will begin (see FIGS. 11-59 (A6) and (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 simulating the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Start charging!", and a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed. is executed (see FIG. 11-59 (A8)). If the long press operation by the player is detected within the operation valid period during which the operation prompting display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 11-59 (A9)).

In addition, before displaying the button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B during or immediately before the effect period of the win/fail button effect, a preliminary effect (for example, a light gathering effect in which light gathers at the position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed) etc.) may be executable. Moreover, it is preferable that such a preliminary effect is not executed in the time saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the operation prompting display 069SG452 was started, the display of the operation prompting display 069SG452 is changed to "Release!!" to promote the release of the operation of the push button 31B. At the same time, the operation release operation time is displayed by the gauge display 069SG453 (see FIG. 11-59 (A10)). Then, the teammate character attacks at the timing when the release of the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without the release of the pressing operation being detected. is displayed, and the movable body 32 drops from the origin position to the vicinity of the intermediate position (see FIG. 11-59 (A11)).

Next, when the variable display result is a big win, the movable body performance is executed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position, and the image and the movable body 32 showing that the ally character's attack hit the enemy character are displayed. A movable body effect image 069SG456 consisting of an effect image for emphasis is displayed, and after the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), the enemy character is defeated and becomes an ally. A notification image 069SG457 indicating that the character has won the battle is displayed (see FIG. 11-59 (D2)), and the finalized decoration symbols that will be a predetermined big hit combination are temporarily stopped in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By being displayed, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit (see FIG. 11-59 (D3)).

11-60, the background image is switched to the fifth background image 069SG350, and the character image 069SG100C and the scheduled number of balls to be played in the jackpot game state are displayed. A number counter display 069SG460 is displayed and the post effect is started (see FIG. 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional pitch display 069SG461 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed on the number counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 11-60 (D5)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the scheduled pitch count counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B and a message such as "Press!!" An operation prompting display 069SG452 and a gauge display 069SG453 indicating the remaining operation effective period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect for prompting single-pressing of the push button 31B is executed (see FIG. 11-60 (D6)).

Next, at the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before a predetermined operation effective period elapses, or at the timing at which the operation valid period elapses without the pressing operation being detected, the teammate character attacks and the scheduled ball is released. The counter value of the number counter display 069SG460 is variably displayed (see FIG. 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 11-60 (D8)). Then, the scheduled number-of-balls-out counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the number of expected number of balls-out that can be obtained in the case of a "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed. (See Figure 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of a jackpot A or a jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is not updated, and is controlled to the jackpot game state. After the counter value displayed on the number-of-balls counter display 069SG460 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500", etc.) (see FIG. 11-60 (D10)), it is controlled to the jackpot game state.

When the result of the variable display is not shown in detail, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the performance position, and the enemy character is not knocked down. 11-59 (Fig. 11-59 ( D4)).

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP reach C" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the variable probability state, the variable display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 11). -58 (B1)). Next, at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect in which the display screen is displayed as a black screen is started (see FIG. 11-58 (B2)). After that, the variable display mode does not change to the ready-to-reach mode, and after the effects similar to those in FIGS. -59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP reach D" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (Fig. 11-58(C1)). Next, at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect is started in which the display screen is displayed as a black screen (see FIG. 11-58 (C2)). After that, the variable display mode does not change to the ready-to-reach mode, and the effect similar to that of FIG. (C3)), the same production as in FIG. 11-59 (A10-A11) is performed without the production of FIG. 11-59 (A8-A9) (see FIG. 11-59 (C4-C5) ). Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

(Example of control operation of super reach jackpot variation pattern)
Next, an example of the control operation of the big hit variation pattern of SP reach E, C, D will be compared based on FIG. 11-61. 11-61 is a timing chart showing an example of control operations in SP reach E, C, and D. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to (C), SP reach E, C, and D are obtained in a variable display part for executing variable display of decorative patterns and in a jackpot game state after the variable display part is finished. and a post-effect part for notifying the possible number of scheduled balls to be put out. In the variable display part, when the variable display is started, the above-mentioned "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", "button notice", etc. are executed, and after reaching the reach state, SP reach production "Battle production" and "Short battle production" are executed as. Then, at timing ta1, the "correction button effect" as the operation promoting effect is started in the "decision effect", and then at the timing ta2, the "movable object effect" is started. After that, after the result of the ``battle performance'' or ``short battle performance'' is notified, the confirmed decoration patterns which are the predetermined big win combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing ta3, and the big win specific action is displayed (big win pattern stop action. 11-55 (G)) is performed, the combination of the big hit confirmed symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing ta4 to notify that the big win has been achieved. After that, the post effect is executed during the period from timing ta5 to ta6.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP reach E that can be determined in time saving state A, 40 seconds for SP reach C that can be decided in variable state, and SP reach that can be decided in time saving state B. D is 25 seconds. On the other hand, the time (ta5 to ta6) of the post-effect part is 15 seconds in common for each of SP reach E, C, and D.

That is, the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state B (25 seconds) are different, while the time saving state A and The variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the probability variable state and the variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state B are common, and the time saving state A and the probability changing state and the time saving state B Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost by standardizing the post-production part while enhancing the production effect by giving different effects in the variable display part.

Also, the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state B (25 seconds) are different, while the time saving state A and The display time of the jackpot specific action display in the probability variable state (ta3 to ta4) and the display time of the jackpot specific action display in the time saving state B (ta3 to ta4) are common, so that various effects in the variable display part are different. The development cost can be reduced by sharing the display time of the big hit specific action display while enhancing the performance effect by having it.

Incidentally, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the "win/fail button effect" is common to the SP reach C and D, and only the SP reach E is different.

Further, the display control unit 123 generates image data (display data) for displaying the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area on the image display device 5 in the display image creating area. When performing display processing for outputting image data (display data) as a video signal, extended commands (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc.) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. (“X” is an arbitrary number)), and an extended command (for example, an extended command BXXX (“X ” generates an arbitrary number)) and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120 .

Based on the reception of the extension commands DXXX and SXXX, the effect control CPU 120 converts the operation control execution data of the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B described in the process data. Separately from the operation control based on the extension command DXXX, SXXX, the operation control for operating the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 for vibrating the push button 31B is started.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the extended command BXXX etc. separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data based on the reception of the extended command BXXX etc. Control for turning on/off the movable body LED 208 is started according to the lighting pattern (for example, refer to the light emission pattern shown in FIG. 13-6(B) in the characteristic portion 018SG).

Control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B and control data for lighting the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121 .

Here, control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A and the variable probability state And control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for controlling the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B are common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, an extended command (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. ("X" is an arbitrary number)) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. , extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX ("X" is an arbitrary number)) as lamp control information for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. Although the generated form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. On/off control of the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12, and control of the movable bodies such as the movable body 32 and the push button 31B are executed based on the extended command B000 as the lamp control information. may be made. In other words, lighting control and operation control may be performed using common control information (extension command).

In addition, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect", and in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, the "movable Since the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the motion of the movable body 32 in the "body effect" is common, the development cost can be reduced.

In addition, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" ( For example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000), and control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. (For example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000) are common, so development costs can be reduced.

In addition, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body motion control and the LED lighting control, there is no need to separate the extended command for the movable body motion control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. Control program capacity can be reduced. If the extension commands used for the movable body presentation are divided into an extension command for controlling the motion of the movable body and an extension command for controlling the lighting of the LED, there is a risk that one of the extension commands may be missed due to a problem. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the movable body effect.

In addition, an effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body production" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state (see movable body production image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) And the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body production" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B (see movable body production image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) By being common, the development cost can be reduced.

(Comparison between super reach fluctuation pattern and non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach variation pattern and the non-reach deviation variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-62. FIG. 11-62 is a diagram comparing a super reach variation pattern and a non-reach out of reach variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern to the stop display is the decoration pattern in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern. It is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from the start of variable display to the stop display.

In addition, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach loss variation pattern is the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the super reach loss variation pattern until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (tb0 By being shorter than tb3), the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until reaching the reach mode, so a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L to the stop display is the left in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern. Since the period (tb0 to tb2) from the start of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L to the stop display is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2), the variable display of the decorative design in the predetermined row is completed in a short period of time. A suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

(Rush performance)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the rush effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-63 and 11-64. 11-63, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the rush introduction effect, and (D) an effect operation example of the time-saving rush effect A. FIG. 11-64, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the variable probability rush effect and (B1) to (B4) of the short time rush effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C), in the “introduction effect”, the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and “BATTLE
Rush rush! ! , is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 by a predetermined number (for example, one character) and moved to the center of the display screen.

Then, an effect image 069SG470A that is maximized and the display color changes, and a character image 069SG470B consisting of characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" It is notified that the control of the time saving state A is started by performing the rush performance A".

In addition, in the case of "variable rush effect", after the rush image 069SG470 of FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed, as shown in FIG. After the probability variation image 069SG471 having a predetermined transmittance is displayed on a display layer higher than the rush image 069SG470, it gradually shrinks toward the lower left of the display screen and moves while the transmittance decreases. It will be displayed (see Fig. 11-64 (A2 to A3)).

Then, a "probability change rush effect" is performed in which a rush image 069SG472 consisting of a rush image 069SG470 and a probability change image 069SG471 displayed at the lower left of the display screen with a minimum size and a transmittance of 0% is displayed. , It is notified that control of the variable probability state is started (see FIG. 11-64 (A4)).

In addition, in the case of "time saving rush effect B", the "rush introduction effect" described in FIGS. 11-64 (B1) after the rush image 069SG470 of FIG. As shown, after the idle time image 069SG473A having a predetermined transmittance, which is composed of the characters "1100" and the effect image, is displayed on a display layer higher than the rush image 069SG470, it is directed toward the lower left of the display screen. 11-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, a rush image 069SG470, a play-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen with a minimum size and a transmittance of 0%, and a play-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "play" The start of the control of the time saving state B is notified by performing the “time saving rush effect B” in which the rush image 069SG473 consisting of the image 069SG473B is displayed (see FIG. 11-64 (B4)).

In this way, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability variable are used in the probability variable rush effect. While displaying the rush image 069SG472 consisting of the image 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, in the time saving rush effect B, the rush image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time saving state A and the probability variable state A common rush image 069SG470 is displayed, and idle time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started.

Therefore, in the time saving state B controlled after the variable display of a predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, in the time saving rush production B, the probability variable state and the time saving state A are controlled. Not only the rush image 069SG470 common to when it is started, but also the idle time image 069SG473B that is not displayed when the control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started is displayed, so the start of the time saving state B can be excited. .

[Embodiment 2]
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic portion 069SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-65 to 11-69. FIG. 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 11-66 is a diagram showing part of the variable display start setting process as the second embodiment in the characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 11-67 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11-68 is an example of the SP reach D effect operation. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of each game state. In the second embodiment, illustrations and detailed descriptions of the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment are omitted, and differences will be mainly described.

FIG. 11-65 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, (B) is a case where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 Specific example of variation pattern determination table for case loss, (C) Specific example of variation pattern determination table for big hit when number of pending memories is 0, (B) Big hit when number of pending memories is 1 to 3 4 shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for .

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 100 determination values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-65(B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to ultra-short non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP reach E, SP reach D 90 decision values are assigned.

In the present embodiment, when variable display of the variation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 is described in the first embodiment as a variable display effect "Short battle On the other hand, when the variable display of the variation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 does not use the “short battle effect” as the variable display effect, but the “immediate effect” described later. Execute "hit effect" or "full rotation effect".

In addition, the variation pattern of the SP reach D that can be determined in the variable probability state and the time saving state A is the reach variation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode after the variable display is started. On the other hand, the variation pattern of the SP reach D that can be determined in the time saving state B is "immediate hit production" or "full rotation production" without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode after the variable display is started. is the non-reach variation pattern performed.

Next, FIG. 11-66 is part of a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-44. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S069SGS271 to step S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting processing, and then, in step S069SGS277, the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is shortened non-reach. If it is determined that it is not a fluctuation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), reach notice execution decision processing of step 069SGS278 Before execution, the processing of steps 069SGS277A to step 069SGS277D is executed.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is the SP reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and is the SP reach D variation pattern. In that case (step 069SGS277A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B). And when it determines with a game state being the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), a variable display production|presentation pattern determination process is performed (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display effect pattern determination process, for example, a variable display effect pattern determination random number (0 to 99) is extracted, and a variable display effect pattern is determined using the variable display effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-67.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-67, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" for each of the "instant hit effect" and the "full rotation effect", the "jackpot A, B(6R)” are assigned different determination values so as to have the number of determination values shown in FIG. 11-67.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", 10 determination values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect", and 60 determination values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". is assigned. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)", 70 determination values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect", and 30 determination values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". assigned.

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the "immediate hit effect" and the "full rotation effect" are not executed in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and in the time saving state B It is a variable display effect that can be executed only in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and is executed by using the SP reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined.

In addition, the execution ratio of "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)" is higher than the execution ratio of "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)". On the other hand, the execution ratio of "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" is higher than "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)" ” execution rate. In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpots A, B (6R)" and is advantageous to the player because the expected number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state is larger, the "immediate hit performance" is performed. "Full rotation effect" is executed at a higher rate than.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the "immediate hit effect" and the "full spin effect" will be described. When the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, after the variable display mode has changed to the reach mode after the variable display is started, the ally character wins over the enemy character in the battle production. As a result, a "short battle effect" is executed to inform that the variable display result is a big hit (see FIGS. 11-58 to 11-59), but in the time saving state B, the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined. In this case, after the variable display is started, the variable display mode does not become the ready-to-win mode, and ``immediate winning performance'' or ``full rotation performance'' in which the variable display result is announced as a big hit is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, the "immediate hit effect" is, in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern, after the variable display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (Fig. 11- 68 (A1)), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the determined decoration symbols that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A2)). ). After that, in the "determination effect", an operation promoting effect for promoting the operation of the push button 31B is executed by displaying a button image simulating the push button 31B, an operation promoting display such as "Press!!", and a gauge display. A movable body effect image 069SG456 indicating that the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed, and a "movable body effect" is executed in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the vicinity of the intermediate position. (See Figure 11-68 (A3)). Then, the fixed decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A4)). After that, in the post-effect part, after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIG. be done.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, the "full rotation production" is, in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern, after the blackout production in which the display screen is displayed as a black screen with the start of the variable display is executed for a predetermined period (Fig. 11-68 (B1)), the variable display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the third background image 069SG330 is simultaneously started (see FIG. 11-68 (B2)). Then, when a predetermined time elapses, a full rotation display is started in which the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state in which the fixed decorative patterns that form a predetermined jackpot combination are aligned. (See Fig. 11-68 (B3)). After that, fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (B4)). After that, in the post-effect part (symbol confirmation period), after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIG. It is controlled to a jackpot game state.

Thus, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the variable display notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot without going through the reach mode after the variable display is started. A player can enjoy the SP ready-to-win performance with peace of mind without worrying about being stirred up by the ready-to-win performance by executing the ``immediate hit performance'' or the ``full rotation performance'' as the performance.

In addition, in the "immediate winning effect" or "full rotation effect", a button image imitating the push button 31B and "Press!!" ” and the operation prompting effect that promotes the operation of the push button 31B by displaying the operation prompting display and the gauge display, and the operation effect that requires the player to operate the push button 31B are not executed. , the player can preferably digest the variable display without prompting or performing troublesome operations.

(Various action examples by game state)
Next, examples of various operations for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-69. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining various operation examples for each game state. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 11-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three game states of "time saving state B", "variable probability state" and "time saving state A" are compared.

<Item D1>
First, regarding the ratio of determining the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern CPU103 does not go through the reach mode, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. The determination ratio of "SP reach D (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" that does not go through the reach mode in the case is "90%", and in the "variable state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), The determination ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is "5%", and in "time saving state A", Fig. 11-7 (C) , the determination ratio of "SP non-passing A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is "5%".

In addition, in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, "SP reach D" is a reach variation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed via the reach mode, and is not a non-reach variation pattern that does not go through the reach mode.

In other words, the ratio (for example, 90%) of "SP reach D big hit variation pattern (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A Higher than the ratio (for example, 5%) at which the "non-SP A jackpot variation pattern" is determined, and the ratio at which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the probability variation state is determined (for example, 5%).

According to the item (D1), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is not decided to control to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the form of the variable display to the ready-to-win form, the game is controlled to the big hit game state without being mischievously aroused, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ratio of "SP reach D big hit variation pattern (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined reach mode in the time saving state A and the probability variable state Although the form is exemplified by a higher ratio than the "SP non-passing A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state B , "SP reach D fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode may be determined at a rate of 100%.

<Item D2>
The effect control CPU 120 can execute a "win/fail button effect" as an action promoting effect for prompting the action of the player, for example, in the SP ready-to-win effect. It is possible to execute "movable body presentation".

Then, in the variable probability state or the time saving state A, when the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined, the production control CPU 120 executes the "win/fail button production" in the "decision production" in the variable display of the SP reach D. While the first performance execution pattern for executing the "movable body performance" is executed later, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined, the "immediate hit performance" in the variable display of the SP reach D. , the second effect execution pattern for executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect" is executed.

Therefore, when the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the execution ratio of the "immediate hit effect" that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "success button effect" is shown in the figure As shown in 11-65 (C), when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, it is "90%", and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the number of pending memories In the case of 0 to 3, it is "0%", and in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG.

In other words, in the time saving state B, the execution ratio (for example, 90%) of the "immediate hit effect" that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "win or fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (for example, 90%) is the time saving state A In the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern, the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect" is higher than It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable object effect" without executing the "button effect".

According to the item (D2), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is determined to control to the big hit game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big hit game state continued for a long time. Since the player is less likely to be urged to operate the push button 31B when the event is notified, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ratio of executing "immediate hit production" or "full rotation production" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B is the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A and the probability variable state Although a form higher than the ratio of executing "immediate hit production" or "full rotation production" is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time saving state B, the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern "immediate hit The ratio of executing "effect" or "full rotation effect" may be 100%.

<Item D3>
When the number of retained memories is 0, the CPU 103 determines the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or "shortened non-reach A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds). In the time-saving state B ”, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (A), when the number of pending memories is 0, it is “100%”, and in the “variable probability state”, as shown in FIG. , “0%” when the number of reserved memories is 0, and “0%” when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if the number of retained memories is 0, the CPU 103 will detect that the variable display time is longer than the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern. Reach variation, etc.), in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), when the number of pending memories is 0, it is "100%", and in "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the number of pending memories In the case of 0, it is "100%".

That is, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the variable probability state or the time saving state A, the variable display time is long to earn time to accumulate the pending memory in the second pending memory. While it is possible to determine non-reach of 7 seconds and SP reach fluctuation of 25 seconds and 40 seconds of fluctuation time), when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, the variable display time is long and the fluctuation pattern ( For example, a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time than non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds shortened non-reach) can be determined.

According to the item (D3), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, even if the number of pending memories is 0, A deviation variation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened variation pattern (for example, non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds, SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.) is determined, and the digestion speed of the variable display is determined. does not decrease, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

<Item D4>
In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in which a 6R round game is executed, and the degree of advantage for the player is higher than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" (for example, , the number of rounds, that is, the number of scheduled balls that can be obtained is large), or “jackpot C” (see FIG. 11-3(D)).

In addition, when the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 selects a special variable display pattern " It is possible to execute "full rotation effect".

In addition, the rate at which the production control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation production" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern is shown in FIG. 11-67, it is "90%", and in the "probability variable state", it is "0%" ("full rotation effect" is not executed) as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), and "time saving In state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7(C), it is "0%" ("full rotation effect" is not executed).

That is, when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the rate at which the production control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation production" (for example, 100%) is a big hit in the time saving state A When the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the type, the ratio of the production control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation production" (for example, 0% (non-execution)) is higher than the jackpot type in the variable probability state. is higher than the ratio (for example, 0% (non-execution)) at which the effect control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined.

According to the item (D4), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the number of rounds is greater than the jackpot A or jackpot B, considering that the period of not being controlled in the jackpot game state continued for a long time. If it is determined to control the jackpot C, which has a high degree of advantage for many players, it is not executed (or the execution ratio is low) in the normal state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state A. A special variable display "all Since "rotation effect" is easily executed, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the ratio of the production control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation production" is 100%. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the production control CPU 120 executes "full rotation production". If the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the "full rotation production" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the ratio is less than 100%. You may make it perform by the ratio. Moreover, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the production control CPU 120 may execute the "full rotation production".

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 069SG)
In the characteristic portion 069SG, as an example of the "advantageous state advantageous to the player", the form in which the big hit game state is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable probability state and the small win game state , Reach state, pseudo continuous effect state, pending continuous, chance up effect, pre-reading notice effect, loss with time saving, ceiling time saving control, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, a mode is exemplified in which a so-called pachinko game machine capable of being controlled to a variable probability state for a predetermined period after the end of the big win game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big win is achieved. When the type is a variable probability big hit, the pachinko game machine may be controlled in a variable probability state after the end of the big win game until it is controlled to the next big win, or it may be in the variable state after the end of the big win game until winning a variable probability drop lottery. It may be a pachinko game machine that is controlled. Also, a so-called 1 type and 2 types of game machine that can be controlled to a big win game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of the big win game may be applied, and the game characteristics can be changed in various ways. It is possible.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, as a special state with a higher execution frequency of variable display than the non-special state (for example, normal state), the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B are applied. The invention is not limited to this, and four or more game states other than the above may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 069SG, the first special state controlled when the controlled advantageous state ends from a non-special state (for example, normal state, low probability / low base state), and the advantageous state in the non-special state As a second special state that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed without being controlled by the 2nd special state))), but the present invention is not limited to this, high probability height base probability variable state (first special state) and low probability height base time saving state B (Relief time reduction (second special state)) may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, as the third special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends, a form in which the variable probability state is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention Is not limited to this, for example, if it is a pachinko game machine of one type and two types, a time saving state different from the time saving state as the first special state {for example, the execution of the time saving state than the first special state time-saving state with a large number of times (long control period), etc.} may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, at least one special state of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state is, for example, a plurality of types of different execution frequency of time reduction control, execution frequency of variable display, etc. It may have a special state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, as a non-special state, the normal state (low probability / low base state) was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is more than the special state is not limited to the low probability/low base state, but may be a high certainty base state, a low probability/high base state, or the like, as long as the game state has a low execution frequency.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, the time saving state B (relief time saving state) as the second special state is variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in the non-special state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be changed in various ways. Also, the control may be performed when another condition is established in addition to the above conditions.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probability variable state, the average normal pattern fluctuation time (the period during which the normal pattern is changed), the probability of becoming “per normal pattern” in the normal pattern game, the second Without changing the control (high open control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the 2 start winning opening, the average special figure fluctuation time (period of changing the special figure) in the time saving state B is changed to the probability variable state And the form of improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) by executing the control to be shortened than the time saving state A was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B , the average normal figure fluctuation time (period of changing the normal figure), the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening (high open control, By making at least one of the high base control different from the variable probability state or the time saving state A, the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) may be further improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, the CPU 103 sets the variable display mode as a specific mode (eg, reach mode) as a variation pattern, and displays a display result deviated from the first non-specific variable display pattern (eg, "SP reach A ~E miss", etc.) and a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach miss", etc.) that displays the result of the miss display without specifying the variable display mode as a specific mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specified variable display pattern and the second non-specified variable display pattern may include variations patterns of types other than the above. In addition, as a variation pattern, a first specific variable display pattern (eg, "SP reach A to C, E big hit", etc.) that displays a display result out of the variable display mode as a specific mode (eg, reach mode), A second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) that displays the result of the display without specifying the variable display mode is determined. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include variations patterns of types other than those described above.

In addition, the “specific mode” is not limited to the “reach mode”, and includes, for example, a “chance mode (eg, “133”), a “quasi-continuous mode (eg, 122)”, and a “normal reach mode.” Various aspects such as "aspect" and "super reach aspect" may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, as a suggestive effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to a big hit, a form in which "notice of movable body" or "notice of character" is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. If it is a production that suggests that it is controlled to a jackpot game state, for example, it includes various productions such as stop pattern notice, pseudo consecutive notice, dialogue notice, operation notice, reach notice, and look-ahead notice production. You can

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, as a pre-reading forewarning effect suggesting that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory is controlled in an advantageous state, "countdown notice", "holding change notice", and "symbol chance notice" are provided. , Although the form in which "effect display notice" is applied has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, even if it includes various reading notices such as "continuous effect" and "prediction effect" good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 069SG, the mode in which the "button notice" and the "win/fail button effect" are applied as the action promoting effect to prompt the player's action was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may include various productions other than. Also, the "player's action" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, but is an effect prompting the operation of other operation means (for example, a touch panel) provided other than the push button 31B, or an operation Instead, it may be an effect that encourages the action (movement) of the player.

Further, in the characteristic part 069SG, as an example of the first effect execution pattern in which the "appropriate button" as the action promotion effect is executed and then the "movable body effect" as the specific effect is executed, "Pattern A-2, A-3 ” is applied, and as an example of the second effect execution pattern in which the specific effect is executed without executing the action promotion effect, the form in which the “pattern A-1” is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, other operation promotion effects such as "button notice" may be applied as action promotion effects, and effects other than "movable body effects" (for example, battle results in SP reach effects, etc.) may be applied as specific effects. You may

In addition, in the characterizing section 069SG, as the first action promotion effect prompting the player to perform one action, a mode is exemplified in which the operation promotion display of the "hit" operation is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of prompting the player to perform a single push operation, it may be possible to prompt the player to perform a single pull operation, a rotating operation, a reciprocating operation, or the like.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, a mode is exemplified in which the operation prompting display of the “continuous hit” or “long press” operation is applied as the second motion prompting effect to prompt the player to perform the motion over a predetermined motion period. The invention is not so limited and may facilitate pulling, rotating, reciprocating, etc., over a predetermined period of motion. Further, the motion over a predetermined motion period is not necessarily limited to continuously detected motion, and may include an intermittent operation, an operation according to a predetermined pattern, and the like.

In addition, in the characterizing section 069SG, a mode is exemplified in which "character notice" and "reach notice" are applied as a production including a stimulating production for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is to be a specific mode, but the present invention is this. However, it is not limited to "chance mode (for example, "133" etc.)", "pseudo consecutive mode (for example, 122 etc.)", "normal reach mode", "super reach mode". It may include various effects such as.

Further, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the post-effect, the expected number of balls to be put out is reported as game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value to be given in an advantageous state in which control in the specific effect is notified. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state (eg, 6R, 10R, etc.) may be reported. In addition, in the state where the jackpot is continuous, such as when the jackpot occurs in the variable probability state, the planned total number of balls obtained by adding the scheduled number of balls for this big hit and the total number of balls won during the predetermined period of the jackpot The number of balls or the like may be displayed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 069SG, when the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to inform the start of the control of the special state. , time-saving rush performance A, time-saving rush performance B, and shutter performance have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various rush performances other than the above may be executed. Also, the effect mode of each rush effect is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, a form in which the variable probability rush effect and the short time rush effect A are separately shown is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable probability rush effect and the short time rush effect A may be used as one common rush effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 069SG, when the time-saving rush effect B is executed, the rush introduction effect is not executed. may be executed. Also, when the time-saving rush performance B is executed, the rush introduction performance may be executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the troublesomeness of the performance, it is preferable to set a rush introduction performance with a short performance period as compared with the case where the variable probability rush performance or the time-saving rush performance A is executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, as an example of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous state, the jackpots A and B ( 1st advantageous state) and the jackpot C (second advantageous state) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantage for the player is higher than the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state means not only the jackpot that is highly advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state, such as the number of game rounds and the number of balls that can be obtained, but also the game state after the jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It may be a big hit (for example, a big hit with a long time-saving control after the big hit game state, or a "small hit rush" in which the frequency of execution of the small hit game state increases after the end of the big hit, etc.). .

(Description of Characteristic Portion 099SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion 099SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-22. In addition, in this characterizing portion 099SG, illustrations and detailed descriptions of the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion 069SG are omitted, and differences are mainly described. Further, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 069SG.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG is formed in the left game area where game balls can flow down on the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, like the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. The right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area in which game balls can flow down. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 099SG, the game ball weakly launched by the shooting device due to the game state being the normal state flows down the first path of the left game area, and the game state is the time saving state. A, the time-saving state B, or the variable probability state causes the game ball strongly launched by the launcher to flow down the second path in the right game area. Also, part of the game balls flowing down the second path in the right game area can pass through a gate 41 provided on the second path (to the right of the image display device 5). Based on passing through 41, the variable display of normal symbols is executed. Then, the second starting winning port provided on the second path changes from the closed state to the open state based on the variable display result of the normal pattern becoming a hit (normal pattern winning), and the second start A game ball can win a prize in the winning opening. In addition, in the characteristic portion 099SG, "variable display" may be described as "fluctuation" or "variable display".

FIG. 12-1(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 099SG. As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), in this characteristic portion 099SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern determination Numerical data representing the random number MR3, the random number MR4 for judging the result of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for judging the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65535". The random value MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is a random value used to determine the type of jackpot when the variable display result is "jackpot" to be one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C". and takes a value in the range of, for example, "0" to "299".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 99”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number MR5 for determining the initial value of the random number MR4 is a random number used to determine the initial value of the random number MR4, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23".

FIG. 12-1 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 099SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature part 099SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for judging the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic portion 099SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then the probability of being determined (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 099SG) is higher than the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state (in this feature part 099SG about 1/80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

12-1 (C1) and FIG. 12-1 (C2) show a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In FIG. 12-1 (C1), when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" and the game state is controlled to the big hit game state at the time of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the random number MR2 for judging the big hit type is set. 12-1 (C2) is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type from the jackpot A and the jackpot B, and FIG. '' to determine the big win type from the big win B and the big win C based on the random number value MR2 for judging the big win type.

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic portion 099SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-1(D). In this characteristic portion 099SG, as the jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 times of variable display after the jackpot game state ends. Also, these jackpots A, jackpots B, and jackpots C are maximized after the jackpot game ends by entering the V prize opening after the game ball enters the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probability variable control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this characteristic part 099SG, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) is a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open state period and a long open state with a long open period. state (eg, 15 seconds). In the big win A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the big wins B and C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. and

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot A'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial normal jackpot.

In the jackpot game state by the ``big win B'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot C'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two or less jackpot types, or Four or more types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B1), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. , and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B2), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

That is, in this characteristic part 099SG, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state at a rate of 50%. Both the variable probability control and the time saving control are carried out after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the big win game state with a probability of 100%, so that the probability change control is performed after the big win game ends. and time saving control are both implemented.

In this characteristic part 099SG, even if the jackpot A is achieved, it is possible to win the V prize when the V lid is in a short open state, but it is extremely rare, so when the jackpot A is achieved will be described assuming that no V prize is won and variable probability control is not executed. Also, even in the case of the big win B and the big win C, it is possible that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, but it is extremely rare, so the big win B and the big win C are made. In this case, it is assumed that the V prize is won and the variable probability control is executed.

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

FIG. 12-2(A) shows whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal pattern hit) based on the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol when the game state is the normal state. It is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referred to for determining whether, and FIG. A normal symbol hit determination table referred to for determining whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal pattern hit) based on the execution of the variable display.

In addition, the time saving state B in this feature part 099SG is a game state in a normal state (low probability / low base state where neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed) Variable 900 times without being controlled to a big hit game state It is a game state controlled when the display is performed, and is a time saving state A (low probability/high base state) in which time saving control is performed over a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), of the range 3 to 13 of the random number value MR4 for normal symbol hit determination, 3 is assigned to hit and 4 to 13 are assigned to lose. ing. On the other hand, in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(B), 3 to 12 of the range 3 to 13 of the random number value MR4 for normal symbol hit determination are assigned to the hit, and 13 is assigned to the hit. assigned to the outskirts. That is, in the present characteristic portion 099SG, the ratio of the normal pattern when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B is higher than the ratio of the normal pattern when the game state is the normal state. is set too high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), the normal pattern variation time when the game state is the normal state is set to 60 seconds, while the game state is the time saving state A, the probability variable state , and the time-saving state B, the normal pattern variation time is set to 0.1 second. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning opening is set to 0.1 second when a normal game win occurs when the game state is the normal state. On the other hand, when the game state is one of the time-saving state A, probability variable state, and time-saving state B, the opening time of the second starting winning port is set to 3 seconds when a normal game hit occurs.

In other words, the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B in this characteristic portion 099SG are compared to the normal state, "the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high", "the variable display time of the normal symbol is short", " Due to the long opening time of the second starting winning opening when the hit of the normal symbol occurs, the game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening, that is, the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Although it is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time-saving state B are compared to the normal state. Variable display of the second special symbol by satisfying at least one of the following conditions: the variable display time of the symbol must be short, and the opening time of the second start winning opening is long when the win of the normal symbol occurs. may be set to have a high execution frequency.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 099SG is similar to the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 069SG (see FIG. 11-1), when the game state is the normal state, the player moves the game ball to the left game area 2L. While the game ball can win the first start prize opening by hitting toward, it is impossible to win the second start prize opening, the big prize opening, pass through the gate 41, etc., and the game ball is time saving. In any of the state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B, the game ball can enter the second start winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the right game area 2R and the gate 41. can pass through. In addition, when the game state is the jackpot game state, the game ball can enter the second start winning hole and the big winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the right game area, and the gate 41 can be passed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-12(A), when the game state is the normal state, the game ball launched toward the left game area 2L is started and won by a plurality of nails or the like arranged on the game board 2. is obstructed, the winning probability of the game ball into the first start winning hole is about 5.5% (continuation by the player's operation of the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). The condition is that the game ball is launched to the left game area 2L. Further, when the game state is the normal state, even if the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal symbols due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is 60 seconds, which is extremely high. As long as it is long, the opening time of the second start winning opening when a normal game hit occurs is extremely short at 0.1 seconds (see FIGS. 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D)), so the game ball Winning to the second start winning opening almost never occurs.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (B), the game ball launched toward the right game area 2R when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B, the gate 41 It is possible to pass through, and the variable display time of the normal pattern due to passing through the gate 41 is as short as 3 seconds. Figure 12-2 (C), Figure 12-2 (D) reference), the winning probability of the game ball to the second start winning opening is about 55% (player's hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) The condition is that the game ball is continuously launched to the right game area 2R by the operation of 30).

FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing variation patterns used in variable display of the special symbols of the characteristic portion 099SG. In this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIG. Reach A missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time shortened by 5000 ms Non-reach B missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time 7000 ms Non-reach A missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time 12000 ms Non-reach B missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time 45000 ms Super reach Missing A, Missing Super Reach B with special figure fluctuation time of 80000ms, Missing Super Reach C with special figure variation time of 4000ms, Missing Super Reach D with special figure variation time of 25000ms, Missing Super Reach E with special figure variation time of 50000ms Each variation pattern is provided. It should be noted that the variation pattern of super reach A lost to super reach E lost is also a variation pattern for executing a super reach performance during variable display.

In addition, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a big hit, there is a 15000ms jackpot notification period after the variable display of 7000ms in which the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (special figure fluctuation time is 7000ms + 15000ms) without super reach After the variable display of 12000 ms in which the ready-to-reach performance of A big hit and super reach is not executed, there is a jackpot notification period of 15000 ms (special figure fluctuation time is 12000 ms + 15000 ms) B 45000 ms in which the ready-to-reach effect of big hit and super reach is executed After the variable display, it has a jackpot notification period of 15000ms (special figure fluctuation time is 45000ms + 15000ms) Super reach A jackpot, super reach reach effect is executed After the variable display of 80000ms, it has a jackpot notification period of 15000ms (special Figure fluctuation time is 80000ms + 15000ms) super reach B jackpot, super reach C jackpot with 15000ms jackpot notification period after 40000ms variable display in which super reach reach effect is executed (special figure fluctuation time is 40000ms + 15000ms), After the 25000ms variable display in which the ready-to-win performance of super-reach is executed, there is a jackpot notification period of 15000ms (the special figure fluctuation time is 25000ms+15000ms). Each variation pattern of super reach E jackpot is provided after (special figure variation time is 50000ms + 15000ms) having a jackpot notification period of 15000ms. The variation pattern of the super reach A is a variation pattern in which a bowling effect is executed to notify whether or not a jackpot is won by bowling between a friend character and an enemy character as a reach effect, and a super reach B. , Super Reach C, and Super Reach E are variation patterns for executing a battle rendition for informing whether or not a jackpot is won by a battle between a friend character and an enemy character as a reach rendition, and In the super reach D variation pattern, a friend character and an enemy character perform a battle shorter than the battle performance in the variation patterns of the super reach B, super reach C, and super reach E to win a big hit as a reach performance. It is a variation pattern that executes a short battle effect that informs whether or not there is.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 099SG, there is a game control data holding area 099SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 12-4 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 099SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 099SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 099SG153, a game control counter setting unit 099SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 099SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit value that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 099SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit value that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 099SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In other words, in this characteristic unit 099SG, as the first special figure pending storage (suspended storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A), it is possible to store a maximum of four pending storages, and the second special figure pending storage A maximum of four pending memories can be stored as (holding memories that can be stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B).

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

Incidentally, when executing the variable display, the CPU 103, first, if there is a second special figure pending memory in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6), random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B are shifted. That is, the CPU 103, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 of the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B, the random values stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 The values of MR1 to random number MR3 are read, the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 is erased, and the reservation memory stored as the reservation memory of the reservation number 2 is set as the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 and the reservation memory of the reservation number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Moreover, CPU103 determines whether the 1st special figure reservation memory exists, when the reservation memory is not memorize|stored in 2nd special figure reservation storage part 099SG151B. When the first special figure reservation storage exists, after reading the random values MR1 to MR3 from the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A, shift the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A. That is, the CPU 103, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 of the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A, the random values stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 The values of MR1 to random number MR3 are read, the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 is erased, and the reservation memory stored as the reservation memory of the reservation number 2 is set as the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 and the reservation memory of the reservation number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B (if the variable display result is a big hit, the random value Judgment of jackpot type based on MR2) is executed), in the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 6), a variation pattern that differs according to the number of pending memories of the game state, the variable display result, and the special symbol that executes the variable display A decision table is used to determine a variation pattern.

That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory just before the variable display.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 099SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 099SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the aforementioned ball-out state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 099SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the variation pattern determination table used when performing variable display of special symbols will be described. As shown in FIGS. 12-5 to 12-11, in this characterizing section 099SG, the game state when the variable display of the special symbols is executed and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display of the special symbols A variation pattern can be determined using a different variation pattern determination table depending on the situation.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 0 to 2, the loss variation shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) Using the pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B loss, super reach A loss, and super reach B loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, among the numerical values that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment, 97 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach B deviation, and two numerical values are Super reach A is assigned to the variation pattern of loss, and one numerical value is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach B. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is off, and the number of pending memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern is 97% of the non-reach B deviation variation pattern. At a rate of 2%, super reach A is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 1%, super reach B is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss shown in FIG. 12-5 (B) is changed. Using this, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of short non-reach B deviation, super reach A deviation, and super reach B deviation. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, 97 numerical values among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach B loss, and two numerical values is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach A missing, and one numerical value is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach B missing. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 97% of the variation pattern is shortened non-reach B. At a rate of 2%, the super reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation, and at a rate of 1%, super reach B is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation.

In addition, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display (even if the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, it is common d), using the big hit variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super reach non-passing B big hit, the super reach A big hit, and the super reach B big hit. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 10 values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned to the variation pattern of B big hit without super reach, and 40 values. are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach A jackpot, and 50 numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach B jackpot. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, the variation pattern is determined to be the B jackpot variation pattern without super reach at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 40%. , it is determined to be a super reach A jackpot variation pattern, and at a rate of 50%, it is determined to be a super reach B jackpot variation pattern.

In addition, if the game state is a variable probability state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 0, the variation pattern determination table C for loss shown in FIG. 12-6 (A) A variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A deviation, super reach C deviation, and super reach deviation D. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach A deviation, and two numerical values are Super reach C is assigned to the variation pattern of loss, and three numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach A failure variation pattern at a rate of 95%. Then, the super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 2%, and the super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the game state is a variable probability state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. Using table D, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of short non-reach A loss, non-reach A loss, super reach C loss, and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss D, 80 numerical values among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the shortened non-reach A loss, and 15 numerical values is assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach A, two numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach C, and three numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern is 80% at a rate of 80%. It is determined, non-reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 15%, super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 2%, and super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 3%. be.

In addition, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. Using Table E, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of short non-reach A loss, non-reach A loss, super reach C loss, and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss E, 90 numerical values among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the shortened non-reach A loss, and 5 numerical values is assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach A, two numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach C, and three numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is 90% at a rate of 90%. It is determined, non-reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 5%, super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 2%, and super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 3%. be.

In addition, if the game state is a variable probability state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols to execute the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. Using Table F, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortening non-reach A, super reach C deviation, and super reach D deviation. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss F, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A loss, and 2 numerical values is assigned to the super reach C deviation variation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the super reach D deviation variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 95% of the variation pattern is shortened non-reach A deviation. At a rate of 2%, the super reach C is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 3%, the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

As described above, regarding the variable display in which the variable display result is lost in the probability variable state, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs according to the reserved memory number of the special symbol for executing the variable display. That is, in the definite variable state in this characteristic part 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost is the number of pending memories of the special symbol to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol is the first special symbol The number of pending memories stored in the pending memory unit 099SG151A, and the number of pending stores stored in the second special figure pending memory unit 099SG151B if the variable display of the second special symbol are different.

In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in FIG. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the via A jackpot, the super reach C jackpot, and the super reach D jackpot. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the variation pattern of A big hit without super reach, and 80 values are assigned. A numerical value is assigned to the super reach C jackpot variation pattern, and 15 numerical values are assigned to the super reach D jackpot variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is a probability variable state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, the variation pattern of the A big hit without super reach is determined at a rate of 5%, and the super reach is determined at a rate of 80%. It is determined to be a C jackpot variation pattern, and is determined to be a super reach D jackpot variation pattern at a rate of 15%.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols to perform the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table G, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A loss and super reach E loss. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table G, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach A deviation, and 5 numerical values are Super Reach E is assigned to the deviation variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of pending memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is 95% of the non-reach A variation pattern. It is determined, and the super reach E is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 5%.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table H, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of short non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table H, 85 numerical values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A deviation, and 10 numerical values is assigned to the non-reach A-missing variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super-reach E-missing variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern is 85%. At a rate of 10%, the non-reach A is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 5%, the super reach E is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. Using the judgment table I, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of short non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table I, 90 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A deviation, and 5 numerical values is assigned to the non-reach A-missing variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super-reach E-missing variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is 90%. At a rate of 5%, the non-reach A is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 5%, the super reach E is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table J, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the shortened non-reach A deviation and the super reach D deviation. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss J, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of shortened non-reach A loss, and 5 numerical values is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 95% of the variation pattern. , and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 5%.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs according to the reserved memory number of the special symbol for executing the variable display. That is, in the time saving state A in the characteristic portion 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost is the number of pending memories of the special symbols to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special The number of pending memories stored in the figure pending storage unit 099SG151A, the number of pending storage stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B if the variable display of the second special symbol) is different.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state A and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in FIG. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of non-passing A jackpot and super reach E jackpot. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table C, among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the A big hit without super reach, and 95 values. Numerical values are assigned to variation patterns of the Super Reach E jackpot. In other words, if the game state is time saving state A and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, the variation pattern is determined to be the A big hit variation pattern without super reach at a rate of 5%, and 95% It is determined by the ratio to the super reach E jackpot variation pattern.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table K, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B deviation and super reach D deviation. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table I, 97 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the non-reach B deviation variation pattern, and 3 numerical values are Super Reach D is assigned to the deviation variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of pending memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is 97% of the non-reach B variation pattern. It is determined, and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table L, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of super-short non-reach loss and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss L, 97 numerical values among the numerical values that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss, and 3 numerical values is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern is 97%. , and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 3%.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table M, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of super-short non-reach loss and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss M, 99 numerical values among the numerical values that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss, and one numerical value is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is 99%. , and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 1%.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table N, the variation pattern is determined only from the ultra-shortened unreachable deviation variation pattern. In the losing variation pattern determination table N, 100 numerical values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach losing variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 100%. is determined by

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs according to the reserved memory number of the special symbol for executing the variable display. That is, in the time saving state B in the characteristic portion 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost is the number of pending memories of the special symbols to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol is the first special The number of pending memories stored in the figure pending storage unit 099SG151A, the number of pending storage stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B if the variable display of the second special symbol) is different.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in FIG. Only the variation pattern of the D jackpot is determined. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table D, 100 numerical values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned to the super reach D big hit variation pattern. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined to be the super reach D big hit variation pattern at a rate of 100% regardless of the number of pending memories.

Here, time saving state A in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic portion 099SG, time saving state B, period values in the variable probability state will be described based on FIGS. 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (A) and 12-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state A is the period value α, the period value α is A × It is calculated by the value of a+B×b+C×c+D×d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A, a is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state A, b is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, c is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure pending memory is 2 in the time reduction state A to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A is out, d is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays of the time saving state A. It should be noted that the variable display period in which the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 099SG is different refers to the period from the variable display start timing of the special symbol to the variable display end timing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (B) and 12-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the case where the game state is the time saving state B is the period value β, the period value β is E × It is calculated by the value of e+F×f+G×g+H×h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B, f is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, g is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 2 in the time reduction state B to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state B is out, h is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (C) and 12-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the case where the game state is the variable probability state is the period value γ, the period value γ is I × i + J It is calculated by the value of xj+Kxk+Lxl. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state is out, i is the second special figure pending storage when the number is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j is in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state is the average variation time when is out, k is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 110 variation display of the probability variation state, H is the second special in the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of figure pending memories is 3, l is the 110 times variation of the probability variable state when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state It is a percentage of the display.

Above, from FIGS. 12-13 (A) to 12-13 (C), substituting the numerical value in this characteristic part into each algebra A to L and a to l, the period value α in time saving state A, in time saving state B When the period value β and the period value γ in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value α is a value larger than the period value β, and the period value γ is a value larger than the period value β (α>β, γ> β).

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability changing state. do. As shown in FIGS. 12-14 (A) and 12-23, when the average fluctuation time of 1100 fluctuations when the gaming state is the time saving state A is the period value α', the period value α' is It is calculated by the value of A*a'+B*b'+C*c'+D*d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A, a ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A is out, b ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display of the time saving state A, C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, c' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state A 1100 times of the time saving state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A, d ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state A is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (B) and 12-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the case where the game state is the time saving state B is the period value β ', the period value β ' is It is calculated by the value of Exe'+Fxf'+Gxg'+Hxh'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is out, f' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B, G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, g' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state B 1100 times of the time saving state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B, h ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state B is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state B.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (C) and 12-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state is the period value γ', the period value γ' is It is calculated by the value of xi'+Jxj'+Kxk'+Lxl'. Here, I is the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state, i ' is when the second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 1100 variable displays of the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j' is the probability variable The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 in the state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variation when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state The average variation time when the display result is out, k 'is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 1100 variation display of the probability variation state, H is in the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, l' is the probability variation state when the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 3 is the probability variation state This is the ratio of 1100 times of fluctuation display.

Above, from FIGS. 12-14 (A) to 12-14 (C) and 12-23, the numerical value in this feature is substituted for each algebra A to L and a' to l 'Period in time saving state A When the value α ', the period value β ' in the time saving state B, and the period value γ ' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value α 'is a value larger than the period value β ', and the period value γ' is the period value β (α'>β', γ'>β').

Next, attention will be paid to the case of executing the variable display 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (A) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that every 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is executed is 3 is the period value δ, the period value δ is calculated by the value of D×110. Here, D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state A as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (B) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state A If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed is 3 is the period value ε, the period value ε is calculated by the value of H×110. Here, H is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state B as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (C) and 12-23, the player always continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., 110 times of fluctuation in the variable probability state , When the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value ζ, the period value ζ is calculated by the value of L × 110. Here, L is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability fluctuation state as described above.

Above, from FIGS. 12-15 (A) to 12-15 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra D, H, and L, the period value δ in the time saving state A, the period value in the time saving state B When ε and the period value ζ in the probability variable state are calculated, the period value δ is a value larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is a value larger than the period value ε (δ>ε, ζ>ε). .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (A) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value δ', then the period value δ' is calculated by the value of D × 1100 . Here, D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state A as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (B) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and every 1100 fluctuations in the time saving state B Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value ε ', the period value ε ' is calculated by the value of H × 1100 . Here, H is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state B as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (C) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 times of fluctuations are made in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value ζ ', the period value ζ ' is calculated by the value of L × 1100. Here, L is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability fluctuation state as described above.

Above, from FIGS. 12-16 (A) to 12-16 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra D, H, and L, and the period value δ ' in the time saving state A, the period in the time saving state B When the value ε' and the period value ζ' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value δ' is larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ' is larger than the period value ε' (δ' >ε', ζ'>ε').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (A) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state A When the period value of the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is executed in a state of 2 is set to η, the period value η is calculated by the value of C×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (B) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B Variation, average variation when executed in a state where the number of second special figure reserved memories is 2 110 times of variation display when the number of second special figure reserved memories is always 2 at the time of execution of fluctuation display Assuming that the average fluctuation time is the period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (C) and 12-23, the player always continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., 110 times in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 is the period value ι, the period value ι is calculated by the value of K×110.

Above, from FIGS. 12-17 (A) to 12-17 (C), substituting the numerical value in this characteristic part into each algebra C, G, K, period value η in time saving state A, period value in time saving state B θ, when calculating the period value ι in the probability variable state, the period value η is a value larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value larger than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ) .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (A) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Variation, the average variation time when it is executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 is period value η ', the period value η ' is calculated by the value of C × 1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (B) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed in a state of 2 is the period value θ', the period value θ' is calculated by the value of G×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (C) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 times of fluctuations are made in the variable probability state. , The period value ι' is calculated by the value of K×1100, assuming that the average fluctuation time when the game is executed in the state where the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 is the period value ι'.

Above, from FIGS. 12-18 (A) to 12-18 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra C, G, and K, and the period value η ' in time saving state A, the period in time saving state B When the value θ' and the period value ι' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value η' is larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι' is larger than the period value θ' (η' >θ', ι'>θ').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (A) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state A If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed is 1 is the period value κ, the period value κ is calculated by the value of B×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (B) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B The period value λ is the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is 1, and the period value λ is calculated by the value of F×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (C) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes 110 times in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is the period value μ, the period value μ is calculated by the value of J × 110.

Above, from FIGS. 12-19 (A) to 12-19 (C), substituting the numerical value in this characteristic part into each algebra B, F, and J, the period value κ in the time saving state A, the period value in the time saving state B λ, when calculating the period value μ in the variable probability state, the period value κ is a value larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is a value larger than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ) .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (A) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. The period value κ' is calculated by the value of B×1100, assuming that the average fluctuation time is the period value κ' when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is 1.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (B) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B Fluctuation, the average fluctuation time when it is executed in the state that the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is the period value λ ', the period value λ ' is calculated by the value of F × 1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (C) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 times of fluctuations are made in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is the period value μ ', the period value μ ' is calculated by the value of J × 1100.

Above, from Figures 12-20 (A) to Figure 12-20 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra B, F, and J, and the period value κ ' in time saving state A, the period in time saving state B When the value λ' and the period value μ' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value κ' is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ' is larger than the period value λ' (κ' >λ', μ'>λ').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (A) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state A If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed in a state of 0 is the period value ν, the period value ν is calculated by the value of A × 110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (B) and 12-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending memories is 0 is set to the period value ξ, the period value ξ is calculated by the value of E×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (C) and 12-23, the player always continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., 110 times in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is the period value π, the period value π is calculated by the value of I × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-21 (A) to 12-21 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra A, E, and I, and the period value ν in the time saving state A, the period value in the time saving state B When ξ and the period value π in the stochastic state are calculated, the period value ν is a value larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π becomes a value larger than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ) .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (A) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that every 1100 fluctuations in the time saving state A Variation, the average variation time when it is executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is period value ν ', the period value ν ' is calculated by the value of A × 1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (B) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that every 1100 fluctuations in the time saving state B The period value ξ' is calculated by the value of E × 1100 when the average variation time when the variation and the second special figure pending memory number are executed is 0.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (C) and 12-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 times of fluctuations are made in the variable probability state. , The period value π' is calculated by the value of I × 1100, when the average fluctuation time when the second special figure pending storage number is executed in the state of 0 is the period value π'.

Above, from FIGS. 12-22 (A) to 12-22 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra A, E, and I, and the period value ν ' in the time saving state A, the period in the time saving state B When the value ξ' and the period value π' in the variable state are calculated, the period value ν' is larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π' is larger than the period value ξ' (ν' >ξ', π'>ξ').

Next, when the test shooting test of the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature part 099SG is performed for 10 hours, the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, the actual shooting value in the probability variable state (number of game balls fired, special figure 1 start Number of winning prizes, number of starting prizes for special 2, number of special 1 fluctuation display, number of special 2 fluctuation display, total special 1 fluctuation time, total special 2 fluctuation time) and pachinko obtained from these shooting values Design values of the gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 12-24(A) and 12-24(B). In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the total time of the test shooting test time of the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state is less than 10 hours because the remaining time is in the jackpot game state. There is. In addition, the shooting value in the normal state is a condition that the game ball is continuously launched to the left game area 2L by operating the hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30, and in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability variable state The actual shooting value is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously hit to the right game area 2R by operating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), in the normal state, the test shooting test time is 346.08 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 34580, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 1939 times, the special figure 2 start opening The number of times of winning is 0 times, the number of times of special figure 1 fluctuation display is 1883 times, the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 0 times, the total special figure 1 fluctuation time is 23840 seconds, and the total special figure 2 fluctuation time is 0 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state A, the test shooting test time is 77.00 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 7676, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 0 times, the special figure 2 start opening number of wins is 4371 times, special figure 1 The number of fluctuation display is 0 times, the number of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 658 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 3548 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state B, the test shooting test time is 14.96 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 1494, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 0, the number of special figure 2 start opening wins is 821 times, the special figure 1 The number of fluctuation display is 0 times, the number of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 594 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 954 seconds. In addition, in the variable state, the test shooting test time is 116.00 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 11515, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 0 times, the number of special figure 2 start opening wins is 6556 times, the special figure 1 fluctuation The number of times of display is 0 times, the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 987 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual shooting values, as a design value for the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIG. Minutes, special figure 1 winning rate is 5.6 / minute, special figure 2 winning rate is 0 / minute, average special figure 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated as 0 seconds ing. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in the time saving state A is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / minute, the average special figure 1 It is calculated that the fluctuation time is 0 seconds and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in the time saving state B is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 54.8 / minute, the average special figure 1 It is calculated that the fluctuation time is 0 seconds and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in the probability variable state is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / minute, the average special figure 1 fluctuation It is calculated that the time is 0 seconds and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 4.445 seconds.

In addition, when comparing the special figure 2 winning rate in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, only the special figure 2 winning rate in the time saving state B is different, but this is because the number of game balls fired in the time saving state B is different. This is due to the error caused by less than two states of

Here, based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in Figure 12-24, the average fluctuation time in the normal state, time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variable state is actually calculated.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (A), in the normal state, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result when the first special figure pending memory number is 0 is lost, and the first special figure pending memory number For the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number is 1, and the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the first special figure reservation memory number is 2, the first special figure reservation memory number is 0 12000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1/ It is calculated as 100=13340 (ms). Also, regarding the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of first special figure pending storage is 3, the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of first special figure pending storage is 3 and these variation patterns From the determined ratio (see FIG. 12-5(B)), it is calculated as 5000 (ms)×97/100+45000 (ms)×2/100+80000 (ms)×1/100=6550 (ms).

In addition, when calculating the ratio of the variable display executed in each case where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0 to 3 based on the normal state shown in Fig. 12-24 (A), Fig. 12-25 (B ), the percentage of the variable display that is executed when the first special figure pending memory number is 0 is 10%, and the percentage of the variable display that is executed when the first special figure pending memory number is 1 is 40%, the percentage of variable display that is executed when the number of first special figure pending memories is 2 is 40%, and the percentage of variable display that is executed when the number of first special figure pending memories is 3 is 10 %.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-25(C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is 13340 (ms) x 10/100 + 13340 (ms) x 40/100 + 13340 (ms) x 40/100 + 6550 (ms) x 10 /100=12661 (ms).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (A), in the time saving state A, the average fluctuation time A when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 is off, the second special figure pending From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 12-8 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 9150 (ms) ), and the average fluctuation time B at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is out is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 and these From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-8 (B)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) × 85/100 + 7000 (ms) × 10/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5750 (ms). The average variation time C at which the variation display result is lost when the number of special figure pending memories is 2 is determined from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns ( Figure 12-8 (C) reference), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5550 (ms), the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 The average fluctuation time D at which the fluctuation display result is out of order is based on the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (Fig. 12-6 (D) reference), 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5350 (ms).

In addition, based on the time saving state A shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the number of second special figure pending storage in the 110 times and 1100 times fluctuation display in the time saving state A is executed in each case of 0 to 3 When calculating the percentage of variable display to be performed, as shown in FIG. .9090909%, the ratio (b and b') of the variable display executed when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1 is 0.9090909%, and the number of second special figure reserved memories is 2 The percentage of variable display performed (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable display (d and d') that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is 95.4545455% Calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α′) of one fluctuation in the time saving state A is 9150 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) × 0.9090909/100 + 5550 (ms)×2.7272727/100+5350 (ms)×95.4545455/100=5393.636 (ms).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (A), in the time saving state B, the average fluctuation time E when the fluctuation display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is off, the second special figure pending From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (A)), 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5600 (ms) ), and the average fluctuation time F at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is out, is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 and these From the determination ratio of the variation pattern (see Figure 12-10 (B)), it is calculated as 1500 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 2205 (ms), the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 The average fluctuation time G when the fluctuation display result is out of order is obtained from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (Fig. 12-10 (C) See), calculated as 1500 (ms) × 99/100 + 25000 (ms) × 1/100 = 1735 (ms), the average fluctuation time H when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 is out is, from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (D)), 1500 (ms) × 100/100 = 1500 ( ms).

In addition, based on the time saving state B shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the number of second special figure pending storage in the 110 times and 1100 times fluctuation display in the time saving state B is executed in each case of 0 to 3 When calculating the ratio of the variable display to be performed, as shown in FIG. .9090909%, the ratio (f and f') of the variable display executed when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1 is 1.8181818%, and the number of second special figure reserved memories is 2 The percentage of variable display performed (g and g') is 24.5454545%, and the percentage of variable display (h and h') executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is 72.7272727% Calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in the time saving state B is 5600 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) × 1.8181818 / 100 + 1735 (ms)×24.5454545/100+1500 (ms)×72.7272727/100=1607.773 (ms).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (A), in the probability change state, the average fluctuation time I when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 is lost, the second special figure pending memory From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25000 × 3/100 = Calculated as 8200 (ms), the average fluctuation time J at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is lost is the variation that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 From the pattern and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (B)), 3000 (ms) × 80/100 + 7000 (ms) × 15/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5000 (ms) ), and the average fluctuation time K at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 is out is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 and these From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-6 (C)), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 40000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 4600 (ms ), and the average fluctuation time L when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 is out, is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 and these From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-6(D)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms)×95/100+40000×2/100+25000 (ms)×3/100=4400 (ms).

In addition, based on the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the second special figure pending storage number in the 110 times and 1100 times variation display in the probability variation state is executed in each case of 0 to 3 When the ratio of the variable display is calculated, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the ratio of the variable display executed when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 (i and i') is 0.9090909 %, the percentage of variable display (j and j') executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 is 0.9090909%, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 The percentage of variable display (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable display (l and l') executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is calculated as 95.4545455%. be.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (C), the average variation time (γ and γ') of one variation in the probability variation state is 8200 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) × 0.9090909/100 + 4600 ( ms)×2.7272727/100+4400 (ms)×95.4545455/100=4445.455 (ms).

From the above, when comparing the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-29, one variation in the time saving state B The average variation time (β and β') is shorter than the average variation time (α and α') of one variation in time saving state A (α>β and α'>β'), and one variation in time saving state B The average variation time (β and β') of is set shorter than the average variation time (γ and γ') of one variation in the probability variation state (γ>β and γ'>β').

Subsequently, the total average variation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state A, the total average variation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state B, and the variable display 110 times in the probability variable state Total average variation time when executed, total average variation time when variation display is performed 1100 times in time saving state A, total average variation time when variation display is performed 1100 times in time saving state B, in probability variation state Calculate the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times.

As shown in FIGS. 12-30 (A) and 12-35, when the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ, the period value χ is α ( Or α′)×110=5393.633 (ms)×110=593299.63 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ, the period value ψ is β (or β') × 110 = 1607.773 (ms) × 110 = 176855.03 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the variable probability state is the period value ω, the period value ω is γ (or γ') × 110 = 4445.455 (ms) × 110 = It is calculated as 489000.05 (ms).

That is, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state B by 110 is obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state A by 110 It is set smaller than the period value ω, and the period value ψ is set smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probability variable state by 110 (χ> ψ and ω > ψ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (A) and 12-36, when the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ', the period value χ' is calculated as α (or α′)×1100=5393.633 (ms)×1100=5932996.3 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ', the period value ψ' is β (or β') × 1100 = 1607.773 (ms) x1100=1768550.3 (ms). In addition, when the total average fluctuation time when the variable display is performed 1100 times in the variable probability state is the period value ω', the period value ω' is γ (or γ') × 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) × It is calculated as 1100=4890000.5 (ms).

That is, in this feature section 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state B by 1100 is obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state A by 110 is set smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probability variable state by 110. χ'>ψ' and ω'>ψ').

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state every variation, the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is three is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), every change of 110 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 The period value δ is calculated as D×110=5350 (ms)×110=588500 (ms). In addition, in the time saving state B, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, is H × 110 = 1500 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times is performed in the probability variation state, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, is L × 110 = 4400 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=484000 (ms). 12-15, the period value .delta. >ε, ζ>ε).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in the probability variation state every variation, compared with the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is executed in the state of 3 pieces. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A is the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 The period value δ' is calculated as D×1100=5350 (ms)×1100=5885000 (ms). In addition, in the time saving state B, the period value ε', which is the average variation time when the variation is performed 1100 times per variation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, is H × 1100 = 1500 (ms )×1100=1650000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ ', which is the average variation time when the variation of 1100 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 3, is L × 1100 = 4400 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=4840000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the period value δ' is greater than the period value ε', and the period value ζ' is greater than the period value ε'. (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for the average variation time when each variation is executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 2 pieces. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), every change of 110 times in the time saving state A is the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 The period value η is calculated as C×110=5550 (ms)×110=610500 (ms). Also, in the time saving state B, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, is G × 110 = 1735 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, is K × 110 = 4600 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=506000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value η is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is greater than the period value θ (η >θ, ι>θ).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in the probability variation state every variation, the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is executed in the state of two is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 The period value η' is calculated as C×1100=5550 (ms)×1100=6105000 (ms). In addition, in the time saving state B, the period value θ', which is the average variation time when the variation is performed 1100 times per variation and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, is G × 1100 = 1735 (ms )×1100=1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average variation time when the variation of 1100 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 2, is K × 1100 = 4600 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=5060000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value η' is larger than the period value θ', and the period value ι' is larger than the period value θ'. (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for the average variation time when each variation is executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 1 piece. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), every 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A is the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 The period value κ is calculated as B×110=5750 (ms)×110=632500 (ms). Also, in the time saving state B, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, is F × 110 = 2205 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 1, is J × 110 = 5000 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=550000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value κ is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is larger than the period value λ (κ >λ, μ>λ).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in the probability variation state every variation, the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 The period value κ′ is calculated as B×1100=5750 (ms)×1100=6325000 (ms). Also, in the time saving state B, the period value λ ', which is the average variation time when the variation is performed 1100 times per variation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, is F × 1100 = 2205 (ms )×1100=2425500 (ms). Then, in the probability variation state, the variation of 1100 times is changed every time, and the period value μ ', which is the average variation time when the second special figure pending memory number is 1, is J × 1100 = 5000 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=5500000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value κ' is greater than the period value λ', and the period value μ' is greater than the period value λ'. (κ′>λ′, μ′>λ′).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for each variation and the average variation time when executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 0 pieces. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), every change of 110 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 The period value ν is calculated as B×110=9150 (ms)×110=1006500 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when executing 110 fluctuations every fluctuation in the time saving state B and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, is E × 110 = 5600 (ms) x110=616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 0, is I × 110 = 8200 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=902000 (ms). 12-21, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν >ξ, π>ξ).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for each variation and the average variation time when executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 0 pieces. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 The period value ν' is calculated as B×1100=9150 (ms)×1100=10065000 (ms). In addition, in the time saving state B, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are made every fluctuation and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, is E × 1100 = 5600 (ms )×1100=6160000 (ms). Then, the period value π ', which is the average variation time when the variation of 1100 times is performed in the probability variation state every variation and the number of second special figure pending storage is 0, is I × 1100 = 8200 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=9020000 (ms). 12-22, the period value ν' is greater than the period value ξ', and the period value π' is greater than the period value ξ'. (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ').

That is, in the present feature portion 099SG, when comparing the time required for 110 times of variable display in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the 110 times The time required for the variable display is set to be the shortest in the time-saving state B (χ>ψ, ω>ψ). In addition, when comparing the time required for 1100 variable displays in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. State B is set to be the lowest (χ'>ψ', ω'>ψ').

In addition, when executing 110 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, the 110 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-34(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in the time state B (ν>ξ, π>ξ). In addition, when performing 1100 fluctuations in each of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, each fluctuation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, the 1100 times of fluctuation display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-34(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in time state B (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ'). .

In addition, when performing 110 fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, the 110 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-33(A), the time required for the 110 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (κ>λ, μ>λ). In addition, when performing 1100 fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, the 1100 change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-33(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in the time state B (κ'>λ', μ'>λ'). .

In addition, when executing 110 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, the 110 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-32(A), the time required for the 110 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (η>θ, ι>θ). In addition, when executing 1100 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, the 1100 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-32(B), the time required for the 1100 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (η'>θ', ι'>θ'). .

In addition, when executing 110 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, the 110 times of variation display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-31(A), the time required for the 110 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (δ>ε, ζ>ε). In addition, when performing 1100 fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variable state, each fluctuation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, the 1100 fluctuation display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 12-31(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in the time state B (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε'). .

In other words, in the time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variation state in this feature part 099SG, if the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 and 110 times or 1100 times are changed, the second special figure pending When performing 110 times or 1100 times of variation with the number of memories is 1, 2nd special figure reservation When performing 110 times or 1100 times of variation with the number of memories being 2, 2nd special figure reservation In either case of performing 110 times or 1100 times of variation in the state where the number of memories is 3, the time saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol variation efficiency (short average variation display time required per variation) ing. Also, if the player plays the game without worrying about the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variable state (Figure 12-26 (B), Figure 12-27 (B) , When the variation display is performed 110 times or 1100 times at each retention memory number at the ratio shown in FIG. 12-28 (B)), the time saving state B has the highest special symbol variation efficiency (average short fluctuation display time) is set.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature part 099SG, in addition to the time saving state (time saving state A) and the probability variable state in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol variation efficiency is higher than these time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it is possible to control the time saving state B, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko game machine, after the end of a big win, a predetermined number of times (for example, the probability of a big win is about 1) without being controlled to a big win in a low-probability state (for example, normal state (low-probability/low base state)) Even when variable display is performed such as 900 times in the case of /300, which is about 3 times the denominator of the jackpot probability, it is not controlled to the time saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG. At this point, since the player has already got into the game about three times as much as the denominator of the probability of a big win, the player continues playing for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is also increasing. However, this normal state (low-probability/low-base state) continues until a big win occurs, requiring further investment, which may significantly reduce the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, if it is possible to control the time saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature part 099SG, after the end of the big hit, the jackpot in the low certainty state (for example, the normal state (low certainty / low base state)) When variable display is performed for a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the denominator of the probability of a big hit) without being controlled, it is controlled to the time-saving state B, and a maximum jackpot hit is made a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times). 3.8 times the probability denominator, etc.). At this point, the player has already been hooked about three times as much as the probability of a big win, so the player continues the game for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is quite large. However, by being controlled to the time-saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit is increased, so that the decline in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

Especially in the characteristic part 099SG, since the player needs a lot of time and investment at the time when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, in the time saving state B, the variable display of the error is displayed in the shortest possible fluctuation time. It functions as a game state for saving the player, so to speak, for shortening the period until it is controlled to the jackpot game state by executing it.

Also, in the feature part 099SG, even if the number of retained memories is fixed and digested in any state of 0 to 3, the time saving state B has the highest variation efficiency than the time saving state A and the probability variable state, Various effects (for example, countdown notice, pending change notice, symbol chance notice, effect display notice Such as fore-reading notice effects, movable body notice, character notice, reach notice, notice effects such as button notice, etc.) execution ratio is lower than the execution ratio of various effects in the time saving state A and probability variable state (in the feature part 099SG The execution ratio of various effects is the same as the execution ratio of various effects explained in FIG. 11-36 of the characteristic part 069SG). Therefore, even if the player continues to play for a long time without winning a big hit and is depressed because of the increased investment, if the player is controlled to the time saving state B, the number of pending memories is in any state of 0 to 3. To provide a suitable time-saving state B because the fluctuation can be efficiently digested with little wastefulness regardless of whether the fluctuation is digested in a fixed state or in a state where the number of retained memories is 0 to 3. be able to.

Also, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-15, 12-17, 12-19, and 12-21, the average fluctuation time in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability variable state is multiplied by 110 calculated and compared. This is because of the 1100 variable displays in time saving state B, the digestion time of 110 variable displays (total time of 110 variable displays) is more than the digestion time of 110 variable displays in time saving state A and probability variable state. is also short. Hypothetically, if the digestion time of 110 times of variable display in time saving state B is the same (or approximately the same) period as the digestion time of 110 times of variable display in time saving state A or probability variable state, 1100 times of time saving state B Since the consumption time of the variable display requires several times the consumption time of 110 times of the variable display in the time saving state B, if the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, the consumption time will be prolonged and the player will be inconvenienced. It is possible that it will give you a feeling of pleasure or dissatisfaction. Therefore, the present invention prevents the player from feeling dissatisfied when the player is controlled to the time saving state B by increasing the variation efficiency in the time saving state B more than the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and as a result, it is preferable. The invention aims to provide a pachinko game machine 1 capable of controlling the game state to the time-saving state B.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIGS. calculated and compared. By being controlled multiple times in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, the variable display in the time saving state A and the probability variable state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of variable display times in the time saving state B, and these time saving By comparing the variable time of 1100 times in the state A, the variable time of 1100 times in the time saving state B, and the variable time of 1100 times in the probability variable state, it shows that the time saving state B has the highest change efficiency, and the change display is the player This is to show that the time saving state B can be suitably controlled so as not to cause dissatisfaction.

This is, by being controlled multiple times in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, when the variable display in the time saving state A and the probability variable state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of variable display times in the time saving state B, By designing the time saving state B to have the highest variation efficiency, it is shown that the time saving state B has the highest variation efficiency even when compared with the time saving state A and the probability variable state. Therefore, the change in the time saving state B is not dissatisfied, and as a result, the control is preferably performed in the time saving state B.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 110 is the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A It is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 110, and the period value ψ is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability changing state. Since it is set smaller than the obtained period value ω, the variation efficiency of the time saving state B is higher than the variation efficiency of the time saving state A and the probability variable state, thereby shortening the period until it is controlled to the jackpot game state and shortening the time. The player's dissatisfaction in the state B can be reduced, and as a result, a favorable time-saving state B can be provided. Especially in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, the period until it is controlled to the big hit game state is shortened by increasing the variation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced. In addition, in the time saving state A and the probability changing state controlled via the jackpot game (the time saving state A and the probability changing state in which the variable display with a longer special figure fluctuation time than the time saving state B is likely to be executed), the jackpot game is played during the variable display A predetermined effect that suggests being controlled to a state or the like can be executed over an appropriate period of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 1100 is It is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of fluctuation, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability state. Since it is set smaller than the period value ω ' obtained by multiplication, the period until it is controlled to the big hit game state by the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B being higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state A and the probability variable state By shortening, the player's dissatisfaction in the time saving state B can be reduced, and as a result, a suitable time saving state B can be provided. Especially in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, by increasing the variation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the period until it is controlled to the big hit game state can be shortened to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player. In addition, in the time saving state A and the probability changing state controlled via the jackpot game (the time saving state A and the probability changing state in which the variable display with a longer special figure fluctuation time than the time saving state B is likely to be executed), the jackpot game is played during the variable display A predetermined effect that suggests being controlled to a state or the like can be executed over an appropriate period of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-21, 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A It is set smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value ξ Since it is set smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 110 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-22, 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B The period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value ν ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value ξ' is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 in the probability variable state. Since it is set smaller than the period value π ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is deviated by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B 110 times fluctuation in the time saving state B The period value λ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state A is set smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value λ is the second special figure pending storage number in the probability variable state is 1 Since it is set smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variable display by the number of variable displays of 110 times in the time saving state B, the variable display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-20, 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B The period value λ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value κ ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value λ 'is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in the probability variable state Since it is set smaller than the period value μ ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be missed by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-17, 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state B The period value θ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A is set smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value θ is the second special figure pending storage number in the probability variable state is 2 Since the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is set smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A or the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-18, 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state B The period value θ' obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value η ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value θ 'is executed when the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 in the probability variable state Since it is set smaller than the period value ι 'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display in the time saving state B by the average variation time of the variation display that is out of the time saving state B, the variation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state B 110 times fluctuation in the time saving state B The period value ε obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A While it is set smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, the period value ε is the second special figure pending storage number in the probability variable state is 3 Since the average fluctuation time of the variable display is set smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the number of variable displays of 110 times in the time saving state B, the variable display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-16, in the time saving state B 1100 fluctuations in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 The period value ε ' obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value δ ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value ε ' is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 in the probability variable state Since it is set smaller than the period value ζ ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be lost by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 099SG can execute variable display of normal symbols in addition to variable display of special symbols, and the result of variable display of the normal symbols is a win (normal win). A game ball can win a prize in the second starting winning port changed from the closed state to the open state. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening, and the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting winning opening. Based on, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, and the information of the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed yet can be stored as a temporary storage. It has 099SG151B. In these first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B, both the maximum number of reservation reservations are set to 4, and the upper limit value of the maximum reservation number depends on the game state. It never changes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-2 (D), the probability that a normal pattern hit occurs in the normal symbol fluctuation display is when the game state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B The opening time of the second start winning port when the normal game hit occurs is set to 3 seconds in common between the case where the game state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B. If the game state is the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the game ball launched by the launcher toward the second path of the right game area wins (enters) the gate 41 or the second start winning opening ) is possible. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 099SG, since most of the game characteristics can be shared between the case where the game state is the time saving state A and the case where the game state is the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the time saving state can be shared. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to a large difference in game characteristics between the state B and the state B.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this characteristic part 099SG, when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variable state, the variable display period in which the variable display result is lost is displayed variable from the variable display start timing of the special symbol. The average fluctuation time is calculated as the period until the end timing, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the number of fluctuation display times when the game state is any of the probability variable state, time saving state B, and probability variable state “110” or “1100” ” to calculate each period value, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the average fluctuation time is calculated as the period from the timing when the launched game ball enters the starting winning hole to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the starting winning, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the game state are variable states, Each period value may be calculated by multiplying "110" or "1100", which is the number of variable display times in either the time saving state B or the variable probability state. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately obtain the period value in each game state by measurement.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of pending data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 In addition, each period value in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of each number of retained memories by the ratio of the variable display executed with each retained memory number to the 110 variable displays. Since it is calculated based on the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In particular, if the game state is the time saving state A, and the period value α when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A, the period value α is A × a + B × b + C × c + D × Calculated from the value of d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A, a is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state A, b is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, c is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure pending memory is 2 in the time reduction state A to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A is out, d is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α of the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, and the period value β when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B, the period value β is E×e+F×f+G×g+H× Calculated from the value of h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B, f is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, g is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 2 in the time reduction state B to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state B is out, h is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays of the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β of the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

Also, if the gaming state is a variable probability state, and the period value γ is the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable probability state, the period value γ is I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l. calculated by the value. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state is out, i is the second special figure pending storage when the number is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j is in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state is the average variation time when is out, k is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 110 variation display of the probability variation state, L is the second special in the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of figure pending memories is 3, l is the 110 times variation of the probability variable state when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state It is a percentage of the display. By calculating the period value γ as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate probability changing state period value γ corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of pending data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 In addition, each period value in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of each reserved memory number by the ratio of the variable display executed with each reserved memory number to the 1100 variable display times. Since it is calculated based on the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In particular, when the game state is the time saving state A, and the period value α' when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A, the period value α' is A x a' + B x It is calculated by the value of b'+C.times.c'+D.times.d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A, a ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A is out, b ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display of the time saving state A, C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, c' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state A 1100 times of the time saving state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A, d ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state A is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α' as described above, it is possible to obtain the appropriate period value α' of the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

Also, if the game state is the time saving state B, and the period value in the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B is β', the period value β' is E×e'+F× It is calculated by the value of f′+G×g′+H×h′. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is out, f' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B, G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, g' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state B 1100 times of the time saving state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B, h ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state B is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β' of the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, and the period value γ' when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable probability state, the period value γ' is I×i′+J×j′. +K×k'+L×l'. Here, I is the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state, i ' is when the second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 1100 variable displays of the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j' is the probability variable The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 in the state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variation when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state The average variation time when the display result is out, k 'is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 1100 variation display in the probability variation state, L is the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, l' is the probability variation state when the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 3 is the probability variation state This is the ratio of 1100 times of fluctuation display. By calculating the period value γ' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate probability changing state period value γ' corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

As described above, in the time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variation state in this feature part 099SG, when performing the variation of 110 times or 1100 times in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0, the second If the variation is 110 times or 1100 times with the number of special figure pending memories being 1, the second In either case of changing 110 times or 1100 times in a state where the number of special figure pending memories is 3, time saving state B has the highest special symbol variation efficiency (average variation display time required per variation is short ) is set. Also, if the player plays the game without worrying about the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state (Fig. 12-26 (B), Fig. 12-27 (B) 12-28 (B) when the variation display is performed 110 times or 1100 times at each retention memory number), the time saving state B has the highest special symbol variation efficiency (average required per variation short fluctuation display time) is set.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state A, the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state B, and the average variation time of 1 variation in probability variation state are each multiplied by 110 or 1100 By comparing the values obtained by comparing the values obtained, the example shows that the variation efficiency of the time saving state B is the highest, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the average variation time of the variation of 1 in the time saving state A , The value to be multiplied by each of the average variation time of 1 variation in the time saving state B and the average variation time of 1 variation in the probability variation state may be a value other than 110 or 1099, such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state A, the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state B, and the average variation time of 1 variation in probability variation state by 109 or 1099 is the time saving state This is because the first change in A, time saving state B, and probability change state almost always starts with the number of retained memories being 0. In addition, if the final 5 fluctuations of the 3 states of time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variable state, or 2 states of time saving state A and probability variable state are changed at a higher rate than other fluctuations and the special figure fluctuation time is long may be a value multiplied by 104, 1094, etc., excluding a total of 6 fluctuations, ie, the first fluctuation and the last 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 018SG)
Next, an embodiment of the characteristic portion 018SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-23. FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 018SG. 13-2, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the high base state. In addition, in this characteristic part 018SG, illustration and detailed description of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic parts 069SG and 099SG are omitted, and differences will be mainly described. Further, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 069SG or the characteristic portion 099SG.

FIG. 13-1 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 018SG. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach fluctuation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, . , a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Also, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one type of super reach variation pattern may be used as in the normal reach variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the variation patterns of super reach, the variation pattern of super reach β has a variable display period (80 seconds) longer than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the variation pattern of deviation of super reach α. . On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ is a fluctuation pattern of deviation for high base as described later, so the variable display period is shorter than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach α. period (40 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc., the type of the fluctuation pattern is determined first. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 13-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a variation pattern when the game state is the normal state (low base state). If the variable display result is "big hit" in the normal state (low base state), select the big hit variation pattern determination table A, and use the big hit variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach Big hit variation pattern), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot) and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot). In the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, when the game state is the low base state and the variable display result is "jackpot", the decision ratio is higher in the order of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "missing" and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table A for loss The fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern) and PA2-3 (super reach β variation). pattern). Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

Also, if the variable display result is "missing" and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table B for loss The fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α deviation) and PA2-3 (variation of super reach β deviation) pattern). Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

FIG. 13-2(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a variation pattern when the game state is the time saving state (high base state). If the variable display result is "big hit" in the time saving state (high base state), select the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and use the big hit variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach Big hit variation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern). In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, when the game state is the high base state and the variable display result is "big win", the determination ratio is higher in the order of normal reach and super reach γ.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "loss", select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table D for loss to set the variation pattern PA1-4 (variation pattern of non-reach loss) and PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of deviation from normal reach) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ). Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 determination values are assigned to PA2-4. assigned.

(About various productions)
Next, various effects executed in the super ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-3 to 13-5. FIG. 13-3 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in the jackpot variation patterns of super reach α, β, γ. FIG. 13-4 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in loss variation patterns of super reach α, β, γ. 13-5, (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types.

Although not shown in particular, the effect control CPU 120, in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern, after starting the variable display, changes the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode. , abbreviated as “N reach effect”). After that, the variable display of the decoration pattern is ended without developing into a super ready-to-win effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP ready-to-win effect").

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the super reach variation pattern, the period from the timing ta0 when the variable display is started until a predetermined period elapses (ta0 to ta1) Then, variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 13-9 (N1)). In this period (ta0 to ta1), the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 is a light emission pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of normal background effects in the low base state, and a plurality of types of music in the high base state. By combining light emission patterns corresponding to various SP reach effects with light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of normal background effects and light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of music, A dramatic effect can be enhanced by a light emission pattern.

At timing ta1 when a predetermined period has passed from timing ta0 at which variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to a normal reach display mode, and "N reach performance" is executed as a variable display performance over a predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). After that, at timing ta2, the variable display mode is changed to the super ready-to-win display mode, and the "SP ready-to-win effect" as the variable display effect is executed for a predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

Thus, "N reach production" is a common production that is executed in both the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it ends without developing into "SP reach production", and the super In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, it develops into "SP reach production". Therefore, even in the case of the normal reach variation pattern, the player can expect that the "N reach effect" will develop into "SP reach effect A to E", which will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, "SP reach effect A to E" indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", that is, "big hit" or "loss". During the SP ready-to-win effect period, a "determined effect", which will be described later, is executed for a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in FIG. 13-3, when the variable display result is a big hit, after the end of the "SP ready-to-win production A to E", the "post production" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7). After that, the variable display ends. Thus, the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern of SP reach α, β, γ includes a variable display part (ta0 to ta5) for executing variable display of decorative patterns, and a jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. and a post-effect part (ta5 to ta7) that informs the expected number of balls that can be obtained in.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-4, when the result of the variable display is a failure, the variable display ends when the "SP ready-to-win effect A to E" ends. In addition, after the end of the notification of the loss (ta5 to ta5A), the fixed decoration pattern of the predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not the big hit combination returns to the normal background screen in a state of temporarily stopped display (shaking state), and the pattern confirmation period. Temporary stop is displayed until

Next, various effects executed in the super reach variation pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach production A" is executed as the SP reach production, and when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern, When "SP reach performance B" or "SP reach performance C" is executed as the SP reach performance and the variation pattern is the super reach α variation pattern, "SP reach performance D" or "SP reach performance E" is executed as the SP reach performance. is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-5(B), in the "SP reach performance B to E" other than the "SP reach performance A", the teammate character A-1 and the teammate character A different from the teammate character A-1 -2, enemy character X-1, and enemy character X-2 different from enemy character X-1 can appear. The number of types of friendly characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and friendly characters and enemy characters other than the above may appear. Further, even for the same character, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the display mode.

"SP reach performance A" is executed when the SP reach α variation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and is a performance in which a moving image of a bowling challenge is displayed, When all the pins fall, a "big hit" is reported, and when all the pins do not fall, a "loss" is reported. In the video of the bowling challenge, friend characters A-1 and A-2 and enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed.

"SP reach performance B" can be executed when the SP reach β variation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are executed. is displayed in a motion picture of "Battle A" in which the characters face off in the city. is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-1, a "miss" is reported.

"SP reach effect C" is executable when the SP reach β variation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are executed. is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" is displayed in which A-2 faces off in the city. is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-2, a "miss" is reported.

"SP reach effect D" is executable when the SP reach γ variation pattern is determined when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B (high base state), It is an effect in which a moving image of "Battle B", in which character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the wilderness, is displayed. A "big hit" is reported, and a "loss" is reported when the ally character A-1 fails to beat the enemy character X-1 and is defeated.

"SP reach effect E" is executable when the SP reach γ variation pattern is determined when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B (high base state), It is an effect in which a moving image of "Battle B", in which character A-1 and enemy character X-2 face off in the wilderness, is displayed. A "big hit" is reported, and a "loss" is reported when the ally character A-1 fails to beat the enemy character X-2 and is defeated.

In addition, since the variation pattern of super reach β has a higher expectation of a big hit than the variation pattern of super reach α, the expectation of a big hit is higher for SP reach production B and SP reach production C than for SP reach production A ( Hit expectation: SP reach performance A<SP reach performance B<SP reach performance C).

"Determined effect" is a predetermined period from the timing (for example, timing ta3 when the final confrontation of bowling and battle starts just before the end of the SP reach effect) after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effect A to E (for example, , ta3 to ta5). Specifically, during the valid operation period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effectively detected, a "win/fail button effect" prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, and during the valid operation period, the operation of the push button 31B is detected. or "movable body effect" executed at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detection of the operation of the push button 31B.

The "movable object effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit, and is executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period, or during the operation effective period when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. is completed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position. If the variable display result is a failure, it is not executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B.

In addition, according to the execution of the movable body effect (falling of the movable body 32), an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body LED 208 and the game effect are displayed. A light-emitting effect in which the lamp 9 or the like is lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, rainbow lighting), and a vibration in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B. An effect and a sound effect of outputting a predetermined sound effect are performed.

In addition, in the SP reach production A, the friendly character and the enemy character are not displayed in the bowling confrontation, so the character is not displayed in the movable body production. is displayed, the enemy character that was displayed in the battle showdown is also displayed in the movable body presentation.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, the hit/fail button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the big hit, and the variable display result is not lost. In some cases, after the hit/fail button effect is performed, the loss notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

"Post effect A" is executed after being notified that the game state is normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a big win, and SP reach effect A to C are controlled to the big win game state. be. Specifically, in SP ready-to-win performances A to C, after the finalized decoration symbols that are predetermined big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the confirmation of the big hit is announced, The re-lottery variation part (ta5 to ta6) in which the re-variation display of the confirmed decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is performed, and the re-variation display is performed in the re-lottery variation part. and a re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in which the display result is informed by stopping and displaying the fixed decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R later. Incidentally, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post effect A is "10 seconds".

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the SP reach effects A to C, the fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even-numbered patterns (for example, 666, etc.) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-variable display is started in the re-lottery fluctuation part. After that, in the re-lottery result part, the fixed decorative pattern consisting of the combination of even-numbered patterns or the fixed decorative pattern consisting of the combination of odd-numbered patterns is stop-displayed. In the re-lottery result part, when the fixed decoration pattern consisting of the combination of the even-numbered patterns is stop-displayed, it is reported that it is a ``jackpot A'' controlled to the time-saving state A after the end of the jackpot game state, and the odd-numbered patterns are displayed. When the fixed decorative symbols formed by the combination are stopped and displayed (symbol promotion), it is reported that it is a "jackpot B" which is controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot game state is finished.

In addition, in the post effect A of the SP reach effect A, since the character does not appear in the SP reach effect A, the character does not appear in the post effect A either. Further, in the post-effect A of the SP reach effects B and C, the characters appear in the SP reach effects B and C, but the character does not appear in the post-effect A. By doing so, even when the SP ready-to-win performance A in which the character does not appear is executed, the post-performance A is executed in a mode in which the character does not appear, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

The ``post-fact performance B'' is controlled to a jackpot game state in SP ready-to-win performances D and E when the variable display result is a big win in the game state of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B (high base state). Executed after notification. Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win performances D and E, after the confirmed decoration symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify that the jackpot is confirmed, A scheduled ball throwing addition part (ta5 to ta6) in which the scheduled number of balls that have appeared in the SP reach effects D and E attack the enemy character is added and displayed, and the friendly character becomes the enemy character. After giving the final blow, the scheduled number of balls to be put out is stopped and announced, and then the fixed decoration pattern that will be the big hit combination is stopped and the variable display ends. ta6 to ta7). It should be noted that the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-effect B is set to 15 seconds, which is longer than the execution period of the post-effect A.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in the SP reach α is 45 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in the SP reach β is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. That is, the variable display part period is shortened in order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β>SP reach α>SP reach γ). .

In SP reach α, β, and γ, the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of variable display to N reach is different, and from the start of variable display to N reach in SP reach γ. The period (ta0-ta1) is shorter than the period (ta0-ta1) from the start of variable display in SP reach α, β to N reach (ta0-ta1; SP reach γ < SP reach α, β).

In addition, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach α, β, γ is different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach γ is N in the SP reach α, β It is shorter (ta1 to ta2; SP reach γ<SP reach α, β) than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the reach effect.

In addition, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of SP reach effects A to E in SP reach α, β, γ are different, SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E), SP reach α (SP reach effect A) , SP reach β (SP reach production B, C) is longer in order {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach production D, E) < SP reach α (SP reach production A) < SP reach β (SP Reach production B, C)}.

In addition, the variable display part period (40 seconds) of SP reach γ is shorter than the variable display part period (45 seconds) of SP reach α and the variable display part period (80 seconds) of SP reach β (variable display period ; SP reach β > SP reach α > SP reach γ), SP reach γ (SP reach production D, E) After the completion of the decided production, the jackpot combination predetermined in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-production B until the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is determined by SP reach α (SP reach production A) and SP reach β (SP reach production B, C). It is longer than the execution period (ta5-ta7) of the post-effect A from the end until the determined decoration symbols that are the predetermined big hit combinations are stopped and displayed in the respective decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (ta5- ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds)>SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

In addition, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decision effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is common to the SP reach effects A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach effect A = SP reach effect B = SP reach effect C=SP reach effect D=SP reach effect E). Therefore, since the control data of the movable body 32, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the SP reach effects A to E can be shared, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It should be noted that the execution period of the "win/fail button effect" and the execution period of the "movable object effect" in the "decision effect" are common to the SP ready-to-win effects A to E.

In addition, the execution period of "post effect A, B" in SP reach α, β, γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, SP reach effect A From the timing ta5 when the confirmed decorative symbols that become the predetermined big win combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the notification of the confirmation of the big hit to E, the confirmed decorative symbols that become the predetermined big win combination are stop-displayed (the variable display ends). ) By setting (ta5 to ta7) up to timing ta7, it is possible to easily recognize the timing at which the post-effect is executed, and to increase the attention to post-effects A and B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and "post-effects A, B" are performed during a pattern confirmation period and a jackpot fanfare period, etc., which are started after the fixed decoration patterns that form a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. may be executable.

In addition, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), and in SP reach γ, "movable body The period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "effect" ends to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed is the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends in the SP reach β. is longer than the period (ta4-ta7) from the timing to timing ta7 at which fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined big hit combination are stopped and displayed (ta4-ta7; SP reach γ>SP reach β). By doing so, in the SP reach γ executed in a short variable display period, by lengthening the period after the end of the "movable body effect", the impression of the variable display is enhanced even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C are all common, and the execution period of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E ( ta5 to ta7) are all common. By doing so, the control data for the post-effects A and B, especially the character motion control data for the post-effect B can be easily diverted, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C are all common, and the execution period of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E ( While ta5 to ta7) are all common, the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" and the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-effect B" are different, so SP reach effects A to C are each By sharing the effect period of the post-effect A corresponding to , it is possible to easily share the effect contents and control, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the post-effect B with a different effect period is executed. , post-productions A and B can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the production effect of the post-production can be enhanced.

(Operation mode of SP reach production A to E and post-production A and B)
Next, operation modes of SP ready-to-win effects A to E and post-effects A and B when the variable display result is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 13-6. 13-6, (A) is a diagram showing the character display mode in SP reach production A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in SP reach production A to E, (C) is SP reach FIG. 10 is a diagram showing output patterns of BGM and sound effects in productions A to E;

As shown in FIG. 13-6(A), to explain the character display mode in the SP reach production A to E, during the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown and the battle showdown in the SP reach production, In , no character is displayed, in SP reach production B, friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in SP reach production C, friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed. In the SP ready-to-win production D, the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP ready-to-win production E, the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed. As described above, the SP ready-to-win effect A is an effect in which characters are not displayed, whereas the SP ready-to-win effects B to E are effects in which characters are displayed.

In addition, during the execution period of the "positive button effect" of the decided effect in the SP reach effect, the character is not displayed in any of the SP reach effects A to E, while in the execution period of the "movable body effect", in the SP reach effect A , the character is not displayed, in the SP ready-to-win production B, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed, and in the SP ready-to-reach production C, the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed. , in the SP ready-to-win production D, the enemy character X-1 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed, and in the SP ready-to-win production E, the enemy character X-2 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed.

In addition, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of the big hit confirmation notification in the SP reach production, the character is not displayed in the SP reach production A, and the friend character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed in the SP reach production B. Friend character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, and friend character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and SP reach performance. At E, an ally character A-1 and an enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In addition, in the re-lottery variation part (ta5 to ta6) and the re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production A corresponding to the SP reach production A to C, the character is not displayed in the SP reach production A, and the SP In ready-to-reach effect B, friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in SP ready-to-reach effect C, friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

In addition, in the scheduled ball throw addition part (ta5 to ta6) and the scheduled ball ball notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effects D and E, in the SP ready-to-win effect D, the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the friend character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In this way, in the SP reach production A, the character is not displayed in the bowling confrontation, so the character is not displayed in the movable body production and the post-production A, while in the SP reach production B to E, the character is confronted with the ally character in the battle showdown. The enemy character is also displayed in the movable body presentation and the post-facto presentations A and B.

That is, in the SP ready-to-win production A, an image (image in which the character is not displayed) related to the bowling competition is displayed in the movable body production before the big hit confirmation notification is performed, and in the SP ready-to-win production B to E, the big win In the movable body production before the confirmation notification is performed, since the image of the aspect related to the battle confrontation (the image of the enemy character who was confronted) is displayed, SP reach production A to E and the SP reach production A It is possible to increase the relevance with the movable object effect executed during the effect period of ~E.

Further, in the SP reach effect A, in the post effect A, an image (image in which the character is not displayed) related to the SP reach effect A is displayed, and in the SP reach effects D and E, in the post effect B, the SP reach Since the image of the aspect related to the effects D and E (the image of the ally character and the enemy character who are facing each other) is displayed, the SP reach effects A, D and E and the SP reach effects A, D and E end. It is possible to increase the relevance between post-effects A and B to be executed later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-6(B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. It should be noted that the numerical values in parentheses (for example, B100, etc.) of each pattern indicate the extension commands described in the feature section 069SG. In addition, the various light emission patterns described below differ from other light emission patterns in at least one of a plurality of elements such as light emission color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting time, light-off timing, light-off time, and blinking cycle. , and each light emission pattern can be changed in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production, in the SP reach production A, the lighting pattern LP1-1 is lit based on the extended command B100, and in the SP reach production B and C, the extended command Based on B101, it lights up in the light emission pattern LP1-2, and in the SP reach effects D and E, it lights up in the light emission pattern LP1-3 based on the extension command B102.

Also, during the execution period of the "appropriate button effect" in the SP reach effect, based on the extended commands B200 to B203, it is lit in any one of the light emission patterns LP2-1 to LP2-4 common to the SP reach effect A to E. . In addition, one of the light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the light emission patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, and LP2-4. ing.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable body effect" and "big hit notification" in the SP ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect A to E are lit in a common light emission pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B000. In addition, during the execution period of the "loss notification" in the SP ready-to-win production, in the SP ready-to-win production A to E, the common light emission pattern LP3-1 is lit based on the extended command B300.

In addition, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball release part (ta5-ta6) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effect A-C lights up in a common light emission pattern LP4-1 based on the extended command BA00. In the SP ready-to-win productions D and E, the common light emission pattern LP4-4 is lit based on the extended command BB00.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part in the post-production A and the scheduled ball release notification part (ta6-ta7) in the post-production B, in the SP reach production A-C, lighting with the common light emission pattern LP4-2 based on the extended command BA01 , Or, based on the extended command BA02 is lit in the common light emission pattern LP4-3, in the SP reach production D, E, lighting in the common light emission pattern LP4-5 based on the extended command BB01, or to the extended command BB02 Based on this, they are lit in a common light emission pattern LP4-6.

The light emission patterns LP1-1 to 3, LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different light emission modes based on light emission control data described later. An outline of each emission pattern will be described below. The parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern indicate the extension command.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (A), in "Bowling / Battle", the light emission pattern LP1-1 (B100) is the introduction of the reach title, frame LEDs (frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 ~ 9R12) and the LED on the board (movable LED 208) emits light (see Fig. 13-10), and the light emission pattern LP1-2 (B101) introduces the reach title and emits light based on the color of the city background. The frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in color, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up according to the action (such as attacking action) of ally A-1/A-2 and enemy X-1/X-2. It is a pattern that emits light (see FIGS. 13-11 (A2) and (A3)), and the light emission pattern LP1-3 (B102) is based on the title introduction, the color of the wilderness background, and the frame LED and the game board surface. This is a pattern in which the upper LED emits light, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board emit light according to the action (attack action, etc.) of ally A-1 and enemy X-1/X-2 (Fig. 13-12 ( A4), see (A5)).

In the “win/fail button effect”, the light emission pattern LP2-1 (B200) is that after the frame LED and the game board surface LED emit light in accordance with “keep pressing the button to accumulate power!” And the pattern in which the LED on the game board emits light (see FIG. 13-13). It is a pattern in which the LED on the board emits light (see Fig. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for power-up (second stage) when the button is operated, and the frame LED and the game board are displayed in "green". The LED is for light emission (see Fig. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for power-up (third step) when the button is operated, and the frame LED and the game board LED emit light in "red". pattern (see Figures 13-13). The light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 are light emission patterns that change step by step to blue, green, and red (MAX) according to the player's long-pressing operation (accumulation condition of the gauge display).

In the "loss notification", the light emission pattern LP3-1 (B300) is such that when the "loss" is announced in the result notification, the frame LED and the game board surface LED emit light in white with low brightness, and the display screen is the normal background. This pattern continues until the next fluctuation starts even after returning to 1 (see FIGS. 13-16).

In the "movable body effect & big hit notification", the light emission pattern LP3-2 (B000) is used in the background of the movable body effect in the movable body effect (first period) when the "big hit" is announced in the result notification. With the combined color, in the movable body production (second period), the frame LED and the game board surface LED emit light according to the background image and effect display during the movable body production, and in the big hit notification, the frame LED and the game board are illuminated in rainbow colors. This is the pattern in which the LEDs on the board emit light (see FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15). Note that the extension command (B000) is different from other extension commands in that the operation control data (setting the number of steps, speed, and time related to motor driving) for operating the movable body 32, the frame LED and the game board LED and gradation control data for emitting light are set.

In addition, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body motion control and the LED lighting control, there is no need to separate the extended command for the movable body motion control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. Control program capacity can be reduced. If the extension commands used for the movable body presentation are divided into an extension command for controlling the motion of the movable body and an extension command for controlling the lighting of the LED, there is a risk that one of the extension commands may be missed due to a problem. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the movable body effect.

In addition, by performing the movable body movement control and the LED lighting control with one extended command without dividing the extended command for "movable body effect" and "big hit notification", there is no need to divide the extended command according to the effect. Therefore, the program capacity for effect control can be reduced. If the extended commands are divided between the "movable body effect" and the "big hit notification", there is a risk that one of the extended commands may be missed due to a problem. "notification" can be performed.

In the “re-lottery fluctuation/addition of scheduled ball output”, the light emission pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the game board surface LEDs emit light in accordance with the background moving image (round and round) (Fig. 13-17 (F1) reference), the light emission pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is based on the color of the space background. ) in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board emit light (see FIGS. 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result/scheduled ball release notification", the light pattern LP4-2 (BA01) emits light from the frame LED and the game board surface LED when a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed. pattern (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), and the light emission pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is brighter than the light emission pattern LP4-2 when a combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed. This is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board emit light at a high gradation period (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)). , the frame LED and the LED on the game board emit light in accordance with the display of "750", and the same gradation control data as "1500" is used until "750" is displayed (Fig. 13-19 (G1-3) ~ (G3) reference), the light emission pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the scheduled pitch notification "1500", and when "750" is displayed according to the display of "1500" This is a pattern in which the brightness is increased, the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board emit light at a faster gradation period, and the same gradation control data as '750' is used until '1500' is displayed (Fig. 13-19 ( G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, in the later period after the movable body production during the execution of the SP reach performances A to E, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation notification as the latter period production, and in the big hit confirmation notification, depending on the type of the SP reach production A to E First, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, and the movable body LED 208 have a common light emission pattern (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2), so that the common light emission pattern regardless of the type of SP reach production A to E Since the jackpot decision notification is executed, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

It should be noted that the light emission pattern may be varied according to the types of the SP reach effects A to E. For example, the lighting pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the big hit confirmation notification of the SP reach production A is set to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow light emission) shown in FIG. The corresponding light emission pattern LP3-2 is the rainbow flashing pattern (flash rainbow light emission) shown in FIGS. 22 may be changed from the rainbow-colored blinking pattern (flash rainbow emission) to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow emission) shown in FIG. 13-21.

Further, the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball-out addition part of the post-effect B are common between the SP ready-to-win effect D and the SP ready-to-win effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4). As a result, the light emission pattern can also be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

In addition, the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 (light emission patterns LP4-5 and LP4-6) in the scheduled ball release notification part of the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E While is common, the movable body LED 208 of the post-production A corresponding to the SP reach production A, the frame LED 9L1 ~ 9L12, the light emission pattern of 9R1 ~ 9R12 (light emission pattern LP4-2, LP4-3), and the SP reach production D The light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E are different, thereby further reducing the manufacturing cost. The effect of the post-production can be enhanced by executing the post-production A with a different light emission pattern.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, an arbitrary timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period during which the "win/fail button presentation" is executed, or the operation effective period is not detected and the operation effective period is Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing of completion, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light in different light emission patterns according to the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed. can be By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode by changing the timing of the operation by the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), for the LED light emission pattern in the SP reach production, the light emission pattern LP1-2 is commonly used in the SP reach production B and C, for example, the SP reach production B In light emission pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-1, light emission according to action) is used, and in SP reach C light emission pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background By using color + image color of enemy character X-2, light emission according to action), the luminance data of part of the LED light emission pattern (city background color part) of SP reach production B and C can be used in common. While suppressing the development cost, the parts related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 may each use dedicated brightness data so as to make a difference in appearance at a minimum cost.

The light emission pattern LP1-3 is commonly used in the SP reach production D and E. For example, in the SP reach production D, the light emission pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-1 image color , light emission according to the action), and in SP Reach E, the light emission pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: Wilderness background color + enemy character X-2 image color, light emission according to the action) The luminance data of part of the LED light emission pattern (the city background color part) of the SP reach production D and E is used in common to reduce the development cost, and the parts related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 have their own luminance. Data may be used to make a difference in presentation at minimal cost.

Also, one of the SP reach effects B and C in the low base state and the SP reach effects D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach effects D and E) is set as a common light emission pattern, and the other (for example, SP The reach effects B and C) may be different light emission patterns. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost on one side, and to preferably show the difference in presentation on the other side.

(gradation control data)
Here, the control data for realizing the lighting effects will be briefly described. FIG. 13-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LEDs in a smooth rainbow lighting pattern. FIG. 13-22 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LEDs in a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 40 msec as "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED. . The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in rainbow colors by performing lamp control based on the smooth rainbow light emission data table.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-22, as "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED, luminance data corresponding to turning off for 20 msec corresponds to seven colors (rainbow colors) at intervals of 30 msec. Specified between data of various luminances. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the data table of flash rainbow light emission, thereby lighting the frame lamp intensely in rainbow colors.

The ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a light emission control table used by the effect control CPU 120 to control light emission of each LED. The light emission control table contains, for example, light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), driver IDs, output terminal numbers, electric parts and emission control generation data are defined in association with each other.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emission pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitter driver, and the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitter driver output terminal. stores the luminous body driver and electric parts corresponding to the output terminal number (eg, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, movable body LED 208, etc.), and the luminous body driver data for controlling the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the control data format and used for generating the light emission control data based on the control data format.

Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit light emission time, a light emission control cycle, and format data. For example, the data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table, and the format type stores one of the basic format (EX=0) and the extended format (EX=1). ("basic" or "extended") is stored, and the address stores the address to be set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and data transmission The cycle stores the cycle of transmitting the light emission control data from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emission time is the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light. remembered. In this embodiment, the data transmission period is assumed to be 10 ms (milliseconds).

In the light emission control period, a time corresponding to one cycle of light emission control unit (hereinafter, this period is referred to as “light emission control period”) is stored. This light emission control period differs depending on the type of light emission. Specifically, when the light emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100 ms" can be set, and the light emission type is "switching" (special light emission color accompanying multiple color changes ( In the case of rainbow-colored light emission, etc.), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

The format data stores time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type. Specifically, in the format data, the order of light emission and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the order of light emission are defined in association with each other.

In this embodiment, Q data (color hexadecimal number, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal numbers is used to control the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12. In color hexadecimal, "16 x 16 = 256 gradations" is represented by expressing each of RGB with two digits each in total of six hexadecimal digits (0 to F). are the same value, and each of RGB is illustrated and described as a notation in which each digit is abbreviated to a total of three digits. Also, for the sake of simplification, notation of "0x" representing a hexadecimal number is omitted in the drawings and explanations.

The Q data includes Q data for group 1, Q data for group 2, and group 3 is included. The Q data corresponding to each group stores RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in the group.

A specific description will be given. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms", it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver every 10 ms. Further, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms", it is determined that the target LED should emit light with a unit light emission time of 100 ms. If the light emission control period is "100 ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and the same time as the unit light emission time is set as the light emission control period in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color. there is

Further, for example, in the format data, the order of light emission is determined from "1" to "N", and for each of the light emission order "1" to "N", Q data (RGB values) is defined as "0, 0, F", the R value and G value of the Q data are set to "0" and the B value is set to "F" for all the light emission orders. Blue continuous light emission is realized.

Next, the control data for controlling the gradation of the LEDs and realizing mixed-color light emission will be described. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data in the format data included in the emission control generation data.

FIG. 13-22 shows gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control for realizing blinking of rainbow colors (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-2, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated. Note that the gradation control data for the frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is the object of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, so illustration thereof is omitted. In this gradation control data, the left column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn, and the right column shows each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 ( 9L4), . . . ) are expressed in hexadecimal.

Further, in the light emission order 2 of the gradation control data shown in FIG. 0”, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are turned off.

Further, in the light emission order 1 of the gradation control data shown in FIG. The Q data (RGB values) of group 4 are "0, 8, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 4 are "0, C, F", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 5 are "0, F, D ”, the Q data (RGB values) of group 6 are “0, F, 9”, the Q data (RGB values) of group 7 are “0, F, 5”, and the Q data (RGB values) of group 8 are “0 , F, 1", the Q data (RGB values) of group 9 are "2, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 10 are "6, F, 0", the Q data of group 11 (RGB values ) are “A, F, 0” and the Q data (RGB values) of group 12 are “F, F, 0”, the emission colors of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are different from each other (also different from the emission color of the emission order 3). ) is realized.

In this way, with a short switching unit light emission time Δts, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are controlled to sequentially switch the emission colors of a plurality of colors, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are extinguished. Visually, it can be visually recognized as if it were blinking in rainbow colors. It should be noted that the mode of sandwiching is not limited to extinguishing, and for example, white light that does not constitute the rainbow color may be used. RGB values with low luminance such as "1, 1" may be set.

FIG. 13-21 shows gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control for realizing rainbow-colored lighting (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-1, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated.

Unlike the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21, the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 does not include control for turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. Therefore, it can be visually recognized as if it were lit in rainbow colors visually. In the light emission order 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the emission of the same color as in the light emission order 2 of the gradation control data is realized. In addition, even with the gradation control data, by controlling so that the emission colors to be emitted from the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are sequentially switched in a short switching unit emission time Δts, a rainbow-colored light is visually perceived by humans. You can see it as if you were there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-6(C), the output pattern of BGM and sound effects in the SP ready-to-win productions A to E will be described. In addition, the various sound patterns described below differ from other sound patterns in at least one of a plurality of elements such as volume, tone quality, rhythm, tempo, and music, and each sound pattern can be changed in various ways. It is possible.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production A, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound pattern BP1-1 in the SP reach production A, and in the SP reach production B, the sound pattern BP1- 2, BGM and sound effects are output, in SP reach production C, BGM and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP1-3, and in SP reach production D, BGM and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP1-4. In the SP reach production E, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound patterns BP1-5.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach effect, common sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 are output in the SP reach effect A to E. Note that one of the sound patterns BP2-2 to BP2-4 is selected based on the result of the variable display, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4. ing.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable object effect" and "big hit notification" in the SP ready-to-win effect, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3 in the SP ready-to-win effect A to E. In addition, during the execution period of the "loss notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are illuminated with common sound patterns BP3-1 to BP3-3.

In addition, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball release part (ta5 to ta6) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effect A to C is output in the sound pattern BP4-1, the SP reach effect D, At E, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound pattern BP4-4.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part in the post-production A and the scheduled ball notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production B, in the SP reach production A to C, the sound pattern BP4-2 or the sound pattern BP4-3 BGM and sound effects are output, and in SP reach performances D and E, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP4-5 or sound pattern BP4-6.

The sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 output sounds in different modes based on sound control data. The outline of each sound pattern will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(B), in "bowling/battle", the sound pattern BP1-1 is the voice when introducing the reach title for SP reach production A, the voice of "Kill the pins!", and the SP reach. This is a pattern in which the BGM of production A is output (see FIG. 13-10), and the sound patterns BP1-2 are the voice when introducing the reach title for SP reach production B, the voice of "Fight!" It is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-1, the BGM of SP reach production B, and the battle sound effect are output (see FIG. 13-11 (A2)), and the sound pattern BP1-3 is the SP reach production C This is the pattern that outputs the voice when the reach title is introduced, the voice of "Fight!", the voice of ally A-2 of "It's settled next time!" 13-11 (A3) reference), the sound pattern BP1-4 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for SP reach production D, the voice of "Fight!" , BGM of SP reach production D, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A4)), and sound patterns BP1-5 are voices when introducing reach titles for SP reach production E, " Fight!”, the voice of ally A-1 saying “Next time it’s over!”, the BGM of the SP reach effect E, and the battle sound effects (see FIG. 13-12 (A5)).

The sound pattern BP2-1 in the "appropriate button effect" is a pattern in which a voice saying "keep pressing the button to accumulate power" and a sound effect with a power level of 0 are output (see FIG. 13-13), Sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern for outputting sound effects at power level 1, sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern for outputting sound effects at power level 2, and sound pattern BP2-4 is a pattern for outputting sound effects at power level 2. This pattern outputs a voice of level 3 (MAX) and a sound effect of power level 3 (MAX).

In the "notice of failure", the sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which the sound effect of failure is output (see Fig. 13-16 (H1)), and the sound pattern BP3-2 is the defeat of the ally A-1 (disappointing ) voice and battle defeat BGM are output (see FIGS. 13-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)), and the sound pattern BP3-3 is the defeat (disappointment) voice of ally A-2, battle This is a pattern in which defeat BGM is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H3)).

In the "movable body effect & big hit notification", the sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the effect sound of the moveable body effect, the sound effect of success, and the BGM of success are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E1)), The sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body production, the victory voice of the ally A-1, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIGS. 13-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)), The sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body production, the victory voice of the ally A-2, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIG. 13-15 (E3)).

In the "re-lottery variation/scheduled ball release addition", the sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the BGM of the re-lottery variation is output (see FIG. 13-17 (F1)), and the sound pattern BP4-4 is the schedule This is a pattern in which the BGM for adding the number of balls played, the sound effect (attack) for adding the number of balls played, the voice for adding the number of balls played by teammate A-1, and the voice of "Push!" are output (see FIGS. 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result/scheduled ball release notification", the sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of even-numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (Fig. 13-17 (F2), sound pattern BP4 -3 is a pattern in which the sound effects of odd-numbered patterns and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the sound pattern BP4-5 is the BGM of the scheduled ball release notification, 750 This is a pattern in which sound effects are output (see FIGS. 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and sound pattern BP4-6 outputs the BGM of the scheduled pitch announcement, the sound effect of 1500, and the voice of MAX. (G1-4) to (G4) in FIGS. 13-19).

In addition, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable object production is common to all types of SP reach production A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3), thereby further reducing the manufacturing cost. can be done.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, an arbitrary timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period during which the "win/fail button presentation" is executed, or the operation effective period is not detected and the operation effective period is Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the end timing, the sound pattern in the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4 as an example, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, sound effects may be output in different sound patterns according to the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period during which the "win/fail button effect" is executed. By doing so, it is possible to change the effect sound by changing the timing of the operation by the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Flow of SP reach production A to E)
Next, the flow of the SP reach effects A to E will be described with reference to FIG. 13-8. FIG. 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach effects A to E. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, in the SP reach α, β, γ, when the SP reach production develops from the N reach production, in the case of the SP reach production A, bowling as shown in (A1) is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect B, the start image of the battle A between the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2), and in the case of the SP reach effect C , the start image of the battle A between the friend character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A3). 1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, the battle B between the friend character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 starts as shown in (A5). An image is displayed. In this way, the first half of the SP ready-to-win productions A to E are different in each of the SP ready-to-win productions A to E.

Next, the hit/fail button effect is started at a predetermined timing at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. Specifically, as shown in (B1), after the first operation promotion effect for promoting the long-pressing operation of the push button 31B is started, a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation promotion effect was started. At the timing, as shown in (B2), the second operation promotion effect is started to promote the release operation of the long-pressing operation of the push button 31B. In this way, the effect mode in the success/failure button effect is common to the SP reach effect A to E.

Next, when the variable display result is a big hit, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected in the operation valid period of the hit/fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. At the timing when the operation valid period has passed without being played, an image showing the last throw in bowling and the last blow in battle is displayed, as shown in (C).

Next, in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the ball has hit the pin is displayed, and the SP ready-to-win effect B is displayed. In the case of (D2), as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the enemy character X-1 is attacked is displayed. , (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the enemy character X-2 is attacked is displayed. ), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-1 is attacked is displayed. As shown, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. Thus, the effect mode of the movable body effect is different between the SP reach effect A, the SP reach effect B and D, and the SP reach effect C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect A, as shown in (E1), a result image indicating that the pin has fallen is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect B, as shown in (E2), the battle A is displayed. A result image indicating victory is displayed. In the case of SP reach effect C, as shown in (E3), a result image indicating victory in battle A is displayed, and in case of SP reach effect D, ( As shown in E4), a result image showing that the battle B is won is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, a result image showing that the battle A is won is displayed as shown in (E5). be. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification is different for each of the SP ready-to-win effects A to E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach production A to C, the post-production A is started, and in the re-lottery fluctuation part shown in (F1), an image in which the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in (E1 to E3) is re-variably displayed. After being displayed, in the re-lottery result parts shown in (F2) and (F3), fixed decorative symbols that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the case of the SP reach effect D, the post effect B is started, and in the scheduled ball output addition part shown in (G1), the friendly character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacks the enemy character X-1. Then, an image in which the scheduled number of balls is added is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach performance E, the post-performance B is started, and in the scheduled number of balls added part shown in (G2), the teammate displayed in (A5) An image is displayed in which the character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2 and the scheduled ball output is added. Next, in the case of the SP ready-to-win productions D and E, the expected number of put-out balls is displayed in the expected put-out notification parts shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is wrong, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period of the win/fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. (C) (D1 to D5) is not displayed at the timing when the operation valid period has passed without being executed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, as shown in (H1), it is indicated that the strike has failed. In the case of the SP ready-to-win effect B, a result image showing that the player has lost the battle A is displayed as shown in (H2), and in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect C, the result image shown in (H3) is displayed. , a result image indicating defeat in battle A is displayed, and in the case of SP ready-to-win production D, a result image showing defeat in battle B is displayed as shown in (H4), and SP ready-to-win production is displayed. In the case of E, as shown in (H5), a result image indicating that the player has lost the battle A is displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification differs between the SP ready-to-win effect A, the SP ready-to-win effect B and D, and the SP ready-to-win effect C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP ready-to-win performances A to E, as shown in (I1), fixed decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called "ready-to-win failure") which is not a big hit combination are stopped and displayed.

(Example of SP reach production A to E production operation)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effects A to E executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-9 to 13-20. FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an effect operation example from the start of the variable display of SP reach α, β, γ to the development of SP reach effect. 13-10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effect A. FIG. 13-11 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effects B and C. FIG. 13-12 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effects D and E. FIG. FIG. 13-13 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the hit/fail button effect. 13-14 are diagrams showing an example of the rendering operation of the movable body rendering. FIGS. 13-15 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the big hit notification of the SP reach effects A to E. FIG. FIGS. 13-16 are diagrams showing an effect operation example of notifying the loss of the SP ready-to-win effects A to E. FIG. 13-17 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the post effect A. FIG. 13-18 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the post effect B. FIG. 13-19 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the post effect B. FIG.

Incidentally, in the following explanation, among the SP ready-to-win productions A to E, the production operations executed in common will be collectively explained, and the different production operations will be explained individually. Also, some of the numbers (for example, A to I) assigned to each frame correspond to the numbers assigned to the frames shown in FIG. 13-8.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N1), each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R based on the determination of one of SP reach α, β, γ as a variation pattern with the occurrence of the start winning prize At , the variable display of the decoration pattern is started.

In the following description, the active display 018SG003 corresponding to the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 018SG013 corresponding to the active display area 069SG013 of the characteristic portion 069SG, and the first reserved display area corresponding to the first reserved display area 069SG011. The pending display 018SG001 corresponding to the pending display 069SG001 is displayed in 018SG011, and the pending display 018SG002 corresponding to the pending display 069SG002 is displayed in the second pending display area 018SG012 corresponding to the second pending display area 069SG012. do.

After the variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N2), when the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode, the normal ready-to-win effect is started as the variable display effect of the decoration pattern. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N3), at the timing when a predetermined time has passed after entering the ready-to-win mode, the decoration symbols stopped and displayed in the decoration design display areas 5L and 5R in the decoration design display area 5C After the decorative symbols with different numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N4), the variable display of the decorative design display area 5C is resumed, thereby developing into SP ready-to-win effects.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1), when it develops into SP reach production A, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, and SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01A indicating the start of A is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01A includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production A) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and a content display representing bowling. 018SG102 and

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 indicating that the pins are arranged in the bowling lane and the challenge is started is displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-2). , after the image 018SG104 in which the ball hits the pins and is knocked down is displayed, as shown in FIG. !” and an image 018SG105 indicating that the next throw will be the last throw is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-1, voices and voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. BGM is output.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2), when it develops into SP reach production B, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01B indicating that B is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01B includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production B) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-1. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-2, voices and voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-1), there is a background image 018SG201 representing a town, a character image 018SGA1 representing an ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing an enemy character X-1. Then, an image 018SG202 indicating that the confrontation is to start is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 having character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1 and indicating that the next blow will be the last blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3), when it develops into SP reach production C, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01C indicating that C is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01C includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production C) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-2. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-2. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-1), there is a background image 018SG201 representing a town, a character image 018SGA2 representing an ally character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 representing an enemy character X-2. Then, an image 018SG212 indicating that the confrontation is to start is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 having character images 018SGA2 and 018SGX2 and indicating that the next attack will be the last blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4), when it develops into SP reach production D, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in reduced size in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, and SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01D indicating that D is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01D includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production D) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-1. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-4, voices and voices from the speakers 8L and 8R BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-1), there is a background image 018SG221 representing wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 representing friend character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing enemy character X-1. Then, an image 018SG222 indicating that the confrontation is to start is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 having character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1 and indicating that the next blow will be the last blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5), when it develops into SP reach production E, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in reduced size in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, and SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01E indicating that E is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01E includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production E) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-1. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-5, voices and sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-1), there is a background image 018SG221 representing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 representing an ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 representing an enemy character X-2. Then, an image 018SG232 indicating that the confrontation is to start is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 having character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX2 and indicating that the next blow will be the last blow is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1), when the success/failure button presentation is started, a button image 018SG241 imitating the push button 31B and a message such as "Press and hold the button to accumulate power!" An operation prompting display 018SG242 is displayed, and an operation prompting effect for prompting the long-pressing operation of the push button 31B is started. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP2-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP2-1, voices and voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-1), the operation prompting display 018SG242 is switched to "Start charging!" is detected, the display modes of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 change. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L, Voices and BGM are output from 8R.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), when the long-pressing operation is detected for a predetermined period, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation prompting display 018SG242 is switched to "Power MAX!" be. Note that the gauge display 018SG243 may not become MAX according to the variable display result even when the long-pressing operation is detected for a predetermined period. Also, the power level may be changed in different manners according to the result of the variable display.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the winning/failure button effect was started, as shown in FIG. Along with prompting to release the long-pressing operation of 31B, the gauge display 018SG243 is switched to a gauge indicating the remaining operation effective period. 13-13 (B1) to FIG. 13-13 (B1-3) are common to the SP reach effects A to E.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-2), in the hit/fail button presentation, an operation prompting display for accumulating power is executed as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting display need not be executed.

Then, when the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period of the success/fail button effect, or when the operation valid period passes without detection of the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B, variable If the display result is a big hit, the movable object presentation shown in FIGS. 13-14 is started.

During the first period from the start of the movable body effect until a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) elapses, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, as shown in FIG. and an attack image 018SG250 indicating the final throw or final blow is displayed. The attack image 018SG250 consists of an object image 018SG250A imitating the spherical operating portion of the push button 31B and an effect image 018SG250B showing the object moving to the back side of the screen. In addition, according to the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position to the rendering position, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are colored to match the background based on the light emission pattern LP3-2. The lights are turned on, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3, and the push button 31B is vibrated by the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect.

As described above, in the first period of the movable body production, the SP ready-to-win productions A to E are executed in a common mode, but in the second period after the first period ends, as follows: Different mode effects are executed in the SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A and the effect image 018SG250B showing the impact are displayed. , and an impact image 018SG251 in which the object hits something is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 does not display the impacted object (for example, pin) that the object (ball) collided with, but the present invention is not limited to this. An image showing bowling pins may be displayed in 018SG251.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2) and (D4), in the case of the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing a shock, and a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X1, and a shock image 018SG252 showing that the enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D3) and (D5), in the case of the SP reach effect C and the SP reach effect E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing the impact, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X2, and an impact image 018SG253 showing that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed.

In addition, in the second period of the movable body presentation shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), common display presentation, light emission presentation, sound presentation, and vibration presentation are performed. Specifically, the display and non-display of the effect image 018SG250B are alternately performed according to the vibration of the movable body 32 (non-display when the movable body 32 moves upward, display when the movable body 32 moves downward, etc.). As a result, based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 basically match the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B. ~ 9L12, 9R1 ~ 9R12 in order of outward direction, and when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed, it emits light in a light emission pattern that flashes violently in white, and as a sound effect, a sound pattern BP0-1 3, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the push button 31B is vibrated by the vibration motor 61 as a vibration presentation. In addition, in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), display using a light guide plate display device may be performed.

In FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed according to the vibration of the movable body 32 is a display color common or similar to the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time. They are displayed in colors (for example, similar colors). By doing so, it is possible to enhance the relationship between the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 representing the enemy characters and the effect image 018SG250B, thereby enhancing the rendering effect of the movable body rendering.

Then, after the movable body effect is completed, it is notified that the game will be a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 13-15. Specifically, in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect A, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E1), an image 018SG261 indicating a fallen bowling pin, a character display 018SG262 indicating "Success!", and an effect image 018SG263. , a result image 018SG260A indicating that the bowling challenge was successful is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-1. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E2), a character image 018SGA1 representing the friend character A-1, a character image 018SGX1Z representing the enemy character X-1, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260B indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle against the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends. The character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out. By displaying the character image 018SGX1Z in this manner, the end of the series of presentations can be appropriately notified.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E3), a character image 018SGA2 representing the friend character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 representing the enemy character X-2, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260C indicating that the friendly character A-2 has won the battle against the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-3. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends. The character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 is hidden by fading out. By displaying the character image 018SGX2Z in this manner, the end of the series of presentations can be appropriately notified.

In the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E4), a character image 018SGA1 representing the friend character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 representing the enemy character X-1, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260D indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle against the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends.

In the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E5), a character image 018SGA1 representing the friend character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 representing the enemy character X-2, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260E indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E were displayed, the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. Confirmed decoration patterns (for example, 666, etc.) as a predetermined big win combination in 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the words "big win" are displayed to notify that the big win is confirmed. executed.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the long press operation of the push button 31B has been released during the valid operation period of the win/fail button effects shown in FIGS. When the effective period of operation has passed without detection of cancellation of the long-pressing operation, if the result of the variable display is failure, the movable object effect is not executed, and as shown in FIGS. The deviation confirmation notification shown is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and an image showing the remaining bowling pins that have not fallen down. A result image 018SG270A having 018SG271 and a character display 018SG272 indicating "Failed..." indicating that the bowling challenge has failed is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-1, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect B and SP reach effect D, as shown in FIGS. , a character image 018SGX1 indicating the enemy character X-1, and a character display 018SG262 indicating "defeat...", and the friendly character A-1 battles with the enemy character X-1. A result image 018SG270B indicating that the player has lost the confrontation is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-2, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA2 showing the friend character A-2 and the enemy character A-2 are displayed. A result having a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeated..." indicating that the friendly character A-2 has lost the battle against the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270C is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-3, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

In addition, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA1 showing the friend character A-1 and the enemy character A-1 are displayed. A result having a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeated..." indicating that the friendly character A-1 has lost the battle against the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270E is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-2, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E were displayed, the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. In 5R, by stop-displaying fixed decorative symbols (for example, 676, etc.) of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also referred to as "ready-to-win loss") which is not a big hit combination, loss confirmation notification indicating that the loss is confirmed is executed. .

Next, when the big hit decision notification is executed in the SP ready-to-win productions A to C, the post production A shown in FIGS. 13-17 is executed.

Specifically, in the announcement of the confirmation of the big hit, after the confirmed decoration symbols (for example, 666, etc.) that are the predetermined combination of the decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the In the re-lottery variable part shown in (F1), the re-variable display of the decorative design is started in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-1. is output.

Then, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F2), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-variable), when a predetermined time has passed since the re-variable display is started, a predetermined A combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666, etc.) is stop-displayed as a fixed decorative symbol for a jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-2. is output.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F3), if the jackpot type is jackpot B (variable probability), a predetermined jackpot is won when a predetermined time has passed since the re-variable display is started. A combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stop-displayed as a fixed decorative symbol to be combined, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-3. is output.

Next, when the big hit confirmation notification is executed in the SP ready-to-win effects D and E, the post effect B shown in FIGS. 13-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the announcement of the determination of the big hit, after the determined decorative symbols (for example, 666, etc.) which are predetermined combinations of the predetermined jackpots are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIGS. In the scheduled ball payout addition part shown in (G1-1), the background image 018SG280 representing the universe, the character image 018SGA1 representing the teammate character A-1, and the scheduled payouts given in the jackpot game state displaying the expected number of payouts are displayed. A scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281 representing the number of balls is displayed, and the post effect B is started. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-4, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-4. is output.

Next, in the case of SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. An image of the character A-1 attacking the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and an additional pitch display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed in the scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281.

In addition, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. An image of the character A-1 attacking the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and an additional pitch display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed in the scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-2), the push button 31B is simulated when the counter value displayed in the scheduled pitch count counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"). button image 018SG283, an operation prompting display 018SG284 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 018SG285 indicating the remaining operation effective period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect for promoting single-pressing of the push button 31B is executed. be.

Next, in the case of SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the operation effective period has passed without being detected, the character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1 are displayed, the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-1, and the counter value of the scheduled pitches counter display 018SG281 is displayed. is displayed variably. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-5, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-5. and sound effects are output.

On the other hand, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. Character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX2 are displayed at the timing when the operation effective period has passed without being detected, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2, and the counter value of the scheduled number-of-balls counter display 018SG281 is displayed. is displayed variably. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-6, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-6. , sound effects and voices are output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-5), a character image 018SGA1 and a special image 018SGXZ that disappears into a star after the attacked enemy character X-2 is blown away are displayed. The expected number of put-out balls counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the expected number of put-out balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-19 (G3), in the case of a big win B (6R big win), the counter value displayed in the expected ball number counter display 018SG281 is not updated, and is controlled to the big win game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G4), in the case of a big hit C (10R big hit), the counter value displayed in the scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281 is a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"). After the display is updated to , it is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(SP reach production type determination table)
Next, in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 is executed when the determined variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern SP reach effect type In the determination process, the SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table used when determining the SP ready-to-win effect type will be described. 13-20, (A) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table A, (B) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table B, and (C) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table C. FIG.

In the SP reach effect type determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the SP reach effect type determination is extracted, and SP reach is performed using any of the SP reach effect type determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. Determine the type of presentation.

In the SP reach effect type determination table, as shown in FIGS. Different determination values are assigned to each of the SP ready-to-win effect types so as to correspond to the determination value numbers shown in FIGS. 13-20(A) to (C).

When the variation pattern is the SP reach α, the SP reach effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 13-20(A) is used. Specifically, 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-1" in the case of "jackpot B (6R)". In the case of "jackpot A (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". For the case of "missing", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the variation pattern is the SP reach β, the SP reach effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 13-20(B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PB-1", and 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern PC-1". . In the case of "jackpot A (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PB-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PC-1". In the case of "missing", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PC-2".

That is, when the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B (6R)" which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)", the SP reach performance is performed. C is determined at a rate higher than SP reach performance B.

Also, when the variation pattern is SP reach γ, the SP reach effect type determination table C shown in FIG. 13-20(C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot C (10R)", 40 determination values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 60 determination values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". . In the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". In the case of "missing", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-2" and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-2".

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)", the SP reach performance is performed. E is determined at a rate higher than SP reach performance D.

(action/effect)
As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the enemy character X-1 is used to enter the jackpot game state. SP ready-to-win effect B) and a second specific effect (e.g., SP ready-to-win effect A) for informing whether or not to be controlled to a big win game state without displaying an enemy character can be executed, and SP ready-to-win effect can be executed. , a "movable body effect" can be executed as a special effect during the execution period of the SP ready-to-win effect. character image 018SG250B is displayed together with the effect image 018SG250B related to the character image 018SGX1, and while the effect image 018SG250B in the same manner as the SP reach effect B is displayed, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect in the SP reach effect A. However, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body production is a common light emission pattern LP3- in the case where the movable body production is executed in the SP reach production B and the case where the movable body production is executed in the SP reach production A. 2.

By doing so, the movement mode of the movable body 32 and the light emission mode of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body presentation are common between the SP ready-to-reach presentation B in which the enemy character is displayed and the SP ready-to-reach presentation A in which the enemy character is not displayed. It is possible to increase the relevance between the SP reach performance and the movable body performance by whether or not the enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

More specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production B and the SP ready-to-win production A, which have different production modes, the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32 are common to the movable body production performed during the SP ready-to-win production, while the effect By setting the image 018SG250B in a display mode corresponding to each SP ready-to-win effect, it is possible to prevent the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect from being interrupted by the movable body effect.

In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect B is applied as the first specific effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to any of the SP reach effects C to E. It is possible.

Also, the execution period of the movable body production includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the production mode in the first period is common to the SP reach production B to E and the SP reach production A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14 (C) is common), the production mode in the second period is different between SP reach production B to E and SP reach production A (see FIG. 13-14 (D1) 13-14 (D2-D5)). By doing so, by making the production mode common until the first period, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced, and the SP reach production B to E and the SP reach production A can be used until the first period. Since it is unclear which one it is, the performance interest of the SP reach performance can be improved.

Further, as the SP reach effect, it is possible to execute the SP reach effect E that displays the enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1, and the ratio of control to the jackpot state is when the SP reach effect B is executed. and when the SP reach effect E is executed. In other words, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β variation pattern that allows execution of the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. , the determination ratio of the SP reach γ variation pattern capable of executing the SP reach effect E is 800/997. Then, in the SP ready-to-win production C, an effect image 018SG250B common to the SP ready-to-win production B corresponding to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed during the execution period of the movable body production to be executed when a big win is announced, and the enemy is displayed. A character image 018SGX2 representing the character X2 is displayed, and the light emission pattern of the movable body LEDs 208 in the movable body presentation performed in the SP ready-to-reach presentation C is the same as the light emission pattern of the movable body LEDs 208 in the movable body presentation performed in the SP ready-to-reach presentation B. A common emission pattern LP3-2.

By doing so, the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body production are made common to reduce the manufacturing cost, while the SP reach production in which the ratio of being controlled to the big hit state is different. can be increased, and attention can be paid to which SP ready-to-win performance is to be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body presentation executed in the SP reach presentation B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, so that the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image can be enhanced. , the production effect of the movable body production can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first mode (for example, SP ready-to-win effect B) and a second mode for displaying an enemy character and notifying whether or not the enemy character is used to control the big hit game state. (For example, SP ready-to-reach production D), and movable body production can be executed during the execution period of SP ready-to-reach production B and D (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5), and execution of movable body production During the period, in both the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with a common effect image (for example, the effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body 32, and in the case of the SP reach effect B , instead of the post-production B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach production, the post-production A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed (see FIGS. 13-17), while the SP reach production D is executed. In this case, a post effect B (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

By doing so, the SP ready-to-win production B and the SP ready-to-win production D can share the enemy character and the movable body 32 in the movable body production to reduce the manufacturing cost, and the common enemy character X can be used. By displaying -1 with different effects, the relevance between the SP reach performances B and D and the movable body performance and the SP reach performances B and D and the post performances A and B can be enhanced, and the performance effect can be improved.

More specifically, even in the post-production after the big hit confirmation notification is performed in the SP reach production, the character displayed in the SP reach production is used to inform the re-variation result of the decoration pattern and the scheduled number of balls to be put out. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach production, notifications such as re-fluctuation result notification and scheduled number of pitches are shared in common, while the display content is made to correspond to the type of SP reach production, so that the SP reach production It is possible to show up to the post-production as a series of productions.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a special effect (for example, effect in which the enemy character disappears) that changes the enemy character X-1 into a special mode after the movable body effect executed in the SP ready-to-win effect. Yes, in SP ready-to-win production B, character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out in the big hit notification before post-production A (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). , SP ready-to-reach production D, in post-production B, a special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 is flung away and then disappears into a star (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)). By doing so, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the type of the SP ready-to-win effect, so the effect of the effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, as a special effect, the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out, and the attacked enemy character X-2 is flung away and then disappears to become a star. etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. effect image, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, instead of hiding the character, various effects can be used as long as the appearance changes even if the character is not hidden, such as increasing the transmittance, decreasing the brightness, or deforming the image. Can be changed.

Further, when the SP reach effect B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state, the "jackpot" is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state). B (6R)” (second advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state and the SP reach production D is executed, the “jackpot The percentage controlled to the "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state) more advantageous to the player than B (6R) (first advantageous state) is 40%. By doing so, it is possible to make the user pay attention to which of the SP ready-to-win effects B and D is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and the friend character A-1, and determines whether or not the big win game state is controlled using the enemy character X-1 and the friend character A-1. A first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D) to be notified, an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1, and an ally character A-1 are displayed, and the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1 are displayed. 1 and a second specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect E) for notifying whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state using 1, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP ready-to-win effect D In addition, by displaying and operating the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach performance D, it is given in a big win game state in which it is notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance D. It is possible to execute a post-facto effect B for notifying the scheduled number of balls to be put out, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect E, the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A displayed in the SP reach effect E. -1 is displayed and operated, it is possible to execute a post-effect B for notifying the number of balls to be put out in the jackpot game state in which control in the SP ready-to-win effect E is notified, and at least for allies. The action mode of the character A-1 is common between the post-effect B corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect D and the post-effect B corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19).

By doing so, by using a common ally character in the SP reach performance and the post performance, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the relationship between the SP reach performance and the post performance can be easily understood, resulting in a performance effect. can also be increased.

In addition, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so that the background image is also Since it can be shared, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

Also, the ally character A-1 is common in the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so the special character is also common. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

In addition, in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach production D, an image of the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time, and in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach production E, the enemy character By displaying the images of X-2 and the friendly character A-1 fighting at the same time (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), each character is displayed at the same time. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as a post effect, when executing a movable body effect in the SP reach effect D, the first post effect (for example, post effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect D, and the SP A second post-effect (for example, post-effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP ready-to-reach effect E when the movable body effect is executed in the ready-to-reach effect E, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP ready-to-reach effect A. A third post-effect (for example, post-effect A) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect A can be executed, and the ratio controlled to the second advantageous state is the SP reach effect D, the SP reach effect E, and the SP reach. It differs depending on which of the effects A is executed.

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state, "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state) is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state). state) is 40% when the SP reach effect D is executed, and 60% when the SP reach effect E is executed, and the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state. SP ready-to-win production A executes the ratio of control to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantage state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantage state), when 100% if

By doing so, not only is the big hit reported by the SP ready-to-win effect, but also the ratio of control to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP ready-to-win effect is executed, so that the player for the SP ready-to-win effect The degree of attention of the game can be suitably increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, as the first post-effect of the effect mode related to the first specific effect, the friend character and the enemy character displayed in the SP ready-to-win effect D are displayed. The effect is related to the first specific effect, and as the second post-effect of the effect mode related to the second specific effect, the friend character and the enemy character displayed in the SP ready-to-win effect E are displayed. The second post-effect is related to the second specific effect, and the third post-effect is related to the third specific effect by not displaying the friend character and the enemy character in the SP reach effect A and the post-effect A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The third post-effect may be related to the third specific effect.

In other words, the post-effect related to the specific effect means that if the display mode of the specific effect and at least a part of the effect mode are the same, the common effect mode is that the character is displayed or the character is not displayed. are common, the character types displayed in the specific effect and the post-effect may be different. Moreover, you may have four or more types of specific effects and post-effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect and the second specific effect can be executed in the low base state, and the third specific effect can be executed in the high base state. The first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect may all be effects that can be executed in the low base state, or all of them can be effects that can be executed in the high base state. That is, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect may be effects that can be determined regardless of the game state.

Further, as the third specific effect, it is possible to execute the SP reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with the enemy character X-3, which is different from the enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in the high base state. Well, in this case, the ratio controlled to the jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%)>SP reach effect E (35%)>SP reach effect D (15%). Incidentally, the post-effect C (third post-effect) performed when a big hit is reported in the SP ready-to-win effect F may have a longer effect period than the post-effects A and B.

Further, in the above SP reach production F, for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body production shown in FIG. It is preferable that the sound pattern of the movable body effect shown in (C) be the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3 common to the SP reach effect A to E.

In the above-described embodiment, the second advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous state is, for example, an advantageous state in which the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, the planned number of balls to be put out is 10R jackpot C) and an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot B or a jackpot C controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot ends) are applied. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state is the number of balls put out, the number of game rounds, the control period of the variable probability state, the time saving state, and the small hit state than the first advantageous state, It may include a state or the like in which the falling rate of stochastic fluctuation is advantageous. Also, the big win game state or the effect mode after the end of the big win game state may be an advantageous state or the like that is advantageous to the player.

Also, when applying the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic parts 069G and 099G, for example, the SP reach effect A in the characteristic part 018SG is changed to the SP reach A and B of the characteristic parts 069G and 099G Apply, apply the SP reach effects B and C in the feature parts 018SG to the SP reach C of the feature parts 069G and 099G, and apply the SP reach effects D and E in the feature parts 018SG to the SP reach D of the feature parts 069G and 099G. It is possible.

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 018SG)
In the characteristic portion 018SG, an example is given in which the big hit game state is applied as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small win game state, time saving state (high base state). , probability change state, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in the characterizing part 018SG, a form in which the movable body 32 is applied as an example of the movable body is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board can be used. Alternatively, a movable body or the like provided in the frame 3 for a game machine may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, as a specific effect for notifying whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state, a form in which SP reach effects A to E for notifying whether or not to be controlled to a big hit game state is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal reach effect, a post effect, or the like may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, a mode in which enemy characters X-1 and X-2 that confront friendly characters A-1 and A-2 are applied as specific characters and special characters was exemplified. The game is not limited to this, and enemy characters other than those described above, other characters that do not face off against friendly characters, and the like may be applicable. Also, a character or the like made of an image in which a person is actually photographed may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, an example is given in which friendly characters A-1 and A-2 that confront enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are applied as special characters, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, ally characters other than the above, other characters that do not confront enemy characters, etc. may be applicable. Also, a character or the like made of an image in which a person is actually photographed may be used.

Further, in the characteristic portion 018SG, as a specific effect in which characters are displayed, a form is exemplified in which SP reach effects A to E in which a special character (ally character) and a specific character or a special character (enemy character) face each other are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character, the specific character, and the special character may be a plurality of ally characters or enemy characters that fight together without confrontation, or a plurality of characters that do not confront each other. good.

In addition, in the characterizing part 018SG, a mode is illustrated in which the movable body effect is applied as a special effect of causing the movable body to operate and the light emitting body to emit light. You may apply the production|presentation which operates the movable body of. Moreover, the operation mode of the movable body 32 can be changed variously.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the execution timing of the movable body production is before the announcement of the big hit determination in the latter stage of the SP reach production A to E, but it can be changed variously such as the middle stage of the SP reach production A to E. is. Also, the movable object effect can be started in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, but it may be started at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation.

In the characteristic part 018SG, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light, sound effects are output, and the push button 31B vibrates according to the movement of the movable body 32 in the movable body presentation. Although the embodiment has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light guide plate light emitting effect using the light guide plate device may be executed according to the operation of the movable body 32 . In this case, it is preferable that the light-emitting pattern of the light guide plate device be common to the SP reach effects A to E in the same way as the light-emitting pattern of the LEDs.

In addition, in the characterizing part 018SG, as an effect image related to the motion of the movable body 32, the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. , an effect image in a mode (for example, a mode representing impact) related to the operation mode (for example, vibration) of the movable body 32, or an effect image in a mode for emphasizing the vibrating movable body 32, or the like. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a post effect executed after the movable body effect as a special effect, the fixed decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are re-variably displayed. A form is illustrated in which the performance A and the post-performance B for notifying the number of balls to be put out in the big win game state notified by using the friendly characters and the enemy characters appearing in the SP ready-to-win performance are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to the above-mentioned post-effect as long as it is an effect executed after a special effect, for example, a jackpot middle effect executed in a big win game state. Or, it may be possible to apply a small-hit middle effect executed in the small-hit game state.

Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, before the end of the variable display, the post-effect B for notifying the expected number of balls to be given in the notified big win game state is executed. During the fanfare period from the start of the game to the start of the round game, the round interval between the game rounds, etc., it is possible to execute a post-production that notifies the scheduled number of balls to be given in the notified jackpot game state. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the post-effect B, as the game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value to be given in the big win game state notified that the SP reach effect D, E is controlled, Although a form has been exemplified in which the scheduled number of put-out balls to be given is notified so as to be identifiable, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds or the like may be notified.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, in the post-effect B, the mode of notifying the scheduled number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state in which control by the SP reach effect D, E was notified was exemplified, but the present invention. is not limited to this, for example, when the jackpot continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) or more, instead of or in addition to the scheduled number of balls, the first The total number of put-out balls acquired from the jackpot game state to the present time may be reported. Furthermore, when the addition is made in the scheduled ball throwing addition part in the post production B, or when the scheduled number of thrown balls is notified in the scheduled ball throwing notification part, the total number of thrown balls is a predetermined number (for example, 2500 balls, 5000 balls, etc.). ball, 7500 balls, 10000 balls, etc.), it may be possible to notify that the total number of balls put out has exceeded a predetermined number.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, while the types of friendly characters and enemy characters to be confronted are different in the SP reach effects A to E, the operation mode of the movable bodies 32 and the display mode of the effect images 018SG250B in the movable body effects are common. Although a certain form was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background images in the SP reach effects A to E, the type and execution ratio of various advance notice effects such as chance up, the battle confrontation period, and the action mode of the character , display mode, etc. may be changed according to the variable display result, and even in this case, it is preferable that the motion mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body presentation and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B be common.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, the SP ready-to-win productions D and E exemplified a mode in which the execution period of the scheduled ball-ball addition part and the scheduled ball-ball notification part in the post-production B is common. It is not limited, and the execution period of the scheduled put-out addition part or the scheduled put-out notification part may be changed according to the type of the big win, that is, the size of the expected number of put-out balls.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, the SP reach effects A to C can be executed in the low base state, and the SP reach effects D and E can be executed in the high base state, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the various specific effects (SP ready-to-win effects) described above may all be effects that can be executed in the low base state or all can be executed in the high base state. That is, it may be executable in any type of game state.

Although the characteristic portions 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these examples, and modifications and changes are made within the scope of the present invention. Any additions are included in the invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is increased. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the amount is subtracted and stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

Other embodiments will be described below. In the above embodiment, the SP reach A (bowling SP) and SP reach B (battle SP) were described as the SP reach executed in the normal state, but in other embodiments, the SP reach executed in the normal state , "SP first half → SP latter half (loss)", "SP first half → SP latter half (hit)", "SP first half → final reach (loss)", "SP first half → final reach (hit)" will be executed. .

Correspondence with claims is as follows.
Non-special state is normal state (low probability low base state). The first special state is a time-saving state controlled after the advantageous state (jackpot) ends. The second special state is a time-saving state that is controlled by performing a predetermined number of fluctuations of losing without being controlled to an advantageous state.

(Other embodiments Characteristic portion 117F, characteristic portion 132F, characteristic portion 1940S, characteristic portion 1941S)
<Pachinko machine configuration, etc.>
FIG. 14 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 shows the arrangement layout of main members in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of the game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. there is A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

Incidentally, as the special symbols variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, two types of special symbols are provided. For example, one special symbol is also called "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also called "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decoration symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolling display or updated display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 19). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, thereby opening the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize opening is open). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 14, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 19). hereinafter referred to as a general prize winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A consists of a game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 15) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning entrance door is provided in the space between them, and this large winning entrance door slides horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the normal big winning mouth with game balls. open a path to Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 19), the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the game balls enter the normal big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 19). (referred to as a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door is slid to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 19) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . In addition, the normal big prize mouth and the V big prize mouth are also collectively referred to as the big prize mouth. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 14), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is composed of a character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation, the name of a singer, etc.). Also, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Mume" indicating the main character, Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is indicated on the movable body 32 .

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position covering (overlapping) the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by causing the characters "POWERFULII" to fall diagonally (falling so that "P" is downward and "II" is upward) ( overlap) position. In addition, the movable body 32 is also called an accessory.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is a stick controller 31A as an operating rod that can be gripped by the player and tilted (operated in the front, back, left, and right directions, and pulled toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 19) is provided inside the body of the stick controller 31A or the like to detect a tilting operation on the operation rod. The stick controller 31A also incorporates a vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also called a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 19).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a special figure LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the LED. In the special symbol LED board 9020, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (a) to be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 represents the type of the second special figure. In the present embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept including lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of various lamps such as frame lamps to be described later.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5 . The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of special symbols, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 17(b) to be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/flashing/extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9053, Represents the type of the first special figure, by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054, represents the type of the second special figure.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also called game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 . Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided near the accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, the board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and the special variable winning ball device 7B. The attacker lamp 9E, the V-attacker lamp 9F provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V big winning opening are open to allow V winning to occur. A V lamp 9G that informs that a A button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3 are provided. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The role lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as role lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the character "POWERFUL II" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the character lamp 9A1 is behind the parts "P" and "O", and the character lamp 9A2 is The character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "W" and "E" parts, the character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "R" and "F" parts, and the character lamp 9A4 are arranged behind the "U" and "L" parts. there is As a result, the character lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (lighted) on the back side of the member to which the letters "POWERFUL II" are attached, so that "POWERFUL II" is lighted (lighted).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, a main character (for example, "Muyume" indicating the main character, Mumu) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 indicate the main character. are arranged on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Also, the V-attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V-attacker lamp 9F lights (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, thereby lighting (lighting up) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It's becoming The electric tube lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (lighting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (lighted).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (lighted), the stick controller 31A is lit (lighted). The push button lamp 9K is provided in the push button 31B, and lights up (lights up) the push button 31B.

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later with reference to FIG. 16) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights (lights), the lamp for the gaming machine The left side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 16) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (lights up), the gaming machine The right side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as frame lamps. In addition, role lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric tube lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main substrate 11, for example, at predetermined positions on the power supply substrate 17 (see FIG. 19).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 19) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls that enter the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls won in the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, extending counterclockwise from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame left lamp 9L causes the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of eleven lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, extending clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame right lamp 9R causes the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the special LED board 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. FIG. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the special figure LED board 9020 includes a special figure 1 variable display section 9021 showing the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display section showing the variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 storage display unit 9023 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display unit 9024 indicating the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game , Normal pattern storage display unit 9025 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, normal pattern display unit 9026 showing variable display of normal patterns, right hitting display unit 9030 prompting the player to hit right, presence or absence of probability variation state , a time saving display portion 9029 indicating whether or not there is a time saving state, and a round display portion 9027 indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 9020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 9030 . In the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-hand hitting display unit 9030 lights (lights up), and when not prompting the player to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, lighting means such as an LED in the hitting right display section 9030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 9030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 9030 is extinguished. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-handed display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 9030 .

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display section 9030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is being displayed, causing the game balls to enter the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special figure 1 storage display unit 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 9052 showing the number of pending memories, Special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 indicating the situation or display result of the variable display of the 1st special figure, The situation or display result of the variable display of the 2nd special figure A special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 showing and a right hitting display unit 9055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 indicates whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Below, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol to represent the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 1 variable display portion 9053 Also called In addition, representing the variation of the stop design of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights (lights up), indicating that the player hits to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 9055 is extinguished. After design determination, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the design is changed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination, the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right hitting display section 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right hitting display section 9055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 17(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a before-variation pattern command and a later-variation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the effect control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp , lighting/blinking/extinguishing. Before the fluctuation pattern command and after the fluctuation pattern command, from the CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100 to be described later, is a command output to the production control CPU120 of the production control board 12, before the fluctuation pattern command and after the fluctuation pattern It is output to CPU120 for production|presentation control from CPU103 by one set by a command. Hereinafter, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are collectively referred to as a variation pattern command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special figure 1 variable display 9053 and special figure 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 when a variation pattern command is received from the CPU 103 . For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, based on the received variation pattern command, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 variable display 9053 is changed to the first special symbol. Switching from extinguishing indicating stop to blinking indicating variation of the first special symbol. In addition, the effect control CPU120, when receiving the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU103, based on the received variation pattern command, changes the lighting mode of the special figure 2 variable display 9054 to the second special symbol. Switching from the light-off indicating the stop to the blinking indicating the variation of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode before receiving the variation pattern command is changed without changing the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp. maintain.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special figure 1 variable display 9053 and special figure 2 variable display 9054) in the 4th symbol unit 9050 when the design confirmation command is received from the CPU 103 . For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a symbol determination command that specifies to end the variation of the symbol in the first special figure game, the special figure 1 variable display 9053 is lit based on the received symbol determination command. The aspect is switched from blinking indicating the variation of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the first special symbol. In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a symbol determination command that specifies to end the variation of the symbol in the second special figure game, based on the received symbol determination command, the special figure 2 variable display 9054 is lit. The aspect is switched from blinking indicating the variation of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the design confirmation command is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 does not change the lighting condition of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp, and changes the lighting condition before receiving the design confirmation command. maintain.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, the mode of the lamp (LED) changes according to the reception of the variation pattern command and the symbol confirmation command. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the state of the lamp before and after receiving the command regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the symbol determination command is received. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the mode of the game effect lamp 9 according to the reception of the variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time saving state after the big hit, the pachinko game machine 1 changes from the lighting mode of the normal state to the time saving state in response to receiving the variation pattern command for starting the time saving state. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode of .

FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as variable display of decoration patterns and ready-to-win effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as decoration identification information of a plurality of types different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) is displayed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first reserved memory display area 5D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved circular indications. A displayable second pending memory display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J is displayed to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Numbers indicating the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are displayed below the fourth symbol 5J. As for the numbers indicating the number of reservations, the left side indicates the first reserved number of memories, and the right side indicates the second number of reserved memories. A small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the bottom of the display showing the number of reservations. The small patterns are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R. Patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction. The small pattern 5M is also a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 18, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. are placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or substantially rectangular, and the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. It is Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edge) is invisible or difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

<Board configuration>
FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (for example, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 has, for example, an input port for receiving various signals (detection signals to be described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020 and the like, solenoid drive signals). and

The switch circuit 110 receives a detection signal ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 .

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the type of jackpot), variation patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9. Luminance data (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) for the operation is supplied to the LED driver. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

Each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies a current to the LED are mounted, although the details will be described later. The LED driver turns on/flashes/extinguishes the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current for each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the luminance data from the performance control CPU 120 . In this manner, the effect control CPU 120 controls lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, luminance data signal). and an output port for

A board other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13, is also called a sub board. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display part under the control of the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

<Overview of Game Progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the configuration described above, the game progresses as follows. A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later) The actual pattern differs depending on the kind of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of the lighting mode of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is also referred to as a "specific display result". In addition, the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the big hit pattern When a combination of lighting modes is obtained, it becomes "losing". In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, it corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the big hit pattern This lighting mode is also referred to as a "failure display result".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. In addition, you may be made to be controlled by a small hit game state as an advantageous state. Here, a small win is a win in which the number of openings of the big winning opening is smaller than that of a big win. In addition, when the small hit game state ends, the game state does not change. That is, before and after the small winning game state, there is no transition from the variable probability state to the normal state or from the normal state to the variable probability state. In addition, as with the big hit types, the "small hit" may also be provided with a small hit type.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earliest timing. This predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, the kind of big win is set in the "big win". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game is improved compared to the normal state. Therefore, control (high open control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the termination conditions, such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big win game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut short time, number of times cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variable state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, It may be performed by turning off the light, by moving the movable body 32, or by using any rendering device including some or all of these.

As effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which is higher in reliability of big win than normal reach. In addition, super reach includes the first half of super reach that ends in the first half of super reach, the second half of super reach that develops from the first half of super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of super reach. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. Also, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach than the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Also, the reliability of the big win is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is referred to as "first half of SP (first half of SP reach)", "second half of super reach" is referred to as "second half of SP (second half of SP reach)", " Final Reach” is also referred to as “SP Final (SP Final Reach)”.

When the display result of the special game is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (specific display result described above), on the screen of the image display device 5, the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is determined in advance. Determined decoration patterns that will be a big hit combination are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is "big hit"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big win'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit". As the promotion effect, for example, after temporarily stopping the non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern) as a result of the big hit display, a re-lottery effect may be executed for inciting whether or not to promote to the probability variation pattern. In addition, a round promotion performance may be executed in which the non-probability variable big win is promoted to the probability variable big win during the big win game state.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of the lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display of the decorative pattern is not the ready-to-win mode, but the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result of the display, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination (also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect that foretells the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

<Various tables related to big hits>
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG.

[Hit type]
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the hit types. As shown in FIG. 20, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the big win, the probability of big win after the end of the big win game state, the base after the end of the big win game state, and the number of times of opening in the big win ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is performed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low-probability state and a high-base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after three rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The variable probability big win 6 is a big win controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after five rounds of the big win game state are finished. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after seven rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Each random number]
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 21, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a hit determination random counter that determines whether or not to make a big win. Random 1 is, for example, updated by adding 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 65536, and then updated again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for later variation pattern determination) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a later variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the later variation among the variation patterns. The post-fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the second half of the fluctuations in the special design. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of failure. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit.

Random 5 is a random counter (previous variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special symbol fluctuation. Random 5 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 6 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented from 1 again.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which one of the plurality of types of jackpots is selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern may be determined based on the random 2 value.

Also, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the post-variation pattern determination random number (random 3, 4), and the post-variation pattern determination random number (random 5) is used to determine the post-variation pattern. be done. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 22(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with random 1 are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set by the number of determination values described in the upper column of FIG. A big hit judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in . The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). If it coincides with the big hit determination value, it is determined to make a big win (normal big win or probability variable big win) with respect to the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 22(a) shows the probability (percentage) of winning or the probability (percentage) of losing.

FIGS. 22(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 22(b) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 22(c) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 22(b), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination corresponds to each of the normal jackpots 1 and 2 and the probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 22(b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2, variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 value is assigned.

In the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 22(c), the determination value is set by the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which is the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2. It is For example, as shown in FIG. 22(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 out of 100 random 2 values random 2 values are assigned, and the probability variable jackpot 9 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines a type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 2 matches as the jackpot type, and also determines the value of random 2 as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Production control command>
FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the control board on the main side, transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, the 1st byte indicates MODE (class of command), and the 2nd byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 23 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The post-variation on the sub-side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

A front variation pattern command and a rear variation pattern command are transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 as one set of two commands. The effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the variation pattern only by receiving only one of the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command, and receives both the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command. By doing so, the variation pattern can be specified.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (variable probability big hit 1 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (variable probability big hit 2 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 2 is determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (variable probability big hit 3 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (variable probability big hit 4 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (variable probability big hit 5 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 5 is determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (variable probability big hit 6 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (variable probability big hit 7 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (variable probability big hit 8 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (variable probability big hit 9 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 9 is determined. Loss designation commands, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation commands, and probability variable jackpot 1-9 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special figure. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command.

The command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no pending at present by receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the video for the demonstration 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a lamp mode for demonstration 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state (higher brightness, more blinking mode, rainbow lighting, etc.). As a result, the attractiveness of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the player. In the demonstration display of waiting for customers, the background in the normal state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, in the demonstration display of waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWERFUL II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or moving image) of part of the effect may be displayed.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the normal jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command for designating the start of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 7 . Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 8 . The command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 specification command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the normal jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7 . The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of the probability variable jackpot 8 . Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24 .

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment results at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will be made and the judgment result of the kind of big win among the results of determination at the time of winning.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big win will occur, the type of the big win, and the range of judgment values of the variation pattern type judging random number at the time of starting winning. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

<Variation pattern>
Contents of the variation pattern, determination of the variation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. FIG.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, which is the main side, sets a plurality of types of variation patterns. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern, which corresponds to the post-variation. It is designed to contain The previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 23, and the later variation pattern corresponds to the later variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. corresponds to

[Previous fluctuation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are respectively assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that designates normal variation (for example, variation of decorative patterns over 13 seconds) is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that designates a shortened variation (for example, a variation of decorative patterns over 7 seconds). The previous variation number 3 is a previous variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that designates a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of the decoration pattern over 3 seconds).

Pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies normal reach (normal or first half of SP) (reach that ends with normal reach or end with first half of SP reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that designates normal reach (SP latter half development) (reach that develops into SP latter half reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) (reach that develops into final reach after being in a reach mode).

Pre-fluctuation number 7 is a pre-fluctuation pattern command (8006(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (normal or first half of SP) after one pseudo-fluctuation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. It is a variable display (variable display). An effect that repeats such a pseudo-variation is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo-continuation, the variable display based on one reserved memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo-variable displays. Note that the variable display resumed after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as “re-variable display”. Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (SP latter half development) after one pseudo-variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

Pre-fluctuation number 10 is a pre-fluctuation pattern command (8009(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (normal or first half of SP) after two pseudo-fluctuations. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (development of SP latter half) after performing pseudo-variation twice. The previous variation number 12 is a previous variation pattern command (800B(H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

Each of the previous variation patterns has a specified variation time, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of previous variation numbers 7 to 9, the variation time is set to 41500 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1246 frames. In the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, the variation time is set to 62000 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1861 frames.

[Post-fluctuation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of post-variation patterns to which post-variation numbers are assigned, post-variation number 1 is a post-variation pattern command (8400 (H)) that designates a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that designates a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) specifying a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo-repeating sequence. Pseudo-continuum is an effect that pretends to execute a pseudo-continuum but does not execute the pseudo-continuum after all.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that designates normal reach (losing) (variation of decorative pattern that becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach although it becomes a reach mode). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that designates the first half of SP (losing) (variation of decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but loses in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that designates the second half of the SP (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that designates the final reach (loss) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that designates normal reach (hit) (variation of decoration pattern that becomes a reach state and becomes a hit state). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that designates the SP first half (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that designates the second half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that designates the final reach (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode in the final reach).

[Determination of post-fluctuation pattern]
The post-variation pattern is determined using different random counters depending on whether a big win or a loss is determined in the big win determination. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. As shown in FIG. 26, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using random 3 described in FIG. Furthermore, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination values according to the number of pending memories after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8, A different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 1, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 3, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, a post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion, and a post-variation number is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 27, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using random 4 described in FIG. Furthermore, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers according to the type of the big win.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(a), when the normal jackpot 1, 2 or the probability variable jackpot 1, 2, 5-8 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9-12 posterior variation patterns are determined, and a different decision value number is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1/1.1.

When one of the probability variable jackpots 3 and 9 is determined, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from among the post-variation numbers 9 to 12, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. . The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot 4 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using different judgment value numbers according to the type of the big win, the kind of the variation pattern changes according to the kind of the big win, thereby adding variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP reach or the final reach is about 1/102 at the time of losing, whereas the big hit Since the time is about 1/1.1, which is higher than that, the player can expect a big win in the event of SP reach or final reach.

[Determination of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using a different number of random 5 judgment values depending on the type of the pre-determined post-variation pattern. Furthermore, the determined pre-variation number differs depending on the type of post-variation pattern that has been previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28( a ), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 1 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 28(e), when either of the post-variation patterns of post-variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28(f), when any of the post-variation patterns of post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28(g), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 7 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of any of pre-fluctuation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 28(h), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28(i), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 8 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28(j), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 12 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined.

[Total fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. After the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery for an effect pattern on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the SP first half reach A losing pattern described later, or , SP first half reach B loss pattern production is determined. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP first half reach A described later, or the SP One of the performances of the hit pattern of the first half reach B is determined.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, the effect of the losing pattern of reach A in the second half of SP, which will be described later, or the SP It is determined to one of the effects of the losing pattern of the second half reach B. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP second half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP Any of the performances of the hit pattern of the second half reach B is determined.

<Action>
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

[Major Operations of Main Board 11]
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and settings for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, the ON state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

When the restoration condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the restoration process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle 30, detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped. It is sufficient to perform control so that a display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates) the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the game hall attendant or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 The setting change process of step S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. . If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is OFF when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main-side error process to diagnose an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and makes it possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result if necessary (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process so that, for example, the big win information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big wins, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the starting Data such as information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". Execution of the general pattern game is performed by driving the general pattern display unit 9026, and displays the general pattern reservation number by lighting the general pattern storage display unit 9025.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process processing is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (such as the type of reach production), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes the processing of setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and the elapsed time since the special symbol starts to change It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 stop the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "losing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big win, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning a big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is a special variable winning ball device 7 during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the probability of big hit is higher than when the set value is any one of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is ON (Y in step S51), the number of first special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S52). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation storage. When the number of the first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is ON (Y in step S54), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S55). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation storage. When the number of second special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, while when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects the random number random number 1 for judging a big hit or the The numerical data representing the random number random number 2 and the random number random number numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers random 1 to random 4 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while the start buffer value is "2". At some point, numerical data indicating random number random 1 to random 4 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number random number 1 for judging the big hit and the random number random number 2 for judging the type of big hit determine whether the fluctuation display result of the special pattern or decorative pattern is "big hit", and whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step S59, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the performance control board 12 stores the storage address of the first start winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. to send the first start winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. 2 Make settings for sending the start winning designation command. The start winning designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be.

Following the process of step S60, CPU 103 saves the random value in the save area corresponding to the reserved storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start prize determination process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is a first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or a second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information (step S1001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). When the predetermined period does not pass from the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process ends. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step S1009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 21) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values is set in a probability variable jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 22 (a) are set). A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 22(a) are set) is provided, which is set to be smaller than the jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random 1) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 22(a). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the variable probability flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when either of the earlier conditions is established.

If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step S1012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 22(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 22(c) Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 22(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 22(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads the random number for judging the type of jackpot that is extracted in the starting winning judgment process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and stores it in the reserve memory buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot pattern corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for judging the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Moreover, CPU103 sets the big-hit classification data which show the determined big-hit classification to the big-hit classification buffer in RAM102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step S1014 is set as the special pattern stop pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 36, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-variation pattern based on randoms 3 and 4 according to the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determining fluctuation patterns. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects a post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide.

Next, CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 28 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the random 5 value. determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and back variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 37, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022. Control for derived display is performed (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), the time between rounds Data indicating an open state such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 3rd rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加In addition, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加. Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set to the big winning hole control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step S1303 (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter has reached 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, the game state is shifted from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time-saving state. In step S1311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step S1313). When the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the fact that the game state has shifted from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), to step S1316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening preprocessing)
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 39, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (step S1402).

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a special winning opening open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (step S1406) to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 40, in the process during the opening of the big win, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtracts and updates) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step S1503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize opening or the V big prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is ON (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when the V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability variation determination device passage specification command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510 do.

Then, CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the process after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 41, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S117) (step S1604), End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V opening round) in which the V big winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 and open the V big winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening open specification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 42, in the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S1707). Next, the variable probability state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the variable probability determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1705), and 100 is set to the time saving counter. (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

[Main operations of production control board 12]
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Production control main processing)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43 is executed. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 43 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and also controls the effect control board 12. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (Y at step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 for the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process. Effect control process processing is processing executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output a sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative patterns is read out from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of fixed decorative patterns is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot gaming state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "5" which is the value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it checks whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (step S7103).

When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the losing pattern determination data table to determine the display result of the losing pattern that does not become the reach as the final stop of the effect pattern (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S7103 (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop design of the effect design constituting the combination of reach design is determined (step S7104), and step S7106. proceed to

In addition, when it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is determined to be a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 forms a combination of big win symbols according to the type of the big win. A stop design of the effect design is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect suggesting a big hit (inciting whether or not it is a big hit) in the effect setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not to develop to the final reach based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and if it develops to the final reach, a big hit based on the variation pattern. Determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect based on the determined result of whether or not it is a big hit, and determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) in the case of execution. do. When executing the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the production control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of production control patterns. In step S7107, according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the various production control (production operation) patterns specified by the production control pattern of the production determined in the process of step S7106, the pattern fluctuation control pattern One of a plurality of types of pattern variation control patterns stored in a table is selected and determined as a usage pattern, one of which corresponds to various designated performance operation patterns.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the variation of the performance symbols to the stop display of the fixed performance symbols that are the final stop symbols. Data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as variable display operation, production display operation in ready-to-win production, production display operation by simulated series production, and production display operation in advance notice production are stored in multiple types as pattern variation control patterns. It is

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, effect control process timer set value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, voice control data, brightness data, and end code, corresponding to the effect symbol variable display Including control data for controlling various production operations, in time series, the contents of various production control, switching timing of production control, etc. are set.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After the processing of step S7109 is executed, the production device (the image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, and The control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as parts for presentation is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is output to display an image (including effect symbols) corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control data) to an LED driver in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

The types of jackpots in the first special game include normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4, as described above. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed to urge the player to hit right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a figure (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage right-handed hitting. Along with displaying the image, in the right-handed display portion 9030 of the special figure LED board 9020 and the right-handed display portion 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050, for example, lighting of lighting means such as LED prompts right-handed hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, when V winning occurs during the big hit round, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) controlled to the time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055. - 特許庁Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion performance even in the time saving state after the big win round is finished.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display part 9022 becomes a display mode showing a big hit pattern, a big hit (also called a consecutive chance hit) occurs.

As the types of jackpots in the second special game, there are probability variable jackpots 5 to 9 as described above. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state and the probability variable state (high probability high base state) over the fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055. - 特許庁For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the short time state after the end of the big hit round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055 is ended. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

<Flow of production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, the notification effect is executed from when the variable display is started to when the variable display is stopped. The notification effect is an effect for informing the player whether or not the variation of the special symbols and decorative symbols stops in a manner indicating a big hit, that is, whether or not the game is controlled to a big win game state. The notification effect is made up of a plurality of parts. Includes fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, it becomes a fanfare part to be executed before shifting to the jackpot game state. Note that the inciting part is also called an introductory part. Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are collectively referred to as an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part in which an effect corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also the part that indicates the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach after the pseudo run or normal reach is executed. It should be noted that the start part also includes fluctuations that are non-reachable.

[Promotion part (introduction part)]
The fanning part (introductory part) includes from the start of SP reach (also referred to as super reach) (start timing of SP reach title display) to the timing of heading for a big hit or a loss. In addition, the fanning part is a part for fanning whether the performance to be executed results in a big hit or a loss. The fanning part corresponds to either the part corresponding to SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B executed after the start part, SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP final reach that develops from SP first half reach. part is included. In addition, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as SP first half, SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach may be collectively referred to as SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part announcing a big win display result and a losing epilogue part announcing a losing display result after each fanning part. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed by developing a story to inform that the changing pattern is displayed as a big winning result and controlled to a big winning game state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect is executed by developing a story to inform that the changing symbols will result in a losing display and the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

Also, in the epilogue part, the notification that it will be a big hit display result is, like the final reach described later, after the introduction part, when notifying by the movement of the role when performing the success or failure notification, and the SP reach other than the final reach As in the above, there are times when the notification is given by story development on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using any accessories. Of the epilogue parts, the hit epilogue part notified by the movement of the accessory is also referred to as the hit/fail notification part. Specifically, in SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, when a big hit occurs, the liquid crystal is used by the hit epilogue part as described above. It is notified that the game is controlled to a big win game state as the end of the story performance, and if no big win occurs, a loss epilogue part informs that the story performance using the liquid crystal is not controlled to the big win game state. The first story development in the story production may suggest whether it is a hit or not. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introductory part, first of all, there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled by the action of the role product by the success/failure notification part (the role product operation part). After that, when a big win occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above informs that the game will be controlled to the big win game state as the end of the story production using the liquid crystal, and when no big win occurs, the losing epilogue part informs the liquid crystal. As the end of the story presentation using , it is notified that the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state. Thus, the winning epilogue part in the final reach includes the winning or losing reporting part and the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part that follows.

Also, corresponding to the SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A and the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B and the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to SP latter half reach A, the success epilogue part of SP latter half reach A and the losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP latter half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B and the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, the SP final reach winning epilogue part and the SP final reach losing epilogue part are executed.

[Accessory movement part]
The character action part is a part corresponding to the period during the development of the latter half of the SP during which an effect indicating that the game progresses from the first half of the SP to the latter half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32 . The role object action part is executed after the premonition part of SP first half reach A or the premonition part of SP reach first half B. After the accessory action part, any one of the SP latter half reach A boosting part, the SP latter half reach B boosting part, and the SP final reach boosting part is executed.

[Benefit Part]
The relief winning part is a part in which a relief winning performance is executed to make it look like a loss and then suggest a big win. The rescue winning part is a part that can develop from either the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, or the losing epilogue part of SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the winning epilogue part in which the big win display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery effect is the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP reaching first half B, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B. Executed after the hit epilogue part and the relief hit part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be a case where the re-lottery effect part is not performed. For example, after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the hit epilogue part, and the probability variation pattern (that it will be a probability variation) as a result of the hit display The re-lottery part may not be executed when the odd number symbol shown) is derived.

[Relationship before and after determination]
Next, an example of a case where a series of presentations is divided at timings before and after determination of success or failure will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the win/fail decision, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. Here, the win/fail decision is an effect that indicates the branching result of the big win display result or the losing display result in the final stage of the fanning part. As shown in FIG. 47(A), a series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after determination of success or failure at timings before and after determination of success or failure from the start of variation to the end of variation. The part before the judgment of suitability includes the start part and the fanning part. In addition, the part after the success/failure determination includes an epilogue part (hit/lost), a relief winning part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, a series of effects from the start of variation to the stop of variation are composed of a plurality of parts. Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation can be divided into before and after the start of SP reach (after the start of fluctuation). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the previous fluctuation described above, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post fluctuation described above.

Next, the variation pattern of the main variation number 20, which is the variation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the variation patterns, will be described with reference to FIG. 47(B). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (after the start of fluctuation). Then, from the start of the SP reach (the start of the post-variation) to the determination of whether or not the result is right or wrong becomes the fanning part (the first half of the SP reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory is not moved at the timing of the win/fail decision. Then, from the determination of success or failure to the start of the re-lottery effect is the epilogue part (per reach A in the first half of SP). Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fanning part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is 15 seconds, and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds. The time is set so that

Next, the variation pattern of the main variation number 26, which is the variation pattern for the SP final reach big hit, among the variation patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 47(C). In the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (after the start of variation). Then, from the start of the SP reach (the start of the later fluctuation) to the development of the second half of the SP is the fanning part (first half of the SP reach A). And from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is right or wrong will be the fanning part (SP final reach). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory is not moved at the timing of the winning/failing determination. Then, from the determination of success or failure to the start of the re-lottery effect is the epilogue part (per SP final reach). Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fanning part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the fanning part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set so that the second part is 20 seconds and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 47(B) and 47(C), the fluctuation time of the SP final reach having a higher degree of expectation than the SP first half reach A is longer. In addition, the total time of the fanning part and the time of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has a higher degree of expectation than in the SP first half reach A. As a result, the higher the expected variation, the longer the period of stimulating the player, and the longer the lingering time when the player wins, so that the feeling of blessing can be enhanced.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence relationship between the contents of the effects executed in a series of effects and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using a scenario for each part. The scenario described here has the role of a script that summarizes the contents of each scene in a series of productions. The scenario of each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the effect mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. Details such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings for explaining the effect mode described later. In the following, the relationship between diagrams for explaining the scenario of each part and diagrams for explaining the effects mode described later will be explained.

FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIGS. 68 to 74, which will be described later. FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the missing epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS.

FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first-half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the character action part (during the second half of the SP development). The scenario of the role product action part (during the second half of the SP development) corresponding to number 8 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG.

FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIGS. The scenario of the missing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS.

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the missing epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS.

58 and 59 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach). The scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 128 to 145, which will be described later. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the rendering modes in FIGS. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a winning part for relief. The scenario of the relief winning part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the rendering mode of FIGS.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (derivation of odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part corresponding to number 19 in FIG. 46 (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation) corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 154 to 169 described later. FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) and a fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd symbol derivation after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG. 173, which will be described later. FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) and a fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 46 (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation) corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 174 to 176, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 46 corresponds to the rendering mode in FIG. 177, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 turns on/blinks/lights off one or more lamps (LEDs) among a plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. It outputs luminance data for making the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting / blinking / light extinction performed with respect to lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for production|presentation control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 subject to lamp control. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/lights off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a brightness data table storing brightness data for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 . The brightness data table is the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the brightness for SP reach used in each part during SP reach (flashing part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, character action part, etc.) It includes a data table and a luminance data table for background.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability/low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The jackpot background brightness data table used during the round of the state, the ending background brightness data table used in the ending state in which the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the high probability high base state (probability variable state) and a variable background brightness data table used in the state).

Each of the background luminance data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on whether the That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority when using each of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, the priority is higher when used in the order of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table.

For example, the production control CPU 120, when developing into SP reach while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in the normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the SP reach is displayed in the normal background. The SP reach luminance data table is used preferentially over the SP reach luminance data table, and luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach luminance data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background, when SP reach occurs, a mode corresponding to SP reach occurs based on the brightness data table for SP reach. , the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. While the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for normal background is not output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, luminance data based on the background luminance data table is output to the LED driver, and when a big hit results in a fanfare state, luminance data based on the fanfare background luminance data table is output to the LED driver. output.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background luminance data table corresponding to the game state under control while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control with a timer. However, if it develops into SP reach or the like, the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the SP reach is preferentially used over the luminance data table for background and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background luminance data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the SP ready-to-win luminance data table. Since the luminance data contained in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the end of the SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data included in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Also, for example, if an error occurs while outputting luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach during SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error to SP reach. It outputs the luminance data to the LED driver based on the error luminance data table, which is used with priority over the error luminance data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control in a mode corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, a game effect is generated in a mode corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. While the brightness data based on the brightness data table for error is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but the error is canceled and the SP reach is started again. When returning to the game state of , luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU120, while measuring the time of the lamp control corresponding to the SP reach under control by the timer, using the brightness data table for the SP reach corresponding to the SP reach to the LED driver brightness Data is output, but when an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is preferentially used over the luminance data table for SP reach to output luminance data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the brightness data table for SP reach. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the brightness data table for SP reach even while performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data table for error, but Since the luminance data contained in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It's becoming After the error is released, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the luminance data table for SP reach to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

<Lighting Mode of Game Effect Lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting luminance data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. 66 and 67 are diagrams for explaining how the game effect lamp 9 lights.

In the present embodiment, terms relating to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 such as the frame lamp, the character lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H are defined as "turn off", " "Almost off", "on", and "flashing" are used. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of zero. The term "almost extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "turned off". Also, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 66(X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the brightness data of the role lamp 9A is "0000", the role lamp 9A is "turned off". . Also, when the luminance data (RRRR data) of the character object lamp 9A is "1111", the character object lamp 9A lights up in red with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the character object lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 66 (X1), when WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as luminance data of the left panel lamp 9B is "00000", the left panel lamp 9B is turned off. "do. Further, when the luminance data (WWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111", the board left lamp 9B is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the board left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 66(X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Also, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the attacker lamp 9E in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 66(X1), when WWW (White, White, White) data defined as luminance data of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V-attacker lamp 9F is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (WWW data) of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V-attacker lamp 9F is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the V-attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 66 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "000", the electric tuning lamp 9H "turns off". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "111", the electric tuning lamp 9H is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the electric tuning lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which a plurality of lined lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and lighting when the game effect lamp 9 is on. It also includes haze lighting that dimly lights while changing the luminance. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lighted". Since the brightness is high, the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 66 (X3), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lighted". Since it is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 67 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the role lamp 9A is "AAAA", the role lamp 9A "lights". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 67 (X5), when the luminance data (WWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the board left lamp 9B is "lighted". The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 67 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E "lights". lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V-attacker lamp 9F is "lighted". When the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric tuning lamp 9H "lights". Especially in this case, since the luminance is high, the electric tuning lamp 9H lights brightly.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode other than the above-described "turning off" or "turning on" of the game effect lamp 9, in which the lighting luminance of each lamp is a first luminance and a second luminance higher than the first luminance. including alternately switching between For example, "blinking" includes repeating turning on and off or almost off. This includes switching between the case where the luminance data is "0" and "1" with the lapse of time. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is haze lighting. , and blinking are different in that the entire lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing.

<Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 177, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In this embodiment, an effect mode when any one of the main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23 and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the plurality of routes shown in FIG. The production transitions in the order of the missing epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the inciting part (5) of the first half of the SP reach B, and the losing epilogue part (7) of the first half of the SP reach B. .

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the role action part (8), the inflection part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inflection part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inflection part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B loss epilogue part (14), or the start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), role movement part (8), SP second half Reach A's fanning part (9), SP second half Reach B's losing epilogue part (14) The production transitions in order, or the start part (1), SP first half reach B's fanning part (5), role movement part ( 8), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B swaying part (12) and SP second half reach B losing epilogue part (14).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the action part (8), the inflection part of the SP final reach (15), the SP final Whether the production transitions in the order of reach loss epilogue part (17), start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), role movement part (8), SP final reach fanning part (15) , The effect transitions in the order of SP final reach losing epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 20 is selected, the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the inflection part (2) of the SP first half reach A, and the hit epilogue part (3) of the SP first half reach A, or the start The effect transitions in the order of part (1), SP first half reach B swaying part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the character action part (8), the inflection part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The effect transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) in the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inflection part (2) in the first half of SP reach A, the role movement part (8), the inflection part in second half reach B (12), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), or start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character movement part (8), SP second half Reach A's fanning part (9), SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (10), or the start part (1), SP first half reach B's fanning part (5), role movement part ( 8), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B swaying part (12) and SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the action part (8), the inflection part of the SP final reach (15), the SP final Reach hitting epilogue part (16) production transitions in order, start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character action part (8), SP final reach fanning part (15) , SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

The figure also shows the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the present embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. In addition, although description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief winning part is omitted in the example of all variation patterns, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief winning part will also be described. In the case of winning, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of losing, the relief winning part that looks like losing and becomes a winning may use the variation time to perform the performance of the relief winning part.

[Direction mode in the start part]
Description will be made of the effects in the start part with reference to FIGS. 68 to 74. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 68(a1), when the variable display (variable display) is started based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are variable in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Along with the display, the fourth pattern 5J is variably displayed, and the small pattern 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image of a flying girl called Yume-chan is displayed as a character that appears in variations during the normal game state. Yume-chan is a main character who appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 .

At the start of the fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background. Note that during the variable display, sound effects are appropriately output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but only part of the drawings are shown for the sound effects. Further, the lighting of yellow corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "yellow background lighting". The effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, the term "lighting" used herein includes constant lighting, wave lighting, and haze lighting, and the same applies to the following description.

As shown in FIG. 68(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol. The stop of the "NEXT" symbol indicates the start of the second pseudo-variation. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. It should be noted that the term "blinking" here includes the repetition of lighting and extinguishing of the lamp as described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, and the same applies to the following description. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(a3), the characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the second variable display is performed by the pseudo continuous effect. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(a4), re-fluctuation is performed as the second pseudo-fluctuation. At the upper left of the screen, a small character "x2" is displayed to indicate that the variable display is the second time. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(a5), after the ready-to-win mode, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo consecutive symbol stops on the medium symbol. The stop of the "NEXT" symbol indicates the start of the third pseudo-variation. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(a6), the characters "x3" are displayed to indicate that the third variable display is performed by the pseudo continuous effect. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(a7), pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, a small letter "x3" is displayed to indicate that it is the third variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(a8), "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. It becomes a mode. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(a9), the background darkens and the screen becomes dark while the medium pattern is still fluctuating in the state of reach tenpai. At the start of background darkening, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decoration pattern and the character image of Yume-chan. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decoration pattern layer and the Yume-chan character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 71(a10), the shutter is displayed to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, the image behind the shutter becomes invisible. In addition, the brightness of the screen is gradually reduced in accordance with the gradual closing of the shutter. In the state where the shutter is closed in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while decreasing the brightness step by step.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at (a10). When the shutter is closed in (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is further lowered from the time of (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time of (a11). When the shutter is closed in (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is further lowered from the time of (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen luminance gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that the relationship is, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Also, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter is closed in (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as in (a12). After that, the closed state of the shutter is maintained from FIG. 72(a14) to (a15). In the state where the shutter is kept closed in (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at the time of (a13).

After that, the screen brightness is gradually improved in accordance with the situation in which the shutter is gradually opened from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. In the state where the shutter is opened in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 73(a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen luminance is improved from that at (a16). When the shutter is opened in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 73(a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved from that at (a17). In the state where the shutter is opened in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a17).

The screen luminance gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) so as to satisfy the relationship of (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%, for example. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the luminance from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 74(a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. The screen brightness is 100% when the shutter is open in (a19). Also, in the state where the shutter of (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. In addition, it may be "substantially turned off" instead of "turned off". Further, when it is determined to shift to SP first half reach B when the shutter is opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. When the SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), it shifts to the production of FIG. 75 (b1), and when the SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), FIG. It shifts to the production of e1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A)]
75 to 80, description will be given of the effect mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). The fanning part (Reach A in the first half of SP) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume-chan, an ally character, chases Bakuchu, an enemy character. In the fanning part (SP first half Reach A), the story develops that if Mumu-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, and if Mumu-chan cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 75(b1), in the fanning part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A of "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed. The content of the effect of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on is indicated by the title display. While the title display of (b1) is being displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(b2), the title display is erased, and an image showing how the enemy character "Bakuchu" lands is displayed. When the title display of (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(b3), an image is displayed in which the enemy character Bakuchu lands in the center of the screen and takes a pose. In the state of (b3) where an enemy character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(b4), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, the friend character, and Bakuchu, the enemy character, face each other in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed. Also, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle display "I found it" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(b6), the subtitle display "found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(b7), Yume-chan, who is a friendly character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b7), the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed on the Yume Yume up screen. Also, in the Yume-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the line "Too" from Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Mumu-chan is displayed. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu Escape (b9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's utterance of the line "hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image in which Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen chases Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait~" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait~" is displayed on the Muyume Chasing screen. In addition, Mumu-chan's footsteps "Za Zha Zha" are output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as a physical sound) in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the dream-chasing state of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(b12), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As shown in (b11), Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the state of chasing dreams (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, along with a part of Mumu's hand, and Bakuchu escapes from Mumu. As shown in (b13), the subtitle display "I'm caught!" corresponding to the line "I'm caught!" In addition, Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu escape (b13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(b14), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b14), an explosive jump sound "pyon" is output as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) in accordance with the image of the explosive jump. In addition, in the Baku-chu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), Bakuchu, which is an enemy character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character on the Bakuchuup screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(b16), Mumu-chan, who is a friendly character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the screen of Yume Yume Up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line "Torya~!" is output on the screen of Yume Yume Jump. Also, in the state of Yume Yume Jump (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(b18), a screen is displayed in which Yume-chan is displayed in an enlarged form for the winning/losing decision scene. In addition, in the scene (b18) before the win/fail decision, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the win/fail decision scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (b18), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in the SP first half reach A, the process proceeds to the presentation of (c1). From the state of (b18), when it is determined that the SP first half reach A will be lost, the process moves to the effect of (d1). From the state of (b18), when it is decided to develop into SP reach in the second half, the process shifts to the effect of (h1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
81 and 82, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state as the story of Mumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 81(c1), in the hit epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of SP, an image of Yume-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) catching Bakuchu, the sound that Mumu catches Bakuchu is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Mumu chan catching Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (c1) catching Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white brighter than the white of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) corresponding to catching Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81(c2), an image of Mumu-chan, who has caught Bakuchu, and is making a vei sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display "easy victory!" corresponding to Mumu's line "easy victory!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to indicate that a big win has been achieved. Hereinafter, smooth lighting of rainbow colors is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Also, in the state of (c2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image in which Mumu-chan, who has caught Bakuchu, is giving a v-sign is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 82(c4), a design effect is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of drawing out the symbols of (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of (c5) where the symbols are displayed. After that, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in the normal size, being further reduced from the state of (c5). In the state of (c6) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
83 and 84, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state due to the development of the story in which Mumu-chan could not catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 83(d1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of SP, an image is displayed in which Yume-chan did not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the sound "Suka" that Mumu could not catch is output as an onomatopoeic sound in accordance with the video in which Mumu could not catch Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) corresponding to the fact that Bakuchu was not caught. Lights up white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(d2), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, gets down on his knees in regret, and Bakuchu is delighted. As shown in (d2), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (td1) indicating the lighting mode in (d1). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in (d3). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (d3). After that, as shown in FIG. 84(d4), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1), which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B)]
85 to 90, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). The fanning part (Reach B in the first half of the SP) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume-chan, an ally character, and Boingo, an enemy character, play hockey. In the agitation part (SP first half Reach B), the story unfolds that if Mumu-chan wins against Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if Mumu-chan loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 85(e1), in the fanning part in which the SP first half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach B of "Biribiri Hockey Confrontation" is displayed. The content of the effect of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on is indicated by the title display. While the title display of (e1) is being displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 85(e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. In the state (e2) where the screen cracks and the title display disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image is displayed in which the competing characters appear on the screen, in which Yume-chan, who is an ally character, and Boingo, which is an enemy character, appear on the screen. In the state of (e3) where the opponent character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(e4), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, who is an ally character at the front left side of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right side of the screen, face each other. In the confrontation state of (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed. Also, the game effect lamp 9 lights in cream color corresponding to the character of Boingo on the right side where Boingo is displayed. Also, at the timing when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), the subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Mumu's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(e6), the subtitle display "Call me" corresponding to Boingo's line "Call me" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in cream color corresponding to Boingo's speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(e7), an image of Yume-chan, who is an ally character, hitting a puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Mumu's turn, Yume's line "ya~" is output. Also, in the state of Yume Yume turn (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume Yume's speech. After that, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed. In addition, in the pack display state of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the physical sound "whoosh" of the action of the pack. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of a state in which Boingo blocks Mumu-chan's puck is displayed. In addition, in the state of (e9) Boingo prevention, the game effect lamp 9 lights in cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(e10), an image of the flipped puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of dancing in the puck of (e10), a physical sound of rotating the puck is output. In addition, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream corresponding to the Boingo character. After that, as shown in (e11), an image in which the enemy character Boingo hits the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), Boingo's line "Let's go" is output on the screen which is Boingo's turn. In addition, in the state of Boingo's turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo's speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. In addition, in the pack display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the physical sound "whoosh" of the action of the pack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(e13), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged by receiving the puck directly, and electricity runs through her bones. As shown in (e13), in the Yume damage state, Yume-chan's line "Uwa~" is output. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e13). In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (e16), an image similar to that shown in (e14) is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e16), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume received damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene changes to the scene before the winner/failure decision, in which a state in which Yume-chan is damaged is displayed. In the scene (e17) before the winning/failing determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before the winning/failure determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (e17), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in SP first half reach B, the process shifts to the effect of (f1). From the state of (e17), when it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be lost, the process shifts to the effect of (g1). From the state of (e17), when it is decided to develop into SP reach in the latter half, it shifts to the production of (h1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
91 to 93, description will be given of the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state as the story of Yume-chan's victory over Boingo unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 91(f1), in the winning epilogue part of SP first half Reach B, an image of Yume-chan hitting back the puck is displayed. In addition, in the Yume attack state of (f1), in which Yume-chan attacks by hitting back the puck, the subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Go~!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yume Yume attack of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in brighter white than the white of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume's attack. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91(f2), an image is displayed in which Boingo is blown away after being attacked by Mumu-chan. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, the subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (f2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of Yumu Victory, in which Mumu-chan makes a fist pose and Boingo is lying down, is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of Mumu Victory, the subtitle display "Easy Victory!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Easy Victory!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of Victory Mumu is displayed as a still image in the style of a graphic novel. In the state of the still image of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 92(f5), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (f5), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of (f5) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of drawing out the symbols of (f6). After that, as shown in FIG. 93(f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (f6) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (f7) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
94 and 95, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which it is reported that the game will not be controlled to the big win game state as the story of Mumu-chan being defeated by Boingo develops.

As shown in FIG. 94 (g1), in the missing epilogue part of SP first half Reach B, an image of Yume-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume Yume flying, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being flung. lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is blown away farther than in the state of (g1). As shown in (g2), in the state where Yume Yume is tossed, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(g3), an image of Mumu-chan, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in regret, and Boingo is laughing is displayed. As shown in (g3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white that is darker than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) indicating the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 95 (g4). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (g4). After that, as shown in FIG. 95(g5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Direction mode in character movement part (at the time of development in the second half)]
96, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the character action part (at the time of development in the second half).

As shown in FIG. 96(h1), when developing from SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B to SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, SP strongest reach, any of SP reach in the second half is used. The movable body 32 operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. Due to the effect image, the character of Yume-chan and the reduced “2” decoration pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the accessory falls further from the state of (h1). In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls. After that, in the state of (h3), the role is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the role is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From the state of (h3), an effect is executed in which the accessory rises. If it has been decided that the game will develop into reach A in the second half of the SP after the character rises, the process shifts to the production of (i1). If it has been determined that the game will progress to reach B in the second half of the SP after the character rises, the process shifts to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP final reach will occur after the character rises, the process shifts to the production of (r1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach A)]
97 to 109, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (Reach A in the second half of SP). The fanning part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which the story unfolds in which friendly characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan chase Bakuchu, an enemy character. In the fanning part (Reach A in the second half of the SP), the story unfolds that if Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Baku-chu, it will be a big hit, and if Yume-chan and Jam-chan cannot catch Baku-chu, it will be a loss. be.

As shown in FIG. 97(i1), in the agitation part in which the SP second half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed. The contents of the effect of the SP latter half ready-to-play that will be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. In the state where the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image is displayed in which friendly characters Mumu-chan and Jam-chan (leftmost characters) and enemy characters Bakuchu face each other in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters on the left side of which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the reach A in the latter half of the SP is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle display "I won't let you go!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I won't let you escape!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98(i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98(i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. In the jam display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 99(i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go~" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Let's go~" is displayed. In the dream display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Come on, come on!" In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the state of chasing jam (i9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "tata-tat" are output as physical sounds. In addition, in the state of (i10) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 100(i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the room background state (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. In addition, as shown in (i12), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the jam chasing screen. As indicated by (i12), jam-chan's footsteps as physical sounds "za-za-za" are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the state of chasing jam (i12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As indicated by (i13), jam-chan's footsteps as physical sounds "za-za-za-za" are output in accordance with Jam's image. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the chasing jam state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks white three times corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the jump sound of Bakuchu as an onomatopoeia is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu's jump. In addition, in the state of Baku-chu jump (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (i16), an image in which Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the state of (i16) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the subtitle display "I can't catch you" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch you" is displayed. In addition, along with the image of Jam-chan not catching Bakuchu, an onomatopoeic sound "Suka" that Jam-chan was unable to catch is output. In addition, in the state of (i16) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speech. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (i17), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Next is me!" is displayed. . In the dream display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the state of chasing Bakuchu (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the action of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (i19), when the image of Bakuchu running away from Mumu-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds. Also, in the state of (i19) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image in which Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen chases Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the Muyume chasing screen. In addition, as indicated by (i21), Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the dream-chasing state of (i21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (i22), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As indicated by (i22), the footsteps of Yume-chan as physical sounds "za-za-za-za" are output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yume Yume Jump, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the jump sound of Bakuchu as an onomatopoeia is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu's jump. Also, in the state of Baku-chu jump (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (i25), an image in which Mumu-chan could not catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the state of (i25) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the subtitle display "Can't catch you" corresponding to Mumu's line "Can't catch you" is displayed. In addition, along with the image of Yume-chan not catching Bakuchu, the sound "Suka" that Yume-chan couldn't catch is output as an onomatopoeia. Also, in the state (i25) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (i26), two friends, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two teammates are displayed, the subtitle display "Next is two people!" corresponding to the lines of the two teammates "Next is two people!" is displayed. In the state (i26) in which two teammates are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume-up state of (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yume Yume and Jam Up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two players are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (i30), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. At (i30), an image in which two people are closer to Bakuchu than at (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the footsteps of Yume-chan and Jam-chan as physical sounds, "za-za-za-za", are output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the chasing state of two characters (i30), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the jam-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "wow" is output on the jam jump screen. Also, in the jam jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (i33), Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), in the screen of Yume-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (i34), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume-chan's line "Wow~" is output on the screen of Yume Yume Jump. Also, in the state of Yume Yume Jump (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume Yume is jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to the words "Wait!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of two players jumping (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to two players jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (i36), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 1. FIG. In the two-person jump state of (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white corresponding to the fact that two players are jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (i37), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 2. FIG. In the state of two players jumping (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to two players jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 3 . In the state of two players jumping (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to two players jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (i39), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 4, which is the scene before the winner/failure determination. In the scene (i39) before the win/fail determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before the win/fail determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (i39), when it is determined that the game will be a big hit in the second half of the SP reach A, the process proceeds to the effect of (j1). From the state of (i39), if it is determined that the game will be lost in reach A in the latter half of the SP or that it will be a relief hit, the process shifts to the production of (k1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
110 to 111, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The winning epilogue part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is reported that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state by developing a story in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 110 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the state of (j1) catching Bakuchu, the sound of Yume and Jam chan catching Bakuchu is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume and Jam chan catching Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (j1) catching Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white brighter than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) corresponding to catching Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(j2), Mumu-chan, who caught Baku-chu, gives a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan riding on Baku-chu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the caption display "It was a shame!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It was a shame!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Mumu-chan, who has caught Baku-chu, gives a buoy sign, and an image in which Jam-chan is riding on Baku-chu is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (j4), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by the concentration line in the pattern display. In the state of (j4) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (j4). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of (j5) where the symbols are displayed. After that, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (j6) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
112 to 113, description will be given of the effect mode in the lost epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). The missing epilogue part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state due to the development of the story in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 112(k1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan were unable to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu is not caught, an onomatopoeic sound "suka" that cannot be caught is output in accordance with the image in which Mumu-chan and Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) corresponding to the fact that Bakuchu was not caught. Lights up white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(k2), Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Uh-shih!" corresponding to Baku-chu's line "Uh-shih!" is displayed on the Baku-chu-up screen. In the state of (k2) "Bakuchu-up", the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan and Jam-chan, who could not catch Bakuchu, kneel down in regret. As shown in (k3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 113 (k4). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (k4). After that, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in which the normal screen of (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (k5), when it is determined that the win will be a relief win, the process shifts to the effect of (v1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach B)]
114 to 122, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (Reach B in the second half of SP). The fanning part (Reach B in the latter half of SP) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friend characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against enemy characters crab robots. In the fanning part (Reach B in the latter half of the SP), the story unfolds that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab robot win against Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 114 (n1), in the fanning part in which the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B of "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed. The contents of the effect in the latter half of the SP to be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. Below the title display, the expected degree of big hit in this reach is indicated by the number of stars. It should be noted that the display indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit may be displayed in another SP reach. In the state where the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image is displayed in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (characters on the left end) face each other and the enemy character crab robot faces each other. As shown in (n2), the subtitle display "I will not lose!" corresponding to the line "I will not lose!" In the confrontation state (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in white corresponding to the fact that the two players are speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP latter half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 115(n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two players are running away, the subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the line "Kyaa!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of (n4) two players running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two players running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(n5), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping into a depression in a rocky area to escape from the beam of the crab is displayed. In the two-player jump state of (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image of the beam passing over the rocky area is displayed. In the state where the beam of (n6) passes, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are relieved in the shadow of a rocky place. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "Hahaha" corresponding to Jam's line "Hahaha" is displayed on the screen where the two people are relieved. In the confrontation state (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in pink corresponding to Nana's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle display "This is your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "This is your turn!" is displayed on the jam-up screen. Also, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab with a technique called Delta Break is displayed. In addition, in the jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's utterance of the line "delta break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (n10), an image is displayed in which the crab is damaged by Jam-chan's attack. In addition, in the crab attack state (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the crab saying the line "gununu~". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan facing each other and the crab is displayed. In the facing state of (n11), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two players are running away, the subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the lines "Kyaa!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of two players running away (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two players running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image in which the beam approaches Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being damaged by crab beams is displayed. In addition, in the state of (n15) where two players are damaged, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times corresponding to the fact that two players are damaged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (n16), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan who have been damaged stand up. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two players stand up, the subtitle display "From now on!" corresponding to the line "From now on!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of (n16) where two players stand up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in pink corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, in the Nana-up state of (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to the Nana-chan character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen in which Nana prays is displayed. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a production to confuse the enemy. Also, in the state of Nana's prayer (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink corresponding to Nana's praying action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (n19), an image in which the crab is confused by Nana's prayer is displayed. In addition, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the crab's confused action. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of an angry crab that has recovered from its confusion is displayed. In the crab angry state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of the crab swinging its arms to attack is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (n22), an image is displayed in which Nana-chan is damaged by a crab's attack. In addition, in the state of Nana being damaged (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times corresponding to Nana being damaged. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam holding the remote controller and operating it is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" of the jam is displayed on the jam remote control operation screen. In addition, in the jam remote control operation state of (n23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam-chan trying to press a remote control button is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (n25), an effect is executed in which a hand appears from the sky. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand reaching out from the sky to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), in the crab-catching state, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), it becomes a scene before the winner decision in which an enlarged image of the crab and the hand is displayed. In the scene (n27) before winning/failing determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before winning/failure determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (n27), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in the latter half of the SP reach B, the process shifts to the presentation of (o1). From the state of (n27), if it is determined that the game will be lost in reach B in the latter half of the SP or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the presentation of (p1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
123 to 125, description will be given of the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The winning epilogue part (Reach B in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning state as the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan winning over the crab robot unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 123(o1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the latter half of the SP, an image of a hand reaching from the sky catching a crab is displayed. Also, as shown in (o1), the subtitle display "I got killed" corresponding to the crab's line "I got killed" is displayed on the screen where the crab is caught. Also, in the state of (o1) catching crabs, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in brighter white than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to catching crabs. After that, as shown in (o2), an image is displayed in which the caught crab is installed as a signboard of the shop. In addition, (o2) in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (o2), the winning BGM is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123(o3), a screen appears in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Also, as shown in (o3), the subtitle display "nice signboard" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "nice signboard" is displayed on the screen of the shop where the crab is the signboard. In addition, in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard of (o3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 124(o4), the screen where Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab continues. Also, as shown in (o4), the subtitle display "Work hard" corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the shop with the crab as the signboard. In addition, in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard of (o4), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), an image of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed as a graphic novel-like still image. In the state of the still image of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 124(o6), a design effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the design of "222" is enlarged and emphasized with concentrated lines in the design display. In the state of (o6) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (o6). In the state of (o7) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (o8) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
126 and 127, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The lost epilogue part (Reach B in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as the story develops in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are defeated by a crab robot.

As shown in FIG. 126 (p1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach B in the latter half of the SP, an image is displayed in which a hand reaching from the sky could not catch a crab. In addition, in the state of (p1) where the crab is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to the fact that the crab was not caught. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab walking sideways and running away is displayed. In the state of crab escape of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights in a darker white than the white of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who were escaped by a crab, looking down with regret, is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), the subtitle display "Sonna~" corresponding to the words "Sonna~" of the two teammates is displayed on the regrettable screen. Further, as shown in (p3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (tp1) indicating the lighting mode in (p1).

After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 127(p4). In the state of the screen darkening of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. After that, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (p5), when it is determined that the game will be a relief win, the process proceeds to the effect of (v1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP final reach)]
128 to 145, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (SP final reach). The fanning part (SP final reach) is the part where the story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. is. In the agitation part (SP final reach), a story is developed that if 6 people can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, and if 6 people can not catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss. In addition, the fanning part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit among all the reach.

As shown in FIG. 128(r1), in the agitation part in which the SP final reach is executed, a title corresponding to the SP final reach is displayed, "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". The contents of the effect of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. In the state where the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Mumu-chan face each other in the center of the screen, Bakuchu, an enemy character. An image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of the six allies "This is the end" are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to the speeches of the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (r2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128(r3), Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in FIG. 129(r4), when the AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" of the AD is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange corresponding to the AD issuing a line. After that, as shown in (r5), when the maid A is displayed, the caption display "look at me" corresponding to the line "look at me" of the maid A is displayed. In the state of maid A display of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue corresponding to maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r6), when the maid B is displayed, the subtitle display "Because I'll do my best" corresponding to the line "Because I'll do my best" of the maid B is displayed. In the state of maid B display of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue corresponding to maid B speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 130(r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you~" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'll catch you~" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "It's okay" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's okay" is displayed. In the state of Jam-chan display of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone's going~!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Everyone's going~!" is displayed. In the state where Yume-chan is displayed in (r9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Anyone can call me" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Anyone can call me" is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in (r11), when the image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the caption "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue corresponding to the maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r12), when an image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing AD & Maid A in (r12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in orange corresponding to the speech of the AD character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in blue corresponding to the maid A's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r13), when the image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch me!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Caught!" In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r13) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r14) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (r16), when the image of Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" is displayed. . In the state of chasing Nana (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink corresponding to Nana's speaking. After that, as shown in (r17), when the image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the state of chasing Maid B & Nana in (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in pink corresponding to the fact that Nana-chan's character is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (r18), when the image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, the subtitle display "Woo!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. Also, in the state of (r18) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (r20), when the image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait!" be done. In the dream-chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to the lines from Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing after Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the state of Chasing Dreams & Jam (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character uttering lines. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in green corresponding to the speech of Yume-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, the subtitle display "Dangerous!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Dangerous!" is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. Also, in the state of (r23) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange when the AD performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Ah!" is output as the dialogue sound of the AD, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Too!" is output as the speech sound of maid A, but the caption is not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (r28), when the maid B character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B. As shown in FIG. After that, as shown in (r29), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue when the maid B performs the action of jumping. At this time, as maid B's voice, the same voice as maid A's voice, "Too!", is output, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (r31), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink when Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (r32), when Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple when Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Jam-chan's dialogue sound "Torya!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (r34), when the character of Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green when Yume-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Yume-chan's dialogue sound "Oyaa!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (r36), an image in which the faces of the six characters are close-up is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when the image of the six teammates up is displayed, the subtitle display "This is the last!" corresponding to the line "This is the last!" of the six teammates is displayed. In addition, in the state of (r36) 6 allies are up, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that the 6 allies are speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (r37), the image of 6 teammates up is continuously displayed. Also, in the state of (r37) with 6 teammates up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed along with the background of the city. Also, in the Bakuchu display state of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (r39), Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabe!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabe!!!" is displayed. be. Also, in the Baku-chu-up state of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Baku-chu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (r40), an image showing push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with concentration lines superimposed on the image of Baku-up. In addition, in the state of (r40) "Explosion Chew Up + Button Display", the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid period of button operation, as shown in (r41), three main characters in the pachinko game machine 1, Nana-chan, Yume-chan, and Jam-chan, cut in on the screen. is displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed as an interrupting image in the currently displayed image. Also, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is green. Also, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green according to the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (r42), after the cut-in display ends, an image of six people jumping toward Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of cut-in (r42), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six teammates. After that, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen on which Bakuchu is displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in (r45), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when six teammates are displayed that are larger than those in (r43). After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when an explosion that is enlarged more than at (r44) is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (r47), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than at (r45), the subtitle display "I'm cornered!" !” is displayed. In addition, in the state of (r47) in which six teammates are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white in response to the fact that six teammates are speaking. After that, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of six people are alternately displayed. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to operation prompting is output for prompting the player to perform an operation in response to the trigger display gathering in the center. Also, in the state of (r49) to the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is gathered in the center of the screen rather than (r49). As indicated by (r50), in response to the trigger display coming together in the center, a sound corresponding to the prompting of operation is output for prompting the player to perform the operation. Also, in the state of (r50) to the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (r51), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. FIG. At this time, the words "Close!" are superimposed on the Bakuchu image, and a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed. In the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to operation promotion is output for prompting the player to perform the operation. Also, in the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (r52), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. FIG. At this time, the characters "Close!" are superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, a prompt for operating the trigger, and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r51). In the state where the closing display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (r53), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. FIG. At this time, the characters "Close!" are superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, a prompt for operating the trigger, and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r52). In the state where the closing display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (r54), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as a still image 4, which is the scene before the winning/losing decision. At this time, the words "Close!" are superimposed on the Bakuchu image, and a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r53). In a state in which the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as a pre-determination scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From the state of (r54), when it is determined that the game will be a big hit in the SP final reach, the process proceeds to the effect of (s1). From the state of (r54), if it is determined that the game will be lost in the SP final reach, or if it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the production of (u1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP final reach)]
146 to 149, description will be given of the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state by developing a story in which six players catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 146(s1), in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen in accordance with the start of the character object falling. be done. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing to the second half of the SP reach. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of FIG. 146 (s2), the accessory falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (s3), the character is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the character is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. From the state of (s3), an effect is executed in which the accessory rises. After that, as shown in FIG. 147(s4), in the state after the character object is raised, a scene in which Mumu-chan caught Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "Uh, I got caught" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Uh, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu in (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Also, in the state of (s4), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147(s5), an image of the six people being happy to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s5), the subtitle display "Everyone did it!" corresponding to Mumu's line "Everyone did it!" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of the six people happily catching Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "You did it, everyone!" is continuously displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu in (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 148(s7), an image of the six people being happy to catch Bakuchu is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), a design effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized with concentrated lines. The game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in the state of drawing out the symbols in (s8). After that, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (s8). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of drawing out the symbols in (s9). After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP final reach)]
150 to 151, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The lost epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is reported that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state by developing a story in which six players have failed to catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 150 (u1), in the missing epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. In addition, in the state of (u1) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) corresponding to the failure to catch the Bakuchu. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed in which the Bakuchu runs far away and the six people who could not catch the Bakuchu are disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), the subtitle display "I was sorry~" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I was sorry~" is displayed on the screen of regret. As shown in (u2), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (tu1) indicating the lighting mode in (u1).

After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 150(u3). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (u3). After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (u4), the symbol of "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state (u4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (u4), when it is determined that the win will be a relief hit, the process proceeds to the effect of (v1).

[Production Mode in Relief Winning Part]
152 and 153, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the relief winning part. The redemption winning part is a part in which a story is developed by a redemption effect that becomes a big hit after the development of the losing story. In the relief per part, a premium character corresponding to relief (resurrection) named Mr. Drum, who did not appear in other Reach, appears.

As shown in FIG. 152 (v1), in the relief winning part, a relief effect is executed in which a character called Mr. Drum is displayed on the screen. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that the resurrection hit is disguised as a loss. In the relief effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen is whited out. In the white-out of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (v3), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (v3), the design of "222" is enlarged and emphasized with concentrated lines in the design display. The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of (v3) where the symbols are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (v3). The game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in the state of drawing out the symbols (v4). Thereafter, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size from the state of (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the state of (v5) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in re-lottery part (odd number pattern or even number pattern derivation after button operation)]
154 to 169, description will be given of the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). In FIGS. 154 to 169, the flow of a series of effects from the detailed effect of putting out symbols in the fan effect to the button operation in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 154 (A1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big win display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the state of two-symbol enlargement, the symbol "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (A1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the (A3) 2-symbol reduction state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155(A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (A5) two symbols normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background is switched and the re-lottery effect is started. In the state of (A6), the symbol combination "222" is in a swing period in which it swings up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of (A6) two-symbol swing, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished.

Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period during which the pattern is swaying is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is the normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after it becomes the normal size, the pattern fluctuation of the re-lottery part continues. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is lit at a timing related to the completion of the pattern output (including, for example, the timing immediately before the size becomes normal, the timing after the size becomes normal, and the timing at which the pattern swing starts). It changes from white blinking to rainbow colored smooth lighting. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth pattern display from pattern display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to shaking period, and blessing by pattern matching by screen and lamp light emission. After that, during the pattern shaking period of FIG. 156 (A7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the state of (A7) two-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 156 (A8), during the period of pattern fluctuation, a screen in which the pattern is displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the state of two-symbol swing. After that, as shown in (A9), the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8) during the start period of movement due to the re-lottery effect. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (A10), two symbols are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, replacement display is performed by rapidly changing the numbers used as decoration patterns from FIG. 157 (A11) to FIG. 161 (A24). When the switching display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are sequentially replaced with other patterns, so that the decorative patterns are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are lightly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the change state of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during the high speed fluctuation. In the state of three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. 158 (A13) to 161 (A23), such as 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, 7 patterns, 1 pattern, etc., so that the patterns are changed while changing at high speed, and the display is thin. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 158 (A13) to FIG. 161 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 161 (A24) where the two symbols are clearly displayed again after one cycle of the high-speed fluctuation starting from the two symbols, the button image and the time gauge are faintly displayed under the two symbols. After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed when the two symbols are displayed lightly during the high speed fluctuation. After that, 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, 7 patterns, 1 pattern, 2 patterns, 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, etc. from Fig. 162 (A26) to Fig. 169 (A46) , the pattern is changed while fluctuating at high speed, and the light display and the clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 161 (A24) to FIG. 169 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it is determined that the odd-numbered symbol will be derived, the process proceeds to the presentation of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even-numbered symbol will be derived, the process proceeds to the presentation of (C1).

[Production mode in re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation)]
170 to 173, description will be given of the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd symbol derivation after button operation). In FIGS. 170 to 173, the flow of a series of effects from button operation to derivation of odd symbols in re-lottery effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 170 (B1), a design effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "333" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the state of 3-pattern enlargement, the background is brightened, the pattern of "333" is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the (B1) 3-symbol enlargement state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in an enlarged manner compared to the state of (B1). In the 3-symbol enlargement state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is reduced and displayed. In the 3-symbol reduction state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171(B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the 3-symbol reduction state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the (B5) 3-symbol normal size state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "333" shakes up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of (B6) 3-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 172 (B7). The pattern shaking period also continues in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background shaking state of (B7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172 (B8), the decorative symbol "333" is determined and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (B8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B9), the symbol fixing period continues. In the symbol fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the flashing lighting mode of rainbow color. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 173 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), after the mode of the game effect lamp 9, the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed. At this time, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in the fanfare mode.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation)]
174 to 177, description will be given of the mode of effect in the re-lottery part (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation). In FIGS. 174 to 177, the flow of a series of effects until the even-numbered symbols are derived after the button operation is operated in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 174 (C1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big win display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the background becomes brighter, the "222" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the 2-symbol enlargement state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (C1). In the 2-symbol enlargement state (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175(C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two-symbol normal size (C5), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a shaking period occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of the two-symbol swing of (C6), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 176 (C7). The pattern shaking period also continues in the normal background of (C7). In the normal background shaking state of (C7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (C8), the decorative symbol "222" is determined and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (C8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C9), the symbol fixing period continues. In the symbol fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the smooth lighting of the rainbow color. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 177(E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), after the mode of the game effect lamp 9, the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed. At this time, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in the fanfare mode.

<Description of Characteristic Portions in Effect Mode of Pachinko Machine 1>
Next, a detailed description will be given of the characteristic portions and modifications of the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

(Start 5)
The aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the fanning part starts. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect that is executed in the back invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the character. may

(Start 6)
Further, the shutter described above is in a form in which it closes from the upper and lower ends of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Also, the shutters may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a fusuma (sliding door). Alternatively, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Also, as shown in FIG. 71 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, just before the shutter closes completely as shown in FIG. 71(a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of incongruity can be eliminated. . When the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 73(a16), the sense of discomfort can be similarly eliminated.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the SP first half reach is not started and the screen brightness is gradually increased, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect proceeds. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to execution of the effect before the shutter is opened because the effect of the SP first half reach is the effect that the player wants to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 70(a9) described above, the brightness of the screen decreases before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter closes completely at the timing when the shutter closes completely. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered in conjunction with the shutter closing timing, the speed of the screen darkening may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the speed of screen darkening can be made appropriate, and a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

(Start 12)
In addition, until the shutter is opened, the player does not know which SP first half reach is to be started. According to this, it is possible to have expectations about which production will be executed.

(Start 13)
It should be noted that the effect by the shutter described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, it may be the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-run. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in active pending, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may be changed (for example, from blue to green). In addition, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation by the shutter.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter is closed and automatically opened, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed and the shutter is opened by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of kinds of effects by the shutter are provided, the attraction of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Provocation 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned agitation part for inciting the right or wrong has a production that is updated by the development in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternately fight (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Provocation 2)
Also, as shown in FIG. 76(b5) and the like described above, in the teasing part, the line of the ally character is generated first, and the caption corresponding to the line is displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in the teasing part.

(Instigation 3)
Note that the caption display of the teammate character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the caption display in another scene of the teasing part. According to this, the ally character can be recognized firmly.

(Instigation 4)
Also, as shown in FIG. 80(b17) and the like described above, there is a scene in which subtitles are not displayed when a teammate character utters a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the caption display of the teammate character that is displayed first, and to show the screen display more preferably than adding the caption display to all the lines.

(Instigation 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned inflection part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first inflection part executed in the first half timing, and SP second half reach A as the second inflection part executed in the second half timing , SP latter half reach B, and SP final reach. In addition, there is a scene in which the ally character plays an active role in both the first and second teasing parts. Also, in any of the teasing parts, the line of the friendly character was generated first, and the caption corresponding to the line was displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts.

(Instigation 6)
In addition, in the agitation part mentioned above, in the agitation part corresponding to reach B in the first half of the SP, Yume-chan's character is active, and in the agitation part corresponding to the second half of SP reach B, the characters of Jam-chan and Nana-chan are active. There were occasions when it worked. In Reach B in the first half of the SP, a line by Yume-chan, who is an ally character who plays an active role first, is generated, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. In Reach B in the second half of the SP, dialogues by Jam-chan and Nana-chan, the friendly characters who are active first, were generated, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the friendly character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts. In addition, the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Also, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half of the excitement part.

(Provocation 11)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 76(b5) and (b6), there is a scene in which each character speaks a line under a situation in which an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue is displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs getting angry.

(Inciting cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 140(r39) to 141(r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the caption display is displayed before the prompt display of the button image is displayed. According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen while paying attention to the subtitle display, the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. can be done.

(Inciting cut-in 3)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 141 (r41) to 143 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is over. Then, after a predetermined period of time without words has passed, the words are spoken, and subtitles are displayed for the said words. According to this, the player can concentrate on the effect during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be performed.

(Yes or No 1)
Also, as shown in FIG. 145 (r54) described above, the success/failure determination scene was between the teaser part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning/failing determination, the player is informed whether or not the player has won a big hit after operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was moved after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the attraction of the presentation is improved by making it a suitable scene for deciding whether to use the operating means.

(Yes or No 2)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 143 (r47) to 145 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the teammate character before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, and then the screen corresponding to the operation means, The effect that was being executed becomes invisible. Then, the effect executed after that becomes recognizable again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, and to display the performance that has been firmly executed at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be favorably shown. .

(Yes or No 3)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 143 (r48) to 144 (r51), while the introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling operation of the operation means are displayed, are also being staged. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the image (the image of (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to make the player pay attention to the development of the effect.

(Yes or No 4)
145 (r51) to 145 (r54) described above, when the trigger image as the promotion display was displayed, the tail slightly moved at each image change in the Bakuchu image. In this way, the effect may proceed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include a scene change or a character action instead of just moving the tail. According to this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the development of the presentation during the promotion display.

(Yes or No 5)
Further, the effect progressing while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the effect executed before the prompting display is displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the prompting display for operating the operation means, and to balance the prompting display and the progress of the effect. It should be noted that the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed may be slower than the effect that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect during display of the promotion display and during display of the introductory image.

(Yes or No 6)
Also, it is preferable to echo the lines before the introductory image is displayed as shown in FIG. 143 (r47) described above. According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(Yes or No 7)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 143(r47) to 144(r49), the introductory image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introductory image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introductory image and the caption display from overlapping.

(Yes or No 14)
108 (i36) to FIG. 109 (i39), the image displaying the two characters, Yume and Jam-chan, is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 A single image is displayed while stationary for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is statically displayed for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused for use, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data and favorably promote the success/failure decision scene. It should be noted that during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as many images (for example, 10) as shown in FIGS. may be used.

(Yes or No 16)
144 (r49) to FIG. 145 (r54), there is an introductory image display period in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed in the center of the screen. Afterwards, there is a period of time during which prompts for activating the trigger are displayed. During the display period of the prompt display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning/failing determination, if the game is a big hit, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if the game is lost, the video of the losing epilogue part is played. These periods are periods during which dynamic display is performed in which images appear to be moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

(Yes or No 18)
In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/fail determination scene shown in FIGS. 146(s1) to 149(s10) and FIGS. In the winning epilogue part, an image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character action. Also, in the unsuccessful epilogue part, the screen turns black after the production corresponding to the unsuccessful epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it becomes the flow which switches a plurality of images after the scene of winning/failure determination, it can be set as the flow of suitable production|presentation.

(Epilogue 1)
The winning epilogue part described above is a part that does not transition when the game is lost, and is a part that has a scene in which the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene in which the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the production is smaller than in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be favorably shown.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 117 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the teasing part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123(o1), subtitles are added to the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage (scene of catching crabs) in the winning epilogue part. According to this, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles that were not displayed in the inciting part are displayed, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 147(s5) to (s6), the subtitles displayed in the winning epilogue part are designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitles displayed in the introductory part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. It should be noted that, when the caption display is displayed, the larger the number of characters, the longer it may be displayed than the smaller the number. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the introductory part, the period during which the subtitles are displayed is longer in the winning epilogue part. should be designed as

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIGS. 147(s6) to 148(s8), the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the design effect is executed. . According to this, it is possible to prevent the caption display from being covered with the decoration pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message in the effect of the pattern display. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of designing is completed and the player can recognize the decorative design, the decorative design and the image such as the character displayed as the background become a still image. there is According to this, it is possible to prevent the decoration pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decoration pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 148(s7) described above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the symbol presentation effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of drawing out the pattern.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 148(s7) described above, the still picture displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special graphic style. According to this, by adding a special effect to the still picture, it is possible to make a suitable epilogue part by emphasizing that the picture is still and suggesting that the scene has changed.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the pattern display shown in FIG. 147(s6) described above should not have the fade effect of gradually erasing the display. Here, a fade effect may be added to the caption display that is displayed at other timings to gradually erase the display. According to this, except for the final subtitle display, it is possible to effectively switch by adding a fade effect, and by instantaneously erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display overlaps the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and the misunderstanding that it is a message in the performance of designing. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, both the decoration design and the small design are displayed during the design production. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are in the process of being changed while enhancing the production effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols, and to make a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, both the decoration design and the small design are displayed during the design production. Here, the movement of the decorative design and the small design may be synchronized at the timing when the design of the decorative design is completed. Concretely, during the pattern shaking period in which the decoration pattern is completed and the pattern swings up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same motion as the decoration pattern. According to this, by synchronizing the movement of the decoration pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 170(B1) to 171(B5) described above, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed during the design effect in the re-lottery part. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being changed and displayed while increasing the performance effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, both the decoration pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state in which the patterns are aligned at the time of effecting the pattern display. Then, in conjunction with the shift to the re-lottery part, both the decoration design and the small design may change again. According to this, the decoration pattern and the small pattern can be displayed in a suitable manner in synchronization.

(Re-lottery production 3)
As shown in FIG. 155 (A5) described above, in the final state of the effect of the pattern appearance in the winning epilogue part, the ornamental pattern is swayed and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when the background is switched from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with the concentrated lines is continuously added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smooth rainbow lighting to extinguished. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery production, the pattern fluctuation and effect mode continue, and the background and the lamp are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decoration pattern the re-lottery effect started.

(Re-lottery production 6)
As shown in FIGS. 157 (A10) to 169 (A46) and 170 (B1) to 171 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the reduced size decorative pattern is used to advance the pattern, and the button is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, an effect of displaying a symbol in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed is executed. In other words, from the moment the pattern is put out, the decoration pattern that is finally notified is displayed in an enlarged manner. According to this, since the symbol is finally announced from the start of enlargement, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Re-lottery production 16)
154(A1) to 155(A5) and the pattern output in FIGS. 174(C1) to 175(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same.

(Re-lottery production 17)
In the above-described pattern display effect, a series of effects are executed in which the pattern is displayed in an enlarged size and then displayed in the normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

(Re-lottery production 18)
In the above-described symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the symbol presentation presentation data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol presentation presentation data in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of pattern presentation effects may be executed by combining common pattern presentation data and a plurality of decorative designs. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data volume while favorably displaying the design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the symbol appearance effect data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol appearance effect data in the re-lottery effect.

<Detailed description of production modes>
Next, with regard to the above-described presentation modes, characteristic portions and modifications to be particularly mentioned will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 178 to 204. FIG.

[Regarding inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 178, characteristic parts in the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 178(b11), the relationship between Yume-chan and Baku-chu on the screen is such that Yume-chan is on the left and Baku-chu is on the right. In accordance with this character arrangement, the frame left lamp lights up in green corresponding to Mumu-chan, and the frame right lamp lights up in red corresponding to Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is output as the dialogue sound, Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za" are output as physical sounds, and Baku-chu's footsteps as physical sounds are output. Tata-ta-tat” is output.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Bakuchu is in front and Mumu-chan is in the back in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Bakuchu is near and Mumu is far away. On the other hand, the volume relationship is as follows: Yume-chan's line sound of "Wait~" > Bakuchu's footsteps, "ta-ta-ta-ta-" > Yume-chan's footsteps, "za-za-za-za". In this way, the volume data is set so that Mumu-chan's dialogue sounds louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, who is closer.

In FIG. 178(b12), the relationship between Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In (b12), no dialogue sound is output, and Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" as physical sounds and Baku-chu's footsteps as physical sounds "tata-tata-tata" are output. The relationship between the volumes is as follows: "Bakuchu's footsteps 'ta-ta-ta-ta' > Yume-chan's footsteps 'za-za-za'." In this way, when dialogue sounds are not output, the volume data is set so that the footsteps of the closer Bakuchu are louder than the footsteps of Yume-chan, who is farther away, so as to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 178(b13), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the horizontal direction, Mumu-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In addition, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" "Ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Mumu-chan is in front and Bakuchu is in the back. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Mumu-chan is nearby and Bakuchu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship of the volume is as follows: the sound of the blasting lines of "Tararumonka!" > Yume-chan's footsteps, ``Za-za-za'' > the blasting footsteps, ``Tata-tata-ta''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the farther Bakuchu's dialogue sounds are louder than the closer Yume-chan's footsteps.

(Provocation 12)
In the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the timing when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap each other, the dialogue sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting the physical sound as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output loudly, so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

(Provocation 13)
Here, a work process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, images for each effect corresponding to the variable time such as SP reach are created. In accordance with this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance in the image, sound is output that ignores reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player. Sound data is set as follows. As a result, a series of presentations can be shown favorably.

(Provocation 15)
In addition, when the dialog sound of a character whose sense of distance is far from the player overlaps with the physical sound of which the player has a close sense of distance, the sound data is set so that the dialog sound sounds louder than the physical sound. It is As a result, a sound is output that discards reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, so that the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Regarding inciting 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 179 and 180, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Description of volume level)
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in FIG. 179(A), among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and SP reach BGM will be described. The level of the volume to be output has a relationship of dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. Also, when these three sounds overlap, the method of outputting the sounds differs between the dialogue sounds with subtitles and the dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 179(B), in the case of speech sounds with subtitles, when speech sounds (with subtitles), physical sounds, and BGM of SP reach are output at the timing at which they overlap, the volume of BGM of SP reach is increased. It is controlled to reduce the level and output. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. It is controlled to output without changing any sound volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM.

(Provocation 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 179(B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be smaller in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation while presenting reality.

(Provocation 16)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 179B and 179C, when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound and when there is no subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound, there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound. In the case, it is adjusted so that it sounds louder because the volume of the SP reach BGM is lowered. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more relevant to SP reach content than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

(Description of volume level)
FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. A method of effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that of FIG. 179 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 180 and FIG. 179, the relationship of the level of the output volume is the same: dialog sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 180(B), when the character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Provocation 16)
As shown in FIGS. 180(B) and 180(C), the case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has subtitles and the case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound does not have subtitles are different. Only one side is adjusted to increase the volume. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[About Inciting 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 181 to 170, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r24) to (r27) parts)
FIG. 181 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as indicated by (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange when the AD performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Ah!" is output as the dialogue sound of the AD, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times in the scene where the AD is removed from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Too!" is output as the speech sound of maid A, but no caption is displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when the maid A is released from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the maid B character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue when the maid B performs the action of jumping. At this time, as maid B's dialogue sound, the same dialogue as that of maid A is output, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when the maid B is released from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink when Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when Nana-chan is released from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r32) to (r35) parts)
FIG. 183 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as indicated by (r32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple when Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Jam-chan's dialogue sound "Torya!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where Jam-chan is released from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r34), when the character of Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green when Yume-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Yume-chan's dialogue sound "Oyaa!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks white three times in the scene where Mumu-chan is released from the screen.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the output speech is a one-word speech in which the player is enthusiastic. In these specific scenes, scene switching is faster than other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, the subtitles are less directly related to the storyline than other subtitled scenes. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to dialogue are not displayed.

(Instigation 7)
As shown in FIGS. 181 to 183, there are scenes in which the character speaks lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the presentation. As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be suitably shown to the player.

(Provocation 8)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, and r34), colors other than the colors corresponding to the characters in the preceding scenes are displayed. , the control for turning on the game effect lamp 9 is performed. Specifically, before the scene (r24), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r26), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the character of Maid A. scenario. Also, before the scene (r28), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in blue (r27) or white (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r30), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in pink corresponding to Nana's character. becomes a scenario that lights up. Also, before the scene (r32), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. scenario. Also, before the scene of (r34), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple of (r33) or white of (r33'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. becomes. In this way, before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, after which the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the color corresponding to the character. control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of lamps that the displayed character changes and that the player can easily understand which character is the character that has changed, and it is possible to make a suitable fanning part.

[About start 1 to 4]
Characteristic portions of FIGS. 184 and 185 are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of role product actions in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 184 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the winner/failure decision is made, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting state. After that, when developing into the SP latter half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed with respect to the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. Due to the effect image, the character of Yume-chan and the reduced “2” decoration pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the role is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the role is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Also, a role object corresponding sound corresponding to the falling of the role object is output as a sound effect. After that, in the state of (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the drop position in the state of (h2). In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the state of (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When the (h3) state changes to the (h4) retracting state, the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the character action part to the brightness data table of the reach A (flashing part) in the second half of the SP changes. . After that, in the state of (h5), the role further rises. In the state of (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 185 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the role further rises. In the state of (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), when the character further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the character becomes faint. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to reach A in the second half of SP begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. In addition, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP, is output as a sound effect. Note that sound effects related to the title in the second half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state of (h8), the character is further increased from the state of (h7). In the state of (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h7), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state of (h9), the role further rises. In the state of (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h8), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (h10), the role further rises. In the state of (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h9), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of reach A in the latter half of the SP is clearly displayed. In the state of (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to reach A in the latter half of the SP while the character object is rising. In addition, while the role product is rising, the brightness data table of the role product action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 215 to be described later) is changed to the brightness data table of SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 217 and 218 to be described later). ) is switched to the luminance data table. Also, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the rousing part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. Also, before the action of the role object, the "2" pattern is reduced and displayed at the left and right lower corners of the screen. When the role object moves, the role object falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the role object is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern "2" was displayed. do. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the action of dropping the character is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol displayed in reduced size. Then, after the role object rises from the falling position and the “2” pattern does not overlap with the role object, the effect image gradually fades, and the background and “2” pattern corresponding to the second half of the SP reach A displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being not aesthetically pleasing due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Also, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of the movement of the character, it is possible to suitably switch the effects according to the movement of the character.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 184, the character moves and displays an effect image before reaching the bottom position of the drop. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to make a suitable changeover of the presentation including the character.

(Start 4)
It should be noted that an image related to the character object may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the production in the second half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 185, when the characters rise, the characters "POWERFUL II" and the images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance with the use of the character by providing the interlocking property when the performance is switched.

[About epilogues 7, 8, 10 to 14, 20]
In FIGS. 186 and 187, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of role product actions in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 186 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (r54) to (s4). In the scene (r54) before the success/failure determination, a sound corresponding to the prompting of the operation is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. Further, below the operation image, a time gauge is displayed as an operation prompting display for prompting the operation. When the player performs an action of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period of time, or when the predetermined period of time elapses, the movable body 32 as the accessory moves. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. Here, the time during which the character object falls in the success/fail notification scene is longer than the time during which the character object falls in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing to the second half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the success/fail notification scene such as (s1) is rainbow colored. Note that the effect image in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP is blue or red. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of (s2), the character is dropped so that the character "P" of the characters of the character is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. do. In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, in the state of (s3), the position of the role object is maintained at the falling position in the state of (s2). In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Luminance output from the brightness data table for the performance of the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue of the winning epilogue part when the state (s3) changes to the retracting state (s3-2) Data table changes. After that, in the state of (s3-3), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 187 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the character further rises. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), when the character further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the character becomes faint. By thinning the effect image (increasing the transmittance), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Also, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as an effect sound. After that, in the state of (s3-6), the role is further increased from the state of (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-7), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s4), a scene in which Mumu-chan caught Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound at the time when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line "Uu, I got caught". In the state of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, an effect image corresponding to the motion of the character object is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. While the character is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the character object returns to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the rising timing related to the timing of the start of the returning motion. According to this, since the display is switched to the display corresponding to the epilogue at the timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the character product motion ends before the character product returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image from being displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts rising. Also, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the drop position.

(Epilogue 10)
BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue when the character returns to the initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue when the character returns to its initial position. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM and sound effects.

(Epilogue 13)
In the situation where the character returns to the initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the epilogue display after the character returns to the initial position outputs the dialogue sound and subtitles. should be displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle from being displayed at a timing when the subtitle is difficult to see, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the character returns to the initial position, it is sufficient to output the dialogue sound and display the subtitles in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be recognized firmly, and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the mode of production is switched to the hit epilogue part by the movement of the character from the scene before the win/fail decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character object is rising. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the role product to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the role product is rising. In addition, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part is output while the character is ascending. In addition, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the character changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), the dialogue sound is not output. . After that, in the state (s4) in which movement of the character to the initial position is completed and display of the effect image is finished, dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part in the middle of the ascending of the character, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the operation of returning to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[About Epilogues 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 188, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines)
FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of captions and the number of lines. FIG. 188 shows the number of dialogues of the character being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the dialogues for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of captions is 5 for the number of lines of 8. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the number of captions is one for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part in the first half of the SP Reach A, there are no lines, so there are no subtitles.

Also, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of captions is three for the number of lines of five. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the number of captions is three for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach B, there is no dialogue and no subtitles. In the case of SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is 14 for the number of lines of 16. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part in the latter half of the SP reach A, the number of captions is one for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines.

Also, in the case of SP latter half reach B, the number of captions is seven for nine lines. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part in the second half reach B of the SP, the number of captions is three for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines. Also, in the case of the SP final reach, the number of captions is 19 for the number of lines of 27. Also, in the case of the epilogue part that hits the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is two for the number of dialogues. In the case of the missing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 188, the ratio of displaying captions to characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying captions to characters during SP reach, which is the inciting part. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 188, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of blessing by clearly showing what the character is saying in the hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 188, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part, and each type has a different presentation development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to convey the effect by switching images first, so that the effect is not disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. . Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 189 and 190, characteristic parts of the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the re-lottery part)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the big hit display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then the symbols are reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period during which the pattern is shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is the normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after it becomes the normal size, the pattern fluctuation of the re-lottery part will continue. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is lit at a timing related to the completion of the pattern output (including, for example, the timing immediately before the size becomes normal, the timing after the size becomes normal, and the timing at which the pattern swing starts). It switches from white blinking to rainbow colored smooth lighting. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth pattern display from pattern display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to shaking period, and blessing by pattern matching by screen and lamp light emission.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), it becomes a swinging period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the central "2" pattern is once reduced. After that, all of the ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' used as decorative patterns are displayed from (A11) to (A23). A fast variation is performed at . After that, again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed from (A10') to (A23'). Fast variation is performed in a manner that

After that, as shown in (A24), after two cycles of all decorations, the initially displayed "2" pattern and the button image are faintly displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decoration pattern fluctuates at high speed to "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and the passage of time The time gauge displayed under the button image decreases accordingly. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the operation effective period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the operation effective period and the effective period of the button operation ends, odd numbers as shown in FIGS. Symbols or even-numbered symbols are derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a big win.

(Re-lottery production 1)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is used for the re-lottery. The performance begins. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

(Re-lottery production 4)
At the start of the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the variation starts from the state where the decoration pattern that was displayed from the hit epilogue part is reduced. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of presentations well without executing the process of changing to a different decoration pattern.

(Re-lottery production 5)
In the pattern feed effect, the reduced pattern starts to change, and the size of the pattern during the change is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smoothen the appearance of the variation at the time of the pattern feed effect, and to show the flow of the series of effects well.

(Re-lottery production 7)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is used for the re-lottery. The performance begins. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown.

(Re-lottery production 8)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order, and again, ``2''. , '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '1', and all the decoration patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decoration patterns are sent in order, it is possible to clearly show the flow of the series of presentations.

(Re-lottery production 9)
In the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the patterns are displayed with the degree of transparency of the pattern when temporarily stopped, and the degree of transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, "2" pattern with 0% transparency, "2" pattern with 50% transparency, "3" pattern with 0% transparency, "3" pattern with 50% transparency, transparent Patterns are switched such as a "4" pattern with a degree of 0% and a "4" pattern with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the patterns can be clearly displayed in a mode with low transparency during the pattern feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of pattern is being sent.

(Re-lottery production 10)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" are sent in order, but each pattern is The times displayed are the same. According to this, all patterns can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of performances can be shown well.

(Re-lottery production 11)
During the pattern feed effect, a promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative pattern during the pattern feeding effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may be partially overlapped with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

(Re-lottery production 12)
As shown in FIGS. 189 and 190, the prompting display is started at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation of displaying all the decoration symbols during the symbol feed effect. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feeding pattern is repeated twice in this manner, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feeding effect.

(Re-lottery production 13)
The symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than the 2 symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the action prompting display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display was displayed was the timing at which 2 symbols were displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols to be sent is the same regardless of which symbol the re-lottery effect is started. According to this, since control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 14)
In the lottery effect, there is a pattern that displays an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern that displays an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) and then displays an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns). was established. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 15)
In the lottery effect, a pattern to display an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns), a pattern to display an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns) and then an odd numbered pattern (for example 3 patterns), Common data is used in any of the patterns in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed and then odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed. In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design is such that the data relating to the decorative design is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[About Inciting 21-27]
In FIGS. 191 to 194, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(fade effect)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the teasing part, a fade effect is added to the subtitles for the lines. The fade effect is an effect composed of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 191(A), part of the production with a fade effect in the SP first half reach A, which is the fanning part, will be described.

In the state of (b4), a screen is displayed in which Mumu-chan and Bakuchu face each other. After that, as shown in (b4'), the caption "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the caption "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's lines is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is added when subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed. In the state (b4'), the dialogue sound "I found it" is not output, and the dialogue sound is output when the caption transparency is 0% as in the state (b5). .

After that, as shown in (b5'), a layer under the subtitle with a transparency of 0% for "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's dialogue is added to the layer below the subtitle with a transparency of "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's dialogue. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. After that, as shown in (b5''), the caption "I found it" and the caption "I found it" are both displayed with a transmittance of 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the caption "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's lines is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the caption of "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's lines gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). In states (b5′) and (b5″), the dialogue sound “found” is not output. is being output.

As shown in FIG. 191(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. For example, in FIG. 191(B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progress of the song sung by Nana-chan. Immediately after that, the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed according to the progress of the song, saying, "Grab it with this small hand." When such subtitles (lyrics) during the jackpot round are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand.

(Provocation 21)
In the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 191(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

(Provocation 22)
As shown in FIG. 191(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of one character is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of another character. There is something. In this case, the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 70% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first caption fades out, and the second caption fades in, resulting in display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fading effect.

(Modified example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same timing, the fade effect may be applied to either one of the two subtitles instead of applying the fade effect to both of the two subtitles. . Specifically, a pattern in which no fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display, and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. A pattern without . Either of the patterns may be applied by replacing the above-described pattern of adding a fade effect to the first caption display and adding a fade effect to the second caption display. Also, when adding a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed under the first subtitle display.

In addition, the subtitles for the lines of the first character and the second character have been described for the case where the subtitles are displayed at the same timing. However, when the same character continuously utters lines, the subtitle display for the second line may overlap after the subtitle display for the first line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the caption display.

(Provocation 24)
As shown in FIG. 191(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is representative music of the contents installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the operation of applying the fade effect during the big win round, and the series of performances can be shown well.

(Regarding the relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound. FIG. 192 shows the situation when Mumu-chan's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 191(A) are uttered. The horizontal axis of the graph in FIG. 192 indicates the number of frames. The caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the sound of "I found it" is not output.

Thereafter, during the period in which the dialogue sound of "I found it" is output, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, during a period T1, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the dialogue sound of "I found it" is completed, the caption "I found it" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. . After that, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining one frame period of T1. As a result, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the period of T1, the dialogue sound of "found" is not output either, but the subtitle of "found" is faded in with the effect of fading in one frame after the start of the period of T1. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the caption "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, during the period in which the dialogue sound of "found" is output, the subtitle of "found" is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, during a period T2, which is a three-frame silence period after the output of the dialogue sound of "found" is completed, the subtitle of "found" continues to be displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. After that, the caption "Found" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining one frame period of T2. As a result, the caption "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 192, the first subtitle of "found" corresponding to the character of Yume-chan and the second subtitle of "found" corresponding to the character of Bakuchu have the same fade-in and fade-out. effect is applied. Also, the fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas the fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Provocation 23)
As shown in FIG. 192, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of “Found” is such that the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other, and is output during the period in which the fade effect is applied. not. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialog sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the presentation by sight and hearing.

(Comparison of subtitles between the provocation part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 193 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (o3) to (o5). FIG. 193(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part. Also, FIG. 193(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (o3) to (o5). FIGS. 193(A) and 193(B) are common in that subtitles are continuously displayed for lines spoken by two characters. However, between FIG. 193(A) and FIG. 193(B), the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different.

As shown in FIG. 193(A), in parts (b4) to (b7), in (b4), Mumu-chan and Bakuchu face each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed. After that, at (b6'), Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, subtitles corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I'll catch you!" are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 193(B), in the portion (o3) to (o5), a shop whose signboard is the crab killed by Jam and Nana in (o3) is displayed. A first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of the shop with a signboard of a crab without subtitles is displayed. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. After that, the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is approximately 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 193A and 193B, subtitles corresponding to lines are displayed multiple times in one scene (period from 0 to t1 or period from 0 to t2) in the introductory part and the epilogue part. Sometimes. In the case where subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to make it easier to understand the switching of the subtitle display by erasing the once displayed subtitle display. However, when there is no margin in the time scale, such as the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the caption display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, by adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to make the switching of captions easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, an image is first created, and then voices such as lines are added. Subtitles corresponding to each line are then added. If the time period from 0 to t1, in which the time scale is not large enough, to temporarily erase the caption display, it would be troublesome to recreate the video by lengthening the period. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles without recreating the video. In addition, even if there is a margin in the time scale, such as in the epilogue part when the shop with the crab signboard is displayed, by uniformly adding a fade effect, the overall work load is reduced, and when switching subtitles It is possible to prevent discomfort from occurring.

(Provocation 26)
As shown in FIG. 193, a fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in a predetermined scene in portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out effects may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is troublesome to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display is covered or not. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to prevent an increase in work load.

(Provocation 25)
Here, although not shown, the subtitle display timing may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 193, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from caption display to caption display is longer than in the introductory part. This is because the provocation part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part progresses less quickly than the provocation part. As a result, the introductory part is displayed more frequently than the epilogue part at the timing when the subtitle display overlaps. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort when switching the caption.

[About Inciting 27]
In FIG. 194, characteristic parts in the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Provocation 27)
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of caption display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 194(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed continuously. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without adding any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding subtitle display for long lines and subtitle display for fast-progressing lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur if subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incompatibility can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the caption display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 194(B), it is conceivable to superimpose "Found" on the caption display of "Found" and then display "Found". In such a case, the caption display becomes difficult to see without the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 194(C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in upper and lower two stages. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area for the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the subtitle display area. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the caption display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 195, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 195 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). Referring to FIG. 195, description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the effects using the decoration patterns and small patterns on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9. FIG. As shown in (B4), in the re-lottery pattern rendering effect, the enlarged "3" pattern is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Then, as shown in (B5), the "3" pattern is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" pattern is displayed with a slight up-and-down motion. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

Then, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" pattern continues to be displayed slightly shaking up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B8), the decoration design and the small design are fixed and stopped based on the reception of the design confirmation command. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. As shown in (B9), the pattern fixing period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained to flash in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the fanfare command, after about 10 msec, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, after about 33 msec, the screen is switched to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received. On the other hand, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to support fanfare earlier than the mode of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Then, as shown in (D2), the screen is switched to a screen in which characters of "FEVER" indicating a fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in a lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 196, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining a modification of designing. In a modified example, the pattern output may be executed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the decorative patterns (reduced patterns) reduced in the scene of catching Bakuchu are arranged in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Then, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced pattern slightly shakes up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Then, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decoration pattern on the upper left of the screen is once erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration of "222" that has been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged in design and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y4) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y5) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y6) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing.

In the pattern output of the modified example, the decorative symbols move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of the SP reach, and the symbols are aligned during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced pattern temporarily deleted after the reduced pattern shaking period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the position in the center of the screen, and the second design effect is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the video of the winning epilogue is finished, the reduced pattern is erased and the design effect is executed in which the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the pattern. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the pattern display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is displayed, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the winning epilogue part is completed, the pattern is displayed. At the time of playing, by enlarging and displaying the decoration patterns continuously using the screen end side and the screen center, the big winning patterns can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to show the scene switching appropriately. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position) are displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue image is being displayed, the reduced decoration pattern allows the player to recognize that the big winning display result is displayed.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is deleted, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner position is deleted, and the image at the center of the screen is deleted. The decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decoration pattern, and misunderstanding that some kind of message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the epilogue part can be suitably reproduced. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In the modified example, the decoration pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach state when the SP reach starts. According to this, by positioning from the start of the SP reach, it is possible not to interfere with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

197 to 200 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the re-lottery. In the modified example, for example, a case where a re-lottery is executed in the order of (F1) to (F12) from design placement will be described. Specifically, after the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the pattern is reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). After that, as shown in (F5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" pattern is reduced and displayed.

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed under the "3" pattern. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the lapse of time. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation.

FIG. 198 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12). In FIG. 198, the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13), A high-speed variation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1" and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol displayed before the high speed variation is displayed.

After that, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). After that, as shown in (G19), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, the background is switched to the background for pattern shaking. Here, as the pattern shaking, the pattern swings by rotating the pattern on the screen to the back side and the front side. Specifically, after the pattern swings to the back side from (G20) to (G21), the pattern swings to the front side from (G22) to (G23) to change to the initial position. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (G24) to (G25), the pattern swings to the back side from (G26) to (G27) to change to the initial position.

FIG. 199 shows the case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12). In FIG. 199, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be described. When the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12), the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. . After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is faintly displayed and the button image is erased. After that, all of "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and "2" used as decorative patterns are displayed from (H8) to (H20). A fast variation is performed at . After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol displayed before the high speed fluctuation is displayed.

After that, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). After that, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as indicated by (H27), the background is switched to the background indicated by (G20) to (G27). The movement of designing in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of designing in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the reduction time of the time gauge when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed in the period during which the effect of shaking the three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

After (G27) or (H27), an effect as shown in FIG. 200 is executed. In FIG. 200, the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be described. After (G27) or (H27), the screen is once whited out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state of (J2), (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), (J8), ( J9) and rotate. The rotation movement is so fast that the pattern seems to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the pattern swings to the back side from (J11) to (J12), and then the pattern moves to the front side from (J13) to (J14). It changes to the initial position by swinging. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. The movement of the symbol shaking from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol shaking from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the pattern stops neatly at the normal position.

[About loss 1 to 7]
Characteristic parts in the missing epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Regarding the design confirmation period)
FIG. 201 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol fixing period. (X1) in FIG. 201 is a diagram showing the timing of determination of success/failure corresponding to (r54) in FIG. (X2) to (X5) will be used to explain the details of the symbol determination period in the case of shifting from this state to the winning epilogue part. Also, the details of the pattern fixing period when the state of (X1) shifts to the missing epilogue part will be explained with reference to (X6) to (X9).

When the state of (X1) shifts to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state of (s5) in which Bakuchu is caught is displayed as shown in (X2). After that, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, it becomes a pattern confirmation period such as (B8) in which the pattern is fixed and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), there is a fanfare period like (B11). After that, as shown in (X5), it becomes a jackpot round period.

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the unsuccessful epilogue part, as shown in (X6), an image of the state of disappointment (u2) that Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. After that, as indicated by (X7), the background is blacked out, and the symbol combination indicating the result of the display of "232" being lost is displayed. After that, as indicated by (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's eye is displayed. After that, after being controlled to the normal screen, it becomes a symbol confirmation period such as (X9) during which symbol confirmation is stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the end of the pattern fixing period, the next variable display is started.

(detailed description of blackout)
FIG. 202 is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. Details of the blackout will be described in the order of FIGS. 202 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the state of disappointment (u2) that Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the background of the blackout is displayed with gradually decreasing transmittance, and the background of the middle pattern showing "3", which is one of the decorative symbols displayed in the center, gradually decreases transmittance. displayed. By decreasing the transmittance, the blackout background becomes gradually darker and the medium pattern becomes gradually clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 70% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 100%. After that, as indicated by (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 60% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 90%. After that, as indicated by (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 50% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 80%. After that, as indicated by (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 40% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 60%. After that, as indicated by (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 30% and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 40%. After that, as indicated by (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 20%, and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 20%. After that, as indicated by (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 10% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%. After that, as indicated by (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 0%.

After that, from (X19) to (X20), it becomes a symbol swinging period in which the medium symbol "3" swings up and down. After the pattern shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as indicated by (X21). After that, as indicated by (X22), it becomes a symbol fixing period. As shown in FIG. 202, the blackout of the background starts earlier than the fade-in of the medium pattern, and the blackout of the background has more stages of switching of the transmittance than the fade-in of the medium pattern. .

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 201, in the case of losing after determination of winning or losing, a losing pattern is displayed in the blackout background in the losing epilogue part. After that, after the switching image of the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen switches to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen at the time of failure by the eye-catching screen.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 202, in the losing epilogue part, the background at the time of losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, since the image and the medium pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of failure can be favorably displayed due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in FIG. 202, in the missing epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of failure from 100% to 0% transmittance is to fade the middle pattern from 100% to 0% transmittance. It has more steps than it takes to get in. Specifically, the blackout of the background has 8 stages from (X11) to (X18), whereas the fade-in of the middle pattern has 6 stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of failure is based on the relationship between the two. can be displayed appropriately.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 202, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of losing starts earlier than the change in which the medium pattern fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the medium pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in. It is possible to make the display of the hour look good.

(Loss 5)
The displayed image of the lost image before blackout is switched, but the displayed image of the blackout image does not change. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that the switching of the image includes switching of the picture on the screen, switching of the angle of the video, and switching of the displayed scene itself. In addition, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that it is the same still image, that even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is slightly moving.

(Loss 6)
As a result of the middle pattern fading in as the background at the time of failure blacks out, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transmittance of 0% and the transmittance of 0%. is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes a symbol fluctuation period as shown in (X19) to (X20). In the period of design fluctuation, the period of shifting the middle design from the central position to the upper position, the central position, the lower position, and the central position is defined as one period, and the fluctuation of the design may be repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the medium pattern is faded in from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Also, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a period during which the medium pattern is clearly displayed, so that it is possible to suitably show that it is a failure.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, on the eye-catching screen, the title "POWERFUL II" and images of main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed as information about the pachinko game machine 1. be done. According to this, the information of the pachinko game machine 1 can be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[About loss 8, 10 to 17]
Characteristic parts in the missing epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when losing)
FIG. 203 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp at the time of losing and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of losing. FIG. 203 also describes the lighting mode of the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 . FIG. 203 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp at the time of losing, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples at the time of losing. The example shown in FIG. 203 shows the production at the time of loss in the SP final reach, but for the production at the time of loss in other reach such as SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, The technique shown in FIG. 203 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the effect (X30) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the effect (X31) in which the background image is blacked out. The luminance data table at the time of failure shown in FIG. 203 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of the child table WD17 in the failure epilogue part shown in FIG. 229 to be described later.

After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention. An image is displayed.

A luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, through the switching period to the normal screen of (X34) and the design confirmation period of (X35), the next variation of (X36) executed when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the background A luminance data table for is used. The background luminance data table shown in FIG. 203 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the missing epilogue part shown in FIG. 229 to be described later.

It should be noted that the luminance data table for the background is maintained even when the customer waiting command is received when there is no reservation after the pattern fixing period of (X35). Incidentally, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the effect screen may be a demonstration display, and a luminance data table for demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, from (X30) to (X34), the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is blinking. And, by receiving the symbol decision command, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is turned off in the state of (X35). After that, by receiving the variation pattern command when there is a hold, in the state of (X36), the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 becomes blinking. In addition, when there is no hold after the symbol determination period of (X35), even if the customer waiting command is received, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 maintains extinguishing.

Further, as a modified example for failure, the luminance data table in each state may be different from that of the present embodiment. Specifically, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, during (X42) the eye-catching screen switching period, (X43) the eye-catching screen, (X44) the normal screen switching period, and (X45) the pattern confirmation period, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is created. may be used. Then, the luminance data table for the background may be used in the next variation of (X36).

Here, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before eye-catching display (at the time of failure). In addition, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation.

(Loss 8)
Characteristic portions of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished by the reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by the reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from extinguishing to blinking upon receipt of the variation pattern command of the next variation, but the brightness data table for the background does not switch even upon receipt of the symbol determination command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background with the end of the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table for the background is continuously used even if there is no reserved memory and the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the performance by the lamps can be presented without any sense of incongruity, and the series of presentations can be favorably presented. can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command which triggers the production of symbol confirmation and stop. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 12)
The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguishing to blinking by receiving the variation pattern command of the next variation which is the trigger for the next variation to start. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 13)
A modified example at the time of losing will be explained. The brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the rendering of (X40) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the rendering of (X41) in which the background image is blacked out. After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the pattern fixing period of (X45). After that, when a variation pattern command with hold is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the luminance data table is maintained during the pattern fixing period, and at the timing of switching to the next change, the background brightness data table. Further, in the pattern fixing period, the last luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), that is, turning off is used. According to this, after switching to the luminance data table of the background, the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received. can be easily recognized, and as a result, the failure can be favorably shown.

(Loss 14)
The final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data for keeping the light off. In addition, the data for keeping the light off is not used in the luminance data table for the background. According to this, since the brightness data for maintaining the lights off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the failure that the lights are off when the background is displayed. It can be made easy to recognize that it is.

(Loss 15)
If there is no pending memory after design determination, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, by receiving the customer waiting designation command, the table is switched to the brightness data table for the background, so that it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the table is lost.

(Loss 16)
The first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of failure). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher luminance than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

(Loss 17)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching is easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Regarding 8-12]
Characteristic parts in the parts related to the determination of success or failure are numbered and explained.

(Detailed description of (r48) part)
FIG. 204 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 204 (r48) is a scene in which the final hype is performed before the winner is decided. FIG. 204A is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 204B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 204(A), in the (r48) part, after the explosive chu is displayed as in (r48-1), six allies are displayed as in (r48-2). After that, after the display of Bakuchu like (r48-1) is displayed again, the six allies like (r48-2) are displayed. After that, switching of still images between (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 204(B). The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time elapses.

(Acceptability 8)
The scene before the propriety decision of (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

(Acceptability 9)
As shown in FIG. 204B, the image switching speed between the image of the friend character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that a scene in which the friend character has an advantage or a scene in which the enemy character has an advantage is developed. It becomes possible to incite the development of the game, and the interest is improved. In addition, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friend character and the enemy character.

(Yes or No 10)
The effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP last reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect even at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach.

(Yes or No 11)
At least one of the friend character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images during the slow motion period in (r48). For example, in the case of an ally character, four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, . good. According to this, by changing only part of the data while using the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully represent the state of movement while reducing the amount of data change work.

(Yes or No 12)
In the slow motion period in (r48), when the character's hair and clothes are shown to move gradually from a plurality of images, the hair and clothes move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to be visible. Here, if the number of images is increased in accordance with the motion of the slow motion in order to make the motion look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, even if the number of images used is reduced, the movement does not become awkward, and while reducing the data capacity, it is possible to express the movement more faithfully. can.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 273. FIG.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using luminance data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table stored in the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 to light/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11 . The sub-fluctuation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 controls the ROM 121 and RAM 122 when the sub-variation time reaches the timing for starting the display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the inflection part). The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the . The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to an effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124 .

For example, FIG. 285 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 285, when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extension command for designating the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124 .

In the parent table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , and information specifying a child table (a specified address of the child table) to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp. In the parent table, only lamps to be controlled are specified, and lamps not to be controlled are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 205, which will be described later, the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attack lamp 9E, the V attack lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H are the objects of lamp control. 600000 msec is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 205, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the character object lamp 9A, and the child table LD1 is designated for the board left lamp 9B. , the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuner lamp 9H.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but as shown in FIG. 285, in the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp is 600000 msec (10 minutes). It is specified, and the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 counts 600000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60000 times. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600000 msec (10 minutes) is clocked. In the parent table for epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as a child table.

In the child table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and a grandchild table to be referenced at each time when lamp control is performed are specified. information (designated address of grandchild table). For example, in the child table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 206, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) are specified for each time ta1 to ta19.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but as shown in FIG. 285, in the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time during which the frame lamp is subjected to lamp control. , The effect control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the time reaches 3000 msec, the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 is used to perform lamp control. ing. In the child table WD3 for epilogue per SP first half reach A, W4 is designated as a grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and luminance data used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, a grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 243, which will be described later, stores luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec.

The luminance data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the object of lamp control. For example, the frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements "R", "G", and "B", and the luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. . Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 levels of current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when luminance data “A” is output to the “R” element, a current corresponding to the “A” luminance data flows through the “R” element, and “1” flows through the “G” element. When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows through the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "F" is output. A current corresponding to the luminance data of 'G' flows through the element 'G'.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by applying a current corresponding to luminance data to each element of RGB. Also, the frame lamp can be illuminated in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on luminance data. As an example, in a production in which Yume-chan appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light red. . In an effect in which Maid A appears, data "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in blue. In an effect in which Maid B appears, data "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in Hawaiian blue. In an effect in which AD appears, data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in yellow. In an effect in which Jam-chan appears, data "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in purple. In an effect in which Nana-chan appears, data "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in pink. In an effect in which Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in red. In an effect in which Boingo appears, data "FEA" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in a cream color.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 243, but as shown in FIG. 285, in the grandchild table W4, for each lamp, "000" and "AAA" are alternately set at intervals of 30 msec as luminance data (RGB data). specified. The effect control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the time reaches 300 msec, brightness data is generated at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4. Output to the LED driver. Then, based on the received luminance data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow through the specified LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can lamp-control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data from the first specified location of the grandchild table, and when the output of the luminance data is completed up to the last specified location of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is displayed. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, output of luminance data is started again from the first specified location of the corresponding grandchild table. On the other hand, when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table designating the grandchild table becomes 0 while the luminance data is being output based on the grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 286 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in FIG. 286, in the child table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 3000 msec is specified as the time during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec is data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec is data 3, and the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. data 4, data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 5, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 6, and data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 7.

The effect control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the count reaches 3000 msec, data 1 to data 7 are displayed at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4. is output to the LED driver, but if the clock has not reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 to data 7, the luminance data are again output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1. When the clock reaches 3000 msec, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting luminance data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has passed.

As in the parent table shown in FIG. 205, which will be described later, child data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays a role of troubleshooting. That is, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the effect control command from the CPU 103. Even when the CPU 120 does not receive the performance control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so that different lamp controls are prevented from being performed one after another from the point where trouble occurs. can do.

Also, as in the child table shown in FIG. 206, which will be described later, grandchild data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the last specified location, and 10 minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. It plays the role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first specified position in the child table due to the timer remaining in the parent table when the value of the timer to be set becomes 0.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 248, which will be described later, luminance data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and 10 minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer to be set becomes 0, it plays a role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first specified position of the grandchild table because the timer of the child table still remains.

In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to be 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with the determined single light emission, thereby preventing the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can be done. Furthermore, if the luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can.

As described above, the luminance data table consists of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. Of these, only characteristic tables are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the start part]
FIG. 205 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 205, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the start part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp for each game effect lamp 9 Information designating child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) referred to during control are stored.

FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 206, in the child table WD1 of the frame lamp, the time of the start part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table referenced in each time period is specified. In this embodiment, only the grandchild tables that are particularly characteristic are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "omitted" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, grandchild table W21 is specified at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 65, and corresponds to the frame lamp grandchild table W21 in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 273, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 273, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern).

Grandchild table W4 is specified at time ta3 and time ta6. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table shown in FIG. 243 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 243, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp twice in white by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec×5) based on the grandchild table W4.

The grandchild table W11 is specified between times ta10 and ta12. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 264 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 264, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is set to decrease stepwise from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to reduce the brightness step by step in correspondence with the effect of closing the shutter as shown in FIGS. 71(a10) to (a12). The frame lamp lights up in red while

The grandchild table W12 is specified at times ta13 to ta18. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 264 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 264, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. 72 (a13) to (a15) and FIG. 73 (a16) to (a18) by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, the effect control CPU120 from the fully closed state of the shutter The frame lamp is lighted in red while maintaining the luminance in a reduced state corresponding to the effect of gradually opening after the time is maintained.

Thus, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamps change color and brightness, such as yellow background lighting, red blinking, white blinking, and red lighting. While the brightness data is switched so that the lighting/blinking changes while changing the brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is kept in a reduced brightness state and lit in red. maintains the luminance data. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the ensuing part to the player.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72(a13), the luminance data is set so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining the reduced luminance from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It was maintained, but not limited to this. For example, even if the luminance data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining the reduced luminance after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing just before the shutter starts to close, etc.), the frame lamp is kept at a reduced luminance and the luminance is changed to red. Data may be maintained.

At the time ta19, which is the last part of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect that the shutter is maintained in a completely open state as shown in FIG. 74(a19). As described with reference to FIG. 66, "lights out" means a state in which the luminance data is "0". You can become Also in the following description, the part of "lights out" may be "substantially lighted out". At time ta19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The lamp remains off.

In this way, since the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened, the player can be easily informed of the timing when the shutter is fully opened, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach The frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 207, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used for the swing part of SP first half reach A. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 208, in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified for the frame lamp.

For example, the grandchild table W3 is specified for 1560 msec at time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table shown in FIG. 242 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 242, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at intervals of 180 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. . The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tb14 and for 210 msec at time tb17. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

Here, as shown in FIG. 243, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , the first 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights on white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights on white), the next The first 30 msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30 msecs is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msecs is "000" (lights out). That is, the frame lamp alternately turns off and on over one period of 210 msec (30 msec×7), thereby blinking the frame lamp in white (white flash) a plurality of times. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec×7), the frame lamp flashes white three times, and the effect control CPU 120 performs 150 msec. When the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec×5), the frame lamp flashes white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, the grandchild table W4 is specified. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tb17, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the incitement part of the first half of SP reach A, Yume-chan explodes before the success/failure decision (big hit, loss, development of SP reach second half) as shown in FIG. 80 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to the production that incites whether or not to catch the. At time tb18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the tilt 2 luminance data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 262 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 262, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the timer value corresponding to the child table WD2 is Until it becomes 0, the frame lamp keeps lighting in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 80 (b18), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the winning/failing branch in the swinging part of the first half of the SP reach A. Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is designated so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time tb4, the effect control CPU 120 responds to an effect in which Yume, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 76(b4). , The left frame lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume-chan, and the right frame lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the effect control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Flash the frame left lamp in green. Furthermore, at time tb8 and time tb9, the effect control CPU 120 displays a frame with a color corresponding to the character when there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. 76(b8) and (b9). Flash the lamp.

As shown in FIGS. 77(b8) and 77(b9), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP first half reach A]
FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 209(a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 209(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD3 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD3 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

As described above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has the RGB data "FDC", whereas the white flashing at tc1 after the win is determined has the RGB data "FFF". At the time of winning, the frame lamp flickers in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can easily inform the player of the winning.

Grandchild table W1 is specified at time tc2 and time tc3. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 238, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 238, in the grandchild table W1, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching an explosive chew as shown in FIGS. light up in rainbow colors corresponding to

As shown in FIG. 209(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 209(b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the time of the symbol output part in the hit epilogue part of the SP reach first half A is set for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD0 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. Further, the common symbol drawing child table WD0 is commonly used in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final reach of the SP.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tc4 and time tc5 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time tc6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothed in rainbow colors in correspondence with the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 82(c6). Light. At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on the grandchild table W1, frame lamps are displayed corresponding to the effect of catching Bakuchu. is smoothly lit in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on the grandchild table W1, the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 210(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used in the losing epilogue part of SP first half Reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common losing epilogue used in the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the losing epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach A , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD4 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. In addition, child table WD4 for common loss epilogue is commonly used in SP reach first half A, B, SP reach second half A, B, and SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the losing 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 265 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 265, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp is lit in white.

As described above, the RGB data for the white lighting at the success/failure branch (tb18) is "FDC", whereas the white lighting at td1 after the failure notification has the RGB data for "888" or "444". . As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the success/failure branch (tb18). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec at time td2. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the losing 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 265 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 265, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect in which Yume-chan is disappointed as shown in FIG. lights up in dark white.

As mentioned above, the rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tc2, tc3) switches the RGB data at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the dark white lighting at the time of losing (td2) is 250 msec, which is longer than the time of winning. switch at intervals. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the losing 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 266 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 266, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec and "111" is specified for the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , “111” is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 83(d3) and the screen turns dark. .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. That is, the grandchild table W21 that is used with the normal screen displayed at the time of failure has a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is the grandchild table W21 specified by time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At time td4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. Lamp control is performed while switching RGB data until a customer waiting command is received. If the fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command is not received even after performing lamp control based on the final RGB data, the lamp is restarted. Lamp control is performed based on the first RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 203, the period from when the frame lamp is turned off at time td3 to when the frame lamp is turned on in a yellow background lighting pattern corresponding to the effect of displaying the normal screen at time td4. , an eye-catching screen is displayed and a frame lamp based on the luminance data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is lit. As described above, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of failure, after the luminance data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, the grandchild table which is also used in the start part as the luminance data table corresponding to the normal screen is used. Table W21 is used. As a result, after the eye-catching screen is displayed, there is no need to separately prepare a brightness data table that is used until the design is determined. , the performance by the frame lamp can be shown to the player without a sense of incongruity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 211, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the swing part of the SP first half reach B. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 212, in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a period of 150 msec, which is shorter than one cycle. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time te12, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD5, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time te17, which is the last part of the fanning part of the first half of the SP reach B, it is to fan whether or not Yume-chan will lose in the winning/failing branch (jackpot, losing, development of the second half of the SP reach) as shown in FIG. 90 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to the production. At time te18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90 (e17), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the success/failure branching in the swing part of the first half of the SP reach B. Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time te4, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the effect that Yume, who is located on the left side of the screen, faces Boingo, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 86(e4). The frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in cream color corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Blink the left lamp. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the frame right lamp in a cream color corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to the effect that Boingo located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 86(e6). blink.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in a cream color corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to the effect that Boingo hits the puck as shown in FIG. 88(e11). Furthermore, at time te7, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume-chan when there is a line by Yume-chan but no caption as shown in FIG. 87(e7). Let

As shown in FIG. 87(e7), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the luminance data (subscription data) is set so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP first half reach B]
FIG. 213 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 213(a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 213(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD6 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD6 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the winning/failing branch shown in FIG. Corresponding to the production, the frame lamp blinks in white.

White lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times tf2 to tf4. The production control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the production shown in FIGS. Then, the frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 213(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 213(b2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time for the symbol output part in the winning epilogue part of the SP reach first half B is set for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tf5 and time tf6 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the frame lamp is set to display a pattern in correspondence with the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. 92(f5) and (f6). Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time tf7, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothed in rainbow color in correspondence with the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 93 (f7). Light. At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

Thus, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the times tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, Boingo is attacked and Yume wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time tf7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 214 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 214(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 213 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common losing epilogue used in the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the losing epilogue part in the SP reach first half B , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between time tg1 and time tg2 for 200 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. , the frame lamp is lit in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 265, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (te17), so that the player can suitably indicate that the failure has occurred. can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec at time tg3. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the production shown in FIGS. The lamp is illuminated with a white color darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 265, which will be described later, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than the hit time. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 95 (g4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the effect of displaying the normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. Further, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in the character action part in the second half of SP development]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a character action part in the latter half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD8 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 215, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, the grandchild table referred to in the character action part is specified for the frame lamp. Further, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling portion) of the character object motion shown in FIGS. be done.

For example, the grandchild table W2 is designated for 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking luminance data table shown in FIG. 241 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 241, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W2, so that after the win/fail branch shown in FIG. 90 (e17), the accessories shown in FIGS. Corresponding to such an effect, the frame lamp blinks in red.

Note that during the 7000 msec period from th1 to th3 when the role object falls, lamp control is also performed for the role object lamp 9A. For example, during the period of 7000 msec from th1 to th3 when the character object falls, the effect control CPU 120 selects the child table corresponding to the character object falling motion on the character object lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. Based on this, the role lamp 9A is flashed in red.

As a result, it is possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the presentation of the falling role by the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the role lamp 9A.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the backing part of reach A in the second half of SP. As shown in FIG. 216, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

217 and 218 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the swing part of reach A in the second half of SP. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp, the time of the inflection part of the reach A in the latter half of the SP is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified. there is

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (upward portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 184(h4) to 185(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to lighting in yellow corresponding to the background of reach A in the latter half of the SP, thereby making it easy for the player to understand that the reach A has developed in the latter half of the SP. I can tell you.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp shows that the player has reached the second half reach A of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 242, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). At time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1130 msec, and at time ti20, The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the effect control is performed for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. By the CPU 120 performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is possible to use the common grandchild table W3 for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between times ti15 and ti24 and for 210 msec between times ti14, ti23 and ti35. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time ti15, time ti24, time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the grandchild table W4 is specified. performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the grandchild for one cycle of 210 msec. By performing lamp control based on the table W4, the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W7 is specified for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the tilt 1 luminance data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 262 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 262, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

At time ti39, which is the last of the fanning part of reach A in the second half of SP, it is fanned whether or not Yume-chan and Jam-chan will catch Bakuchu in the success/fail branch (big hit, lose) as shown in FIG. 108 (i39). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to such an effect. At time ti39, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. As shown in FIG. 262, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the timer value corresponding to the child table WD2 is Until it becomes 0, the frame lamp keeps lighting in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes.

In this way, the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP is a reach without operation prompt, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 108 (i39), the frame lamp is maintained in white lighting with the sound muted, so that the player can be easily informed of the winner/failure branch (decision timing). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 262, “FDC” is specified for the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used during the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38, and furthermore, “FDC” is specified for the grandchild table W8 used at the subsequent time ti39. "FDC" is also designated for the last RGB data. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 maintains the state of outputting the luminance data of "FDC" to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and thereafter continues to output the luminance data of "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8 to the LED driver. Since the information is output to the driver, it is possible to favorably produce the timing for determining whether the decision is made by a simpler lamp control without excessively increasing the amount of data.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the SP second half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time ti2, the effect control CPU 120 creates an effect such that Yume-chan and Jam-chan located on the left side of the screen face off against Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. 97(i2). Correspondingly, the frame left lamp is lit in white corresponding to Mumu-chan and Jam-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 97(i3), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time ti4, the effect control CPU 120 displays the left frame lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan in response to the effect that Jam-chan located on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. At time ti5, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right frame lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to the effect that Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 98(i5). flash.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the SP latter half Reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the effect control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Flash the frame left lamp in green. Further, at time ti32 and time ti34, the effect control CPU 120 determines the color corresponding to the character when there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. to make the frame lamp flash.

In this way, even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption as shown in FIGS. The luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified as follows. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of the SP]
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 219(a1), in the winning epilogue parent table used for the winning epilogue part of SP latter half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 219(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD10 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD10 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, during times tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting at the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Grandchild table W1 is specified at times tj2 and tj3. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching an explosion as shown in FIGS. Lights up smoothly in the rainbow colors that correspond to the

As shown in FIG. 219(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 219(b2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the pattern output part in the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is timed for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in (j4) and (j5) of FIG. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time tj6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are displayed smoothly in rainbow colors in correspondence with the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 111 (j6). Light. At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for times tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamps are displayed in correspondence with the effect of catching Bakuchu. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is designated for time tj6, and the frame lamp is turned on to correspond to the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 220(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of reach A in the latter half of the SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 220 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the losing epilogue part in the SP reach first half B , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tk1. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp is lit in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 265, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (ti39). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec between time tk2 and time tk3. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the production shown in FIGS. The lamp is lit in a darker white than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 265, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the winning time. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 113 (k4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. 113 (k5) is displayed. to turn it on. Further, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the swing part of reach B in the second half of SP. As shown in FIG. 221, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the swing part of SP latter half reach B, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the swing part of the SP latter half reach B. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 222, in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified for the frame lamp.

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (upward portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 184(h4) to 185(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to lighting in yellow corresponding to the background of reach B in the latter half of the SP, making it easy for the player to understand that the reach B has developed in the latter half of the SP. I can tell you.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp indicates that the player has progressed to reach B in the latter half of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 242, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). Time th7 to th10, time tn1, and time tn5, by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 effect control CPU120 between 1130msec more than one cycle, the frame lamp is lit yellow over 1130msec, time At tn14, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp is lit yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tn6, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD12, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing different grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between time tn3, time tn12 and time tn25 and for 210 msec between time tn4, tn13, time tn15, time tn19 and time tn22. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time tn3, time tn12, time tn25, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, so that the frame lamp blinks white twice, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, And at time tn22, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

Thus, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the swaying part of reach B in the second half of SP, corresponding to the effect of swaying whether or not to catch the crab at the success/fail branch (big hit, loss) as shown in FIG. 122 (n27), The frame lamp lights up in white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 122 (n27), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the success/fail branch in the swing part of the reach B in the second half of the SP. Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time tn2, the effect control CPU 120 causes Jam-chan and Nana, who are positioned on the left side of the screen, to face off against a crab positioned on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 114 (n2). Then, the frame left lamp blinks in white corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and the frame right lamp lights in red corresponding to the crab. Furthermore, since Jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP latter half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tn18, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink corresponding to Nana-chan in response to Nana-chan praying effect as shown in FIG. 119 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, the effect control CPU 120 displays the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is a character (crab) dialogue but there is no caption as shown in FIG. 117 (n10). to make the frame lamp flash.

As shown in FIG. 117(n10), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the luminance data (subscript n10) is set so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the latter half of the SP]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 223(a1), in the winning epilogue parent table used for the winning epilogue part of SP latter half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 223(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD13 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD13 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times to2 to to5. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and makes the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. Corresponding to the pleasing performance, the frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 223(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 223(b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol output used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the symbol output part in the winning epilogue part of the SP reaching second half B is set for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone.

For example, during 5000 msec between time to6 and time to7, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby making the frame lamp correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. 124(o6) and 125(o7). Blink in bright white corresponding to the output.

At time to8, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly rainbow-colored in correspondence with the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 125 (o8). Light. At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the caught crabs are used as signboards of the shop, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan The frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow colors to correspond to the pleasing effect, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time to8, and the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the production that seems to be. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are used in common. Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 224(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 224 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the losing epilogue part in the SP reach latter half B , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tp1. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W13, so as to correspond to the effect of failing to catch the crab as shown in FIG. to light the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 265, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (tn27). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified between time tp2 and time tp3 for 5800 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect that Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed as shown in FIGS. 126(p2) and (p3). The frame lamp is lit in white that is darker than tp1.

Rainbow lighting at the time of winning (to2-to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 265, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the winning time. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 127 (p4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. 127 (p5) is displayed. to turn it on. Further, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach fanning part]
FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the swaying part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 225, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect and information designating the child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) referred to during lamp control for the lamp 9 are stored.

FIGS. 226 and 227 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the end part of the SP final reach, and designates a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. .

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (upward portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 184(h4) to 185(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to glowing in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP final reach, so that the player can easily understand that the SP final reach has developed. can be done.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the player to play the game on the screen indicating that the SP final reach has occurred. can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 242, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 during 1130msec exceeding one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights yellow over 1130msec, and time tr19 and time At tr22, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1330 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD15, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing different grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

Further, the child table WD9 used in the end part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the end part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the end part of the SP are different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing another grandchild table for each of a plurality of timings, the amount of data used for ramp control is reduced in a plurality of ready-to-win performances, It is possible to vary the time of lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table is similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tr36 and for 210 msec at time tr40 and tr47. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, the grandchild table W4 is designated, but at time tr36, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

Furthermore, the child table WD2 used in the early part of the SP first half Reach A, the child table WD5 used in the first half SP Reach B part, the child table WD9 used in the SP second half Reach A part, and the SP second half Reach B part In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the inflection part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using it, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. When the information for executing the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is designated at time tr41, and when the information for executing the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, Grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are first set for only the R data at intervals of 30 msec. Then, at intervals of 20 msec, data indicating various luminance values are specified only for the R data, and finally, at intervals of 30 msec and 40 msec, various luminance values are specified only for the R data. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 so as to correspond to the cut-in effect (red cut-in effect) shown in FIG. 141 (r41), and lights the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 255 to 257, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 255 to 257, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are first set for G data only at intervals of 30 msec. Then, at intervals of 20 msec, data indicating various luminance values are designated only for the G data, and finally, at intervals of 30 msec and 40 msec, various luminance values are designated only for the G data. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 so as to correspond to the cut-in effect (green cut-in effect) shown in FIG. 141 (r41), and lights the frame lamp in green.

As shown in FIGS. 141(r40) and (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not utter a line and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, frame lamps that are subject to lamp control in situations other than the cut-in effect in the SP final reach continue to be subject to lamp control even in the cut-in effect.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (the button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap each other when the cut-in effect is executed, and the overlapping of the two makes it difficult to recognize one of the displays. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the content of the display. Furthermore, the luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect and the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the frame of the same place as the lamp control in the end part of the SP final reach By being designed to use the lamp, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

In the present embodiment, the object of lamp control is common in that the button display and cut-in effect and the effect in the SP final reach are all using frame lamps. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more game effect lamps 9, such as a frame lamp, a character lamp 9A, and a board left lamp 9B, are used in button display and cut-in effect, and other SP final reach effects. The ramp control targets may be common in terms of point, or the ramp control targets may be common in that all the game effect lamps 9 are used.

A grandchild table W9 is specified at 860 msec at time tr49 and time tr50. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for frame lamps in the trigger display luminance data table shown in FIG. 263 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 263, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to effects such that the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIGS. 144(r49) and (r50). to light the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W10 is designated at the time tr51 to tr54, which is the end of the fanning part of the SP final reach. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promoting luminance data table shown in FIG. 263 to be described later. As shown in Fig. 263, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , by performing ramp control based on the grandchild table W10, corresponding to an effect that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. , the frame lamp flashes in red, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes from time tr51 to tr54, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0. Until then, the frame lamp keeps blinking in red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 144 (r49) to 145 (r54), in the success/failure branching of the SP final reach part, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the reach (BGM) was output. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, red flashing, etc., and it is possible to enhance the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the winning/failing branch (decision timing).

Here, the child table WD2 used in the boost part of SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the boost part of SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the SP second half reach A boost part, and the SP second half reach B In the case where there is no operation promotion that urges the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) like the child table WD12 used in the fanning part, the frame lamp lights up at the last pass/fail branch of the fanning part. It remains lit in white, and then transitions to the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part. On the other hand, as in the child table WD15 used in the backing part of the SP final reach, when an operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), it is shown in FIG. 143 (r47). After flashing in white in an effect to agitate whether or not the friendly character will catch Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. After the frame lamp lights up in red corresponding to such an effect, the switch is made to the grandchild table W9, and based on the grandchild table W9, the stick controller 31A (trigger) shown in FIGS. The frame lamp lights up in red to correspond to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate in the success/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the effect seems to have stopped. can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, in which an operation is promoted to prompt the player to perform an operation in the success/fail branch, based on the grandchild table W10, the luminance data (RGB data) is set to "500" and "D00" at intervals of 30 msec. As a result, it is possible to suitably produce the timing of deciding whether to decide whether the decision is true or not by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is designated so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character utters a line.

For example, at time tr2, the effect control CPU 120 responds to an effect such as shown in FIG. Then, the left frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to the six ally characters, and the right frame lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six teammate characters positioned on the left side of the screen are speaking lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white. In addition, at time tr3, the effect control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to Bakuchu in response to the effect that Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 128(r3). Flash the right lamp.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. there is

For example, at time tr11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to the maid A, corresponding to the effect that the maid A chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 131 (r11). Furthermore, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. (r33) and when there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption as shown in FIG. 139 (r35), the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

136 (r25), (r27), 137 (r29), 138 (r31), (r33), and 139 (r35). Even if there is no such character, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the epilogue part for the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 228(a1), in the master table for the character action used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD 16a, YD 16a, LD 16a, AD 16a) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 228(a2), in the child table WD16a for character object actions used in the SP final reach winning epilogue part, the time of the character action part in the SP final reach winning epilogue part is subdivided for frame lamps. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD16a is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is designated for 10000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the win determination brightness data table shown in FIG. 269 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 269, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is specified repeatedly. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the win/fail branch shown in FIG. 145 (r54), the accessories shown in FIGS. 146 (s1) to (s3) fall Corresponding to such a production, the frame lamp blinks in seven colors.

As shown in FIG. 228(b1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , and information specifying child tables (WD 16b, YD 16b, LD 16b, AD 16b) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 228(b2), in the winning epilogue child table WD16b used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame ramp. Along with this, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD16b is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at times ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. 186 (s3-2) to 187 (s3-8). The frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to the rise of the role object, corresponding to the effect that the display appears.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times ts4 to ts7. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby making the frame lamp correspond to the effect of catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. 147(s4) to 148(s7). Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to winning determination.

As shown in FIG. 228(c1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the epilogue part for winning the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 228(c2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the SP final reach winning epilogue part, the time of the pattern output part in the SP final reach winning epilogue part is subdivided for frame lamps. In addition, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time ts8 and time ts9 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time ts10, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly lit in rainbow color in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern as shown in FIG. 149 (s10) is displayed in the center of the screen. At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for times ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamps are displayed in correspondence with the effect of catching Bakuchu. The frame lamp is illuminated smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified at time ts10, and the frame lamp is displayed in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table used at the time of notifying the winning and the grandchild table used at the time of displaying the winning pattern are shared, so that there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. , While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, it is possible to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the effect that the character is falling, the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. Frame lamps are lamp controlled. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and congratulate the player. After that, in the production that the ally character catches the bomb, the smooth rainbow color lighting without achromatic color is executed to congratulate the player for the big win in a calm manner. be able to. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the SP final reach losing epilogue part.

As shown in FIG. 229(a1), in the parent table for the losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , and information designating child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 229(a2), in the child table WD17 for the unsuccessful epilogue used for the unsuccessful epilogue part of the SP final reach, for the frame lamp, the time of the unsuccessful epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided, and each time A grandchild table referenced in the band is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD17 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of the time tu1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to light the frame lamp in white.

Red blinking in the success/failure branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 265, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is darker than the red flashing at the winning/failing branch (tr54), so that the player can be suitably notified of the losing.

The grandchild table W14 is specified for 3900 msec of the time tr2. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect that the six teammate characters are disappointed as shown in FIG. Lights up in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 265, which will be described later, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than the hit time. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are the same as the SP final reach child table WD17. In addition, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing based on the grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is common among different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. Thus, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 150 (u3) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. 151 (u4) is displayed. to turn it on. Further, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in relief part]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the relief part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD18 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 230, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the relief per part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at time tv1 of 1980 msec, grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one luminance data table per remedy shown in FIG. 267 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 267, in the grandchild table W16, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec, and each lamp is specified in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W16 so as to correspond to the relief effect shown in FIG. 152 (v1), and lights the frame lamp in red.

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W21 lastly specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the child table WD18 used at the time of relief is displayed first. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights up even brighter. As a result, since the frame lamp lights more brightly than the state after the notification of the loss at the time of the relief hit, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to understand the notification of the loss and the subsequent notification of the relief hit. I can show you.

In the present embodiment, once the frame lamp lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background after the loss notification, and furthermore, at the time of the relief hit, the frame lamp lights up brighter in red corresponding to the relief effect. there were. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the grandchild table W15 is designated, and "111" is designated as the last luminance data (RGB data). may be As a result, the frame lamp is turned off in the white system at the end of the losing time. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used at the time of repair. As a result, the frame lamp lights up brightly in the white system at the beginning of the relief hit after the loss notification. In this way, at the time of a relief hit, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification. It is possible to show the information and the subsequent relief winning information in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

At time tv2 of 700 msec, grandchild table W17 is specified. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2 luminance data table per remedy shown in FIG. 268 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 268, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white data such as "AAA" and "DDD" are displayed for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the white-out effect shown in FIG. 152 (v2).

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tv3 and time tv4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white in correspondence with the effect of the design shown in FIGS. 153(v3) and (v4).

The grandchild table W1 is designated at time tv5, which is the last part of the repair per part. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the pattern output effect shown in FIG. . At time tv5, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). Information designating child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) referred to during lamp control is stored.

(Luminance data table used before prompting)
FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the re-lottery part (before prompting the operation). As shown in FIG. 232, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, a child table used before the pattern starts to move and a child table used after the pattern starts to move are prepared. In each child table of these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

FIG. 232(a) shows a child table that is used before the pattern starts to move. For example, between times tA6 and tA8, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, so that as shown in FIGS. Before the moves, the frame lamp is turned off.

In this way, after the frame lamp is once turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance in which the pattern starts to move, so the pattern starts to move in the re-lottery performance depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 232(b) shows a child table that is used after the pattern starts to move. Grandchild table W19 is specified at times tA9 and tA10. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 270 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 270, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 60 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. 156 (A9) and FIG. 157 (A10), the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to correspond to the effect that the symbol "2" is reduced as shown in FIGS. Flash the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W20 is specified at times tA11 to tA46. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 271, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 271, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which is shorter than in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. It is The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to the effect that the symbols change at high speed as shown in FIGS. Makes the frame lamp flash rapidly in red.

(Brightness data table used when the pattern is promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 233 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used in the re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 233 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 233, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified during 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white in correspondence with the performance of the pattern output such that the pattern of is enlarged and displayed.

The grandchild table W18 is specified at times tB5 to tB9. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that the symbol "3" as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is blinked in rainbow colors in correspondence with the effect that the pattern of "3" is determined after the pattern is shaken and displayed.

Note that the flashing of the rainbow color by lamp control during the time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow color lighting by the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, during times tB5 to tB9, the light flashes more violently than the rainbow-colored smooth lighting. During time tB5 to tB9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp keeps blinking in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a ramp control when the pattern is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow The frame lamp lights up in color, but when the pattern of “2” is promoted by a re-lottery and replaced with the pattern of “3”, the flashing of the rainbow color at times tB5 to tB9 is once in the epilogue part of the winning “2”. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the pattern starts to move due to the re-lottery effect with the light off and the pattern is displayed in a swinging manner, the smooth rainbow color is displayed based on the luminance data (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. has a different lighting mode, and the frame lamp blinks in red. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 172(B7) to (B9), the frame lamp is designed to blink in rainbow color when the effect is started such that the symbol "3" is displayed shaking and then the symbol is confirmed. Therefore, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" as shown in FIG. is also taken over. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

(Brightness data table used when the design is not promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 234 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 234 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 234, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified during 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white in correspondence with the performance of the pattern output such that the pattern of is enlarged and displayed.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times tC5 to tC9. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby producing an effect such that the symbol "2" as shown in FIGS. , the frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow colors. During the time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as ramp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. Table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and after turning off, the pattern starts to move due to a re-lottery effect, and the pattern is displayed in a swaying manner. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the luminance data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild tables W19 and W20). As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Also, when the symbol "2" is promoted by the re-lottery and replaced by the symbol "3", the lighting of the rainbow color during the time tB5 to tB9 is "2" without being promoted from the symbol "2" by the re-lottery. The lighting mode is more intense than the rainbow-colored smooth lighting at times tC5 to tC9 in the case where the pattern is maintained. Thus, when the winning pattern is promoted by the re-lottery, the player can effectively celebrate the promotion of the winning pattern by the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning pattern is promoted by the re-lottery. If not, the grandchild table W1 used in the epilogue part and common to the grandchild table W1 can be used to reduce the data capacity.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 176(C7) to 176(C9), after the pattern output of the "2" pattern is completed, the "2" pattern becomes the normal size and the pattern is confirmed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start lighting the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

176(C7), the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" is shaken is shown in FIGS. 176(C8) and 176(C9). is also taken over. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Luminance data table used in fanfare part]
FIG. 235 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used for the fanfare repertoire. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 235, in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. 173 (D1) or 177 (E1), by performing lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 once turns on the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed. turn off the light.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamps in a fanfare manner. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that the frame lamps are displayed in a fanfare manner in correspondence with the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 173 (D2) or FIG. 177 (E2). Light up in the lighting mode. At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp maintains lighting in a fanfare manner.

[Smooth rainbow luminance data table]
FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the parent table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be used.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the child table of the smooth rainbow brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referenced in a predetermined time period are specified.

FIG. 238 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 238, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various luminance values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at intervals of 30 msec. Data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

FIG. 239 is a diagram for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp and the grandchild table for the board left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 239, in the grandchild table Y1 for the role product lamp, the data "FFFF" is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "RRRR" data to be output to the role product lamp 9A. there is The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1 to light the role lamp 9A in red. In the grandchild table L1 for the board left lamp, "FFFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the board left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L1 to light the board left lamp 9B in white.

FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and output to the electric tuning lamp 9H. Various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as the "RGB" data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A1 to smoothly light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in rainbow colors corresponding to winning determination.

[Accessory movement red flashing luminance data table]
FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow haze brightness data table]
FIG. 242 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 242, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at intervals of 180 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow and hazy manner.

[Blinking white (flash white) luminance data table]
FIG. 243 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 243, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30 msecs is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msecs is "000" (lights out). That is, the frame lamp alternately turns off and on over one period of 210 msec (30 msec×7), thereby blinking the frame lamp in white (white flash) a plurality of times. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 244 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 244, in the parent table of the common red cut-in brightness data table, the time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child lamp control time for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec. Information specifying the table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the child table of the common red cut-in luminance data table, the grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) referenced in a predetermined time period for each game effect lamp 9 , L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) are specified.

246 to 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are displayed for only the R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating luminance is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified only for the R data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W5e, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various brightnesses for only the R data is designated alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec intervals. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the role-product lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the role-product lamp 9A. there is In the grandchild table Y5d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the role lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the character lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the panel left lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as data of "WWWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. there is In the grandchild table L5d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are specified as data of "WWWW" to be output to the board left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "WWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e) to light or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

251 and 252 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, in the attacker lamp grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and as the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data are specified that indicate different intensities at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. and 40 msec alternately specify data indicating various luminances. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 253 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 253, in the parent table of the common green cut-in luminance data table, the time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child table for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec. Information specifying the table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 254, in the child table of the common green cut-in luminance data table, the grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e) and Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) referenced in a predetermined time period for each game effect lamp 9 are , L6 (L6a to L6e) and A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

255 to 257 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 255 to 257, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are generated at intervals of 30 msec for only the G data. Data indicating luminance is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified only for the G data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W6e, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data representing various brightnesses are specified for only the G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec intervals. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamp in green.

FIG. 258 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the role-product lamps, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are specified as data of "RRRR" to be output to the role-product lamp 9A. there is In the grandchild table Y6d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are specified as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to light or blink the character lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 259, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the panel left lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are specified as the data of "WWWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. there is In the grandchild table L6d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are designated as data of "WWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "WWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins.

260 and 261 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 260 and 261, in the attacker lamp grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and as the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data are specified that indicate different intensities at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. and 40 msec alternately specify data indicating various luminances. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A6 (A6a to A6e) to light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in. or blink.

[Incline brightness data table without operation prompt]
FIG. 262 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the tilt luminance data table without operation prompt. As shown in FIG. 262, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W8.

[Incline luminance data table with operation prompt]
FIG. 263 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 263, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter luminance data table]
FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the shutter luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 264, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is set to decrease stepwise from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light the frame lamp in red while decreasing the luminance stepwise.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12.

[Bad brightness data table]
265 and 266 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the missing luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 265, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 266, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec and "111" is specified for the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , “111” is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per remedy]
267 and 268 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 267, in the grandchild table W16, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec, and each lamp is specified in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 268, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white data such as "AAA" and "DDD" are displayed for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit Confirmed Brightness Data Table]
FIG. 269 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 269, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is specified repeatedly. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in seven colors by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Re-lottery effect luminance data table]
270 and 271 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 270, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 60 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red. Thus, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background luminance data table]
272 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table; FIG. As shown in FIG. 272, in the child table of the background luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 ( L21a, L21b) and A21 (A21a, A21b)) are specified.

FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<Referring to luminance data>
Although the brightness data table has been described above, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be described below while arranging it for each effect content.

281 to 284 are diagrams for explaining reference to the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 281, during the times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for character object actions in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 18 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the success/failure branching shown in FIG. The frame lamp flashes in seven colors in response to the effect of falling.

During times ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby raising the character as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white corresponding to the rise of the role object, corresponding to the effect that the display that seems to have caught appears.

During the times ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to effects such as catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. A frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to winning confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 282, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for designing in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. 154(A1) to 155(A4), the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning symbol as shown in FIGS. Flash the lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the design.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for designing in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 so as to correspond to the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 283, during the time tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the start of movement of the symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for extinguishing is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is turned off once before the pattern starts to move by the production.

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table W19 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, thereby supporting the effect that the symbol "2" is reduced as shown in FIGS. 156(A9) and 157(A10). so that the frame lamp flashes in red.

During the time tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of the symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and the ramp control based on the grandchild table W20 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W20, thereby responding to effects such as those shown in FIGS. to make the frame lamp flash rapidly in red.

As shown in FIG. 284, during the time tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for designing in the re-lottery part is used, and the ramp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is blinked in white in correspondence with the effect of displaying the pattern such that the pattern of "2" is displayed in an enlarged manner.

During the time tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for designing in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and after the symbol "2" as shown in FIGS. In response to such a production, the frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and the grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 173 (D1) or FIG. Turn off the frame lamp.

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamps in a fanfare manner is specified. 173 (D2) or 177 (E2), the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that the frame lamp is displayed in correspondence with the fanfare effect. It is lit in a fanfare lighting mode.

Thus, at each timing of each production part, a predetermined child table is set, and the production control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each production part, Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a designated grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In FIGS. 281 to 284, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part in the case where the symbol is not promoted is illustrated, but other routes, for example, the symbol is changed from the winning epilogue. As shown in FIGS. 205 to 273, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each production part for the child table from the re-lottery part to the fanfare part in the case of promotion. there is

<Description of Characteristic Portions in Ramp Control of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the features and modifications of the ramp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 206, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open. I can tell you. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach The frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(start 11, start 14)
As shown in FIG. 206, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamps are lit in yellow, blinking red, blinking white, and lighting red. While the brightness data is switched so that it lights up/blinks while changing the color and brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state. Luminance data is maintained to light. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the ensuing part to the player.

(Inciting 7, Inciting 9)
Figure 77 (b8), (b9), Figure 87 (e7), Figure 107 (i32), Figure 108 (i34), Figure 117 (n10), Figure 136 (r25), (r27), Figure 137 (r29), As shown in FIGS. 138 (r31), (r33), and 139 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. / Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

(Provocation 10)
When a character appears, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, as shown in FIG. 76(b4), Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen and Baku-chuu on the right side of the screen face each other. Light the left lamp and light the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

(Provocation 17)
The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is possible to use the common grandchild table W3 for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Provocation 18)
The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Provocation 19)
In any of the child table WD9 used in the backing part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the backing part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the backing part of the SP final reach, a plurality of mutually different In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing another grandchild table for each timing, SP reach is achieved while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in a plurality of reach performances. It is possible to change the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of . In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table is similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

(Provocation 20)
Child table WD2 used in the first half of SP Reach A boost part, Child table WD5 used in SP first half Reach B boost part, Child table WD9 used in SP second half Reach A boost part, SP second half Reach B boost part In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the inflection part of the SP final reach, the common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect and the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the frame lamp in the same place as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in and impairing the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Yes or No 13)
In the SP ready-to-win performance in which no operation prompting to prompt the player's operation is performed in the success/fail branch, the effect is given to the player as if the performance had stopped by keeping the sound muted and the frame lamps lit in white. It is possible to show the result, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

(Yes or No 15)
In the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, there is no operation prompt, and after the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

(Right or wrong 17)
In the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 144 (r49) to FIG. is switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, red flashing, etc., and it is possible to liven up the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the winning/failing branch (decision timing).

(Yes or No 20)
In the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, similarly to the SP final reach child table WD17, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is common among different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. Thus, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

(Yes or No 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 lastly specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the grandchild first specified in the child table WD18 used for each remedy By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the table W16, the frame lamp lights in the same color (yellow) and brighter. As a result, at the time of the relief hit, the frame lamp lights in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can be used to notify the loss and It is possible to show the subsequent relief hit information in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the character object rises, the effect control CPU 120 gradually raises the character object lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character object on the character object lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the character lamp 9A is lowered stepwise so as to turn off the lamp immediately. As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp shows that the player has reached the second half reach A of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying a winning pattern, rainbow color While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting with , each performance can be livened up by a performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, a grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13 and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as ramp control when the symbols are finally determined after the re-lottery. is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

(Re-lottery production 2)
As shown in FIG. 155 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, before executing the re-lottery effect, the frame lamp is once turned off. Since the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance after being extinguished, the start of the re-lottery performance can be easily conveyed to the player by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is swaying, the re-lottery effect is performed. (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp flashes in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

(Re-lottery production 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for ramp control when the symbols are finally determined after the re-lottery. be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

(Re-lottery production 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery. However, when the symbol "2" is promoted to the symbol "3" by a re-lottery, the lighting of the rainbow color at the time tB7 to tB9 is temporarily suspended in the symbol "2" in the winning epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Detailed description of lamp control>
Next, with regard to the lamp control described above, the characteristic portions that should be mentioned in particular will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 274 to 276. FIG.

[Comparison of lamp control between winning and losing]
FIGS. 274 to 276 are diagrams for explaining the comparison of lamps at the time of winning and at the time of losing.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, ramp control at the time of failure will be described. As shown in FIG. 274, the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 at the end of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, thereby lighting the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect of the success/failure branch (decision timing). Also, at the end of the fanning part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. By doing so, the frame lamp is flashed in red in correspondence with the performance of the success/failure branch (decision timing).

After that, in the losing epilogue part via the inflection part in each of SP first half reach A, B, SP second half reach A, B, and SP final reach, first, ramp control is performed based on grandchild table W13. . In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the winning/failing branch, illuminates the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect that the teammate character is defeated in the ready-to-win effect.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W13, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp is lit in a darker white color than the white light based on the grandchild table W13, corresponding to the effect that the ally characters are disappointed. Let

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) specifies “111”. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to the effect that the screen is darkened when a failure is reported.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as described with reference to FIG. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in . In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern corresponding to the normal background is designated as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern), similarly to the start part before reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B respectively.

As shown in FIG. 275, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 at the end of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, thereby lighting the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect of the success/failure branch (decision timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, first, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to make the frame lamp blink in white in correspondence with the effect that the teammate character wins.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. In the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "AAA" is specified for each lamp in turn at intervals of 20 msec, and finally for each lamp at 600000 msec (10 minutes). "000" is specified. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the performance of giving a winning pattern, and lights the frame lamp in bright white corresponding to the appearance of the pattern.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on a grandchild table W1 to smoothly light a frame lamp in rainbow colors in correspondence with performance such that a winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 276, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the backing part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 276, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 at the end of the fanning part in the SP final reach. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to make the frame lamp blink in red in correspondence with the effect of the win/fail branch (decision timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, first, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and " 333” is specified, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to make the frame lamp blink in seven colors in correspondence with the effect that the accessory falls.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the performance of giving a winning pattern, and lights the frame lamp in bright white corresponding to the appearance of the pattern.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on a grandchild table W1 to smoothly light a frame lamp in rainbow colors in correspondence with performance such that a winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 276, characteristic parts will be described below.

(Yes or No 19)
As shown in FIG. 274, in the case of moving to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP latter half reach A, B, the final luminance data (RGB data) in the fanning part is In contrast to "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the missing epilogue part are "888" and "444". As a result, when losing in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, it is possible to light the frame lamp in white more darkly while maintaining the same color using white lighting in the success/fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has been lost. Also, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanning part contains "D00", whereas the first brightness in the missing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is lost, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is darker than the red blinking in the success/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably notified of the loss.

(Accessory action 1)
As shown in FIGS. 275 and 276, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 274, at the time of losing, the frame lamp is dimly lit in white based on the grandchild table W14, and its RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than at the time of winning. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the win is achieved. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamp. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Accessory action 2)
As shown in FIG. 276, in the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the rainbow chromatic color and achromatic color (" 333” RGB data) are alternately lit. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and to congratulate the player. After that, in the effect that the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without achromatic colors to indicate that a big hit has been achieved. It is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

(Regarding the shaking pattern of the design)
Here, with reference to FIG. 277, a detailed description will be given of how the pattern swings. FIG. 277 is a diagram for explaining how the pattern swings. During the pattern fluctuation period in the fanning part and the re-lottery part described above, the decorative patterns move like the first to third modes shown in FIG. It moves like 3 modes. Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 277(a) is a mode in which the decoration pattern is positioned at the center position of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 277(a) is a mode in which the decorative design is positioned above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 277(a) is a mode in which the decoration design is located on the lower side than the first mode.

The first mode shown in FIG. 277(b) is a mode in which the decoration pattern is positioned at the center position of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 277(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is positioned more leftward than in the first mode by rotating rightward about the center of the decorative pattern as the vertical axis. The third mode shown in FIG. 277(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is positioned more rightward than in the first mode by rotating left about the center of the decorative pattern as the vertical axis.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 278 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 278(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect with 7 symbols. Also, FIG. 278(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 278(A), after the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (D1) and (D2), the pattern is reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). After that, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (D7), there is a swinging period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, the "7" pattern is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed under the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the lapse of time. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), "7" fluctuates at high speed, and the light display and sharp display are repeated. After (D20), the same high-speed fluctuation is repeated.

As shown in FIG. 278(B), as shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect, the pattern feeding period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbols fluctuate at high speed by button operation is executed is the same in any re-lottery effect. be. Here, the re-lottery effect includes a first re-lottery effect that changes from even-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, a second re-lottery effect that does not change from even-numbered patterns to even-numbered patterns, and a third re-lottery effect that does not change from 7 patterns to 7 patterns. There is a production. For example, in the first re-lottery effect, when the symbol feed effect is started immediately after the button can be operated, there is a period (t1) during which the decorative pattern sways after the symbol feed period ends, and then the pattern is determined. do.

In addition, in the second re-lottery effect, when the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the pattern feed effect is started, there is a swing period (t1-t2) of the decorative pattern after the pattern feed period ends, The pattern is then finalized. In addition, in the third re-lottery performance, when the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the pattern feed performance is started, there is no fluctuation period of the decorative pattern after the pattern feed period ends, and the pattern is fixed as it is. . In this way, no matter what timing the button is operated, the pattern feeding period is constant, and the period from the pattern shaking period to the finalization of the pattern absorbs the time until the button operation. . Such a relationship is the same when the button operation is executed in any of the first re-lottery effect to the third re-lottery effect.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 26-28]
Characteristic parts in the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 279 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) in FIG. 279, even if the button is operated at any timing of the success/failure determination scene, the decoration pattern moves in the same manner after the whiteout. Specifically, as shown in (K1), when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed, the character movement and hit epilogue part are executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) is executed. Designing is done. After that, after 5 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K5), the three patterns are facing the front.

In addition, as shown in (K2), when the button is operated one second after the promotion display is displayed in the win/fail decision scene, the character movement and winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern is drawn in the epilogue part. After that, after 4 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K6), the three patterns are turned leftward from the front. In addition, as shown in (K3), when the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the win/fail decision scene, the character movement and winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern is drawn in the epilogue part. After that, after 3 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K7), the three patterns are turned to the right side from the front.

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, after the symbol shaking period, the symbol is at the leftward position, and at the third operation timing, After the swinging period of the pattern, the pattern may be positioned to face the right side. However, even if the direction of the pattern changes during the swing period of the pattern depending on the operation timing, after that, as a common effect, as shown in (K8) to (K17), the pattern is rotated and reduced after the whiteout. A lottery production is executed. Then, after (K17), the symbol feed effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 279, the description is made using odd-numbered symbols, but even-numbered symbols are also executed in the same manner.

(Re-lottery production 26)
As shown in FIG. 279, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the re-lottery effect is executed regardless of the timing of the operation. In the time until a predetermined timing is reached, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

(Re-lottery production 27)
From the whiteout screen until the re-lottery effect is executed, any reach may be common. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the effect data.

(Re-lottery production 28)
The movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbol before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that sways on the spot on the front side and the back side on the axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a motion of rotating clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while enlarging it. According to this, by displaying the whiteout between the extended movements of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the movement of the pattern from being uncomfortable, and the series of performances can be shown favorably. be able to.

(Re-lottery production 29)
Among the plurality of SP reach, there are those that are not notified of operation promotion such as button operation in the branch at the time of determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state. With such SP reach, there is no scale deviation associated with the operation. However, even in such an SP ready-to-win game, a re-lottery effect similar to that for an SP ready-to-win game in which scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, even if there is only one re-lottery effect, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused by the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery production 30)
As shown in FIG. 279, the timing is set such that the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) via the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). is designed to be In other words, when the swing of the pattern is one of a series of actions in which the pattern rotates clockwise, a white-out is executed by a re-lottery effect, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotated clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from giving a sense of incongruity by a series of movements of the symbols rotating to the right from the period of the fluctuation of the symbols to the re-lottery effect.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 21-25]
Characteristic parts in the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 280 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram in which the operation is performed at an early timing after the display of the action prompt is displayed during the symbol feeding period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a timing later than (L1) after the action prompting display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L2) after the action prompting display is displayed. Then, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 280, during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery effect, the symbols are drawn in the same way regardless of the timing of the button operation. After that, the white-out is sandwiched between the decorative patterns, and after the same movement is stopped. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the action prompting display is displayed, the pattern output is executed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern is displayed. is the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to sway, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols are in a state in which the three symbols are oriented more to the right than the front, as shown in (L7).

Further, as shown in (L2), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L1) after the action prompting display is displayed, the patterns shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols begin to sway, and after the lapse of a shorter symbol sway period than in (L1), the three symbols are in a state in which the 3 symbols are directed more to the right than the front as shown in (L8). Become. Further, as shown in (L3), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L2) after the action prompting display is displayed, the patterns shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the swinging of the pattern is started, and after the lapse of a shorter pattern swinging period than in (L2), the three patterns as shown in (L9) face the front.

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces rightward after the symbol shaking period, and at the second operation timing, the symbol faces leftward after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing. In this case, the pattern may be positioned facing the front after the swinging period of the pattern. However, even if the direction of the pattern changes during the swinging period of the pattern depending on the operation timing, as shown in (J1) to (J10), the pattern is rotated and reduced after the whiteout as a common effect. is executed. After that, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbols stop after a period of fluctuation of the symbols. In addition, in FIG. 280, the odd-numbered symbols are used for the explanation, but the even-numbered symbols are also given the same effect.

(Re-lottery production 21)
In the modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 280, an action prompting display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

(Re-lottery production 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, after notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, a display with a swinging decorative pattern is displayed (example of no operation in FIG. 280 (L3) ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation effective period, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 280 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid period of operation, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 280 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the fluctuation time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be neatly stopped, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

(Re-lottery production 23)
As shown in FIG. 280, as a common effect, after white-out is executed, a different effect from the previous patterns is executed in which the swinging decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged. According to this, regardless of the position of the pattern in the shaking of the pattern of the scale absorption, by executing a different mode of production after the whiteout is interposed, the flow of the production until the pattern is stopped. It can be made not to give a sense of incongruity.

(Re-lottery production 24)
As shown in FIG. 280, during the swinging period of the pattern, after the pattern swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), the pattern swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14) to return to the initial position. Change. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the pattern is fixed, the pattern is designed to always be positioned at the initial position in which the pattern faces the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Re-lottery production 25)
It is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow colors at the white-out timing of (J1) in FIG. 280 . The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the location where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start opportunity instead of the timing (J1).

<Main configuration and effects>
Technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(F2019-116)
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body (for example, a character, a movable body 32);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect to notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect includes an introduction part (for example, a fanning part) until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a success/failure notification part (for example, a winning epilogue part) in which the success or failure is notified. a winning/failure notification part that notifies a big hit by moving the role object), and an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state after the winning/failure notification. consists of
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the first character whose dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 128 (r2)),
The display means preferentially displays the introductory display of the prompting display that prompts a specific action to the effect display in the introductory part at the timing of transition from the introductory part to the win/fail notification part, thereby making the effect display difficult to see. state, and then perform a promotion display in a state where the effect display is visible (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 144 (r49) to 145 (r54)),
In the success/failure notification part of the notification effect, which is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body moves from a first position (for example, a retracted position) to a second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (e.g., advance position) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 146);
The display means is
displaying an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, ending the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position; Display corresponding to the epilogue part (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 186 and 187),
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed for the final dialogue sound emitted by the character. Examples shown in FIGS. 147 to 149),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the characters is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the characters in the introductory part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 188). .

Specifically, in each SP reach as a fanning part, the first character to say a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 128 (r2)). According to this, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the teammate character at the start of the SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the fanning part to the success/failure notification part, the introduction image of the trigger display prompting the trigger operation is preferentially displayed with respect to the display of the fanning part, so that the fanning part's effect display becomes invisible after that. The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the fanning part can be visually recognized (for example, FIG. 144 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introductory image gives an impact, and the introductory image becomes the image of the trigger button, so that the effect of the fanning part can be confirmed, so that the player can be excited. In addition, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled in the production flow of the background display of the hit epilogue part until the evacuation of the character is completed. In addition, since the pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner after the display of the final dialogue caption in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message for the pattern. In addition, the above-mentioned agitation part for inciting the right or wrong has a production that is updated by the development in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternately fight (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part. Also, since the epilogue part, which develops slowly, is properly subtitled, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying and to emphasize the feeling of blessing. In addition, it is possible to convey the content of the fast moving part by changing the video first, and to prevent the development of the video from being disturbed by the auxiliary caption display. As a result, a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach, which is the inciting part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
Using the first pattern displayed in the epilogue part, the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern fixing period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown.

(F2019-120)
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a light emitting means (for example, a frame lamp, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data (for example, controls a frame lamp or the like using the luminance data table),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect of notifying whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a normal jackpot game state without promotion) and a second advantageous state (for example, a certain variable jackpot game state with promotion) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect is determined to be an introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and to be controlled to the advantageous state after the propriety notification. An epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed when the
The re-lottery part consists of the first half part (Figs. 155 (A6) to 169 (A46)) and the second half part (for example, Figs. 170 (B1) to 171 (B6) or Figs. 174 (C1) to 174 (C6)). and
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after the first pattern (for example, two patterns) is displayed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first pattern is displayed in another A first re-lottery effect (for example, FIG. 155 (A6) to FIG. 169 (A46), FIG. 170 (B1 ) to FIG. 171 (B6)) can be executed,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol (for example, two symbols) is displayed in the second half. is displayed again (for example, FIGS. 155 (A6) to 169 (A46), FIGS. 174 (C1) to 174 (C6)) can be executed,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after the second pattern (for example, 7 patterns) is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the second pattern is displayed. A third re-lottery effect (for example, FIGS. 155 (A6) to 169 (A46) and FIGS. 278 (D6) to (D20)) in which repeated display is performed and the second pattern is displayed again in the second half part. is executable and
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect and the third re-lottery effect are configured to have the same effect scale (for example, the effect scale is the same as shown in FIG. 278(B)),
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode (for example, the frame lamp is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting shown in FIG. 155 (A5). etc.),
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. The light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect (for example, switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 157 (A6), the re-lottery effect Control the frame lamp etc. using the luminance data table for lottery production),
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. (For example, from FIG. 171 (B5) onwards, from FIG. 175 (C5) onwards, the frame lamps, etc. control), and the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is continuously used to control the light emission means (for example, from FIG. 172 (B8) onwards, from FIG. 176 (C8) onwards. In addition, the frame lamp etc. are controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting),
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. (For example, after FIG. 173 (D1) and after FIG. 177 (E1), the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow lighting is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the lighting corresponding to the fanfare, and the lighting corresponding to the fanfare is switched. frame lamps and the like are controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to ).

Specifically, a pattern in which even-numbered symbols (for example, 2 symbols) are displayed after displaying even-numbered symbols (for example, 2 symbols), and a pattern in which even-numbered symbols (for example, 2 symbols) are displayed and then odd-numbered symbols (for example, 3 symbols) are displayed. was provided. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered pattern (for example, 7 patterns) is displayed after displaying an odd numbered pattern (for example, 7 patterns). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent when the patterns are sent. However, regardless of the pattern, the scale of the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery effect may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
displaying the first pattern with the same or substantially the same animation when the first pattern is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part of the second re-lottery effect;
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, the pattern output in the portions of FIGS. 154(A1) to 155(A5) and the pattern output in the portions of FIGS. 174(C1) to 175(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. be done. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same.

(F2019-122)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
By changing the display mode of the first pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part to the time when the pattern is fixed, the first pattern is displayed. Perform a shaking display that displays the first pattern as if it is shaking,
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the display of the second symbol in the second half part to the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is displayed. Perform a shaking display that displays the second pattern as if the two patterns were shaking,
The first mode is a mode in which the player can more easily see the pattern than either the second mode or the third mode,
The production executing means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute an action prompting display that prompts the player to act,
When an action is performed at a first timing while the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, when a predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the second mode;
When an action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the third mode when the predetermined timing is reached;
When the action prompting display is executed in the first re-lottery effect, whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the second pattern is started from the predetermined timing. Display to make it difficult to see is performed, and then the second pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second pattern is maintained while the second pattern is displayed. 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, if the action is performed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first pattern so that the first pattern is in the second mode when the first pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, if the action is performed at the second timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first pattern so that the first pattern is in the third mode when the first pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, the shaking display of the first pattern is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first pattern is maintained while the first pattern is displayed. 1 pattern is stopped and displayed in the first mode,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 280, an action prompting display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

(F2019-126)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the luminance data using the luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. configured to

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183, there are scenes in which the character utters lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the presentation. As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be suitably shown to the player. 77 (b8), (b9), FIG. 87 (e7), FIG. 107 (i32), FIG. 108 (i34), FIG. 117 (n10), FIG. 136 (r25), (r27), FIG. 137 (r29 ), FIG. 138 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 139 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

(F2019-127)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position. End the display, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, so that the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene.

Specifically, the effect may be switched from the effect at the start of the ready-to-win game to the effect in the first half of the SP ready-to-win game by the movement of the accessory. Also, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion may be displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object to the screen corresponding to the first half reach of the SP while the character object is rising. Further, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the role product action part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the role product is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP halfway through the rise of the character, it is possible to preferably display the rousing part of the first half of the SP.

(F2019-128)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The display means is
In the introductory part, a promotional display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output, and dialogue subtitles are displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotional display in the introductory part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The luminance data table includes a cut-in display luminance data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introductory part luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
The light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same locations as the light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the introductory part luminance data table.

Specifically, the cut-in effect and the brightness data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) are the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with station frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in and impairing the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-129)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In the period before transitioning from the introduction part in the first notification effect to the success/failure notification part,
The display means performs a prompt display prompting the player to perform a specific action,
The sound output means continues sound output,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for a first notification effect,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part in the second notification effect to the success/failure notification part,
The display means does not perform the promotion display prompting the specific action, but performs a win-or-fail display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect luminance data table,
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the brightness data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production, in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the win-or-fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the production seems to have stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

(F2019-130)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, the first moving image data is used,
In the second scene, the second moving image data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first moving image data is moving image data in which movement of a specific character is represented by a plurality of specific character images,
The second moving image data is moving image data in which the movement of the specific character is represented by one specific character image and effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of whether (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

(F2019-131)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going into the closed mode after the closing action, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening action after going into the closed mode,
The masking display can be executed at a timing related to the introductory part,
When the shielding display performs a closing action, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs the opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the fanning part starts. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect that is executed in the back invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the character. may

(F2019-132)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operation sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialog sound and the physical sound are output at the timing at which they overlap, the dialog sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are superimposed, the dialogue sound is output loudly so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

(F2019-133)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is once displayed, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first pattern is swaying. It displays the first pattern,
When shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, and when the first pattern is in the second mode There is a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when it is displayed, and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The effect executing means, at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. The first pattern is visually recognized both when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode. Performing a specific display to be difficult, displaying the first pattern in a common display mode, and executing the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern fixing period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 279, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, During the time up to the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

(F2020-005)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines in the fanning part. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

(F2020-006)
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (for example, frame lamps, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data (for example, controls a frame lamp or the like using the luminance data table),
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect to notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed includes an introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. A first epilogue part (for example, a hit epilogue part) that is notified to that effect,
The notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state includes an introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not the control is performed to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not performed to the advantageous state. A second epilogue part (for example, a lost epilogue part) to be notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control will not be in the advantageous state (for example, the disappointing display in FIG. 203 (X30)),
After that, a switching display is performed (for example, an eye-catching display in FIG. 203 (X33)),
After that, background display is performed (for example, the normal background display of Fig. 203 (X34) (X35)),
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (X35), the design is confirmed and stopped by receiving the design confirmation command),
After that, with the variation command as a trigger, the variable display of the symbols is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (X36), the symbols are confirmed and stopped by receiving the symbol confirmation command),
The plurality of light emitting means includes light emitting means for effect and light emitting means for the fourth symbol (for example, frame lamps, LEDs of the fourth symbol unit),
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the effect light emitting means (for example, in the missing epilogue part, the brightness data table at the time of failure is used to control the frame lamp, etc. do),
When the switching display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display, and the lighting means for effect is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display (for example, when the eye-catching display is performed). When it is done, the frame lamp etc. are controlled using the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching)),
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the lighting means for effect is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display (for example, when the background is normally displayed, is performed, the luminance data table for the background is used to control frame lamps, etc.),
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for the fourth symbol change to the brightness data table for the fourth symbol stop, and the brightness data table for the fourth symbol stop is used. The fourth symbol light emitting means is controlled (for example, when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for fourth symbol variation to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, and the brightness data table for the fourth symbol is switched. Control the light emission of the LED of the 4th symbol using the brightness data table for 4 symbol stop),
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the effect light emitting means (for example, when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the background luminance data continue to use the table to control frame lamps, etc.),
When the symbol variation display is started, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth symbol variation, and the fourth symbol light emission means is controlled using the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation. (For example, when the pattern variation display is started, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth pattern variation, and the brightness data table for the fourth pattern is used to cause the LED of the fourth pattern to emit light. Control),
When the variable display of patterns is started, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for effect (for example, when the variable display of patterns is started, the background light is continue to use the luminance data table to control frame lamps, etc.).

Specifically, the characterizing portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The production screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the production of winning or losing. After that, after the blackout display in which the result of the display of failure is displayed, the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished by the reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by the reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from extinguishing to blinking upon receipt of the variation pattern command of the next variation, but the brightness data table for the background does not switch even upon receipt of the symbol determination command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

[Start 1]
Up to the win/fail reporting part, the change of scene is reported by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emitting means while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and in the course of the movable body retreating from the second position to the first position, the scene after switching is output. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the movement of the character. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to reach A in the latter half of the SP while the character object is rising. In addition, while the role product is rising, the brightness data table of the role product action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 215 to be described later) is changed to the brightness data table of SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 217 and 218 to be described later). ) is switched to the luminance data table. Also, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the rousing part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before moving the movable body, a reduced pattern is displayed at a specific display position,
By moving the movable body, the movable body covers a specific display position,
In accordance with the movement of the movable body, an effect display corresponding to the movement of the movable body is performed in a layer that has priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern,
After the movable body starts to retreat and is no longer positioned at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to the display corresponding to the performance after switching the state in which the reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the movement of the character. Also, before the action of the role object, the "2" pattern is reduced and displayed at the left and right lower corners of the screen. When the role object moves, the role object falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the role object is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern "2" was displayed. do. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the action of dropping the character is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol displayed in reduced size. Then, after the role object rises from the falling position and the “2” pattern does not overlap with the role object, the effect image gradually fades, and the background and “2” pattern corresponding to the second half of the SP reach A displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being not aesthetically pleasing due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Also, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of the movement of the character, it is possible to suitably switch the effects according to the movement of the character.

[Start 3]
The effect display is performed before the movable body moves and reaches the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184, the role object moves and an effect image is displayed before reaching the lowest position of the drop. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to make a suitable changeover of the presentation including the character.

[Start 4]
When switching from the effect display to the display of the developed presentation, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the character may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the effect that develops in the second half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 185, when the characters are raised, the characters "POWERFUL II" and the images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed. may be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance with the use of the character by providing the interlocking property when the performance is switched.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going into the closed mode after the closing action, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening action after going into the closed mode,
Occluded display can be performed at timings related to the introductory part,
When the shielding display performs the closing action, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs the opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the fanning part starts. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect that is executed in the back invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the character. may

[Start 6]
An image corresponding to the shielding display has a shape in which a door closes from both ends of the screen at the center of the screen, or a shape in which a door closes from one end to the other end of the screen.

Specifically, the shutter described above is in a form in which it closes from the upper and lower ends of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to preferably show an effect in which the screen luminance gradually changes. Also, the shutters may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a fusuma (sliding door). Also, the shutter may be closed from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the effect display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, just before the shutter closes completely as shown in FIG. 71(a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of incongruity can be eliminated. . When the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 73(a16), the sense of discomfort can be similarly eliminated.

[Start 8]
After the shielding display performs the opening operation after the closing operation, the display corresponding to the introduction part is performed,
The display corresponding to the introductory part is performed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introductory part gradually increases. , the display corresponding to the introductory part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introductory part begins to progress after the operation of releasing the shield display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 described above, the SP first half reach is started after the shutter is opened. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the SP first half reach is not started and the screen brightness is gradually increased, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect proceeds. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to execution of the effect before the shutter is opened because the effect of the SP first half reach is the effect that the player wants to pay attention to.

[Start 9]
extinguishing the light emitting means when the operation for releasing the shielding display is completed;
After the release operation of the shielding display is finished and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emitting means starts to emit light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach Frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing action of the shielding display is started, and the closing action ends at the timing when the effect display completely turns dark.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a9) described above, before the shutter starts to close, the brightness of the screen decreases first, and the shutter closes completely at the timing when the shutter closes completely. It's becoming Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered in conjunction with the shutter closing timing, the speed of the screen darkening may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the speed of screen darkening can be made appropriate, and a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

[Start 11]
If the effect display becomes invisible due to the occlusion display,
The brightness data has a scenario configuration in which the brightness is switched until the occlusion display is performed.
Scenario configuration in which the brightness data is maintained from the time when the performance display is invisible due to the closed display to the timing related to the visual recognition of the performance display due to the open display. It has become.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red. In addition, the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and luminance. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up red while maintaining. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the ensuing part to the player.

[Start 12]
The effect display includes a display before the start of the introductory part and a display during the introductory part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being performed in the start part, the shielding display performs the closing action, and then the shielding display performs the release action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are a plurality of types of introductory parts, and it is not possible to recognize which introductory part is to be executed until the operation of releasing the hidden display is completed.

Specifically, until the shutter is opened, the player does not know which SP first half reach is to be started. According to this, it is possible to have expectations about which production will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may be performed at timings other than the timing of shifting to the introductory part.

Specifically, the effect by the shutter described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, it may be the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-run. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in active pending, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may be changed (for example, from blue to green). In addition, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation by the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielded display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed after the closing operation of the shielded display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielded display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red. In addition, the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and luminance. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up red while maintaining. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the ensuing part to the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the luminance data is maintained is the period until the release operation is performed as it is after the occlusion indication is in the closed mode, or until the occupancy indication is in the closed mode and the prompting display for prompting the player's action is performed. is the period of

Specifically, in addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter is closed and automatically opened, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed and the shutter is opened by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of kinds of effects by the shutter are provided, the attraction of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the occluding display becomes the closed mode and the prompt display is performed, the brightness data that is maintained is switched to the changing brightness data, and after the prompt display is performed, the brightness data is switched again to the brightness data that is maintained.

Specifically, in the effects using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing a button, the infrared sensor A promotional display prompting the user to perform a motion such as holding a hand over the player may be performed, and when the player's motion corresponding to the promotional display is detected, an effect such as opening the shutter may be performed. While the shutter display is in the closed state, lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained, while the shutter display is closed. At the timing when the promotional display is performed in the mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to a luminance data table in which the lighting mode changes, lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table, and then after the promotional display is performed ( In the state where the promotion display continues), lamp control may be performed again based on the luminance data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. and may be different. According to this, while the shutter display is in the closed state, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. can be made easier to draw attention to.

[Start 17]
The prompting display is a display including a button image and a prompting character for prompting the action of the player,
A sound corresponding to the promotion character is output when the promotion character is displayed, and brightness data is incorporated in which the brightness data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in the effect using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, after the shutter is displayed in the closed state, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing a button, the infrared sensor A promotion display prompting the user to perform a motion such as holding a hand over the player may be performed, and when the player's motion corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening the shutter may be performed. In the promotion display, a voice prompting the player to act (for example, the voice of "press") is output, and characters prompting the player to act (for example, the letters "press") are displayed. good. Further, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, frame lamp) in response to a voice prompting the player to act. In this way, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in accordance with the voice prompting the action of the player, the motion of the player is determined by the voice prompting the action of the player and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be emphasized, and the player can be made to more effectively perform an action corresponding to the prompting display.

[Provocation 1]
The introductory part is
The part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state is notified,
Including a scene in which the display is updated as the ally character and the enemy character fight, and a scene in which the ally character takes damage,
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display changes is more than the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned agitation part that incites the right or wrong has a production that is updated in a development in which friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight (for example, reach B in the first half of SP and reach B in the second half of SP). . In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a stimulating part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Provocation 2]
In the introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(b5) and the like described above, in the fanning part, the lines of the ally character are generated first, and the subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in the teasing part.

[Provocation 3]
In the introductory part, the display length of the first dialogue subtitles is set longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the teammate character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the teasing part. According to this, the ally character can be recognized firmly.

[Provocation 4]
There is a scene in which the dialogue sound of the friendly character is output, but the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(b17) and the like described above, there is a scene in which subtitles are not displayed when a teammate character utters a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the caption display of the teammate character that is displayed first, and to show the screen display more preferably than adding the caption display to all the lines.

[Provocation 5]
It may be expanded from the first introductory part to the second introductory part,
Allied characters are active in both the first introduction part and the second introduction part,
In the first introductory part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed,
In the second introductory part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the agitation part described above, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as a first agitation part executed in the first half timing, and SP as a second agitation part executed in the second half timing There was a second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach. In addition, there is a scene in which the ally character plays an active role in both the first and second teasing parts. Also, in any of the teasing parts, the line of the friendly character was generated first, and the caption corresponding to the line was displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts.

[Provocation 6]
The first character is active in the first introduction part,
The second character is active in the second introduction part,
In the first introductory part, first the dialogue sound of the first character is output, the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed,
In the second introductory part, the dialogue sound of the second character is first output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the agitation part mentioned above, in the agitation part corresponding to Reach B in the first half of the SP, Yume-chan's character is active, and in the agitation part corresponding to Reach B in the latter half of the SP, Jam-chan and Nana-chan There was a scene where the character of was active. Then, in Reach B in the first half of the SP, a line was generated by Yume-chan, the ally character who played an active part first, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. In addition, in reach B in the second half of the SP, dialogues by Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are the friendly characters who are active first, were generated, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the friendly character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts. In addition, the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Also, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half of the excitement part.

[Provocation 7]
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the luminance data using the luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. configured to

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183, there are scenes in which the character utters lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). ). In such a specific scene, since sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as lines, subtitles are set not to be displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be preferably executed, and the fanning part can be preferably shown to the player. 77 (b8), (b9), FIG. 87 (e7), FIG. 107 (i32), FIG. 108 (i34), FIG. 117 (n10), FIG. 136 (r25), (r27), FIG. 137 (r29 ), FIG. 138 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 139 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the effect in the slamming part. can.

[Provocation 8]
In a character appearance scene, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, and r34), colors corresponding to the corresponding characters in previous scenes are displayed. Control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the color. Specifically, before the scene (r24), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r26), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the character of Maid A. scenario. Also, before the scene (r28), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in blue (r27) or white (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r30), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in pink corresponding to Nana's character. becomes a scenario that lights up. Also, before the scene (r32), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. scenario. Also, before the scene of (r34), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple of (r33) or white of (r33'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. becomes. In this way, before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, after which the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the color corresponding to the character. control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of lamps that the displayed character changes and that the player can easily understand which character is the character that has changed, and it is possible to make a suitable fanning part.

[Provocation 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character positioned on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character positioned on the other side of the screen.

77 (b8), (b9), FIG. 87 (e7), FIG. 107 (i32), FIG. 108 (i34), FIG. 117 (n10), FIG. 136 (r25), (r27), FIG. 137 (r29), Figs. 138 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 139 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the color corresponding to the character is Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the effect in the slamming part. can.

[Provocation 10]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The introductory part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output;
The light emission control means is
In the first scene, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene, the light emission means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emission means is set to the light emission color corresponding to the first character, and the second light emission means among the plurality of types of light emission means is displayed. When the luminance data of the luminous means on the side where the character is displayed is set to the luminous color corresponding to the second character is switched in accordance with the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of types of luminous means The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is configured not to switch,
In the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene, the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means is set to the light-emitting color corresponding to the first character, and the second light-emitting means among the plurality of types of light-emitting means is displayed. When the luminance data of the light emitting means on the side where the character is displayed is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in accordance with the dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of types of light emitting means The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is not switched, but the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is switched.

Specifically, when a character appears, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to . For example, as shown in FIG. 76(b4), Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen and Baku-chuu on the right side of the screen face each other. Light the left lamp and light the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

[Provocation 11]
In a state where the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene in which dialogue sounds of the first character are output and a scene in which dialogue sounds of the second character are output. , the dialog subtitles are displayed in a fixed font and at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 76(b5) and (b6), there is a scene in which each character speaks a line under a situation in which an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue is displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs getting angry.

[Provocation 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operation sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the timing when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap each other, the dialogue sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting the physical sound as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output loudly, so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

[Provocation 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output according to the production performed in the introductory part.
At the design stage, various sounds are output together with displays corresponding to the presentation performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, a work process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, images for each effect corresponding to variable time such as SP reach are created. In accordance with this video, BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, dialogue sounds, etc. are added one by one using special software. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the image, sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player by throwing away reality. Sound data is set as follows. As a result, a series of presentations can be shown favorably.

[Provocation 14]
When the output of the action sound and the output of the dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the movement sound.

Specifically, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output while being superimposed, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 179(B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be smaller in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation while presenting reality.

[Provocation 15]
In the front view of the screen, when the output of the dialogue sound of the first character with a far sense of distance and the output of the movement sound of the second character with a close sense of distance overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is higher than the volume of the movement sound. The volume is adjusted so that the

Specifically, when the dialog sound of a character whose sense of distance is far from the player overlaps with the physical sound of which the player has a close sense of distance, the sound is adjusted so that the dialog sound is louder than the physical sound. Data is set. As a result, a sound is output that discards reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player.

[Provocation 16]
In the case where the operation sound and dialogue sound output overlap and subtitle display is not performed, and the case where the operation sound and dialogue sound output overlap and subtitle display is performed, the volume of dialogue sound that does not display subtitles The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound for subtitle display is louder than the volume.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 179B and 179C, when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound and when there is no subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound, When subtitles are present, the volume of SP reach BGM is adjusted so that it sounds louder. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more relevant to SP reach content than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[Provocation 17]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In the second scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introductory part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introductory part are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time longer than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby turning on the frame lamps at a plurality of mutually different timings. While lighting the frame lamp in yellow, it is possible to change the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow by changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is possible to use the common grandchild table W3 for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

[Provocation 18]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In the second scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introductory part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introductory part are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a specific time,
The second higher-order table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby turning on the frame lamps at a plurality of mutually different timings. While blinking in white, the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 is changed by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, so that the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to 2 or 3 times. can be done. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

[Provocation 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time longer than the specific time.

Specifically, in any of the child table WD9 used in the backing part of SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the backing part of SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the backing part of SP final reach In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control is reduced in a plurality of ready-to-win performances. In addition, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach. In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table is similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

[Provocation 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Provocation 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is being displayed. becomes,
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines in the fanning part. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

[Provocation 22]
In the scene of agitation where multiple characters face each other,
When the dialogue sound of one character is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and thereafter, when the dialogue sound of the other character is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. is,
The second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and then the first caption is displayed when the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first caption corresponding to the lines of one character is displayed, followed by a second caption corresponding to the lines of another character. subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 70% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first caption fades out, and the second caption fades in, resulting in display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fading effect.

[Provocation 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap and at least one of them has a fade effect, it is not output,
Output when only the secondary subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of “Found” is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap each other, and a fade effect is applied. is not output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialog sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp the contents of the presentation by sight and hearing.

[Provocation 24]
In the advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed,
When the display of the first subtitle in the lyrics display is switched to the display of the second subtitle, the display of none of the subtitles is given a fade effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is representative music of the contents installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the operation of applying the fade effect during the big win round, and the series of performances can be shown well.

[Provocation 25]
In both the introductory part and the epilogue part, the character's dialogue sound may overlap,
The introductory part has a higher ratio of overlapping dialogue sounds than the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the subtitle display timing may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 193, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from caption display to caption display is longer than in the introductory part. This is because the provocation part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part progresses less quickly than the provocation part. As a result, the introductory part is displayed more frequently than the epilogue part at the timing when the subtitle display overlaps. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort when switching the caption.

[Provocation 26]
Even in certain scenes where subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitle is displayed or when the display of the subtitle disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, a fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in a predetermined scene in portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out effects may be added. In subtitle display created after video is created, it takes time and effort to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display is covered or not. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to prevent an increase in work load.

[Provocation 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be interchanged.
Between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, it is conceivable to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed, but if a long dialogue sound or a fast-paced dialogue sound is output, a sense of incongruity will appear. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of caption display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 194(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed continuously. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without adding any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding subtitle display for long lines and subtitle display for fast-progressing lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur if subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incompatibility can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the caption display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 194(B), it is conceivable to superimpose "Found" on the caption display of "Found" and then display "Found". In such a case, the caption display becomes difficult to see without the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 194(C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in upper and lower two stages. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area for the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the subtitle display area. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the caption display as in the present embodiment.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means
In the introductory part, a promotional display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotional display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The luminance data table includes a cut-in display luminance data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introductory part luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
The light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same locations as the light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the introductory part luminance data table.

Specifically, the cut-in effect and the luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) are the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with station frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in, and to prevent the appearance from being spoiled, and to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Inciting cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140 (r39) to FIG. 141 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the caption display is displayed before the prompt display of the button image is displayed. . According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen while paying attention to the subtitle display, the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. can be done.

[Inciting cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sounds are not output, the dialogue sounds are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (r41) to FIG. 143 (r47), there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display ends. Then, after a predetermined period of time without words has passed, the words are spoken, and subtitles are displayed for the said words. According to this, the player can concentrate on the effect during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be performed.

[Yes or No 1]
In the success/failure notification part,
The player is notified of whether the control is to be in an advantageous state or not,
A prompting display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed,
Executed between the introductory part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (r54) described above, the success/failure determination scene was between the teaser part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning/failing determination, the player is informed whether or not the player has won a big hit after operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was moved after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the attraction of the presentation is improved by making it a suitable scene for deciding whether to use the operating means.

[Yes or No 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
In the state where the expanded display is being performed before the promotional display is performed, the introduction display of the promotional display is performed, so that the expanded display becomes invisible, and after that, the expanded display is performed in a state where the expanded display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143 (r47) to FIG. 145 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles are displayed by the teammate character, and then the characters corresponding to the operation means are displayed. Due to the screen, the effect that was being executed becomes invisible. Then, the effect executed after that becomes recognizable again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, and to display the performance that has been firmly executed at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be favorably shown. .

[Yes or No 3]
The expanded display is behind the introductory display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143 (r48) to FIG. 144 (r51), introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling operation of the operating means are displayed. A performance is in progress during the performance. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the image (the image of (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to make the player pay attention to the development of the effect.

[Yes or No 4]
The expanded display is performed while the prompt display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIGS. 145 (r51) to 145 (r54) described above, when the trigger image is displayed as the promotion display, the tail slightly moves each time the image changes in the Bakuchu image. was In this way, the effect may proceed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include a scene change or a character action instead of just moving the tail. According to this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the development of the presentation during the promotion display.

[Yes or No 5]
Expanded display progresses slower than before the prompt display when performed while the prompt display is performed.

Specifically, the effect progressing while the promotion display is displayed is slower than the effect executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the prompting display for operating the operation means, and to balance the prompting display and the progress of the effect. It should be noted that the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed may be slower than the effect that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect during display of the promotion display and during display of the introductory image.

[Yes or No 6]
An echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introductory display.

Specifically, it is preferable to echo the lines before the introductory image is displayed as shown in FIG. 143 (r47). According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[Yes or No 7]
After ending the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed while the expansion display was performed before the promotion display was performed, the introduction display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 143(r47) to 144(r49), the introductory image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introductory image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introductory image and the caption display from overlapping.

[Yes or No 8]
The introductory part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success or failure notification,
In a predetermined period, a plurality of image data are used to describe the movement of the character,
During the slow motion period, one piece of image data is rendered with effects to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of whether (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

[Yes or No 9]
There is a production that includes an introductory part in which allied characters and enemy characters appear, and a final part after the introductory part.
In the introductory part, there is a predetermined period in which the scene where allies are displayed and the scene where enemies are displayed alternately.
It is possible to shift to the final part by performing the action of the player while the promotion display is being performed during the predetermined period,
In a predetermined period, the speed at which the scenes in which the allies are displayed and the scenes in which the enemies are displayed alternately increase gradually, and after the speed reaches the maximum, the promotion display is performed,
As for the depiction in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed alternately, each of the enemy and the ally is reproduced with one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204B, the image switching speed between the image of the friend character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed. It becomes possible to incite the development of the game, and the interest is improved. In addition, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friend character and the enemy character.

[Yes or No 10]
The predetermined period in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed are alternately applied is also applied to the scene in which the ready-to-win performance develops from one ready-to-win performance to another ready-to-win performance.

Specifically, the effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP last reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect even at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach.

[Right or wrong 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a portion of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is diverted to change only the portion.

Specifically, during the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the friend character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, in the case of an ally character, four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, . good. According to this, by changing only part of the data while using the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully represent the state of movement while reducing the amount of data change work.

[Yes or No 12]
A portion of the character changes during the slow motion period.

Specifically, in the slow motion period of (r48), when the character's hair and clothes are shown to move gradually from a plurality of images, the movement of the hair and clothes is about the same as during periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased in accordance with the motion of the slow motion in order to make the motion look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, even if the number of images used is reduced, the movement does not become awkward, and while reducing the data capacity, it is possible to express the movement more faithfully. can.

[Right or wrong 13]
During the period before transitioning from the introductory part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification effect,
The display means performs a promotion display for prompting the player to perform a specific action,
The sound output means continues sound output,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for the first notification effect,
During the period before the transition from the introductory part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification effect,
The display means does not display a prompt to prompt a specific action, but displays a propriety display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for the second notification effect,
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the brightness data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production, in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the win-or-fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the production seems to have stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

[Yes or No 14]
When promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, in FIGS. 108(i36) to 109(i39), the image in which two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39) Then, one image is displayed while being stationary for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is statically displayed for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused for use, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data and favorably promote the success/failure determination scene. It should be noted that during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as many images (for example, 10) as shown in FIGS. may be used.

[Yes or No 15]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to the first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
A second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined luminance data is maintained,
A third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, it is a reach without operation prompt, and after the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. . Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

[Yes or No 16]
When the promotional display is performed, the display transitions in the order of the first display period in which the introductory display before the promotional display is performed, the second display period consisting of a moving image, and the third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is successful or not. do.

Specifically, in FIG. 144 (r49) to FIG. 145 (r54), the display period of the introductory image in which the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is be. Afterwards, there is a period of time during which prompts for activating the trigger are displayed. During the display period of the prompt display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning/failing determination, the image of the winning epilogue part will be played if it is a big hit, and the image of the losing epilogue part will be played if it is a loss. These periods are periods during which dynamic display is performed in which images appear to be moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

[Yes or No 17]
A scenario for controlling the light-emitting means using luminance data in the case of prompt display is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to the first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
A third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 144 (r49) to FIG. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, and red flashing.

[Yes or No 18]
As a flow from the success report part,
When it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, the display when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state is performed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is performed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scene shown in FIGS. 146(s1) to 149(s10) and FIGS. In the winning epilogue part, an image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character action. Also, in the unsuccessful epilogue part, the screen turns black after the production corresponding to the unsuccessful epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene of winning/failing determination, it is possible to achieve a suitable flow of presentation.

[Yes or No 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and after the notification is made. and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the propriety notification and a second epilogue part that informs that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means is
In the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower brightness than the brightness data last used in the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 274, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the inflection parts in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final luminance data in the inflection part ( RGB data) is "FDC", whereas the first luminance data (RGB data) in the missing epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when losing in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, it is possible to light the frame lamp in white more darkly while maintaining the same color using white lighting in the success/fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has been lost. Also, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanning part contains "D00", whereas the first brightness in the missing epilogue part Data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is lost, the frame lamp can be illuminated in white, which is darker than the red flashing in the success/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably notified of the loss.

[Yes or No 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The first notification effect that notifies that the control to the advantageous state is performed includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state after the propriety notification. and an epilogue part that informs that it will be controlled,
The first notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state will not be performed includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state after the success or failure notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that informs that it will not be done,
The second notification effect, which notifies that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state, includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state after the notification. and an epilogue part that informs that it will be controlled,
The second notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state will not be performed includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and the control to the advantageous state after the notification is given. It is composed of an epilogue part that informs that it will not be done,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table,
The luminance data table includes a first notification effect luminance data table, a second notification effect luminance data table, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means is
In the introductory part of the first notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the first upper table and the luminance data table for the first notification effect,
In the introductory part of the second notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the second upper table and the luminance data table for the second notification effect,
In the epilogue part in the first notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third upper table and a specific luminance data table,
In the epilogue part in the second notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the fourth upper table and the specific luminance data table,
A specific luminance data table used in the epilogue part of the first notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state, and a specific luminance data table that is used in the epilogue part of the second notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state. is a common luminance data table,
The third upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for the first time period,
The fourth upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time different from the first time.

Specifically, in the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the SP final reach child table Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing based on grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is common among different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. Thus, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

[Yes or No 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is
It includes an introductory part until the propriety of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the control to the advantageous state is notified after the propriety notification. a first pattern to be
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and after the notification is made. A second pattern comprising a second epilogue part that notifies that the control to the advantageous state is not achieved after the second epilogue part, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and notifies that the control to the advantageous state is performed. and there is
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the propriety notification and a second epilogue part that informs that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part in the relief notification part in the notification effect of the second pattern;
The brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to have a higher brightness than the brightness data last used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success report part,
When it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, an image is displayed when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, and the decision not to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified by decorative symbols. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed to switch to an image corresponding to the background at the start of reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 201, in the case of a loss after determination of success or failure, a loss pattern is displayed in the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, after the switching image of the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen switches to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen at the time of failure by the eye-catching screen.

[Loss 2]
In the epilogue part at the time of failure, the image when it is determined that the control is not in an advantageous state is displayed in blackout, and the middle pattern of the decoration pattern is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 202, in the losing epilogue part, the background at the time of losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. As shown in FIG. According to this, the image and the medium pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in.

[Loss 3]
The number of steps from 100% to 0% for the transmittance of one image when blacking out the image when it is determined that it is not controlled to an advantageous state is the transmittance of the image with the medium pattern of 100%. more than the number of steps from % to 0%.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 202, in the lost epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of failure from 100% transmittance to 0% is This is more than the number of steps required to fade in from 0% to 0%. Specifically, the blackout of the background has 8 stages from (X11) to (X18), whereas the fade-in of the middle pattern has 6 stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of failure and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of steps for changing the transmittance is different. can be displayed appropriately.

[Loss 4]
The blacking out of the image when it is determined not to be controlled in an advantageous state is performed prior to the fade-in of the middle pattern of the decoration pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 202, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of losing starts earlier than the change in which the middle pattern fades in. According to this, the image at the time of failure and the medium pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in. It is possible to make the display of the hour look good.

[Loss 5]
The cut of the image displayed when it is determined that it is not controlled to the advantageous state before blackout changes,
When it is determined that the image is not controlled to be in an advantageous state when blacking out, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the displayed image of the lost video before the blackout is switched, whereas the displayed image of the blackout does not change. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that the switching of the image includes switching of the picture on the screen, switching of the angle of the video, and switching of the displayed scene itself. In addition, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that it is the same still image, that even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is slightly moving.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined not to be controlled in an advantageous state is blacked out, and as a result of the middle pattern of the decorative pattern fading in, the transmittance of the middle pattern becomes 0%, and the blackout requires 1. A period in which the transmittance of the image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period of time,
In a predetermined period, the pattern itself is shaken for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium pattern image changes from a state with a transmittance of 100% to a state with a transmittance of 0%, and is longer than the period during which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, as a result of the blackout of the background at the time of failure and the fade-in of the middle pattern, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transmittance of 0%, A blacked out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a symbol fluctuation period as indicated by (X19) to (X20). In the period of design fluctuation, the period of shifting the middle design from the central position to the upper position, the central position, the lower position, and the central position is defined as one period, and the fluctuation of the design may be repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the medium pattern fades in from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Moreover, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period of time during which the middle pattern is clearly displayed, so that it is possible to suitably show that it is a failure.

[Loss 7]
The switching display is a display including information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, on the eye-catching screen, as information about the pachinko machine 1, the title "POWERFUL II" and main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed. image is displayed. According to this, the information of the pachinko game machine 1 can be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in an advantageous state or not, and an advantageous part after the notification A first epilogue part that is notified that the state is controlled,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. and a second epilogue part that is notified that it is not controlled by
The display means
In the second epilogue part, display to notify that it is not controlled in an advantageous state,
After that, the switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the variation command as a trigger, the variation display of the pattern is started,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the lighting means for effect,
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the switching display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for presentation;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for effect;
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbols, the light emitting means for the fourth symbols is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. to control the light emitting means for production,
When the pattern variable display is started, the luminance data table is switched to the fourth pattern variable luminance data table, the light emitting means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. is used to control the light emitting means for presentation.

Specifically, the characterizing portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished by the reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by the reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from extinguishing to blinking upon receipt of the variation pattern command of the next variation, but the brightness data table for the background does not switch even upon receipt of the symbol determination command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

[Loss 9]
The luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is to refer to the luminance data by looping until the change condition is satisfied,
In the introductory part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background has been updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table corresponds to the effect of SP reach after change when a specific change condition such as development of SP reach is established. After that, lamp control is performed based on the SP reach luminance data table. In this case, while the effect of SP reach is being executed, in the background of lamp control based on the luminance data table for SP reach, the switching of luminance data in the luminance data table for background stops over time. continue without Further, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition such as an error occurs. Lamp control based on the data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of lamp control based on the error luminance data table, switching of luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping over time. This makes it possible to make the series of effects to be executed look more suitable.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, even if a pattern confirmation command is received, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used, and after that, even if there is no pending customer waiting command The intensity data table corresponding to the background is used continuously.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table for the background continues even if there is no pending memory and the command specifying the customer waiting demo is received. used for According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the performance by the lamps can be presented without a sense of incongruity, and a series of presentations can be favorably presented. can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the design is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special figure stops,
By receiving the symbol determination command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from blinking to extinguishing.

Specifically, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of a symbol determination command that triggers the effect of symbol determination and stop. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the special light emitting means flashes,
By receiving the next variation command, the lighting means for the fourth symbol is switched from off to blinking.

Specifically, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguishing to blinking by receiving the variation pattern command of the next variation which triggers the next variation to start. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 13]
Switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning/failure notification part to the brightness data table corresponding to the determination that control is not performed in an advantageous state,
Switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display according to the switching display,
After switching to the background at the start of reach, the final luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is used, and even if the pattern confirmation command is received, the luminance data is not switched, and the luminance data is used during the pattern confirmation period. Subsequently, when the next variation command is received, the brightness data table corresponding to the next variation is switched to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 203, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the rendering of (X40) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the rendering of (X41) in which the background image is blacked out. . After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the pattern fixing period of (X45). After that, when a variation pattern command with hold is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the luminance data table is maintained during the pattern fixing period, and at the timing of switching to the next change, the background brightness data table. Further, in the pattern fixing period, the last luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), that is, turning off is used. According to this, after switching to the luminance data table of the background, the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received. can be easily recognized, and as a result, the failure can be favorably shown.

[Loss 14]
The final luminance data is turned off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the turned off.

Specifically, the final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data for maintaining the light off. In addition, the background brightness data table does not use the data for keeping the light off. According to this, since the brightness data for maintaining the lights off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the failure that the lights are off when the background is displayed. It can be made easy to recognize that it is.

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no pending memory after the pattern is determined, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, by receiving the customer waiting designation command, the table is switched to the brightness data table for the background, so that it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the table is lost.

[Loss 16]
The first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher luminance than the last luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the determination not to control to the advantageous state.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of failure). It's becoming According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Loss 17]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (not including lights off) corresponding to the background at the start of the fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching is easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Accessory action 1]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that control is to be performed in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state, and whether or not to notify the appropriateness. A notification part, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that it will be controlled to the advantageous state after the success or failure notification,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and a success or failure notification that notifies the appropriateness. part, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state after the success or failure notification,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
Controlling the light emitting means using the winning luminance data table after the success/failure notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed,
Controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for losing after the success/failure notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The average time for switching to the next brightness data after 1 brightness data is used in the winning brightness data table is longer than the average time for switching to the next brightness data after 1 brightness data is used in the losing brightness data table. set short.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 275 and 276, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 274, at the time of losing, the frame lamp is dimly lit in white based on the grandchild table W14, and its RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than at the time of winning. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the win is achieved. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamp. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Accessory action 2]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the epilogue part brightness data table,
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The epilogue part brightness data table is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276, in the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the rainbow chromatic color is used in the effect that the character is falling. , and achromatic colors (RGB data of “333”) alternately. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and to congratulate the player. After that, in the effect that the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without achromatic colors to indicate that a big hit has been achieved. It is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is the celebration part after the decision to control to an advantageous state is announced, there is a scene where the enemy character is defeated, there is no scene where the friendly character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the introduction part. less parts than

Specifically, the hit epilogue part described above is a part that does not transition when the game is lost, and is a part that has a scene in which the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene in which the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the hit epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the production is smaller than in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be favorably shown.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed with respect to the characters' dialogues is higher than the ratio of the dialogue subtitles displayed with respect to the characters' dialogues in the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach, which is the inciting part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed in the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of blessing by clearly showing what the character is saying in the hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, if dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles will not be displayed,
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are displayed when a dialogue sound is output in a scene in which an enemy character takes damage.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the teasing part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123(o1), subtitles are added to the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character takes damage (scene of catching crabs) in the winning epilogue part. According to this, in the hit epilogue part, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the inciting part is displayed, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introductory part and a second introductory part, each with a different development and a different number of dialogues. It is higher than the ratio at which dialog subtitles are displayed relative to the character's dialog sound output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to convey the effect by switching images first, so that the effect is not disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. . Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialog subtitles that are finally displayed in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialog subtitles of the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 147(s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the introductory part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. It should be noted that, when the caption display is displayed, the larger the number of characters, the longer it may be displayed than the smaller the number. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the introductory part, the period during which the subtitles are displayed is longer in the winning epilogue part. should be designed as

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is positioned at the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is performed,
The movable body moves according to a retraction pattern in which the movable body retracts, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display by the time the retraction pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, an effect image corresponding to the motion of the character object is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. While the character is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member retracts and returns,
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is interlocked with the timing of starting the return operation.

Specifically, on the premise that the accessory returns to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise related to the timing of the start of the returning motion. According to this, since the display is switched to the display corresponding to the epilogue at the timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the character product motion ends before the character product returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image from being displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts rising. Also, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the drop position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light-emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches turning off.

Specifically, when the role product rises, the effect control CPU 120 determines the role based on the child table corresponding to the action of the role product rising on the role product lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the character object lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the object lamp 9A. As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp indicates that the player has developed into the second half reach A of the SP. It is possible to draw the player's attention.

[Epilogue 10]
The BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue suggests a switch,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of the epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect suggesting a change is output.

Specifically, sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and a sound effect suggesting switching are output.

Specifically, BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM and sound effects, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, the dialogue sound is not output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is retracted, a dialog sound is output and a dialog caption corresponding to the dialog sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the role object returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is not output in the epilogue display after the character object returns to the initial position. Subtitles should be displayed while outputting. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle from being displayed at a timing when the subtitle is difficult to see, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output at the timing of the evacuation of the movable body,
A dialog sound is output at the timing when the movable body is completely stored, and a dialog caption corresponding to the dialog sound is displayed.

Specifically, at the timing when the character returns to the initial position, it is sufficient to output the dialogue sound and display the subtitles in the epilogue display. According to this, it is possible to make the dialogue clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the start timing of the pattern display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 147(s6) to 148(s8) described above, the final caption display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is erased before the design effect is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the caption display from being covered with the decoration pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message in the effect of the pattern display. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 17]
The moving image that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image at the timing when the symbol display is completed and the player recognizes the finally aligned symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of designing is completed and the player can recognize the decoration design, the decoration design and the image such as the character displayed as the background are displayed. It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decoration pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decoration pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
A moving image that is flowing before the start of designing is taken as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(s7) described above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the symbol presentation effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of drawing out the pattern.

[Epilogue 19]
A special effect is added at the same time as the stillness.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special graphic style. According to this, by adding a special effect to the still picture, it is possible to make a suitable epilogue part by emphasizing that the picture is still and suggesting that the scene has changed.

[Epilogue 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position. Ending the display, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, so that the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the mode of presentation is switched to the winning epilogue part by moving the character object from the scene before the win/fail decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character object is rising. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the role product to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the role product is rising. In addition, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part is output while the character is ascending. In addition, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the character changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), the dialogue sound is not output. . After that, in the state (s4) in which movement of the character to the initial position is completed and display of the effect image is finished, dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part in the middle of the ascending of the character, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the operation of returning to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[Epilogue 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
In the introductory part, a first scene in which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the character;
a second scene in which, in the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character; there is
In the second scene, the switching effect is not applied when ending the display of the final dialogue subtitle, while in the first scene, the switching effect is applied when ending the display of the dialogue subtitle.

[Epilogue 22]
At the time of designing, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the small pattern is not hindered by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, both the ornamental pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are in the process of being changed while enhancing the production effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols, and to make a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
At the time of designing, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the pattern output of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, both the ornamental pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. Here, the movement of the decorative design and the small design may be synchronized at the timing when the design of the decorative design is completed. Concretely, during the pattern shaking period in which the decoration pattern is completed and the pattern swings up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same motion as the decoration pattern. According to this, by synchronizing the movement of the decoration pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the effect in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
At the time of design drawing in the re-lottery part, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Although an effect is added to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not hindered by the effect.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 170(B1) to 171(B5) described above, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed during the design effect in the re-lottery part. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being changed and displayed while increasing the performance effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-lottery part, the small patterns are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and interlocked with the transition to the re-lottery part, the small patterns fluctuate again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (s10) described above, when the design is produced, both the decorative design and the small design may be displayed in a state where the designs are once aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the shift to the re-lottery part, both the decoration design and the small design may change again. According to this, the decoration pattern and the small pattern can be displayed in a suitable manner in synchronization.

[Epilogue 26]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The epilogue part is
a first scene in which the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
a second scene that enlarges and displays the decorative pattern using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table,
In the second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table,
In the first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, the first luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used for the rainbow light emission mode. Switching to the luminance data table, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode,
In the second scene of the epilogue part, the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means, and at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decoration pattern, the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to change the rainbow light emission mode. controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table of
The brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the first scene of the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the second scene of the epilogue part are common brightness data tables. can be,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part and storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the luminance data table for enlarged display and storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used for the winning notification effect and the grandchild table used for displaying the winning pattern, different grandchild tables are prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. Each performance can be livened up by a performance with a sense of unity, while reducing the data volume used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Epilogue 27]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part to be executed and a re-lottery part to be executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified,
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene that enlarges and displays the decorative pattern using the center of the display area and notifies the result of the re-lottery,
The light emission control means is
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the brightness data table for result notification scene enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means, and at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the result notification scene enlarged display brightness data table is used. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for a rainbow light emission mode;
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the re-lottery result notification scene is performed by controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for re-lottery result notification scene enlarged display, and at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for obtaining a rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have the same brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage location data of the brightness data table for enlarging the display of the result notification scene and storage location data of the brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the ramp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery is common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13 and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then the grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

[Epilogue 28]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means. .

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (located in the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the video of the winning epilogue is finished, the reduced pattern is erased and the design effect is executed in which the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the pattern. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the pattern display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is displayed, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the winning epilogue part is completed, the pattern is displayed. At the time of playing, by enlarging and displaying the decoration patterns continuously using the screen end side and the screen center, the big winning patterns can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to show the scene switching appropriately. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, it is positioned at the end of the display area in a state in which the decorative patterns are aligned.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (the position of the upper left corner of the screen) is displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue image is being displayed, the reduced decoration pattern allows the player to recognize that the big winning display result is displayed.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the end of the display area,
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state where the decorative pattern is displayed at the end of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Zoom in using the center of the region.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (position in the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is deleted, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner position is deleted, and the image at the center of the screen is deleted. The decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decoration pattern, and misunderstanding that some kind of message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the epilogue part can be suitably reproduced. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area.

Specifically, the decoration pattern may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach state at the start of the SP reach. According to this, by positioning from the start of the SP reach, it is possible not to interfere with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

[Re-lottery production 1]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to a first advantageous state, a second mode of displaying the first pattern again in the second half part after displaying the first pattern in the first half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
Using the first pattern displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

[Re-lottery production 2]
When the image corresponding to the background temporarily stopping the decorative pattern alignment is displayed, the light emitting means is extinguished, and when shifting to the re-lottery screen, the light-emitting means emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the re-lottery. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp is smoothly illuminated in rainbow color and the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, After the frame lamp is turned off once, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that the start of the re-lottery performance can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 3]
When moving to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the decoration pattern alignment,
While the display is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern arrangement is displayed with a shaking effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are reproduced. Switch to lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (A5) described above, in the final state of the design effect in the winning epilogue part, the decorative patterns are displayed in a swaying manner, and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when the background is switched from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with the concentrated lines is continuously added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smooth rainbow lighting to extinguished. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery production, the pattern fluctuation and effect mode continue, and the background and the lamp are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decoration pattern the re-lottery effect started.

[Re-lottery production 4]
At the start of pattern feeding, the decorative patterns that have been displayed since the epilogue are reduced, and after the pattern feeding is started, the pattern feeding is started.

Specifically, at the start of the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative pattern that has been displayed from the hit epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of presentations well without executing the process of changing to a different decoration pattern.

[Re-lottery production 5]
Pattern feeding is started with a reduced size, and the reduced sizes of other patterns are all uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect, variation is started by a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during variation is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smoothen the appearance of the variation at the time of the pattern feed effect, and to show the flow of the series of effects well.

[Re-lottery production 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative patterns are being sent in a reduced size, transitions are made in the order of motion promotion display, acceptance of motion, display of a slightly larger decorative pattern than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as in the flow shown in FIGS. 157 (A10) to 169 (A46) and FIGS. 170 (B1) to 171 (B5), in the re-lottery effect, the pattern is sent by the reduced size decorative pattern. is executed, and a button prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, an effect of displaying a symbol in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed is executed. In other words, from the moment the pattern is put out, the decoration pattern that is finally notified is displayed in an enlarged manner. According to this, since the symbol is finally announced from the start of enlargement, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Re-lottery production 7]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances, in the first half part, after the first pattern is displayed, a replacement display is performed in which the first pattern is replaced with another pattern. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
A second re-lottery performance in which, among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances, replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part when it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled. is executable and
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 8]
In the pattern feeding according to a predetermined pattern, the temporarily stopped pattern is sequentially sent to the next pattern, and after the last pattern is sent, the temporarily stopped pattern is returned to, and then the next pattern is sent in order. It is a production that sends to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and looping it.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order. , again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decoration patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decoration patterns are sent in order, it is possible to clearly show the flow of the series of presentations.

[Re-lottery production 9]
While the pattern is being fed in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns to be sent are once displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the symbols are displayed with the degree of transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the degree of transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, "2" pattern with 0% transparency, "2" pattern with 50% transparency, "3" pattern with 0% transparency, "3" pattern with 50% transparency, transparent Patterns are switched such as a "4" pattern with a degree of 0% and a "4" pattern with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the patterns can be clearly displayed in a mode with low transparency during the pattern feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of pattern is being sent.

[Re-lottery production 10]
After the symbol feed is started, the display times of the plurality of types of decorative symbols are the same until notification is given as to whether or not the player will be promoted.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order. However, the time that each pattern is displayed is the same. According to this, all patterns can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of performances can be shown well.

[Re-lottery production 11]
The action promotion display is performed during pattern feeding,
The position where the action prompting display is performed is a position that does not overlap with the pattern being sent.

Specifically, during the symbol feed effect, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative pattern during the pattern feeding effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may be partially overlapped with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

[Re-lottery production 12]
The action-promoting display is started during pattern feeding, and is started during the second loop of the predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 189 and 190, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation of displaying all the decoration symbols during the symbol feed effect. be started. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feeding pattern is repeated twice in this manner, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feeding effect.

[Re-lottery production 13]
When pattern feeding is started from the symbol "1", the timing at which the action promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When the symbol feed is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the action promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than 2 symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the action prompting display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display was displayed was the timing at which 2 symbols were displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols to be sent is the same regardless of which symbol the re-lottery effect is started. According to this, since control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 14]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances, in the first half part, after the first pattern is displayed, a replacement display is performed in which the first pattern is replaced with another pattern. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
A second re-lottery performance in which the replacement display is performed in the first half of a plurality of types of re-lottery performances and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half when it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the second pattern is repeatedly displayed after the second pattern is displayed in the first half part, and the second pattern is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to execute a third re-lottery effect to
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance and the third re-lottery performance are configured to have the same performance scale,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed and then an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) is displayed. was provided. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 15]
The re-lottery effect is displayed by combining display data other than decorative patterns and display data of various decorative patterns, reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effects.
By using common display data in each re-lottery effect, the effect scale between each re-lottery effect becomes common, and only the type of pattern sent and the pattern issued in the pattern output are each re-lottery. It differs in the lottery production.

Specifically, in the lottery effect, a pattern of displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns). and a pattern of displaying an odd numbered pattern (for example, 7 patterns) and then displaying an odd numbered pattern (for example, 7 patterns) use common data. In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design is such that the data relating to the decorative design is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 16]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
Displaying the first pattern with the same or substantially the same animation when the first pattern is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part of the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, the pattern output in the portions of FIGS. 154(A1) to 155(A5) and the pattern output in the portions of FIGS. 174(C1) to 175(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. be done. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the pattern is displayed to when it reaches the first position while expanding.

Specifically, in the above-described pattern display effect, a series of effects are executed in which the pattern is once displayed in an enlarged size and then displayed in the normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

[Re-lottery production 18]
When the decorative pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when informing whether or not the decorative pattern matching is promoted in the notification part, the display means refers to common display data,
By combining the common display data and the display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, display of a plurality of types of patterns is performed.

Specifically, in the above-described pattern presentation effect, common pattern presentation data may be used in the pattern presentation presentation data in the winning epilogue part and the pattern presentation presentation data in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of pattern presentation effects may be executed by combining common pattern presentation data and a plurality of decorative designs. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data volume while favorably displaying the design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the symbol appearance effect data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol appearance effect data in the re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery production 19]
If you do not get promoted in the re-lottery production,
When the decoration pattern matching is temporarily stopped before execution of the re-lottery and when the notification that the decoration pattern matching is not promoted in the re-lottery is performed, the light emission mode in the pattern output is the same.

Specifically, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, as a ramp control when the pattern is finally decided after the re-lottery, it is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. A grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

[Re-lottery effect 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-lottery production,
When the decoration pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when the promotion of the decoration pattern matching is notified by the re-lottery, the lighting mode in the pattern output is different,
The light emitting mode in the pattern output is more intense when the decorative pattern matching is notified to be promoted by the re-lottery than when the decorative pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery. The frame lamp lights up, but when the pattern of "2" is promoted by a re-lottery and replaced with the pattern of "3", the lighting of the rainbow color at time tB5 to tB9 is once in the epilogue part of "2". The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the pattern is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 21]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
The first pattern is shaken by changing the display mode of the first pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half until the pattern confirmation period. perform a shaking display that displays the first pattern as if
The second pattern is shaken by changing the display mode of the second pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time when the second pattern is displayed in the second half part to the time when the pattern is fixed. Perform a shaking display that displays the second pattern as if it were there,
The first mode is a mode in which the player can more easily see the pattern than either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute an action prompting display that prompts the player to act,
When the action is performed at the first timing while the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern so that the pattern is in the second mode;
When the action promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at the second timing different from the first timing, the predetermined timing comes after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the third mode when the second pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, display is made to make the second pattern shaking display difficult to see from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the second pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and after that, when the pattern fixing period comes, the second pattern is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second pattern. display stop,
When the action is performed at the first timing while the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern so that the pattern is in the second mode;
When the action is performed at the second timing while the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern so that the pattern is in the third mode;
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, display is made to make the shaking display of the first pattern difficult to see from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the first pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the first pattern is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first pattern. display stop,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 280, an action prompting display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

[Re-lottery effect 22]
When the action is performed at the first timing of the effective period of the operation, after notification of whether or not promotion is performed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner until the predetermined timing of the change comes.
When the action is performed at the second timing, which is earlier than the first timing of the effective period of the action, the action is performed earlier than the first timing until the predetermined timing of the change after notification of whether or not promotion is performed. The decoration pattern is displayed swaying as much as it is early, and the scale is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid period of operation, after notification as to whether or not the player will be promoted, a display with a swinging decorative pattern is displayed (FIG. 280 (L3)). without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation effective period, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 280 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid period of operation, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 280 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the fluctuation time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be neatly stopped, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

[Re-lottery effect 23]
The predetermined effect is started after the flickering decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while blinking in white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 280, after white-out is executed as a common effect, a different effect from the previous patterns is executed in which the swinging decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged. According to this, regardless of the position of the pattern in the shaking of the pattern of the scale absorption, by executing a different mode of production after the whiteout is interposed, the flow of the production until the pattern is stopped. It can be made not to give a sense of incongruity.

[Re-lottery effect 24]
In the shaking display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position as an axis,
The sway display has decorative patterns in the order of 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. A predetermined effect is designed so that when the fixed period comes, the decorative patterns are always displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 280, during the swing period of the pattern, the pattern swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), and then swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14). to the initial position. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the pattern is fixed, the pattern is designed to always be positioned at the initial position in which the pattern faces the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Re-lottery effect 25]
The starting point for causing the light emitting means to emit rainbow light during the second part is to emit light in rainbow at the start of a predetermined effect.

Specifically, it is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow colors at the white-out timing of (J1) in FIG. 280 . The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the location where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start opportunity instead of the timing (J1).

[Re-lottery production 26]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is once displayed, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first pattern is shaken. It displays the first pattern,
When transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. There is a timing to shift from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and a timing to shift from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The effect executing means performs re-lottery from the epilogue part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. When shifting to the part, and when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, a specific display is performed to make the first pattern difficult to see, Displaying the first pattern in a common display mode to execute a first re-lottery effect or a second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 279, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, During the time up to the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

[Re-lottery production 27]
The re-lottery effect is common regardless of which of the introduction parts of the plurality of types of introduction parts wins.

Specifically, any of a plurality of ready-to-wins may be used in common from the white-out screen until the re-lottery effect is executed. According to this, the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery effect 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was once shaken before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that sways on the spot on the front side and the back side on the axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a motion of rotating clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while enlarging. According to this, by displaying the whiteout between the extended movements of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the movement of the pattern from being uncomfortable, and the series of performances can be shown favorably. be able to.

[Re-lottery production 29]
The plurality of types of introductory parts include a predetermined introductory part that is not notified when the operation of the operating means is triggered by branching the notification of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
In the predetermined introductory part, there is no point where the scale is shifted, so if it is decided that the control will be in an advantageous state in the predetermined introductory part, the decoration pattern will be temporarily stopped until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no blurring in the shaking display, but the same re-lottery effect as the reach that causes the scale deviation is executed.

Specifically, among the plurality of SP reach, there are those in which the promotion of operation such as button operation is not notified in the branch at the time of determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state. In such SP reach, there is no scale shift associated with the operation. However, even in such an SP ready-to-win game, a re-lottery effect similar to that for an SP ready-to-win game in which scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, even if there is only one re-lottery effect, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused by the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery effect 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery effect after the shaking display of the decorative pattern in the big hit in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of shifting to the re-lottery effect is designed so that it will be an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 279, the timing is set such that the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) via the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). is designed to be In other words, when the swing of the pattern is one of a series of actions in which the pattern rotates clockwise, a white-out is executed by a re-lottery effect, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotated clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from giving a sense of incongruity by a series of movements of the symbols rotating to the right from the period of the fluctuation of the symbols to the re-lottery effect.

<Description of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. Some terms used in this specification are explained below.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes variably displaying multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "fluctuation" of the pattern is the update display of multiple types of patterns, such as multiple types of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern), multiple types of normal patterns, and multiple types of decorative patterns. Scroll display, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, lamp (4th symbol unit 9050, special figure 1 variable display part 9053, special figure 2 variable display part 9054 etc.) lighting / flashing / extinguishing and so on.

The "decorative symbol" includes symbols variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

The "reduced pattern" is a pattern in which the decorative pattern is reduced, and includes a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern. When the reduced patterns are stopped and displayed, the same number pattern as the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the screen in a smaller size than the decorative pattern.

The "small pattern" includes patterns corresponding to the variable display of decorative patterns displayed in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. The small patterns are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R. Patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction.

"Pattern determination" is the 4th pattern unit 9050, the special figure 1 variable display portion 9053, the special figure 2 variable display portion 9054, and the variation of the decoration pattern etc., which has been fluctuating, finally stops, and finally the special figure game Including that the design in is confirmed. For example, a state in which each of the decorative patterns fluctuating in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern fluctuating in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern fluctuating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is stopped. include.

In the "design determination period", the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuation of the 4th design unit 9050, the special figure 1 variable display part 9053, the special figure 2 variable display part 9054, and the decoration design. Including duration. For example, the decorative patterns fluctuating in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative patterns fluctuating in the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the decorative patterns fluctuating in the right decorative design display area 5R are stopped and displayed. Including the state in which the result was displayed deterministically.

"Reach" means that, when the decoration symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the decoration symbols that are not stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner. For example, the left decorative design display area 5L stops the "2" decorative design, the right decorative design display area 5R stops the "2" decorative design, but the middle decorative design display area 5C This includes the state in which the variable display of the decoration pattern is still continuing.

“Lighting off” of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is “0” (a value indicating the lowest luminance). It should be noted that "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is luminance data corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means). It may include a state with a value close to "0". The state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", is " It may be included in "turn on" or "substantially turn off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (light emitting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when the lamp is turned off. This includes a state in which the value is equal to or greater than the luminance data value (“0”) corresponding to “lights off” described above. "Lighting" includes constant lighting in which the lamp is always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of lamps are switched from off to lighting in order, and haze lighting in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing its brightness.

"Flashing" of the lighting means (light emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is in a state other than "extinguishing", "substantially extinguished", or "lit", and the lamp is in a state of "lit" and "extinguishing". is repeated over time. Also, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes that the lamp repeats "lighting" and "almost extinguishing" with the passage of time.

"Luminance" is a value indicating brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in the present embodiment, luminance data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to luminance. For example, if the luminance data used to control a given lamp is "0", the lamp is controlled so that the given lamp has the lowest luminance (darkest lamp). When the luminance data used for the calculation is "F", the lamp is controlled so that the predetermined lamp has the highest luminance (the lamp is bright). As described above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp. When the brightness data used to control a given lamp is "0", the current flowing through the given lamp is the smallest. , when the luminance data used to control a given lamp is "F", the current flowing through the given lamp is the largest. Note that the “lamp” is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, and includes any kind of lamps such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent lamps.

The "lighting color" or "luminous color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emitted by one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if the lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light-emitting elements "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), then the three light-emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the luminance data. A current to one light emitting element causes the three light emitting elements to emit light, thereby lighting the LED in various colors. The "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light-emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights in white, although the brightness varies depending on the current that flows. In the case of an LED composed of only R (red) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red although the brightness varies depending on the current that flows.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lighting colors of the lamp include colors composed of seven kinds of colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange (orange), yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Note that the “rainbow colors” are not limited to the colors described above, and may be composed of seven other colors. Even with the same "rainbow color", the lighting mode is different between smooth lighting based on the luminance data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 238 and blinking based on the luminance data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. In addition, the lighting mode of rainbow colors may vary depending on the set luminance data.

The "color corresponding to the character" includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, there are colors set for each character, such as green for Mumu-chan, purple for Jam-chan, and red for Bakuchu.

The "light emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, the "luminous color corresponding to the character" is the green lighting color (luminous color) of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the character of Yume-chan, and the purple lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to Jam-chan. (light emission color), lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu, and the like.

The "speech sound" includes a sound corresponding to a word output in accordance with the timing when a character appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utters a word. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to the words uttered by the character are output in accordance with the image of the character appearing in the performance.

The “dialogue caption” includes characters corresponding to the dialogue sound displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the dialogue sound is output. Dialogue subtitles are also referred to as subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds generated by actions of objects such as characters and objects appearing in the production. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that are likely to be produced by the actions of the objects, such as characters and objects appearing in the performance, are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes pseudo sounds that express the actions of objects such as characters and objects appearing in the presentation. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeic sound) representing the action of an object such as a character or an object appearing in the performance is output in accordance with the image of the object.

"Character action" includes an effect in which a character appearing in the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some action. For example, Mumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

In the "re-lottery effect", after temporarily stopping and displaying a normal jackpot pattern (for example, an even number pattern such as "2" pattern) that does not become a probability variable jackpot in the variable display of decorative patterns, the normal jackpot pattern is a probability variable jackpot. Including an effect that is executed before design determination in order to arouse whether or not to be promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd number symbol such as "3" symbol).

The ``replacement display'' is a presentation included in the ``re-lottery presentation'', and includes the display of images such that the temporarily stopped decoration patterns are sequentially replaced with other patterns, so that the decoration patterns are successively switched. In the present embodiment, the "replacement display" is a display in which the symbol "2" changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced with other symbols, and finally the symbol "2" or "3" stops. include.

“Repeated display” means to repeat the same display, and to repeat the display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect" and includes a display of repeatedly displaying the temporarily stopped decorative pattern with the same animation. As an example, the "repeating display" includes a display in which the symbol "7" changes at high speed and is successively replaced by other symbols, and finally the symbol "7" stops.

"Shaking display" is to display the ornamental pattern while shaking it, indicating that the variation is not finished and is in the process of being varied.

"Still display" is to display the decoration pattern stationary without moving it, indicating that the variation has ended.

"Swaying speed" is the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while the design is swinging.

The "first mode of design", "second mode of design", and "third mode of design" are modes indicating the position of the decorative design. For example, in the case of vertically swinging display of decorative patterns, if the first mode is the center position, the second mode is the upper position, and the third mode is the lower position. Further, in the case where the decorative pattern is displayed to sway in the front-rear direction, if the first mode is the front position, the second mode is the left-facing position, and the third mode is the right-facing position.

"Fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of the big win game state and notifies that the big win game state has been entered.

“Advancement” of a movable body (accessory) is an action in which a movable body (accessory) moves from its initial position. The position of the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advanced position.

“Retraction” of the movable body (accessory) is an action of moving the accessory as the movable body from the advanced position to the initial position. The initial position of the movable area in which the accessory moves is the retreat position.

The "effect display for moving the movable body" is a display for enhancing the visual effect of the surroundings of the character on the screen in accordance with the movement of the character as the movable body to the advanced position. For example, an effect image is displayed for making the character action stand out in accordance with the character action when the reach develops in the second half or when a big hit is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progress of a story or a series of productions. In other words, the story is continuously displayed to the player without interruption of a series of stories or the like due to scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to a group that constitutes an effect, and a part is a larger group than a scene. Parts are divided according to roles.

“Scene switching” mainly refers to switching of display, and particularly to switching of displayed backgrounds, characters, and the like.

"Cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed as an interrupting image in the displayed image. Also, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is green.

"Switching display (eye-catching display)" is an effect displayed at the time of scene change. In the present embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when changing the scene from the state indicating the loss to the normal game state. The eye-catching display has a role to make it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

In the "shielding display (shutter display)", the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image displayed before the shielding display is displayed. is a display that shields the The shield display may shield the image by displaying something other than a shutter.

"The brightness data is switched" means that the brightness data timer defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next brightness data is used. Switching the luminance data switches the light emission mode of the lamp. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given an impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is being updated.

"The brightness data is not switched" means that the brightness data timer defined in the grandchild table does not become 0 and the brightness data continues to be used. Since the luminance data is not switched, the lighting mode of the lamp becomes constant. Since the light emission mode of the lamp becomes constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped without being updated.

“Moving image data” is data for displaying a moving image including animation. Images displayed on an image display device 5 are switched at high speed by several tens of images per second to make them look like they are moving. The moving image data may be compressed and held.

The “first moving image data” is moving image data created using many images in order to move a character out of the moving image data.

“Second moving image data” is moving image data created using a small number of images in order to move a character out of the moving image data.

A "movement of a specific character" is a movement corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

“Blackout” is an effect that darkens (blacks out) by displaying a black image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The blackout may be arranged such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the duration of the blackout state.

“White-out” is an effect in which a white image is displayed (white-out) in the display area of the image display device 5 in order to make the image displayed in the display area invisible. The whiteout may be arranged such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image is displayed on the screen to make the displayed decoration pattern invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image on the entire screen (whitening out), the decoration pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that a state in which a background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to a state in which a predetermined image is visible. In the present embodiment, for example, images showing words are gradually displayed from a state in which the room background is being displayed. Gradual display means that the transparency of the image showing the words is gradually lowered. For example, after the dialogue image is displayed with a transparency of 100%, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 second and displayed, so that the dialogue image is displayed after one second. Contrary to fade-in, fade-out means gradually changing from a state in which a predetermined image is visible overlapping a background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, the image showing the dialogue is gradually hidden from the state in which the image showing the dialogue is displayed on the room background. Gradual hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the dialogue. For example, after the dialog image is displayed with a transparency of 0%, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, so that the dialog image disappears after 1 second. Further, the fade effect includes cross-fade in which fade-in and fade-out are performed simultaneously and images are replaced.

<Example of time saving control without hitting>
Next, as a time saving state, an example of executing time saving control that does not pass through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving pattern)

(A1) In each of the characteristic portions and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is a form in which the transition is made via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A always operates. , the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state). That is, as a time saving state, a time saving control that does not pass through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be part of the losing patterns or may be part of the small winning patterns.

(A3) In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries, such as lottery random numbers for big win patterns, lottery random numbers for small win patterns, random numbers for judging big win lotteries, and random numbers for fall lottery.

(A4) In addition, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

(A5) In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed and the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time saving pattern does not change according to the setting value, that is, the time saving pattern in all the setting values Although the lottery probability is the same, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition in the case of lottery for time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the starting port (first starting Prize-winning opening, 2nd starting prize-winning opening).

(A7) In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result of the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving design lottery When using a small winning pattern random number, a specific small winning pattern random number is used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a falling lottery judgment value in a time-saving design lottery, the random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the game ball passing through the time-saving area may be selected as a time-saving design.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small winning pattern is used in combination with the time saving pattern, the number of variable display times of the time saving state (time saving number) depends on whether or not the time saving area is passed. keep it from changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and the random number of jackpot patterns is used for lottery of time-saving patterns. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be performed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

(A11) In addition, regarding the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times of time reduction is different according to the time reduction design, it is possible to change the allocation lottery of the time reduction design with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Also, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

(A14) Moreover, the lottery result of "the number of times of time saving 0 times" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a derivation lottery for the time saving end pattern (time saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times of time saving is the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving, or until the big hit pattern is derived and displayed. good. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

(A16) In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

(A17) In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the point in time when the time for fixing the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

(A18) In addition, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) In addition, in the case of a game machine that is controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state has been executed a specified number of times of variable display and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time for the time saving symbol may be different from the symbol confirmation time for the other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving patterns)
As other time-saving control using the time-saving design, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the special design is in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed, there is no game control to further shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (such as the time saving state may occur again) without controlling the switching of the game state). Then, when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the normal state with the special pattern, and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the time-saving state, different effects may be performed (decorative pattern Regarding, in the normal state, a special pattern is displayed as a time-saving pattern, and in the time-saving state, a general lost pattern is displayed, etc.). As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special pattern is a time saving pattern, the special pattern is a common time saving pattern in the normal state and the time saving state, and the decoration pattern is the normal state. It may be possible to display different patterns as display results in the time saving state and the time saving state (for example, the decorative pattern displays a special pattern corresponding to the time saving pattern in the normal state, but in the time saving state, it displays a simple lost pattern, etc.) For example, do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is executed to suggest whether or not the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time saving pattern), but in the time saving state, the decorative pattern is executed. It is also possible not to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the display result of . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he/she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decoration pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is different between the normal state and the time saving state. may be controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the performance of the decoration pattern in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B5) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) (a) not control the switching of the game state) may be configured. The variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed at a higher rate in the second variable display than in the first variable display, and information on the variable display is stored as reserved storage information, and reserved storage is performed when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed hitting), and the variable display based on the pending storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. until all finished. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B6) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) (a) not control the switching of the game state) may be configured. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the result of the variable display of the time saving pattern than the first variable display, stores information on the variable display as reserved storage information, and holds the reserved storage when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until the variable display based on the remaining retention storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B7) Execute the left-handed notification in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends. may As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information In the case of winning (small hit, big win) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-handed notification executed in response to the winning It can be different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time saving state ends, common production when there is reserved memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed and when there is no such reserved memory information (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common performance suggesting whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed, and a time saving state return performance different from the common performance is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. possible). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B10) Production at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends and the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit is different from the production at the time of the time-saving state transition based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, since the presentation changes according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) Fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends (maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information is executed may be common. Thereby, an increase in control data can be suppressed.

(B12) In the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable based on the remaining hold storage information When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) in the case of winning patterns (specific display results) such as winning patterns and big winning patterns and the case of reducing time patterns (special display results). Depending on which common specific effect is executed among the common specific effects provided in types, the ratio of the time saving pattern (special display result) may be different. Then, when the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is possible to suitably control the effect.

(B14) After the common specific effect is executed, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time saving pattern (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is enriched, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control creates a common variation pattern for the winning pattern (specific display result), the time saving pattern (special display result), and the losing pattern (predetermined display result). can be selected, and the effect control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, depending on the type of the symbol specification command specifying the display result, Different effects in the variable display may be executable. As a result, the variety of variable display effects can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved by the special effect after execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, there may be cases where a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is executed and a case where it is not executed (for example, multiple types For example, the special effect is not executed when executing the effect with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit among the super reach effects. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for winning (a display that has moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) Depending on the production mode of (display) that can suggest the expectation level of the hit corresponding to the variable display), the expectation level (ratio) that will be the time saving pattern (special display result) will be different. good too. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) occurs, after executing the effect (such as time saving suggesting effect) that suggests that the time saving pattern (special display result) will be performed, the winning pattern (specified It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot with a higher game value than the time saving state) that notifies the display result). As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled in a time saving state (special state) with a different number of time saving times (time saving duration) according to the type of time saving pattern (special display result) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the 1 hour-shortening pattern: 50 hour-shortening patterns, 2nd hour-shortening pattern: 100 hour-shortening patterns, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time-shortening pattern stops depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect). You may perform the production|presentation from which the number of times of time saving (duration) differs. As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention can be focused on the number of subsequent time-saving times, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command. And, the command to be transmitted includes a special command that can be specified to shift (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends a plurality of types of commands including the special command. When receiving, based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information, the pre-reading notice effect for the reserved memory information that occurred after the reserved memory information specified that the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) is executed Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, allowed rarely, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the prefetching of the pending storage information, the prefetching of the pending storage information generated after the specified holding storage information that the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot game state (specific game state) is executed You may make it restrict|limit execution of an advance notice production. Then, as the pre-reading foretelling effect during execution restriction of such a foreseeing foretelling effect, a common mode effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) If the variable display based on the pending memory information is the variable display in which the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, and if the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is not displayed as if it is a variable For both the display and the display, the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect for the reserved memory information generated after the reserved memory information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B25) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute an effect with a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, if the color expectation of the reserved display is blue < green < red such as not changing the display color to red). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B26) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, if the degree of expectation of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red not change). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the number of variable display times of loss)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of times of variable display (number of continuations of variable display with loss) that has given a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) is that the number of continuations of variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times) may be made executable as a condition. As the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the display failure reaches the special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, the game is played based on the variable display result becoming the specific display result. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the normal state, update the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.), and update the numerical information. Based on, when a special condition is established that the number of times the variable display that has resulted in the predetermined display result (the number of continuations) has reached a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.) is established, the normal state is changed to a time-saving state (special state). You may do game control to shift. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, even in a situation where either the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, the update of the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained is continued, so that the player can be easily relieved due to the time-saving state. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time-saving state.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined, based on the numerical information, that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed continuously a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). can be As a result, when display results disadvantageous to the player continue, the player can be relieved by shifting to the time-saving state (special state), so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state (probability variable state, time saving state) different from the normal state. As a result, the player can be favorably relieved when display results disadvantageous to the player continue.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player becomes in a time-saving state (special state) advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary. can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is performed a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to substantially control the time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the backed up stored data can be backed up when specific conditions such as an initialization operation at power-on are satisfied. Data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of initialization of the data and does not remain, so that the game arcade side is prevented from being disadvantaged.

(C8) Based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for the period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more), During the time-saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time-saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time-saving state (special state); A different production may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in which the second time reduction state (special state) is in an extremely disadvantageous state, the second time reduction state shortens the variable display time more than the first time reduction state. Thus, it becomes possible to change the appearance of the presentation, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, without executing such an effect, the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of being in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is executed, and the special condition is established when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The 3rd process for controlling to the time saving state based on (special state) is performed. Also. A game ball can be hit separately in a first path (left game area) and a second path (right game area), and in a normal state, a game ball is hit in the first path, and in a time-saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. And, during the execution of the third process, it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), but it is notified that it should be fired to the second path (for example, right-handed notification by right-handed lamp etc.) can be In addition, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to execute the production of the notification of the firing direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation starts) when actually shifting to the time-saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display that satisfies the special condition, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, since controlling to an advantageous state is given priority over controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the game interest of the player is reduced. Decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes the specific value based on the updated numerical information becoming the specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, customer waiting), control to a time saving state (special state), and when the numerical information after updating reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset) may Thereby, the control which transfers to a time saving state (special state) can be suitably performed by managing special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines the variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines the variation pattern of the symbol fixation time that differs between when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, it is possible to suitably execute the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied The 3rd process for controlling to the based time saving state (special state) is performed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that received the command. Then, when the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value when the special state, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) according to when it is the third numerical value . As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, game control becomes easier. And if a command is changed according to the game state identified at that time, suitable effect control can be executed according to the game state by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means).

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is established, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable display count Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is short, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable number of times of display Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When it hits and when it becomes a time-saving state after the end of the big hit, the time-saving state production with the same fluctuation time is used). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (variable number of times of display Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is reduced, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the big hit, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (the number of times of variable display Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit ends, etc.). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. A ram clear command at the time of cold start, a command for notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) can be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. Suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effect that suggests that the first run in the morning is different, the background image is different, and whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuations is performed) ) may be executable. By giving the player a first game motivation in the morning, the operation rate of the game machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information about the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 Based on the specific information, it may be possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (such as the effect of suggesting the end of the time-saving state). As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is performed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). good too. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of making a player lose money without realizing it by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and to suitably implement the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is established based on the fact that the variable display is executed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests being controlled, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times (for example 100 times), the suggestive effect can be executed each time the variable display is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances (such as different performances when transitioning to the time saving state) are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions and when the working time saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances are executed when being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of conditions and after being controlled to a time saving state (special state) (different performances after shifting to the time saving state, etc.). As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be changed depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the time-saving symbol, the case of a big hit, or the case of a loss.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko game machine 1 may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above was a payout type game machine that paid out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, Big Bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

(Description of Association between Characteristic Portion 117F, Characteristic Portion 132F, Characteristic Portion 1940S, Characteristic Portion 1941S, Characteristic Portion 069SG, and Characteristic Portion 099SG)
In the characteristic portion 117F, the characteristic portion 132F, the characteristic portion 1940S, and the characteristic portion 1941S, various characteristic points regarding the SP reach executed during the low base state (during the non-special state) are developed. In the low base state (non-special state) until controlled to the time saving state B described in the characteristic portion 069SG and the characteristic portion 099SG, the characteristic portion 117F, the characteristic portion 132F, the characteristic portion 1940S, and the characteristic portion 1941S disclosed in the By performing SP reach with a characteristic point, the player's mood can be enhanced, but on the other hand, until it is controlled to the time-saving state B, the loss is reported by SP reach many times. , and spends a considerable amount of time in the low base state. In consideration of them, the variation efficiency of the time saving state B is increased as in the characteristic portion 069SG and the characteristic portion 099SG, thereby preventing the interest in the time saving state B from decreasing.
Further, during the time saving state B, in order to increase the variation efficiency, the SP reach with the characteristic points disclosed in the characteristic portions 117F, 132F, 1940S, and 1941S may not be performed.
In addition, in the variation controlled to the time saving state B (900th variation in the low base state), SP reach with the feature points disclosed in the feature part 117F, the feature part 132F, the feature part 1940S, and the feature part 1941S It is preferable to avoid The reason is that it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot after being controlled to the time saving state B than to win the jackpot in the non-special state, so the SP reach is executed in the 900th variation. This is because there is a possibility that the performance will give a feeling of disappointment, and in consideration of that, the decrease in the interest of the player is prevented by not executing the SP reach at the 900th fluctuation. It has a preventive effect.
Further, after being controlled to the time saving state B, when performing fluctuations to be controlled to the advantageous state, a smooth rainbow luminance data table may be used in order to boost the control to the advantageous state. In that case, it may be shared so as to be common with the smooth rainbow luminance data table used in the low base state. By doing in this way, it can be excited to be controlled in an advantageous state in the time saving state B, without increasing the luminance data table. Furthermore, since it is also used as the luminance data table used in the low base state, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that control is performed in an advantageous state in any state.

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 5 image display device 5C, 5L, 5R decoration pattern display area 6A winning ball device 6B variable winning ball device 8L, 8R speaker 9 game effect lamp , 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 13 voice control board, 15 relay board, 9020 special figure LED board, 21 gate switch, 22A first start opening switch, 22B second start opening switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 9050 fourth symbol unit, 81, 82, 83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition and being able to control to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
state control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
a decision means capable of deciding to control to said advantageous state;
variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The effect execution means can execute a specific notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled in the non-special state,
The specific notification effect includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the propriety notification, when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed. and an epilogue part to be executed,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. and including
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. less than the number of possible variable display patterns,
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images